Garmin | G1000: Diamond DA42NG | Garmin G1000: Diamond DA42NG G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG

Garmin G1000: Diamond DA42NG G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
®
®
G1000 Pilot’s Guide
Garmin AT, Inc.
2345 Turner Road SE
Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
Tel: 503.581.8101
Fax: 503.364.2138
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House,Houndsdown Business Park
Southampton, Hampshire, SO40 9LR, U.K.
Tel: +44 (0) 238 052 4000
Fax: +44 (0) 238 052 4004
Aviation Support: +44 (0) 370 850 1243
Garmin Corporation
No. 68, Zhangshu 2nd Road
Xizhi District,
New Taipei City, Taiwan
Tel: 34-93-357-2608
Fax: 34-93-429-4484
Diamond DA42NG
Garmin International, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street
Olathe, KS 66062, U.S.A.
Tel: 913.397.8200
Fax: 913.397.8282
AOG Hotline: 913.397.0836
Aviation Dealer
Technical Support: 888.606.5482
www.garmin.com
190-00962-04
Revision A
G1000
®
Integrated Flight Deck
Pilot’s Guide
Diamond DA42NG
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL & CNS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Copyright © 2008, 2009, 2011, 2012, 2014 and 2016 Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
This manual reflects the operation of System Software version 0752.13 or later for the Diamond DA42NG Some differences in operation
may be observed when comparing the information in this manual to earlier or later software versions.
Garmin International, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street
Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A.
Tel: 913.397.8200
Fax: 913.397.8282
Aircraft On Ground (AOG) Hotline: 913.397.0836
Aviation Dealer Technical Support: 888.606.5482
Garmin AT, Inc.
2345 Turner Road SE
Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
Tel: 503.581.8101
Fax 503.364.2138
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House, Hounsdown Business Park
Southampton, Hampshire SO40 9LR U.K.
Tel: 44.(0).23.8052.4000
Fax: 44.(0).23.8052.4004
Aviation Support: 44.(0).37.0850.1243
Garmin Corporation
No. 68, Zhangshu 2nd Road
Xizhi District, New Taipei City, Taiwan
Tel: 34.93.357.2608
Fax: 34.93.429.4484
Website Address: www.garmin.com
Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced, copied, transmitted, disseminated, downloaded or stored
in any storage medium, for any purpose without the express written permission of Garmin. Garmin hereby grants permission to download
a single copy of this manual and of any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic storage medium to be viewed for
personal use, provided that such electronic or printed copy of this manual or revision must contain the complete text of this copyright notice
and provided further that any unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly prohibited.
Garmin® is a registered trademark of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries, and G1000® is a trademark of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. These
trademarks may not be used without the express permission of Garmin.
Honeywell® is a registered trademark of Honeywell International, Inc. Stormscope® is a registered trademark of L-3 Communications.
Avidyne® is a registered trademark of Avidyne Corporation. AC-U-KWIK® is a registered trademark of Penton Business Media Inc. SiriusXM
Weather and SiriusXM Satellite Radio are provided by SiriusXM Satellite Radio, Inc.
AOPA Membership Publications, Inc. and its related organizations (hereinafter collectively “AOPA”) expressly disclaim all warranties,
with respect to the AOPA information included in this data, express or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties
of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. The information is provided “as is” and AOPA does not warrant or make any
representations regarding its accuracy, reliability, or otherwise. Under no circumstances including negligence, shall AOPA be liable for any
incidental, special or consequential damages that result from the use or inability to use the software or related documentation, even if
AOPA or an AOPA authorized representative has been advised of the possibility of such damages. User agrees not to sue AOPA and, to
the maximum extent allowed by law, to release and hold harmless AOPA from any causes of action, claims or losses related to any actual
or alleged inaccuracies in the information. Some jurisdictions do not allow the limitation or exclusion of implied warranties or liability for
incidental or consequential damages so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you.
AC-U-KWIK and its related organizations (hereafter collectively “AC-U-KWIK Organizations”) expressly disclaim all warranties with
respect to the AC-U-KWIK information included in this data, express or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. The information is provided “as is” and AC-U-KWIK Organizations do not warrant or
make any representations regarding its accuracy, reliability, or otherwise. Licensee agrees not to sue AC-U-KWIK Organizations and, to the
maximum extent allowed by law, to release and hold harmless AC-U-KWIK Organizations from any cause of action, claims or losses related
to any actual or alleged inaccuracies in the information arising out of Garmin’s use of the information in the datasets. Some jurisdictions
do not allow the limitation or exclusion of implied warranties or liability for incidental or consequential damages so the above limitations
or exclusions may not apply to licensee.
May 2016
Printed in the U.S.A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
WARNING: Do not use terrain avoidance displays as the sole source of information for maintaining separation
from terrain and obstacles. Garmin obtains terrain and obstacle data from third party sources and cannot
independently verify the accuracy of the information.
WARNING: Always refer to current aeronautical charts and NOTAMs for verification of displayed aeronautical
information. Displayed aeronautical data may not incorporate the latest NOTAM information.
WARNING: Do not use geometric altitude for compliance with air traffic control altitude requirements. The
primary barometric altimeter must be used for compliance with all air traffic control altitude regulations,
requirements, instructions, and clearances.
WARNING: Do not use basemap information (land and water data) as the sole means of navigation. Basemap
data is intended only to supplement other approved navigation data sources and should be considered only
an aid to enhance situational awareness.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all of the traffic
within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate information
from aircraft or ground stations, traffic may be present that is not represented on the display.
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous
weather. Information contained within data link weather products may not accurately depict current
weather conditions.
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather
information shown by the data link weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data link weather product
may be significantly older than the indicated weather product age.
WARNING: The displayed minimum safe altitude (MSAs) are only advisory in nature and should not be relied
upon as the sole source of obstacle and terrain avoidance information. Always refer to current aeronautical
charts for appropriate minimum clearance altitudes.
WARNING: Always obtain qualified instruction prior to operational use of this equipment.
WARNING: Do not use a QFE altimeter setting with this system. System functions will not operate properly
with a QFE altimeter setting. Use only a QNH altimeter setting for height above mean sea level, or the
standard pressure setting, as applicable.
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
i
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
WARNING: Do not use GPS to navigate to any active waypoint identified as a ‘NON WGS84 WPT’ by a
system message. ‘NON WGS84 WPT’ waypoints are derived from an unknown map reference datum that
may be incompatible with the map reference datum used by GPS (known as WGS84) and may be positioned
in error as displayed.
WARNING: When using the autopilot to fly an approach with vertical guidance, the autopilot will not level
the aircraft at the MDA/DH even if the MDA/DH is set in the altitude preselect.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance maneuvering.
The traffic display does not provide collision avoidance resolution advisories and does not under any
circumstances or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft.
WARNING: Because of variation in the earth’s magnetic field, do not rely on the accuracy of attitude and
heading indications (GRS 77 installations only) in the following geographic areas: North of 72° North
latitude at all longitudes; South of 70° South latitude at all longitudes; North of 65° North latitude between
longitude 75° W and 120° W. (Northern Canada); North of 70° North latitude between longitude 70° W and
128° W. (Northern Canada); North of 70° North latitude between longitude 85° E and 114° E. (Northern
Russia); South of 55° South latitude between longitude 120° E and 165° E. (Region south of Australia and
New Zealand).
WARNING: Do not rely on information from a lightning detection system display as the sole basis for hazardous
weather avoidance. Range limitations and interference may cause the system to display inaccurate or
incomplete information. Refer to documentation from the lightning detection system manufacturer for
detailed information about the system.
WARNING: Use appropriate primary systems for navigation, and for terrain, obstacle, and traffic avoidance.
Garmin SVT is intended as an aid to situational awareness only and may not provide either the accuracy or
reliability upon which to solely base decisions and/or plan maneuvers to avoid terrain, obstacles, or traffic.
WARNING: Intruder aircraft at or below 500 ft. AGL may not appear on the Garmin SVT display or may
appear as a partial symbol.
WARNING: Do not use the Garmin SVT runway depiction as the sole means for determining the proximity of
the aircraft to the runway or for maintaining the proper approach path angle during landing.
WARNING: Do not operate the weather radar in a transmitting mode when personnel or objects are within
the MPEL boundary.
ii
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
WARNING: Always position the weather radar gain setting to Calibrated for viewing the actual intensity of
precipitation. Changing the gain in weather mode causes precipitation intensity to be displayed as a color
not representative of the true intensity.
CAUTION: Do not clean display surfaces with abrasive cloths or cleaners containing ammonia. They will
harm the anti-reflective coating.
CAUTION: Repairs should only be made by an authorized Garmin service center. Unauthorized repairs or
modifications could void both the warranty and affect the airworthiness of the aircraft.
NOTE: Do not rely solely upon data link services to provide Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) information.
Always confirm TFR information through official sources such as Flight Service Stations or Air Traffic Control.
NOTE: All visual depictions contained within this document, including screen images of the system panel
and displays, are subject to change and may not reflect the most current system and aviation databases.
Depictions of equipment may differ slightly from the actual equipment.
NOTE: The United States government operates the Global Positioning System and is solely responsible for
its accuracy and maintenance. The GPS system is subject to changes which could affect the accuracy and
performance of all GPS equipment. Portions of the system utilize GPS as a precision electronic NAVigation
AID (NAVAID). Therefore, as with all NAVAIDs, information presented by the system can be misused or
misinterpreted and, therefore, become unsafe.
NOTE: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Interference from GPS repeaters operating inside nearby hangars can cause an intermittent loss of
attitude and heading displays while the aircraft is on the ground. Moving the aircraft more than 100 yards
away from the source of the interference should alleviate the condition.
NOTE: Use of polarized eyewear may cause the flight displays to appear dim or blank.
NOTE: This product, its packaging, and its components contain chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer, birth defects, or reproductive harm. This notice is being provided in accordance with
California’s Proposition 65. If you have any questions or would like additional information, please refer to
our web site at www.garmin.com/prop65.
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
iii
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
NOTE: Operating the system in the vicinity of metal buildings, metal structures, or electromagnetic fields
can cause sensor differences that may result in nuisance miscompare annunciations during start up, shut
down, or while taxiing. If one or more of the sensed values are unavailable, the annunciation indicates no
comparison is possible.
NOTE: The system responds to a terminal procedure based on data coded within that procedure in the
Navigation Database. Differences in system operation may be observed among similar types of procedures
due to differences in the Navigation Database coding specific to each procedure.
NOTE: The FAA has asked Garmin to remind pilots who fly with Garmin database-dependent avionics of the
following:
• It is the pilot’s responsibility to remain familiar with all FAA regulatory and advisory guidance and information
related to the use of databases in the National Airspace System.
• Garmin equipment will only recognize and use databases that are obtained from Garmin or Jeppesen. Databases
obtained from Garmin or Jeppesen are assured compliance with all data quality requirements (DQRs) by virtue
of a Type 2 Letter of Authorization (LOA) from the FAA. A copy of the Type 2 LOA is available for each database
and can be viewed at http://fly.garmin.com by selecting ‘Type 2 LOA Status.’
• Use of a current Garmin or Jeppesen database in your Garmin equipment is required for compliance with
established FAA regulatory guidance, but does not constitute authorization to fly any and all terminal procedures
that may be presented by the system. It is the pilot’s responsibility to operate in accordance with established
AFM(S) and regulatory guidance or limitations as applicable to the pilot, the aircraft, and installed equipment.
NOTE: The pilot/operator must review and be familiar with Garmin’s database exclusion list as discussed in
SAIB CE-14-04 to determine what data may be incomplete. The database exclusion list can be viewed at
www.flygarmin.com by selecting ‘Database Exclusions List.’
NOTE: The pilot/operator must have access to Garmin and Jeppesen database alerts and consider their
impact on the intended aircraft operation. The database alerts can be viewed at www.flygarmin.com by
selecting ‘Aviation Database Alerts.’
NOTE: If the pilot/operator wants or needs to adjust the database, contact Garmin Product Support to
coordinate the revised DQRs.
NOTE: Garmin requests the flight crew report any observed discrepancies related to database information.
These discrepancies could come in the form of an incorrect procedure; incorrectly identified terrain, obstacles
and fixes; or any other displayed item used for navigation or communication in the air or on the ground. Go
to FlyGarmin.com and select ‘Aviation Data Error Report’.
iv
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
NOTE: Lamp(s) inside this product contain mercury (HG) and must be recycled or disposed of according to
local, state, or federal laws. For more information, refer to our website at www.garmin.com/aboutGarmin/
environment/disposal.jsp
NOTE: When using Stormscope, there are several atmospheric phenomena in addition to nearby thunderstorms
that can cause isolated discharge points in the strike display mode. However, clusters of two or more
discharge points in the strike display mode do indicate thunderstorm activity if these points reappear after
the screen has been cleared.
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
v
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
Blank Page
vi
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
REVISION INFORMATION
Record of Revision
Part Number
190-00962-00
190-00962-00
190-00962-01
Revision
A
B
A
Date
02/19/09
04/29/09
03/14/11
190-00962-02
190-00962-02
A
B
06/15/12
March
2014
190-00962-03
A
October
2014
190-00962-04
A
May 2016
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Page Range
Description
i – I-6
Initial release with GDU SW Version 9.05
i – I-6
Added Synthetic Vision System
i – I-6
Added GDU 11.12
Added Database Synchronization
Added Electronic Checklists
Added AOPA Airport Directory
Added flight plan import/export
Added Auxiliary Video
Changed procedure for creating user waypoints
i – I-6
Added GDU 12.03
All
Added Underspeed Protection
Updated ESP pitch limits
Changed GFC 700 to Garmin AFCS
Added LP approaches
All
Updated System Message Advisories
Updated Weather Radar
Added Radar Altimeter
Updated EIS strip
Added ADS-B out capablility
Added other GDU 14.02 parameters
Changed GFDS to Connext
Changed Synthetic Vision System (SVS) to Synthetic Vision
Technology (SVT)
Added User Defined Holding Patterns
Added Temperature Compensated Altitude
Updated Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
All
Added Support for GDL 69/69A SXM
Added Support for ADS-B Traffic
Added Support for FIS-B Weather
Added Bluetooth® connectivity
Updated Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
Added other GDU 15.11 parameters
Added Support for GSR 56 Iridium Transceiver
Added Wi-Fi connectivity
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Line Replaceable Units............................................ 2
Secure Digital (SD) Cards........................................ 6
System Power-up...................................................... 7
System Operation..................................................... 8
Display Operation.......................................................... 8
G1000 System Annunciations......................................... 9
System Status.............................................................. 11
AHRS Operation.......................................................... 13
GPS Receiver Operation............................................... 14
G1000 Controls....................................................... 18
PFD/MFD Controls....................................................... 18
Softkey Function.......................................................... 20
Accessing G1000 Functionality............................ 27
Menus........................................................................ 27
Data Entry.................................................................. 27
Page Groups............................................................... 29
System Settings........................................................... 34
Timers........................................................................ 40
Electronic Checklists.................................................... 42
Display Backlighting.............................................. 45
SECTION 2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.1 Flight Instruments.................................................. 50
Airspeed Indicator....................................................... 50
Attitude Indicator........................................................ 52
Altimeter.................................................................... 53
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)........................................ 55
Vertical Deviation........................................................ 56
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)............................... 57
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)................................... 62
2.2 Supplemental Flight Data..................................... 69
Outside Air Temperature............................................... 69
Wind Data.................................................................. 71
Vertical Navigation (VNV) Indications............................ 72
2.3 PFD Annunciations and Alerting Functions......... 73
System Alerting........................................................... 73
Marker Beacon Annunciations...................................... 74
Traffic Annunciation..................................................... 74
Altitude Alerting.......................................................... 75
Low Altitude Annunciation........................................... 75
Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height Alerting....... 76
Radar Altimeter........................................................... 77
viii
2.4 Abnormal Operations............................................ 79
Abnormal GPS Conditions............................................ 79
Unusual Attitudes........................................................ 80
SECTION 3 ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM (EIS)
3.1 Engine Display........................................................ 84
3.2 System Display....................................................... 86
3.3 Fuel Display............................................................. 88
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
SECTION 4 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Overview................................................................. 91
MFD/PFD Controls and Frequency Display...................... 92
Audio Panel Controls................................................... 94
COM Operation....................................................... 96
COM Transceiver Selection and Activation...................... 96
COM Transceiver Manual Tuning................................... 97
Quick-tuning and Activating 121.500 MHz..................... 98
Auto-tuning the COM Frequency................................... 99
Frequency Spacing..................................................... 103
Automatic Squelch..................................................... 104
Volume..................................................................... 104
NAV Operation...................................................... 105
NAV Radio Selection and Activation............................ 105
NAV Receiver Manual Tuning...................................... 106
Auto-tuning a NAV Frequency from the MFD................ 108
Marker Beacon Receiver............................................. 113
ADF/DME Tuning....................................................... 114
GTX 33 Mode S Transponder............................... 118
Transponder Controls................................................. 118
Transponder Mode Selection....................................... 119
Entering a Transponder Code...................................... 121
IDENT Function......................................................... 122
ADS-B TX.................................................................. 123
Flight ID Reporting.................................................... 124
Additional Audio Panel Functions...................... 125
Power-up.................................................................. 125
Mono/Stereo Headsets............................................... 125
Speaker.................................................................... 125
Intercom................................................................... 126
Clearance Recorder and Player.................................... 128
Split COM................................................................. 129
Entertainment Inputs................................................. 129
Audio Panel Preflight Procedure........................ 130
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4.7 Abnormal Operation............................................ 131
Stuck Microphone...................................................... 131
COM Tuning Failure.................................................... 131
Audio Panel Fail-Safe Operation.................................. 131
Reversionary Mode.................................................... 131
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
SECTION 5 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Introduction.......................................................... 133
Navigation Status Box................................................ 134
Using Map Displays.............................................. 136
Map Orientation........................................................ 136
Map Range............................................................... 138
Map Panning............................................................. 140
Measuring Bearing and Distance................................. 145
Topography............................................................... 146
Map Symbols............................................................ 149
Airways.................................................................... 155
Track Vector.............................................................. 157
Wind Vector.............................................................. 158
Nav Range Ring........................................................ 159
Fuel Range Ring........................................................ 160
Field of View (SVS)..................................................... 161
Selected Altitude Intercept Arc.................................... 162
Waypoints.............................................................. 163
Airports.................................................................... 164
Intersections............................................................. 171
NDBs........................................................................ 173
VORs........................................................................ 175
VRPs........................................................................ 177
User Waypoints......................................................... 179
Airspaces............................................................... 185
Direct-to-Navigation ........................................... 189
Flight Planning...................................................... 194
Flight Plan Creation................................................... 195
Adding Waypoints to an Existing Flight Plan................. 202
Adding Airways to a Flight Plan.................................. 205
Adding Procedures to a Stored Flight Plan................... 207
Flight Plan Storage.................................................... 214
Flight Plan Editing..................................................... 216
Along Track Offsets.................................................... 219
Parallel Track............................................................. 221
Activating a Flight Plan Leg........................................ 224
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Inverting a Flight Plan................................................ 225
Flight Plan Views....................................................... 226
Closest Point of FPL................................................... 228
User-Defined Holding Patterns.................................... 228
5.7 Vertical Navigation.............................................. 233
Altitude Constraints................................................... 235
5.8 Procedures............................................................ 239
Departures................................................................ 240
Arrivals .................................................................... 243
Approaches .............................................................. 246
5.9 Trip Planning......................................................... 254
Trip Planning............................................................. 254
5.10 RAIM Prediction................................................... 258
5.11 Navigating a Flight Plan...................................... 261
5.12 Abnormal Operation............................................ 289
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
SECTION 6 HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SiriusXM Weather................................................. 292
Activating Services..................................................... 292
Using SiriusXM Weather Products............................... 293
Garmin Connext Weather.................................... 326
Registering the Iridium Satellite System....................... 326
Registering Garmin Connext Weather.......................... 327
Accessing Garmin Connext Weather Products............... 329
Connext Data Requests.............................................. 336
Garmin Connext Weather Products.............................. 340
Abnormal Operations................................................. 355
FIS-B Weather....................................................... 357
Using FIS-B Weather Products..................................... 357
FIS-B Weather Status................................................. 379
Airborne Color Weather Radar........................... 380
System Description.................................................... 380
Principles of Pulsed Airborne Weather Radar................ 380
Safe Operating Distance............................................. 384
Basic Antenna Tilt Setup............................................. 385
Weather Mapping and Interpretation.......................... 386
Ground Mapping and Interpretation............................ 396
Weather Radar Overlay on the Navigation Map Page.... 397
System Status............................................................ 399
WX-500 Stormscope............................................ 401
Setting Up Stormscope on the Navigation Map............ 401
Selecting the Stormscope Page................................... 405
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
ix
TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.6 Terrain Proximity.................................................. 406
Displaying Terrain Proximity Data................................ 406
Terrain Proximity Page................................................ 409
6.7 Profile View Terrain.............................................. 411
Profile View Display................................................... 412
6.8 Terrain-SVS............................................................ 415
Displaying Terrain-SVS Data........................................ 416
Terrain-SVS Page....................................................... 418
Terrain-SVS Alerts...................................................... 420
System Status............................................................ 423
6.9 Traffic Information Service (TIS)......................... 424
Displaying Traffic Data............................................... 425
Traffic Map Page........................................................ 427
TIS Alerts.................................................................. 428
System Status............................................................ 429
6.10 Avidyne TAS600 Traffic......................................... 432
TAS Symbology.......................................................... 432
Displaying Traffic Data............................................... 433
Altitude Display......................................................... 435
Traffic Map Page Display Range.................................. 435
TAS Alerts................................................................. 437
System Status............................................................ 438
6.11 Garmin GDL 88 ADS-B Traffic.............................. 439
ADS-B System Overview............................................. 439
ADS-B with TAS......................................................... 441
Conflict Situational Awareness & Alerting.................... 441
Airborne and Surface Applications............................... 444
Traffic Description...................................................... 445
Operation................................................................. 445
System Status............................................................ 454
SECTION 7 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.1 AFCS Controls....................................................... 458
7.2 Flight Director Operation.................................... 460
Activating the Flight Director...................................... 460
AFCS Status Box........................................................ 461
Command Bars.......................................................... 462
Flight Director Modes................................................. 462
7.3 Vertical Modes...................................................... 463
Pitch Hold Mode (PIT)................................................ 464
Selected Altitude Capture Mode (ALTS)........................ 465
Altitude Hold Mode (ALT)........................................... 466
x
Vertical Speed Mode (VS)........................................... 467
Flight Level Change Mode (FLC).................................. 468
Vertical Navigation Modes (VPTH, ALTV)...................... 469
Glidepath Mode (GP) (SBAS only)................................ 474
Glideslope Mode (GS)................................................ 476
Go Around Mode (GA)............................................... 477
7.4 Lateral Modes....................................................... 478
Roll Hold Mode (ROL)................................................ 479
Heading Select Mode (HDG)....................................... 480
Navigation Modes (GPS, VOR, LOC, BC)....................... 481
Approach Modes (GPS, VAPP, LOC).............................. 483
7.5 Autopilot and Yaw Damper Operation.............. 485
Flight Control............................................................ 485
Engaging the Autopilot and Yaw Damper..................... 486
Control Wheel Steering.............................................. 486
Disengaging the Autopilot and Yaw Damper................. 487
7.6 Example Flight Plan............................................. 488
Departure................................................................. 488
Intercepting a VOR Radial........................................... 490
Flying a Flight Plan/GPS Course.................................. 491
Descent.................................................................... 492
Approach.................................................................. 495
Go Around/Missed Approach...................................... 498
7.7 AFCS Annunciations and Alerts.......................... 500
AFCS Status Alerts..................................................... 500
Overspeed Protection................................................. 501
Underspeed Protection............................................... 501
Annunciations for KAP 140 Autopilot System............... 503
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
SECTION 8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT)...................... 507
SVT Operation........................................................... 508
SVT Features............................................................. 510
Field of View............................................................. 519
SafeTaxi................................................................. 521
ChartView.............................................................. 527
ChartView Softkeys.................................................... 528
Terminal Procedures Charts........................................ 529
Chart Options............................................................ 537
Day/Night View......................................................... 543
ChartView Cycle Number and Expiration Date.............. 546
FliteCharts............................................................. 549
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FliteCharts Softkeys................................................... 550
Terminal Procedures Charts........................................ 551
Chart Options............................................................ 558
Day/Night View......................................................... 562
FliteCharts Cycle Number and Expiration Date.............. 564
8.5 Airport Directory.................................................. 569
Airport Directory Database Cycle Number and Revision.569
8.6 SiriusXM Satellite Radio Entertainment............ 573
Activating SiriusXM Satellite Radio Services................. 573
Using SiriusXM Radio................................................. 575
8.7 Satellite Telephone Services............................... 579
Telephone Communication......................................... 579
Text Messaging (SMS)................................................ 586
8.8 Electronic Stability and Protection (ESP™)........ 599
Roll Engagement....................................................... 600
Pitch Engagement..................................................... 601
High Airspeed Protection............................................ 602
8.9 Scheduler............................................................... 603
8.10 Electronic Checklists............................................ 605
8.11 Flight Data Logging............................................. 609
8.12 Auxiliary Video...................................................... 611
Video Setup.............................................................. 612
Display Selection....................................................... 612
Zoom/Range............................................................. 614
8.13 WI-FI Connections................................................ 615
8.14 Abnormal Operation............................................ 621
SVT Troubleshooting.................................................. 621
Reversionary Mode.................................................... 621
Unusual Attitudes...................................................... 622
GDL 69/69A Data Link Receiver Troubleshooting........... 622
Database Management.............................................. 653
Navigation Databases................................................ 653
Garmin Databases/Jeppesen Chartview Database......... 658
Magnetic Field Variation Database Update................... 664
Garmin Aviation Glossary............................................. 665
Frequently Asked Questions......................................... 674
General TIS Information................................................ 678
Introduction.............................................................. 678
TIS VS. TAS/TCAS........................................................ 678
TIS Limitations.......................................................... 678
Map Symbols.................................................................. 680
Telephone/Text Messaging.......................................... 684
INDEX
Index .................................................................................I-1
APPENDICES
Annunciations and Alerts.............................................. 625
Flight Plan Import/Export Messages............................ 645
TAS Alerts and Annunciations..................................... 647
TIS Alerts and Annunciations...................................... 648
SVS Terrain Alerts....................................................... 649
SVS Terrain Status Annunciations................................ 649
ADS-B Alerts and Annunciations.................................. 650
Weather Radar Alerts and Annunciations..................... 651
GDL 69A/GDL 69A SXM Data Link Receiver Messages... 652
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
xi
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Blank Page
xii
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) Section for details on the Garmin AFCS.
The G1000 Integrated Flight Deck System presents flight instrumentation, position, navigation, communication,
and identification information using flat-panel color displays. The system is distributed across the following Line
Replaceable Units (LRUs):
• GDL 69/69A or 69/69A SXM Data Link Receiver
• GDU 1045 Multi Function Display (MFD)
• GSA 80 AFCS Yaw Damper Servo
• GMA 1347 Audio Panel with Integrated Marker
Beacon Receiver
• GSA 81 AFCS Servos (3)
• GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Units (IAU)
• GSR 56 Iridium Transceiver
• GDC 74A Air Data Computer (ADC)
• GWX 68/70 Weather Radar
• GEA 71 Engine/Airframe Unit
• GRA 5500 Radar Altimeter
• GTX 33 ES Extended Squitter Mode S Transponder
• Flight Stream 210 Wireless Bluetooth® Gateway
• GRS 77 Attitude and Heading Reference System
(AHRS)
• GDL 88 ADS-B Transceiver
• GSM 85 (or GSM 86) Servo Mounts (4)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• GMU 44 Magnetometer
EIS
• GDU 1040 Primary Flight Display (PFD)
• GDL 59 Data Link
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 1-1 shows interactions between the LRUs. Additional/optional equipment are shown in Figure 1-2.
The Diamond DA42NG may be optionally equipped with a Garmin AFCS Automated Flight Control System,
providing flight director (FD), autopilot (AP), and manual electric trim (MET) functions of the G1000 System.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
1
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.1 LINE REPLACEABLE UNITS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• GDU 1040/1045 (2) – A GDU 1040 is configured as the Primary Flight Display (PFD) and a GDU 1045 as
the Multi Function Display (MFD). Both displays feature 10.4-inch LCD screens with 1024 x 768 resolution.
The displays communicate with each other through a High-speed Data Bus (HSDB) Ethernet connection. Each
display is also paired with an Ethernet connection to an IAU.
EIS
• GMA 1347 – The Audio Panel integrates navigation/communication radio (NAV/COM) digital audio, intercom,
and marker beacon controls, and is installed between the displays. This unit also provides manual control
of display Reversionary Mode (red DISPLAY BACKUP button; see Section 1.4, System Operation) and
communicates with both IAUs using an RS-232 digital interface.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• GIA 63W (2) – The Integrated Avionics Units (IAU) function as the main communications hub, linking all LRUs
with the PFD. Each GIA 63W contains a GPS SBAS receiver, VHF COM/NAV/GS receivers, a flight director (FD;
if Garmin AFCS is installed), and system integration microprocessors. Each GIA 63W is paired with the on-side
display via an HSDB connection. The IAUs are not paired together and do not communicate with each other
directly.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• GDC 74A – The Air Data Computer (ADC) processes data from the pitot/static system and outside air temperature
(OAT) sensor. The ADC provides pressure altitude, airspeed, vertical speed, and OAT information to the G1000
System, and it communicates with the primary IAU, displays, and AHRS using an ARINC 429 digital interface.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: Refer to the Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) to determine whether SBAS functionality is approved.
• GTX 33 or GTX 33 with Extended Squitter – The GTX 33 solid-state Transponder provides Modes A, C, and
S capability. The GTX 33 with Extended Squitter will also provide 1090 MHz Extended Squitter (1090ES)
transmit capability. The transponder communicates with both IAUs through an RS-232 digital interface.
• GEA 71 – The Engine Airframe Unit receives and processes signals from the engine and airframe sensors. This
unit communicates with both IAUs using an RS-485 digital interface.
AFCS
• GRS 77 (2) – The Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) provides aircraft attitude and heading
information via ARINC 429 to both the PFD and the primary IAU. The AHRS contains advanced sensors
(including accelerometers and rate sensors) and interfaces with the Magnetometer to obtain magnetic field
information, with the ADC to obtain air data, and with both IAUs to obtain GPS information. AHRS operation
is discussed in Section 1.4, System Operation.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• GMU 44 – The Magnetometer measures local magnetic field and sends data to the AHRS for processing to
determine aircraft magnetic heading. This unit receives power directly from the AHRS and communicates with
it via an RS-485 digital interface.
APPENDICES
• GDL 69/69A or 69/69A SXM – The Data Link Satellite Radio Receiver provides real-time weather information to
MFD maps and the PFD Inset Map. The GDL 69A model is also capable of providing digital audio entertainment.
The Data Link Receiver communicates with the MFD via an HSDB connection. A subscription to XM Satellite
Radio Service is required to enable Data Link Receiver capability.
• GSA 80, GSA 81 and GSM 85 (or GSM 86) – The GSA servos are used for the automatic control of pitch, pitch
trim, roll and yaw. These units interface with each IAU.
INDEX
The GSM 85 (or GSM 86) servo mounts are responsible for transferring the output torque of the servo actuators
to the mechanical flight-control surface linkages (not displayed in Figure 1-1).
2
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• GRA 5500 (optional) – The Radar Altimeter provides altitude above the ground (AGL) to the MFD, through the
GIA 63W, using an RS-422 digital interface.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• GWX 68/70 – Provides airborne weather and ground mapped radar data to the MFD, via HSDB ethernet
connection.
• GDL 88 (optional) – Provides ADS-B Traffic in and FIS-B Weather.
• Flight Stream 210 (optional) – Provides wireless Bluetooth connectivity between a compatible tablet/mobile
device and the avionics system.
EIS
• GDL 59 (optional) – Provides Wi-Fi capability
• GSR 56 (optional) – The Iridium Transceiver provides voice communication by means of pilot and copilot
headsets. The unit can also send and receive data over the Iridium satellite network.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
3
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
GDU 1040
GDU 1045
GMA 1347
Primary Flight Display
Multi Function Display
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Audio Panel
Reversionary
Control
EIS
Reversionary
Control
GDC 74A
Air Data
Computer
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
No. 1 GIA 63W
Integrated Avionics Unit
OAT
Airspeed
Altitude
Vertical Speed
System Inegration Processors
I/O Processors
VHF COM
VHF NAV/LOC
GPS/SBAS
Glideslope
Flight Director (with AFCS option)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
No. 2 GIA 63W
Integrated Avionics Unit
System Integration Processors
I/O Processors
VHF COM
VHF NAV/LOC
GPS/SBAS
Glideslope
GRS 77
AHRS
GPS Output
GPS Output
Attitude
Rate of Turn
Slip/Skid
GMU 44
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Magnetometer
Heading
GTX 33/33ES
Transponder
AFCS
GEA 71
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Engine/Airframe
Unit
GSA 81
Pitch Servo
Autopilot Calculations
(optional)
GSA 81
Pitch Trim Servo
Autopilot Calculations
(optional)
GSA 81
Roll Servo
Autopilot Calculations
(optional)
GSA 80
Yaw Damper Servo
Yaw Damper Calculations
(optional)
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 1-1 G1000 System Block Diagram
4
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Data link
ADS-B Traffic
and Weather
(optional)
GDL 59
Wi-Fi Connection
(optional)
GDL 69/69A
GWX 68/70
Data Link Receiver
Integrated Avionics Unit
Weather Radar
System Integration Processors
I/O Processors
VHF COM
VHF NAV/LOC
GPS/SBAS
Glideslope
Airborne Weather Radar
(optional)
Real-time Digital
Weather/
Audio Entertainment
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
FS 210
No. 2 GIA 63W
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GDL 88
Bluetooth Datalink
(optional)
Honeywell
KN 63
L3
Stormscope
Avidyne
TAS600 Series
DME
(optional)
Lightning Strike and
Thunderstorm Detection
(optional)
Traffic Advisory System
(optional)
Garmin
GSR 56
Honeywell
KAP 140
Garmin
GRA 5500
Free Flight
Autopilot
(optional)
Radar Altimeter
(optional)
AFCS
ADF Receiver
(optional)
Iridium Tranceiver
(optional)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Becker
RA 3502-(1)
Radar Altimeter
(optional))
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 1-2 G1000 With Optional/Additional Interfaces
NOTE: The GDU 1040 is available in systems using the Honeywell KAP 140 Autopilot.
APPENDICES
NOTE: For information on additional equipment shown in Figure 1-2, consult the applicable optional interface
user’s guide. This document assumes that the reader is already familiar with the operation of this additional
equipment.
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
5
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.2 SECURE DIGITAL (SD) CARDS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Ensure the G1000 System is powered off before inserting an SD card.
NOTE: Refer to the Appendix for instructions on updating databases.
EIS
The PFD and MFD data card slots use Secure Digital (SD) cards and are located on the upper right side of the
display bezels. Each display bezel is equipped with two SD card slots. SD cards are used for aviation database
and system software updates as well as terrain database storage.
Installing an SD card:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Insert the SD card in the SD card slot, pushing the card in until the spring latch engages. The front of the card
should remain flush with the face of the display bezel.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) To eject the card, gently press on the SD card to release the spring latch.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
SD Card Slots
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 1-3 Display Bezel SD Card Slots
6
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1.3 SYSTEM POWER-UP
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: See the Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) for specific procedures concerning avionics power application
and emergency power supply operation.
NOTE: Refer to the Appendix for system-specific annunciations and alerts.
EIS
The G1000 System is integrated with the aircraft electrical system and receives power directly from electrical
busses. The PFD, MFD, and supporting sub-systems include both power-on and continuous built-in test features
that exercise the processor, RAM, ROM, external inputs, and outputs to provide safe operation.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
During system initialization, test annunciations are displayed, as shown in Figure 1-4. All system annunciations
should disappear typically within the first minute of power-up. Upon power-up, key annunciator lights also
become momentarily illuminated on the Audio Panel and the display bezels.
On the PFD, the AHRS begins to initialize and displays “AHRS ALIGN: Keep Wings Level”. The AHRS should
display valid attitude and heading fields typically within the first minute of power-up. The AHRS can align itself
both while taxiing and during level flight.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When the MFD powers up, the screen (Figure 1-5) displays the following information:
• Obstacle database name and version
• Copyright
• Terrain database name and version
• Land database name and version
• Aviation database name, version, and effective dates
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• System version
Current database information includes valid operating dates, cycle number, and database type. When this
information has been reviewed for currency (to ensure that no databases have expired), the pilot is prompted to
continue.
AFCS
Pressing the ENT Key acknowledges this information, and displays the Navigation Map Page. When the system
has acquired a sufficient number of satellites to determine a position, the aircraft’s current position is shown on
the Navigation Map Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
190-00962-04 Rev. A
INDEX
Figure 1-4 PFD Initialization
Figure 1-5 Example MFD Power-up
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
7
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.4 SYSTEM OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the Appendix for detailed descriptions of all alerts and annunciations. Refer to the Airplane
Flight Manual (AFM) for additional information regarding pilot responses to these annunciations.
The displays are connected together via a single Ethernet bus for high-speed communication. As shown in
Figure 1-1, each IAU is connected to the on-side display. This allows the units to share information, enabling true
system integration
EIS
DISPLAY OPERATION
NOTE: In normal operating mode, backlighting can only be adjusted from the PFD. In Reversionary Mode, it
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
can be adjusted from the remaining display.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
In normal operating mode, the PFD presents graphical flight instrumentation (attitude, heading, airspeed,
altitude, vertical speed), replacing the traditional flight instrument cluster (see the Flight Instruments Section
for more information). The MFD normally displays a full-color moving map with navigation information (see
the Flight Management Section), while the left portion of the MFD is dedicated to the Engine Indication System
(EIS; see the EIS Section). Both displays offer control for COM and NAV frequency selection.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 1-6 G1000 Normal Operation
APPENDICES
In the event of a display failure, the G1000 System automatically switches to reversionary (backup) mode. In
Reversionary Mode, all important flight information from the PFD is presented on the remaining display in the
same format as in normal operating mode, with the addition of the EIS. EIS operation while in Reversionary
Mode is discussed in the EIS Section. As when the PFD is operating normally, windows for flight planning,
nearest airports, and procedures are available. The Inset Map is moved to the right side of the display.
INDEX
If a display fails, the appropriate IAU-display Ethernet interface is cut off. Thus, the IAU can no longer
communicate with the remaining display (refer to Figure 1-1), and the NAV and COM functions provided to
the failed display by the IAU are flagged as invalid on the remaining display. The system reverts to backup
paths for the AHRS, ADC, Engine/Airframe Unit, and Transponder, as required. The change to backup paths is
completely automated for all LRUs and no pilot action is required.
8
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
If the system fails to detect a display problem, Reversionary Mode may be manually activated by pressing the
Audio Panel’s red DISPLAY BACKUP Button. Pressing this button again deactivates Reversionary Mode.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NAV1 and COM1 (provided by the
failed PFD) Flagged Invalid
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
DISPLAY BACKUP Button Manually Activates/
Deactivates Reversionary Mode on Both Displays
Figure 1-7 G1000 Reversionary Mode (Failed PFD)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
G1000 SYSTEM ANNUNCIATIONS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When an LRU or an LRU function fails, a large red ‘X’ is typically displayed over the instrument experiencing
failed data (Figure 1-8 displays all possible flags and responsible LRUs). The G1000 System alerts the pilot
when backup paths are utilized by the LRUs. Upon G1000 power-up, certain instruments remain invalid as
equipment begins to initialize. All instruments should be operational within one minute of power-up. If any
instrument remains flagged, the G1000 should be serviced by a Garmin-authorized repair facility.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
9
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
GIA 63W
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
GRS 77,
GMU 44 or
GIA 63W
GDC 74A
Database
Mismatch in
PFD and MFD
EIS
GEA 71,
GIA 63W,
or ECU
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GIA 63W
or DME/ADF
Source
GIA 63W
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GDC 74A
GIA 63W
GTX 33 or GIA 63W
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 1-8 G1000 System Failure Annunciations
10
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM STATUS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The System Status Page displays the statuses, serial numbers, and software version numbers for all detected
system LRUs. Active LRUs are indicated by green check marks; failed, by red ‘X’s. Failed LRUs should be noted
and a service center or Garmin-authorized dealer informed.
Viewing LRU information:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Status Page.
2) To place the cursor in the ‘LRU Info’ Box,
EIS
a) Press the LRU Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
b) With ‘Select LRU Window’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
3) Use the FMS Knob to scroll through the box to view LRU status information.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 1-9 Example System Status Page
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
11
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Airframe information which includes system software, Cockpit Reference Guide (CRG) part number, system
ID, and checklist are also displayed on this page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Viewing airframe information:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Status Page.
2) To place the cursor in the ‘Airframe’ Box,
a) Press the ARFRM Softkey.
Or:
EIS
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Highlight ‘Select Airframe Window’ and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Use the FMS Knob to scroll through the box to view airframe information.
Pertinent information on all system databases is also displayed on this page. Refer to the Appendices and
Additional Features sections for more information about databases.
Viewing database information:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Status Page.
2) To place the cursor in the ‘Database’ Box,
a) Press the DBASE Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Highlight ‘Select Dbase Window’ and press the ENT Key.
3) Use the FMS Knob to scroll through the box to view database status information.
AFCS
The G1000 uses aural tones to convey the priority of airframe-specific alerts. The alerting system’s annunciation
tone may be tested from the System Status Page. Refer to the Appendices for airframe-specific alerts.
Testing the system annunciation tone:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Status Page.
2) Press the ANN TEST Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
b) Highlight ‘Enable Annunciator Test Mode’ and press the ENT Key.
12
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AHRS OPERATION
NOTE: Aggressive maneuvering while AHRS is not operating normally may degrade AHRS accuracy.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) performs attitude, heading, and vertical acceleration
calculations for the G1000 System, utilizing GPS, magnetometer, and air data in addition to information
from its internal sensors. Attitude and heading information are updated on the PFD while the AHRS receives
appropriate combinations of information from the external sensor inputs.
unavailable
available
available
unavailable
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
le
ab
AHRS
no-GPS
Mode
ail
av
AHRS no- AHRS no-Mag/
Mag Mode
no-Air Mode
Heading Invalid
Air Data
un
available
unavailable
available
unavailable
available
Air Data
AHRS Normal
Operation
Magnetometer Data
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Magnetometer Data
EIS
GPS Data
Attitude/Heading Invalid
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 1-10 AHRS Operation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Loss of GPS, magnetometer, or air data inputs is communicated to the pilot by message advisory alerts (refer
to Appendix A for specific AHRS alert information). Any failure of the internal AHRS inertial sensors results in
loss of attitude and heading information (indicated by red ‘X’ flags over the corresponding flight instruments).
APPENDICES
Two GPS inputs are provided to the AHRS. If GPS information from one of the inputs fails, the AHRS uses
the remaining GPS input and an alert message is issued to inform the pilot. If both GPS inputs fail, the AHRS
can continue to provide attitude and heading information to the PFD as long as magnetometer and airspeed
data are available and valid.
If the magnetometer input fails, the AHRS continues to output valid attitude information; however, the
heading output on the PFD is flagged as invalid with a red ‘X’.
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
INDEX
Failure of the air data input has no effect on the AHRS output while AHRS is receiving valid GPS information.
Invalid/unavailable airspeed data in addition to GPS failure results in loss of all attitude and heading
information.
13
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
GPS RECEIVER OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Each Integrated Avionics Unit (IAU) contains a GPS receiver. Internal system checking is performed to
ensure both GPS receivers are providing accurate data to the PFD. When both GPS receivers are providing
accurate data, the GPS receiver producing the better solution is used by the system. Information collected by
the specified receiver (GPS1 for the #1 IAU or GPS2 for the #2 IAU) may be viewed on the AUX - GPS Status
Page.
Viewing GPS receiver status information:
EIS
1) Use the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the Auxiliary Page Group (see Section 1.6 for information on
navigating MFD page groups).
2) Use the small FMS Knob to select GPS Status Page (third page in the AUX Page Group).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Press the desired GPS Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) To change the selected GPS receiver:
b) Use the FMS Knob to highlight the receiver which is not selected and press the ENT Key.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
Satellite Signal
Information
GPS Receiver
Status
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Satellite Constellation
Diagram
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
RAIM
Availability
Prediction
INDEX
APPENDICES
Satellite
Signal
Strength
Bars
Figure 1-11 GPS Status Page
14
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NOTE: Refer to the Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) to determine whether SBAS functionality is approved.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
For SBAS-enabled systems, GPS sensor annunciations are most often seen after system power-up when one
GPS receiver has acquired satellites before the other or one of the GPS receivers has not yet acquired a SBAS
signal. While the aircraft is on the ground, the SBAS signal may be blocked by obstructions causing one GPS
receiver to have difficulty acquiring a good signal. Also, while airborne, turning the aircraft may result in one
of the GPS receivers temporarily losing the SBAS signal. If no failure message exists, check the GPS Status Page
and compare the information for GPS1 and GPS2. Discrepancies may indicate a problem.
EIS
GPS RECEIVER STATUS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The GPS solution type (ACQUIRING, 2D NAV, 2D DIFF NAV, 3D NAV, 3D DIFF NAV) for the active
GPS receiver (GPS1 or GPS2) is shown in the upper right of the GPS Status Page. When the receiver is
in the process of acquiring enough satellite signals for navigation, the receiver uses satellite orbital data
(collected continuously from the satellites) and last known position to determine the satellites that should be
in view. ACQUIRING is indicated as the solution until a sufficient number of satellites have been acquired
for computing a solution.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When the receiver is in the process of acquiring a 3D navigational GPS solution, 3D NAV is indicated as the
solution until the 3D differential fix has finished acquisition. Satellite-Based Augmentation System (SBAS)
status should be indicated as INACTIVE at this point. When acquisition is complete, the solution status
changes to 3D DIFF NAV and SBAS becomes active.
In certain situations, such as when the aircraft is outside or on the fringe of the EGNOS, MSAS (used only
in Japan), or WAAS coverage area, it may be desirable to disable EGNOS, MSAS, or WAAS (although it is not
recommended). When disabled, the SBAS field in the GPS Status box indicates DISABLED. There may be a
small delay for the GPS Status box to be updated upon EGNOS, MSAS, or WAAS enabling/disabling.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Disabling EGNOS, MSAS, or WAAS
1) Select the GPS Status Page.
AFCS
2) If necessary, press the SBAS Softkey.
3) Press the FMS Knob, and turn the large FMS Knob to hightlight ‘EGNOS’, ‘MSAS’, or ‘WAAS’.
4) Press the ENT Key to uncheck the box.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 1-12 Enable/Disable SBAS
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
15
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
RAIM PREDICTION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM) is a GPS receiver function that performs a consistency
check on all tracked satellites. RAIM ensures that the available satellite geometry allows the receiver to
calculate a position within a specified RAIM protection limit (2.0 nautical miles for oceanic and enroute, 1.0
nm for terminal, and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). During oceanic, enroute, and terminal phases of
flight, RAIM is available nearly 100% of the time.
EIS
The RAIM prediction function also indicates whether RAIM is available at a specified date and time. RAIM
computations predict satellite coverage within ±15 min of the specified arrival date and time. In G1000
systems with SBAS enabled, performing RAIM prediction is not necessary in most cases. However, if the
selected approach is outside the SBAS coverage area, it may be necessary to perform a RAIM prediction for
the intended approach.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: Refer to the Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) to determine whether SBAS functionality is approved.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Because of the tighter protection limit on approaches, there may be times when RAIM is not available. The
G1000 automatically monitors RAIM and warns with an alert message when it is not available. If RAIM is not
predicted to be available for the final approach course, the approach does not become active, as indicated by
the message “Approach is not active”. If RAIM is not available when crossing the FAF, the missed approach
procedure must be flown.
Predicting RAIM availability:
1) Select the GPS Status Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the RAIM Softkey.
3) Press the FMS Knob. The ‘WAYPOINT’ field is highlighted.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window.
5) Enter the desired waypoint and press the ENT Key (refer to Section 1.6 for instructions on data entry).
AFCS
Or:
a) To use the present position, press the MENU Key.
b) With ‘Set WPT to Present Position’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
c) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
6) Enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
7) Enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
8) With the cursor highlighting ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’, press the ENT Key. Once RAIM availability is computed, one
of the following is displayed:
• ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’—RAIM has not been computed for the current waypoint, time, and date combination
• ‘COMPUTING AVAILABILITY’—RAIM calculation in progress
INDEX
• ‘RAIM AVAILABLE’—RAIM is predicted to be available for the specified waypoint, time, and date
• ‘RAIM NOT AVAILABLE’—RAIM is predicted to be unavailable for the specified waypoint, time, and date
16
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SATELLITE INFORMATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Satellites currently in view are shown at their respective positions on a satellite constellation diagram.
This sky view is always oriented north-up, with the outer circle representing the horizon, the inner circle
representing 45° above the horizon, and the center point showing the position directly overhead. Each satellite
is represented by an oval containing the Pseudo-random noise (PRN) number (i.e., satellite identification
number). Satellites whose signals are currently being used are represented by solid ovals.
EIS
The GPS Status Page can be helpful in troubleshooting weak (or missing) signal levels due to poor satellite
coverage or installation problems. As the GPS receiver locks onto satellites, a signal strength bar is displayed
for each satellite in view, with the appropriate satellite PRN number (01-32 or 120-138 for SBAS) below each
bar. The progress of satellite acquisition is indicated by signal bar appearance:
• No signal strength bar—Receiver is looking for the indicated satellite.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Hollow signal strength bar—Receiver has found the satellite and is collecting data. Each satellite has a 30second data transmission that must be collected (signal strength bar is hollow) before the satellite may be
used for navigation (signal strength bar becomes solid).
• Solid signal strength bar—Receiver has collected the necessary data and the satellite signal can be used.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Checkered signal strength bar—Receiver has excluded the satellite (Fault Detection and Exclusion; FDE).
• “D” indication on signal strength bar—Satellite is being used for differential computations.
• Green signal strength bar—Satellites that are actually being used in the position calculation.
• Blue signal strength bar—Satellite is locked on but not yet being used in the position calculation.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Using the current satellite signal information, the system calculates the aircraft’s GPS position, time, altitude,
ground speed, and track for the aircraft (displayed below the satellite signal accuracy measurements for
reference). The following quantities denote the accuracy of the aircraft’s GPS fix:
• Estimated Position Uncertainty (EPU)—A statistical error indication; the radius of a circle centered on an
estimated horizontal position in which actual position has 95% probability of lying
AFCS
• Horizontal Dilution of Precision (HDOP)—Measures satellite geometry quality (i.e., number of satellites
received and where they are relative to each other) on a range from 0.0 to 9.9, with lower numbers denoting
better accuracy
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Horizontal and Vertical Figures of Merit (HFOM and VFOM)—Measures of horizontal and vertical position
uncertainty; the current 95% confidence horizontal and vertical accuracy values reported by the GPS
receiver
NOTE: Refer to the Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) to determine whether SBAS functionality is approved.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
17
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.5 G1000 CONTROLS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 controls have been designed to simplify operation of the system and minimize workload and the
time required to access sophisticated functionality. Controls are located on the PFD and MFD bezels and Audio
Panel. PFD and MFD controls and softkeys are discussed in this section. See the Audio Panel and CNS Section
for more information about Audio Panel and NAV/COM controls. AFCS controls (on the bezel of the MFD) are
described in the AFCS section.
EIS
PFD/MFD CONTROLS
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1
10
13
11
14
12
15
AFCS
16
18
17
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 1-13 PFD/MFD Controls
The NAV, CRS/BARO, COM, FMS, and ALT knobs are concentric dual knobs, each having small (inner)
and large (outer) control portion. When a portion of the knob is not specified in the text, either may be used.
APPENDICES
Large (Outer) Knob
Small (Inner) Knob
INDEX
Figure 1-14 Dual Concentric Knob
18
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
NAV VOL/ID Knob Turn to control NAV audio volume (shown in the NAV Frequency Box as a
percentage)
NAV Frequency
Transfer Key
3 NAV Knob
Heading Knob
Press to toggle light blue tuning box between NAV1 and NAV2
Turn to manually select a heading
Joystick
Press to display a digital heading momentarily to the left of the Horizontal Situation
Indicator (HSI) and synchronize the Selected Heading to the and current heading
Turn to change map range
CRS/BARO Knob
Press to activate Map Pointer and move in desired direction to pan map
Turn large knob for altimeter barometric pressure setting
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6
Turn to tune NAV receiver standby frequencies (large knob for MHz; small for kHz)
EIS
5
Press to toggle Morse code identifier audio on/off
Transfers the standby and active NAV frequencies
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2
4
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1
Turn small knob to adjust course (only when HSI is in VOR or OBS Mode)
COM Knob
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
7
Press to re-center the CDI and return course pointer directly to bearing of active
waypoint/station
Turn to tune COM transceiver standby frequencies (large knob for MHz; small for
kHz)
Press to toggle light blue tuning box between COM1 and COM2
COM Frequency
Transfer Key
(EMERG)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8
The selected COM (green) is controlled with the COM MIC Key (Audio Panel).
Transfers the standby and active COM frequencies
11
FPL Key
12
CLR Key
(DFLT MAP)
MENU Key
14
PROC Key
15
ENT Key
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Press and hold to display the MFD Navigation Map Page (MFD only).
Displays a context-sensitive list of options for accessing additional features or making
setting changes
Gives access to IFR departure procedures (DPs), arrival procedures (STARs), and
approach procedures (IAPs) for a flight plan or selected airport
Validates/confirms selection or data entry
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
INDEX
13
Erases information, cancels entries, or removes menus
APPENDICES
Direct-to Key (
Press to turn the COM automatic squelch on/off
) Activates the direct-to function and allows the user to enter a destination waypoint
and establish a direct course to the selected destination (specified by identifier,
chosen from the active route)
Displays flight plan information
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
10
AFCS
Press and hold two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.5 MHz)
automatically into the active frequency field
9 COM VOL/SQ Knob Turn to control COM audio volume level (shown as a percentage in the COM
Frequency Box)
19
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
16
Press to turn the selection cursor on/off
FMS Knob
(Flight Management Data Entry: With cursor on, turn to enter data in the highlighted field (large
System Knob)
knob moves cursor location; small knob selects character for highlighted cursor
location)
EIS
Scrolling: When a list of information is too long for the window/box, a scroll bar
appears, indicating more items to view. With cursor on, turn large knob to scroll
through the list.
17
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Softkey Selection
Keys
18 ALT Knob
Page Selection: Turn knob on MFD to select the page to view (large knob selects a
page group; small knob selects a specific page from the group)
Press to select softkey shown above the bezel key on the PFD/MFD display
Sets the Selected Altitude, shown above the Altimeter (the large knob selects the
thousands, the small knob selects the hundreds)
SOFTKEY FUNCTION
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The softkeys are located along the bottoms of the displays. The softkeys shown depend on the softkey level
or page being displayed. The bezel keys below the softkeys can be used to select the appropriate softkey. When
a softkey is selected, its color changes to black text on gray background and remains this way until it is turned
off, at which time it reverts to white text on black background. When a softkey function is disabled, the softkey
label is subdued (dimmed).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Softkeys revert to the previous level after 45 seconds of inactivity.
AFCS
Bezel-Mounted
Softkeys (Press)
Softkey
On
Softkey Names
(Displayed)
Figure 1-15 Softkeys (Second-Level PFD Configuration)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
In the following descriptions, top level softkeys are denoted with bullets.
PFD SOFTKEYS
APPENDICES
The CDI, IDENT, TMR/REF, NRST, and ALERTS softkeys undergo a momentary change to black text on
gray background and automatically switch back to white text on black background when selected.
INDEX
The PFD softkeys provide control over flight management functions, including GPS, NAV, terrain, traffic,
and lightning (optional). Each softkey sublevel has a BACK Softkey which can be selected to return to the
previous level. The ALERTS Softkey is visible at all softkey levels (label changes if messages are issued).
20
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
PFD
OBS
CDI
(optional)
ADF/DME
XPDR
IDENT
TMR/REF
NRST
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
INSET
ALERTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Press the CDI Softkey to cycle through
navigation sources:
- GPS
- NAV1 (VOR/LOC)
- NAV2 (VOR/LOC)
Figure 1-16 Top Level PFD Softkeys
DCLTR
WX LGND TRAFFIC
TOPO
TERRAIN STRMSCP NEXRAD XM LTNG
METAR
BACK
ALERTS
BACK
ALERTS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
OFF
Displays Inset Map in PFD lower left corner
Removes Inset Map
Selects desired amount of map detail; cycles through declutter levels:
DCLTR (No Declutter): All map features visible
INSET
DCLTR-1: Removes land data
DCLTR-2: Removes land and SUA data
DCLTR-3: Removes everything except active(optional)
flight plan
(optional)
(optional)
PRECIP DL LTNG
PFD andOBS
CDI Inset
ADF/DME
XPDR
IDENT weather
TMR/REF
NRST
ALERTS
Displays
icon
age on the
Map
for
the selected
products
(optional)
(optional)
(optional)
(optional)
or
or
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
INSET
WX LGND
EIS
• INSET
OFF
DCLTR (3)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TRAFFIC (2) Displays/removes traffic information on Inset Map
TRFC-1: Displays traffic on Inset Map.
Press the CDI Softkey to cycle through
navigation sources:
the OFF
or BACK
Softkey
DCLTR-1
TRFC-1 everything except traffic. Inset
TRFC-2: Removes
MapPress
position
HDG
UP only.
- GPS to return to the top-level softkeys.
- NAV1
(VOR/LOC)
Displays/removes
topographical data (e.g., coastlines,
terrain,
rivers, lakes) on Inset Map
TOPO
DCLTR-2
TRFC-2
- NAV2 (VOR/LOC)
Displays/removes terrain information on Inset Map
TERRAIN
DCLTR-3
Displays/removes Stormscope weather information on Inset Map (optional)
STRMSCP
Displays/removes NEXRAD weather and coverage information on Inset Map (optional)
NEXRAD
Displays/removes XM lightning information on Inset Map (optional)
XM LTNG
Displays METAR flags on airport symbols shown on the Inset Map (optional)
METAR
AFCS
INSET
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
(optional) (optional)
(optional)
DCLTR
WX LGND TRAFFIC
DCLTR-1
TRFC-1
DCLTR-2
TRFC-2
TOPO
APPENDICES
OFF
PRECIP DL LTNG
(optional)
or
or
STRMSCP
NEXRAD XM LTNG METAR
TERRAIN
(optional)
Press the OFF or BACK Softkey
to return to the top-level softkeys.
INDEX
DCLTR-3
Figure 1-17 INSET Softkeys
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
21
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Displays second-level softkeys for additional PFD configuration
Displays the softkeys for enabling or disabling Synthetic Vision features (optional)
Displays rectangular boxes representing the horizontal and vertical flight path
of the active flight plan
SYN TERR Enables synthetic terrain depiction
HRZN HDG Displays compass heading along the Zero-Pitch line
APTSIGNS Displays position markers for airports within approximately 15 nm of the
current aircraft position. Airport identifiers are displayed when the airport is
within approximately 9 nm.
Resets PFD to default settings, including changing units to standard
DFLTS
Displays softkeys to select and configure wind data
WIND
Displays wind data in longitudinal and lateral components
OPTN1
Displays wind data total direction and speed
OPTN2
Displays wind data total direction with head and cross-wind speed components
OPTN3
Removes wind information from display
OFF
Displays/removes DME Information Window (optional)
DME
Cycles the Bearing 1 Information Window through:
BRG1
NAV1: Waypoint frequency/identifier and DME information
GPS: Waypoint identifier and GPS distance information
ADF: Waypoint frequency
Off: Removes window
Displays softkeys to select the HSI format
HSI FMT
Displays HSI as a 360° compass rose
360 HSI
Displays HSI as a 140° viewable arc (Bearing Information windows unavailable)
ARC HSI
Cycles the Bearing 2 Information Window through:
BRG2
NAV2: Waypoint frequency/identifier and DME information
GPS: Waypoint identifier and GPS distance information
ADF: Waypoint frequency
Off: Removes window
Displays softkeys for changing the Altimeter barometric setting and altitude displays to
ALT UNIT
metric units
Displays the current and Selected altitudes in meters in addition to feet, when selected
METERS
Displays the Altimeter barometric setting in inches of mercury (in Hg)
IN
Displays the Altimeter barometric setting in hectopascals (hPa)
HPA
Sets barometric pressure to 29.92 in Hg (1013 hPa if metric display is selected)
STD BARO
Selects OBS Mode on the CDI when navigating by GPS (only available with active leg)
• OBS
Cycles CDI through GPS, NAV1 (VOR/LOC), and NAV2 (VOR/LOC) navigation sources
• CDI
• ADF/DME
Displays/removes ADF/DME Radio Tuning Window (optional; may appear as ADF, DME,
or ADF/DME depending on installation)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• PFD
SYN VIS
PATHWAY
22
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PFD
SYN VIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
(optional)
(optional)
DFLTS
WIND
DME
BRG1
HSI FMT
ALT UNIT STD BARO
BRG2
BACK
ALERTS
OPTN2
OPTN3
OFF
360 HSI
IN
HPA
PATHWAY SYN TERR HRZN HDG APTSIGNS
ALERTS
BACK
ALERTS
BACK
ALERTS
BACK
ALERTS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
METERS
ARC HSI
BACK
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
OPTN1
EIS
Press the BRG1/BRG2
Press the STD BARO or BACK
softkeys to display/remove Softkey to return to the top-level
the Bearing Information
softkeys.
windows and cycle through
bearing sources:
- NAV1/NAV2
- GPS
- ADF
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 1-18 PFD Configuration Softkeys
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
23
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PFD
Displays transponder mode selection softkeys:
Selects standby mode (Transponder does not reply to any interrogations)
Selects Mode
A (Transponder replies to interrogations)
(optional)
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• XPDR
STBY
ON
ALT
HSI FMT
BRG1
WIND
DFLTS
DME
BRG2
White
(On-Ground)
- Transponder
does
ALERTS
UNITASTD
not allow ALT
Mode
orBARO
ModeBACK
C replies
to interrogations, , but it does permit acquisition and extended squitters including ADS-B out (if
equipped), and replies to discretely addressed Mode S interrogations.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
VFR
CODE
0—7
IDENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
BKSP
ADS-B TX
• IDENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• TMR/REF
• NRST
• ALERTS
Press the BRG1/BRG2
Press the STD BARO or BACK
softkeys to display/remove Softkey to return to the top-level
Bearing Information
softkeys.
Green (Airborne) - Transponderthegenerates
Mode A, Mode
C, and Mode S replies to
windows
and
cycle
through
interrogations, as well as transmissions of acquisition and extended squitters including
bearing sources:
ADS-B out (if equipped).
- NAV1/NAV2
Automatically enters the VFR code (1200
- GPS in U.S.A. only)
- ADF
Displays transponder code selection softkeys 0-7
Use OPTN1
numbersOPTN2
to enterOPTN3
code OFF
BACK
ALERTS
Activates the Special Position Identification (SPI) pulse for 18 seconds, identifying the
transponder return on the ATC screen
360 HSI ARC HSI
BACK
ALERTS
Removes numbers entered, one at a time
Enables/disables automatic transmission of ADS-B position and speed. (optional)
METERS
HPA
BACK
ALERTS
Activates the Special Position
Identification IN
(SPI) pulse
for 18 seconds,
identifying
the
transponder return on the ATC screen
Displays/removes Timer/References Window
Displays/removes Nearest Airports Window
Displays/removes Alerts Window
AFCS
XPDR
(optional)
ON
ALT
VFR
CODE
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
STBY
IDENT
ADS-B TX
BACK
ALERTS
Press the BACK Softkey to
return to the top-level softkeys.
APPENDICES
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
IDENT
BKSP
BACK
ALERTS
Press the IDENT or BACK
Softkey to return to the toplevel softkeys.
INDEX
Figure 1-19 XPDR Softkeys
24
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MFD SOFTKEYS
MFD softkeys vary depending on the page selected. EIS and Navigation Map Page (default MFD page)
softkeys are described here.
DCLTR
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
MAP
ENGINE
SHW CHRT CHKLIST
DCLTR-1
DCLTR-2
EIS
DCLTR-3
SYSTEM
FUEL
ENGINE
SYSTEM
FUEL
BACK
DEC FUEL INC FUEL RST FUEL
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ENGINE
BACK
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Press the BACK Softkey to
return to the top-level softkeys.
TRAFFIC PROFILE
TOPO
(optional) (optional) (optional) (optional)
(optional)
TERRAIN AIRWAYS STRMSCP NEXRAD XM LTNG METAR LEGEND WX RADAR
BACK
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Press the BACK softkey to
return to the top-level softkeys.
AIRWY ON
AIRWY LO
AIRWY HI
DONE
EXIT
EMERGCY
AFCS
ENGINE
The DONE Softkey label changes to UNDO
when the checklist item is already checked.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 1-20 EIS and MFD Softkeys
• ENGINE
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
APPENDICES
SYSTEM
FUEL
DEC FUEL
INC FUEL
RST FUEL
Displays the Engine Page and top-level engine softkeys (see the EIS Section for
more information)
Displays the System Page
Displays the Fuel Page
Decreases displayed fuel remaining in 1-gal increments
Increases displayed fuel remaining in 1-gal increments
Resets displayed fuel remaining to maximum fuel capacity for aircraft and fuel used
to zero
25
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Enables second-level Navigation Map Page softkeys
Displays/removes traffic information on Navigation Map Page
Displays/removes profile view on Navigation Map Page
Displays/removes topographical data (e.g., coastlines, terrain, rivers, lakes) on Navigation
Map Page
Displays/removes terrain information on Navigation Map Page
TERRAIN
Selects the desired display of Airways; cycles through:
AIRWAYS
AIRWY ON: All Airways displayed
AIRWY LO: Low Altitude (Victor) Airways displayed
AIRWY HI: High Altitude Airways (Jet Routes) displayed
AIRWAYS: Airways are not displayed
STRMSCP Displays/removes Stormscope weather information on Inset Map (optional)
Displays/removes NEXRAD weather/coverage on Navigation Map Page (optional)
NEXRAD
XM LTNG Displays/removes XM lightning information on Navigation Map Page (optional)
Displays METAR flags on airport symbols shown on Navigation Map Page (optional)
METAR
Displays the legend for the selected weather products. Available only when
LEGEND
NEXRAD, XM LTNG, and/or METAR softkeys are selected.
WX RADAR Displays/removes airborne weather radar information on Navigation Map Page.
Returns to top-level softkeys
BACK
• DCLTR (3) Selects desired amount of map detail; cycles through declutter levels:
DCLTR (No Declutter): All map features visible
DCLTR-1: Removes land data
DCLTR-2: Removes land and SUA data
DCLTR-3: Removes everything except the active flight plan
• SHW CHRT Displays optional Flite Charts or Chart View charts (optional)
Displays the Checklist Page
• CHKLIST
Selects the highlighted checklist item
DONE
Returns to the top-level softkeys
EXIT
EMERGCY Immediately accesses the emergency procedures
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• MAP
TRAFFIC
PROFILE
TOPO
26
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1.6 ACCESSING G1000 FUNCTIONALITY
MENUS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 has a dedicated MENU Key that when pressed displays a context-sensitive list of options. This
options list allows the user to access additional features or make setting changes which specifically relate to
the currently displayed window/page. There is no all-encompassing menu. Some menus provide access to
additional submenus that are used to view, edit, select, and review options. Menus display ‘No Options’ when
there are no additional features or settings for the window/page selected.
EIS
Navigating a menu:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the menu.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through a list of available options (a scroll bar always appears to the right of the
window/box when the option list is longer than the window/box).
3) Press the ENT Key to select the desired option.
4) Press the CLR Key or FMS Knob to remove the menu and cancel the operation.
Options for FPL Window
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
No Options for
NRST Window
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 1-21 Page Menu Examples
AFCS
DATA ENTRY
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The FMS Knob can be used for directly entering alphanumeric data (e.g., Flight ID, waypoint identifiers,
barometric minimum descent altitude) into the G1000 In some instances, such as when entering an identifier,
the G1000 tries to predict the desired identifier based on the characters being entered. In this case, if the
desired identifier appears, use the ENT Key to confirm the entry without entering the rest of the identifier
manually. This can save the pilot from having to enter all the characters of the identifier.
APPENDICES
Besides character-by-character data entry, the system also provides a shortcut for entering waypoint identifiers.
When the cursor is on a field awaiting entry of a waypoint identifier, turning the small FMS Knob counterclockwise accesses three different lists of waypoint identifiers for quick selection: flight plan (FPL), nearest
(NRST), and recently-entered (RECENT). The G1000 automatically fills in the identifier, facility, and city fields
with the information for the selected waypoint.
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
27
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Using the FMS Knob to enter data:
1) If needed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Use the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field.
3) Begin entering data.
a) To quickly enter a waypoint identifier, turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of waypoints
in the active flight plan (list is titled FPL). If desired, turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to scroll through lists
of nearest waypoints (NRST) and recently-entered waypoints (RECENT).
EIS
b) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired waypoint from the list and press the ENT Key.
Or:
a) Turn the small FMS Knob to select a character for the first placeholder.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Turning the knob clockwise scrolls through the alphabet (where appropriate) toward the letter Z, starting at
K, and the digits zero through nine. Afterwards, turning the knob counter-clockwise scrolls in the opposite
direction.
b) Use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next placeholder in the field.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
c) Repeat, using the small FMS Knob to select a character and the large FMS Knob to move the cursor, until the
field is complete.
d) Press the ENT Key to confirm entry.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to cancel data entry (the field reverts back to its previous information).
28
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PAGE GROUPS
NOTE: Refer to other supporting sections in this Pilot’s Guide for details on specific pages.
Active Page Title
EIS
Page Group
MFD
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Information on the MFD is presented on pages which are grouped according to function. The page group and
active page title are displayed in the upper center of the screen, below the Navigation Status Box. In the bottom
right corner of the screen, the current page group, number of pages available in the group, and placement of
the current page within the group are indicated by icons. For some of these pages (Airport/Procedures/Weather
Information, XM, Procedure Loading), the title of the page changes while the page icon remains the same.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Page Groups
Pages in Current Group
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected Page
Figure 1-22 Page Title and Page Group Icons
There are four main page groups, navigated using the FMS Knob; specific pages within each group can vary
depending on the configuration of optional equipment.
AFCS
Selecting a page using the FMS Knob:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob until the desired page group is selected.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob until the desired page is selected.
APPENDICES
There are also several pages (Airport/Procedures/Weather Information and XM pages) which are selected first
from within a main page group with the FMS Knob, then with the appropriate softkey at the bottom of the page
(or from the page menu). In this case, the page remains set to the selected page until a different page softkey is
selected, even if a different page group is selected.
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
29
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
• Map Page Group (MAP)
Navigation Map
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Traffic Map
Weather Radar (optional)
Stormscope (optional)
XM Weather Data Link (service
optional)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Terrain-SVS or Terrain
Proximity
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 1-23 Map Pages
• Waypoint Page Group (WPT)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Airport/Procedures/Weather Information Pages:
- Airport Information
(INFO-1, INFO-2 Softkeys)
- Departure Information
(DP Softkey)
AFCS
- Arrival Information
(STAR Softkey)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Approach Information
(APR Softkey)
- Weather Information (optional)
(WX Softkey)
Intersection Information
APPENDICES
NDB Information
Airport,
Procedures
and Weather
Information Pages
VOR Information
VRP Information
User Waypoint Information
INDEX
Figure 1-24 Waypoint Pages
30
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- XM Radio
(RADIO Softkey)
- XM Information
(INFO Softkey)
Satellite Phone
- Telephone
(TEL Softkey)
- SMS
(SMS Softkey)
Wi-Fi Setup
System Status
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Auxiliary Page Group (AUX)
Trip Planning
Utility
GPS Status
Satellite Phone
System Setup Pages:
Pages
- System Setup 1
(SETUP 1 Softkey)
System Setup
- System Setup 2
Pages
(SETUP 2 Softkey)
XM Satellite Pages (optional):
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
XM
Pages
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Video (optional)
ADS-B Status
Bluetooth Management
Figure 1-25 Auxiliary Pages
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
31
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
• Nearest Page Group (NRST)
Nearest Airports
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Nearest Intersections
Nearest NDB
Nearest VOR
Nearest VRP
Nearest User Waypoints
EIS
Nearest Frequencies
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Nearest Airspaces
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 1-26 Nearest Pages
In addition to the main page groups accessed exclusively using the FMS Knob, there are pages for flight
planning (FPL) and loading procedures (PROC) which are accessed by key. In some instances, softkeys may be
used to access the Procedure Loading pages.
AFCS
The Flight Plan pages are accessed using the FPL Key on the MFD. Main pages within this group are selected
by turning the small FMS Knob.
• Flight Plan Page Group (FPL)
Active Flight Plan
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Flight Plan Catalog
APPENDICES
- Stored Flight Plan
(NEW Softkey)
INDEX
Figure 1-27 Flight Plan Pages
32
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Procedure Loading pages may be accessed at any time on the MFD by pressing the PROC Key. A menu
is initialized, and when a departure, approach, or arrival is selected, the appropriate Procedure Loading page is
opened. These pages can also be accessed from the Active and Stored Flight Plan pages using the LD softkeys.
Turning the FMS Knob does not scroll through the Procedure Loading pages (note the single page icon in the
lower right corner).
• Procedure Loading Page Group (PROC)
Departure Loading
Arrival Loading
EIS
Approach Loading
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 1-28 Procedure Loading Pages
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Information on optional electronic checklist pages is offered later in this section. Checklist pages may be
accessed from any page on the MFD using the CHKLIST Softkey.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
33
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM SETTINGS
G1000 system settings are managed from the System Setup Page. The following settings can be changed:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Date/time
• MFD Data Bar Fields
(see Flight Management Section)
• Display Units
(see Flight Instruments Section)
• Baro Transition Alert (see Flight Instruments
Section)
EIS
• Airspace alerts (see Flight Management Section)
• Arrival alerts (see Flight Management Section)
• Audio Alerts
• CDI scaling for GPS navigation source
(see Flight Instruments Section)
• COM channel spacing
(see Audio Panel and CNS Section)
• Criteria for displaying nearest airports
(see Flight Management Section)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Restoring system setup defaults:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the DFLTS Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
b) Highlight ‘Restore Defaults’ and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
Figure 1-29 AUX - System Setup Page
34
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DATE/TIME
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 obtains the current Universal Coordinated Time (UTC) date and time directly from the GPS
satellite signals (shown on the AUX - GPS Status Page, Figure 1-11). System time (displayed in the lower
right corner of the PFD) can be displayed in three formats: local 12-hr, local 24-hr, or UTC. Local time is set
by adding/subtracting an offset (hours:minutes) to/from UTC.
PFD
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 1-30 System Time (Local 24-hr Format)
Configuring the system time:
1) Select the AUX - System Setup Page using the FMS Knob.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Time Format’ field.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired format and press the ENT Key to confirm selection. The ‘Time
Offset’ field is highlighted.
AFCS
5) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time offset (±HH:MM) and press the ENT Key to confirm selection.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
INDEX
Figure 1-31 Date/Time Settings
(AUX - System Setup Page)
35
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
DISPLAY UNITS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Units in which various quantities are displayed on the G1000 screens are listed on the System Setup Page.
The Navigation Angle reference can be set from here (refer to the Flight Instruments Section).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 1-32 Display Unit Settings
(AUX - System Setup Page)
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Category
Settings
Affected Quantities
Navigation Angle Magnetic (North) Heading
True (North)
Course
Bearing
Track
Desired Track
Wind direction (Trip Planning Page)
Distance and
Metric
Crosstrack error (HSI)
Speed
Nautical
Bearing distances (information windows)
DME distance (information window)
Flight plan distances
Map ranges
DIS, GS, TAS, XTK fields (Navigation Status Box)
All distances on MFD
Altitude buffer distance (System Setup)
Arrival Alert trigger distance (System Setup)
All speeds on MFD
Altitude and
Feet
All altitudes on MFD
Vertical Speed
Meters
All elevations on MFD
Celsius
Fahrenheit
All temperatures on PFD
Total Air Temperature (Trip Planning Page)
Airspeed Indicator
True Airspeed (PFD)
Wind speed vector
Map range (Traffic Page, Terrain
Proximity/TAWS Page)
CDI scaling (System Setup)
Fuel range calculation (EIS)
Altimeter
Vertical Speed Indicator
VNV altitudes (Active Flight Plan)
Engine Indication System (EIS)
INDEX
Temperature
Exceptions
36
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Position
Affected Quantities
Fuel parameters (Trip Planning Page)
Exceptions
Engine Indication System (EIS)
N/A
N/A
All positions
N/A
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Weight
EIS
Settings
Gallons
Imp Gallons
Kilograms
Liters
Pounds
Pounds
Kilograms
HDDD°MM.MM’
HDDD°MM’SS.S”
MGRS
UTM/UPS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Category
Fuel and
Fuel Flow
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Table 1-1 Display Units Settings (AUX - System Setup Page)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
37
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
PILOT PROFILES
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
System settings may be saved under a pilot profile. When the system is powered on, the last selected
pilot profile is shown on the MFD Power-up Screen (Figure 1-5). The G1000 can store up to 25 profiles;
the currently active profile, the amount of memory used, and the amount of memory available are shown at
the top of the System Setup Page in the box labeled ‘Pilot Profile’. From here, pilot profiles may be created,
selected, renamed, or deleted.
Figure 1-33 Pilot Profile Settings
(AUX - System Setup Page)
Creating a profile:
AFCS
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘CREATE’ in the Pilot Profile Box.
4) Press the ENT Key. A ‘Create Profile’ window is displayed.
5) Use the FMS Knob to enter a profile name up to 16 characters long and press the ENT Key. Pilot profile names
cannot begin with a blank as the first letter.
APPENDICES
6) In the next field, use the small FMS Knob to select the desired settings upon which to base the new profile.
Profiles can be created based on Garmin factory defaults, default profile settings (initially based on Garmin
factory defaults unless edited by the pilot), or current system settings.
7) Press the ENT Key.
8) With ‘CREATE’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to create the profile
INDEX
Or:
Use the large FMS Knob to select ‘CREATE and ACTIVATE’ and press the ENT Key to activate the new profile.
38
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
9) To cancel the process, select ‘CANCEL’ with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT Key.
Selecting an active profile:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the active profile field in the Pilot Profile Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the pilot profile list and highlight the desired profile.
5) Press the ENT Key. The G1000 loads and displays the system settings for the selected profile.
EIS
Renaming a profile:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘RENAME’ in the Pilot Profile Box.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) In the ‘Rename Profile’ window, turn the FMS Knob to select the profile to rename.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) Press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter a new profile name up to 16 characters long and press the ENT Key.
8) With ‘RENAME’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
9) To cancel the process, use the large FMS Knob to select ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Deleting a profile:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
AFCS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘DELETE’ in the Pilot Profile Box.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) In the ‘Delete Profile’ window, turn the FMS Knob to select the profile to delete.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Press the ENT Key.
7) With ‘DELETE’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
8) To cancel the process, use the large FMS Knob to select ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
39
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
TIMERS
The G1000 timers available include:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Stopwatch-like generic timers (available from the PFD Timer/References Window and on the MFD AUX Utility Page)
• Total-time-in-flight timer (MFD AUX - Utility Page)
• Time since departure (MFD AUX - Utility Page)
EIS
The generic timer can be set to count up or down from a specified time (HH:MM:SS). When the countdown
on the timer reaches zero the digits begin to count up from zero. If the timer is reset before reaching zero
on a countdown, the digits are reset to the initial value. If the timer is counting up when reset, the digits are
zeroed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Setting the generic timer (PFD):
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the timer field (hh/mm/ss).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time and press the ENT Key.
4) With the UP/DN field highlighted, turn the small FMS Knob to select the timer counting direction.
5) Press the ENT Key.
6) With ‘START?’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to start the timer. The field changes to ‘STOP?’.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
7) To stop the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘STOP?’ highlighted. The field changes to ‘RESET?’.
8) To reset the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘RESET?’ highlighted. The field changes back to ‘START?’ and the
digits are reset.
9) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the TMR/REF Softkey.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
PFD
INDEX
Figure 1-34 Generic Timer (Timer/References Window)
40
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The flight timer can be set to count up from zero starting at system power-up or from the time that the
aircraft lifts off; the timer can also be reset to zero at any time.
Setting the generic timer (MFD AUX - Utility Page):
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the timer counting direction (UP/DN) and press the ENT Key.
4) If a specific starting time is desired:
EIS
a) Use the large FMS Knob to highlight the HH:MM:SS field.
b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘START?’ and press the ENT Key to start the timer. The field changes to
‘STOP?’.
6) To stop the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘STOP?’ highlighted. The field changes to ‘RESET?’.
7) To reset the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘RESET?’ highlighted. The field changes back to ‘START?’ and the
digits are reset.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 1-35 Timers (AUX - Utility Page)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Setting the flight timer starting criterion:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
APPENDICES
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the field next to the flight timer.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the starting criterion (PWR-ON or IN-AIR) and press the ENT Key.
Resetting the flight timer:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
INDEX
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Reset Flight Timer’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
41
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 records the time at which departure occurs, depending on whether the pilot prefers the time
to be recorded from system power-up or from aircraft lift off. The displayed departure time can also be reset
to display the current time at the point of reset. The format in which the time is displayed is controlled
from the System Setup Page.
Setting the departure timer starting criterion:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the field next to the departure time.
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the starting criterion (PWR-ON or IN-AIR) and press the ENT Key.
Resetting the departure time:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Use the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Reset Departure Time’ and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ELECTRONIC CHECKLISTS
NOTE: The checklists presented in this section are for example only and may not reflect checklists actually
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
available for the Diamond DA42NG. The information described in this section is not intended to replace the
checklist information described in the AFM or the Pilot Safety and Warning Supplements document.
NOTE: Garmin is not responsible for the content of checklists. Checklists are created by the aircraft
manufacturer. Modifications or updates to the checklists are coordinated through the aircraft manufacturer.
The user cannot edit these checklists.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The MFD is able to display optional electronic checklists which allow a pilot to quickly find the proper
procedure on the ground and during each phase of flight. The G1000 accesses the checklists from an SD card
inserted into the bezel slot (see Figure 1-3). If the SD card contains an invalid checklist file or no checklist, the
Power-up Screen displays ‘Invalid Checklist File’ or ‘Checklist File Not Present’ and the CHKLIST Softkey is
not available.
42
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 1-36 Checklist Page Example
Accessing and navigating checklists:
1) From any page, press the CHKLIST Softkey.
AFCS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘GROUP’ field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired procedure and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘Checklist’ field.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired checklist and press the ENT Key.
6) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the checklist and highlight the desired checklist item (has a hollow white
box for checkmark).
• White - Item is highlighted for selection
• Green - Item has been selected
APPENDICES
The following colors are used for checklist items:
• Blue - Items has not been highlighted
• Yellow - Warning notes
7) Press the ENT Key or DONE Softkey to select the highlighted checklist item (item turns green and a checkmark
is placed in the box next to the item). The next item is automatically highlighted for selection.
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
INDEX
Press the CLR Key to remove a check mark from an item.
43
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
8) Once the last item in a checklist is selected, ‘Go to the next checklist?’ is highlighted. Press the ENT Key to
advance to the next checklist displayed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
9) Press the EXIT Softkey or hold down the CLR Key momentarily to exit the Checklist Page and return to the page
last viewed.
Immediately accessing emergency procedures:
1) From any page, press the CHKLIST Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
2) Press the EMERGCY Softkey.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 1-37 Sample Checklist
44
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1.7 DISPLAY BACKLIGHTING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The backlighting of the PFD and MFD displays and bezel and Audio Panel keys can be adjusted automatically or
manually. The default setting (automatic backlighting adjustment) uses photocell technology to automatically adjust
for ambient lighting conditions. Photocell calibration curves are pre-configured to optimize display appearance
through a broad range of cockpit lighting conditions. Manual backlighting adjustment can be accomplished using
the existing instrument panel dimmer bus or the following procedures. In normal operating mode, backlighting
can only be adjusted from the PFD. In Reversionary Mode, it can be adjusted from the remaining display.
Adjusting display backlighting:
EIS
1) Press the PFD MENU Key to display the PFD Setup Menu. ‘AUTO’ is now highlighted next to ‘PFD DSPL’.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘MANUAL’.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the ENT Key. The intensity value is now highlighted.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired backlighting then press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘AUTO’ next to ‘MFD DSPL’ and repeat steps 2-4.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) To remove the menu, press the CLR or MENU Key.
Adjusting key backlighting:
1) Press the PFD MENU Key to display the PFD Setup Menu. ‘AUTO’ is now highlighted next to ‘PFD DSPL’.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘PFD DSPL’.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Turn the small FMS Knob in the direction of the green arrowhead to display ‘PFD KEY’.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘AUTO’.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘MANUAL’.
6) Press the ENT Key. The intensity value is now highlighted.
AFCS
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired backlighting and press the ENT Key.
8) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘MFD DSPL’.
9) Turn the small FMS Knob in the direction of the green arrowhead to display ‘MFD KEY’ and repeat steps 4-7.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
10) To remove the menu, press the CLR or MENU Key.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
45
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
PFD
Figure 1-38 PFD Setup Menu
46
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Garmin G1000 includes an easy-to-scan Primary Flight Display (PFD) that features a large horizon,
airspeed, attitude, altitude, vertical speed, and course deviation information. In addition to the flight instruments,
navigation, communication, terrain, traffic, and weather information are also presented on the PFD and explained
in other sections of this Pilot’s Guide.
The following flight instruments and supplemental flight data are displayed on the PFD:
• Airspeed Indicator, showing
• Horizontal Situation Indicator, showing
– True airspeed
– Bearing pointers and information windows
– Airspeed awareness ranges
– Navigation source
– Vspeed reference bugs
– Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)
• Attitude Indicator with slip/skid indication
– Bearing pointers and information windows
• Altimeter, showing
– DME Information Window
• Transponder Mode, Code, and Ident/Reply
– Barometric setting
• Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)
– Selected altitude
• References Window, showing
– Generic timer
• Vertical Deviation, Glideslope, and Glidepath
Indicators
– Vspeed bug values
• Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
• Vertical Navigation (VNV) indications
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Radar Altimeter (Optional)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
– Trend vector
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
– Turn Rate Indicator
EIS
– Indicated airspeed
– Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height
(MDA/DH)
• Wind data
AFCS
• Outside air temperature (OAT)
The PFD also displays various alerts and annunciations.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
47
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
21
20
19
1
18
17
16
2
EIS
15
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
14
3
13
4
12
5
11
6
10
7
9
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8
1
NAV Frequency Box
12
Current Track Indicator
2
Airspeed Indicator
13
Barometric Altimeter Setting
3
True Airspeed
14
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
4
Current Heading
15
Reference Altitude Bug
5
Turn Rate Indicator
16
Altimeter
6
Horizontal Situation Indicator ( HSI)
17
Selected Altitude
7
Outside Air Temperature (OAT)
18
COM Frequency Box
8
Softkeys
19
Navigation Status Box
9
System Time
20
Slip/Skid Indicator
10
Transponder Data Box
21
Attitude Indicator
11
Heading Bug
INDEX
Figure 2-1 Primary Flight Display (Default)
48
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
15
14
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
13
1
12
2
EIS
11
9
4
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
10
3
8
6
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5
7
Flight Plan Window
2
Selected Heading
9
Annunciation Window
3
Wind Data
10
Selected Course
4
Inset Map
11
Required Vertical Speed Indicator
5
DME Information Window (optional)
12
Vertical Deviation Indicator
6
Bearing Information Windows
13
VNV Target Altitude
7
Barometric Minimum Descent
Altitude / Decision Height
14
Radar Altimeter (optional)
15
AFCS Status Annunciation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
8
AFCS
Traffic Annunciation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1
Figure 2-2 Additional PFD Information
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
49
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.1 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AIRSPEED INDICATOR
NOTE: Refer to the Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM) for airspeed criteria and Vspeed values.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The Airspeed Indicator displays airspeed on a moving tape rolling number gauge. The true airspeed is
displayed in knots below the Airspeed Indicator. The numeric labels and major tick marks on the moving
tape are shown at intervals of 10 knots. The minor tick marks on the moving tape are marked at intervals of
five knots. Speed indication starts at 20 knots, with 60 knots of airspeed viewable at any time. The indicated
airspeed is displayed inside the black pointer. The pointer remains black until reaching never-exceed speed
(VNE), at which point it appears red.
Vspeed
Bugs
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
VYSE
VMCA
Indicated
Airspeed
Airspeed
Trend Vector
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Speed
Ranges
True
Airspeed
AFCS
Airspeed Indicator
Operating Ranges
Low Speed Range
Red and White
Barber Pole at VNE
Figure 2-3 Example Airspeed Indicator Ranges
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Color coded stripes appear on the Airspeed Indicator to show the operating ranges. The low speed range
stripe is red. Normal operating range is green, caution range is amber, and the never exceed speed (VNE) begins
with a red and white barber pole. The flap operating range is indicated by a white stripe.
A red horizontal bar on the airspeed tape represents VMCA. A cyan horizontal bar represents VYSE.
INDEX
APPENDICES
The Airspeed Trend Vector is a vertical magenta line that appears to the right of the color-coded speed range
strip when airspeed is either accelerating or decelerating. One end of the magenta line is anchored to the
tip of the airspeed pointer while the other end moves continuously up or down corresponding to the rate of
acceleration or deceleration. For any constant rate of acceleration or deceleration, the moving end of the line
shows approximately what the indicated airspeed value will be in six seconds. The trend vector is absent if the
speed remains constant or if any data needed to calculate airspeed is not available.
50
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Vspeeds (Glide, VR, VX, VY,, VLE, and VLO) can be changed and their respective bugs turned on/off from the
References Window. When active (on), the Vspeed bugs are displayed to the right of the airspeed scale. All
Vspeed values are reset and all bugs turned off during power up.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM) for Vspeed values.
Changing Vspeeds and turning Vspeed bugs on/off:
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the field of the desired Vspeed to be changed.
EIS
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired value. When a speed has been changed from a default value, an asterisk
appears next to the speed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the ENT Key or turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ON/OFF field.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to ON or counterclockwise to OFF.
6) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the TMR/REF Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-4 References Window and Menu
Turning all Vspeed bugs on/off:
AFCS
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) To activate all Vspeed bugs, press the ENT Key with All References On highlighted.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) To remove all Vspeed bugs, turn the FMS Knob to highlight All References Off and press the ENT Key.
Restoring all Vspeed defaults:
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
APPENDICES
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight Restore Defaults and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
51
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
ATTITUDE INDICATOR
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Attitude information is displayed over a virtual blue sky and brown ground with a white horizon line. The
Attitude Indicator displays the pitch, roll, and slip/skid information.
9
1
7
EIS
2
8
6
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3
4
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5
1
Roll Pointer
2
Roll Scale
3
Horizon Line
4
Aircraft Symbol
5
Land Representation
6
Pitch Scale
7
Slip/Skid Indicator
8
Sky Representation
9
Roll Scale Zero
Figure 2-5 Attitude Indicator
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The horizon line is part of the pitch scale. Above and below the horizon line, major pitch marks and numeric
labels are shown for every 10˚, up to 80˚. Minor pitch marks are shown for intervening 5˚ increments, up to
25˚ below and 45˚ above the horizon line. Between 20˚ below to 20˚ above the horizon line, minor pitch marks
occur every 2.5˚. Refer to the Additional Features section for details regarding attitude indicator operation
when the optional Garmin ESP™ or Synthetic Vision Technology System (SVT™) is installed.
AFCS
The inverted white triangle indicates zero on the roll scale. Major tick marks at 30˚ and 60˚ and minor tick
marks at 10˚, 20˚, and 45˚ are shown to the left and right of the zero. Angle of bank is indicated by the position
of the pointer on the roll scale.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Slip/Skid Indicator is the bar beneath the roll pointer. The indicator bar moves with the roll pointer and
moves laterally away from the pointer to indicate uncoordinated flight. Slip (inside the turn) or skid (outside
the turn) is indicated by the location of the bar relative to the pointer.
INDEX
APPENDICES
When the optional Garmin Electronic Stability and Protection (Garmin ESP) system is available, additional
indications may appear on the pitch and roll scales; refer to the Additional Features and AFCS Sections for more
information about Garmin ESP.
Figure 2-6 Slip/Skid Indication
52
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ALTIMETER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Altimeter displays 600 feet of barometric altitude values at a time on a moving tape rolling number gauge.
Numeric labels and major tick marks are shown at intervals of 100 feet. Minor tick marks are at intervals of 20
feet. The indicated altitude is displayed inside the black pointer.
The Selected Altitude is displayed above the Altimeter in the box indicated by a selection bug symbol. A bug
corresponding to this altitude is shown on the tape. If the Selected Altitude exceeds the range shown on the
tape, the bug appears at the upper or lower edge of the tape. When the metric value is selected it is displayed
in a separate box above the Selected Altitude.
EIS
A magenta Altitude Trend Vector extends up or down the left of the altitude tape, the end resting at the
approximate altitude to be reached in six seconds at the current vertical speed. The trend vector is not shown
if altitude remains constant or if data needed for calculation is not available due to a system failure.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Setting the Selected Altitude:
T urn the ALT Knob to set the Selected Altitude (large knob for 1000-ft increments, small knob for 100-ft
increments.
If set, the Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height (MDA/DH) value is also available for the Selected Altitude.
Selected
Altitude
Indicated
Altitude
(Meters)
AFCS
Selected
Altitude Bug
Minimum Descent
Altitude/Decision
Height Bug
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Barometric
Setting
(Hectopascals)
Barometric
Setting
Figure 2-7 Altimeter
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Indicated
Altitude
Altitude
Trend
Vector
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected
Altitude
(Meters)
Figure 2-8 Altimeter (Metric Units)
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
53
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Altitudes can also be displayed in meters (Figure 2-8). Note that the altitude tape does not change scale when
the metric altitude overlay is enabled.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Displaying altitude in meters:
1) Press the PFD Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
2) Press the ALT UNIT Softkey.
3) Press the METERS Softkey to turn on metric altitude readouts.
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the top-level softkeys.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The barometric pressure setting is displayed below the Altimeter in inches of mercury (in Hg) or hectopascals
(hPa) when metric units are selected. Adjusting the altimeter barometric pressure setting creates discontinuities
in VNV vertical navigation, moving the descent path. For large adjustments, it may take several minutes for the
aircraft to re-establish on the descent patch. If the change is made while nearing a waypoint with a VNV Target
Altitude, the aircraft may not re-establish on the descent path in time to meet the vertical constraint.
Selecting the altimeter barometric pressure setting:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Turn the BARO Knob to select the desired setting.
Selecting standard barometric pressure (29.92 in Hg):
1) Press the PFD Softkey to display the second-level softkeys..
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the STD BARO Softkey; STD BARO is displayed in barometric setting box.
AFCS
Figure 2-9 Standard Barometric Altimeter Setting
Changing altimeter barometric pressure setting units:
1) Press the PFD Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the ALT UNIT Softkey.
3) Press the IN Softkey to display the barometric pressure setting in inches of mercury (in Hg).
Or, press the HPA Softkey to display the barometric pressure setting in hectopascals (hPa).
INDEX
APPENDICES
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the top-level softkeys.
54
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Baro Transition Alert is provided to notify the pilot to change the barometric pressure setting when crossing
the baro transition altitude. If the aircraft is at least 500 feet below the transition altitude and then climbs
through this altitude and the STD BARO Softkey has not been pressed, the barometric pressure setting flashes
in cyan until the pressure setting is changed. If the aircraft is at least 500 feet above the transition altitude and
then descends through this altitude and the barometric pressure setting has not been changed from STD BARO,
the setting flashes in cyan until it is changed (Figure 2-10).
Setting the Baro Transition Alert:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.
EIS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight Altitude in the Baro Transition Alert box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to turn the alert OFF or ON and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to change the altitude and press the ENT Key.
6) To cancel the selection, press the FMS Knob.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 2-10 Aux System Setup Page, Baro Transition Alert
APPENDICES
VERTICAL SPEED INDICATOR (VSI)
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
INDEX
The Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI) displays the aircraft vertical speed on a fixed scale with labels at 2000 and
4000 fpm and minor tick marks every 1000 fpm. Digits appear in the pointer when the climb or descent rate
is greater than 100 fpm. If the rate of ascent/descent exceeds 4000 fpm, the pointer appears at the edge of the
tape and the rate appears inside the pointer.
55
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
VERTICAL DEVIATION
NOTE: The Glidepath Indicator is only available on GPS approaches supporting SBAS vertical guidance when
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SBAS is available.
EIS
The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI) is a magenta chevron indicating the baro-VNV vertical deviation when
Vertical Navigation (VNV) is being used. The VDI appears in conjunction with the “TOD within 1 minute”
alert. The VDI is removed from the display if vertical deviation becomes invalid. See the Flight Management
Section for details on VNV features, and refer to Section 2.2, Supplemental Flight Data, for more information
about VNV indications on the PFD.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Glideslope Indicator (Figure 2-12) appears to the left of the Altimeter whenever an ILS frequency is tuned
in the active NAV field and the aircraft heading and selected course are within 107˚. A green diamond acts as
the Glideslope Indicator, like a glideslope needle on a conventional indicator. If a localizer frequency is tuned
and there is no glideslope, “NO GS” is displayed in place of the diamond.
NOTE: The Glidepath Indicator appears on the display as soon as the Final Approach Fix (FAF) becomes the
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
active waypoint. Depending on procedure design, pilot action, and/or ATC clearance, the aircraft may be
centered on or above the glidepath when the Glidepath Indicator appears.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Glidepath Indicator is vertical deviation scale for RNAV GPS approaches supporting SBAS vertical
guidance (LNAV+V, L/VNAV, LPV and LP+V approach service levels). The Glidepath Indicator, a magenta
diamond (Figure 2-13) appears on the display as soon as the Final Approach Fix (FAF) becomes the active
waypoint, and the FMS is the selected navigation source. Full-scale deflection (two dots), is angular with upper
and lower limits. The upper limit is +/- 492 feet (150 meters) and the lower limits depends on the approach
service level.
•
LNAV/VNAV, is +/- 148 feet (45 meters).
•
LPV/LP+V is +/- 49 feet (15 meters).
AFCS
If the approach type downgrades past the final approach fix (FAF), “NO GP” is displayed in place of the
diamond.
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
Required
Vertical
Speed
Marker
Beacon
Annunciation
Vertical
Speed
Indicator
Scale
Current Glideslope
Vertical
Indicator
Speed
Pointer
GIidepath
Indicator
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
VNV Target
Altitude
Figure 2-11 Vertical Speed and
Deviation Indicator (VSI and VDI)
56
Figure 2-12 Glideslope
Indicator
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
Figure 2-13 Glidepath
Indicator
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR (HSI)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) displays a rotating compass card in a heading-up orientation. Letters
indicate the cardinal points with numeric labels every 30˚. Major tick marks are at 10˚ intervals and minor tick
marks are at 5˚ intervals. A digital reading of the current heading appears on top of the HSI, and the current
track is represented on the HSI by a magenta diamond. The HSI also presents turn rate, course deviation,
bearing, and navigation source information. The HSI is available in two formats, a 360˚ compass rose and a
140˚ arc.
Changing the HSI display format:
EIS
1) Press the PFD Softkey
2) Press the HSI FRMT Softkey.
3) Press the 360 HSI or ARC HSI Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The 360˚ HSI contains a Course Deviation Indicator (CDI), with a Course Pointer, To/From Indicator, and a
sliding deviation bar and scale. The course pointer is a single line arrow (GPS, VOR1, and LOC1) or a double
line arrow (VOR2 and LOC2) which points in the direction of the set course. The To/From arrow rotates with
the course pointer and is displayed when the active NAVAID is received.
14
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
15
13
1
12
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2
11
3
10
4
5
9
6
AFCS
8
7
9
Lateral Deviation Scale
2
Current Track Indicator
10
Flight Phase
3
To/From Indicator
11
Course Pointer
4
Navigation Source
12
Heading Bug
5
Aircraft Symbol
6
7
Course Deviation Indicator
(CDI)
Rotating Compass Card
Turn Rate and Heading
Trend Vector
14 Current Heading
8
OBS Mode Active
APPENDICES
Turn Rate Indicator
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1
13
15
Lubber Line
INDEX
Figure 2-14 Horizontal Situation Indicator (360˚ HSI)
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
57
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Arc HSI is a 140˚ expanded section of the compass rose. The Arc HSI contains a Course Pointer,
combined To/From Indicator and a sliding deviation indicator, and a deviation scale. Upon station passage,
the To/From Indicator flips and points to the tail of the aircraft, just like a conventional To/From indicator.
Depending on the navigation source, the CDI on the Arc HSI can appear in two different ways, an arrowhead
(GPS, VOR, OBS) or a diamond (LOC).
Course Pointer
Current Track
Indicator
Flight Phase
Annunciation
EIS
Navigation
Source
Course Deviation
and To/From
Indicator
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Lateral
Deviation
Scale
Figure 2-15 Arc HSI
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The selected heading is shown to the upper left of the HSI for three seconds after being adjusted. The cyan
heading bug on the compass rose corresponds to the selected heading. While the HSI is displayed as an arc, if
the heading bug is adjusted off the shown portion of the compass rose, the digital reading is displayed.
Adjusting the selected heading:
Turn the HDG Knob to set the selected heading.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Press the HDG Knob to synchronize the bug to the current heading.
The Selected Course is shown to the upper right of the HSI for three seconds after being adjusted. While the
HSI is displayed as an arc, the Selected Course is displayed whenever the Course Pointer is not within the 140˚
currently shown.
AFCS
Adjusting the Selected Course:
Turn the CRS Knob to set the Selected Course.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press the CRS Knob to re-center the CDI and return the course pointer to the bearing of the active waypoint or
navigation station.
Current Heading
Heading Bug
APPENDICES
Selected
Heading
Selected
Course
INDEX
Figure 2-16 Heading and Course Indications (Magnetic)
58
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Navigation angles (track, heading, course, bearing) are corrected to the computed magnetic variation (Mag
Var) or referenced to true north (T), set on the AUX - System Setup Page. When an approach referenced to
true north has been loaded into the flight plan, the system generates a message to change the navigation angle
setting to True at the appropriate time.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Figure 2-17 Heading and Course Indications (True)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Changing the navigation angle true/magnetic setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight Nav Angle in the Display Units box.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting and press the ENT Key.
• TRUE - References angles to true north (T)
• MAGNETIC - Angles corrected to the computed magnetic variation (Mag Var)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 2-18 Navigation Angle Settings
(AUX - System Setup Page)
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
59
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
TURN RATE INDICATOR
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Turn Rate Indicator is located directly above the rotating compass card. Tick marks to the left and right
of the lubber line denote half-standard and standard turn rates. A magenta Turn Rate Trend Vector shows the
current turn rate. The end of the trend vector gives the heading predicted in six seconds, based on the present
turn rate. A standard-rate turn is shown on the indicator by the trend vector stopping at the standard turn
rate tick mark, corresponding to a predicted heading of 18˚ from the current heading. At rates greater than
4 deg/sec, an arrowhead appears at the end of the magenta trend vector and the prediction is no longer valid.
EIS
Half-standard
Turn Rate
Arrow Shown
for Turn Rate
> 4 deg/sec
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Standard
Turn Rate
Figure 2-19 Turn Rate Indicator and Trend Vector
BEARING POINTERS AND INFORMATION WINDOWS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Two bearing pointers and associated information can be displayed on the HSI for NAV, GPS, and ADF
sources by pressing the PFD Softkey then a BRG or DME Softkey. The bearing pointers are cyan and are
single-line (BRG1) or double-line (BRG2). A pointer symbol is shown in the information windows to indicate
the navigation source. The bearing pointers never override the CDI and are visually separated from the CDI
by a white ring. Bearing pointers may be selected but not necessarily visible due to data unavailability.
Tuning Mode
Frequency
Bearing 1
Pointer
Bearing 2
Pointer
AFCS
Distance
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Distance to
Bearing Source
Station
Identifier
ADF
Frequency
Bearing Source Pointer 1
Pointer 2 Bearing Source
APPENDICES
Bearing 1 Information Window
Bearing 2 Information Window
INDEX
Figure 2-20 HSI with Bearing and Distance Information
60
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
When a bearing pointer is displayed, the associated information window is also displayed. The Bearing
Information Windows are displayed at the lower sides of the HSI and give the following information:
• Station/waypoint identifier (NAV, GPS)
• Pointer icon (BRG1 = single line, BRG2 = double
line)
• GPS-derived great circle distance to bearing
source
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Bearing source (NAV, GPS, ADF)
EIS
• Frequency (ADF)
When the NAV radio is tuned to an ILS frequency the bearing source and the bearing pointer is removed
from the HSI. When NAV1 or NAV2 is the selected bearing source, the frequency is replaced by the station
identifier when the station is within range. If GPS is the bearing source, the active waypoint identifier is
displayed instead of a frequency.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The bearing pointer is removed from the HSI and NO DATA is displayed in the information window if
the NAV radio is not receiving a VOR station or if GPS is the bearing source and an active waypoint is not
selected.
Selecting bearing display and changing sources:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press a BRG Softkey to display the desired bearing pointer and information window with a NAV source.
3) Press the BRG Softkey again to change the bearing source to GPS.
4) Press the BRG Softkey again to change the bearing source to ADF.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) To remove the bearing pointer and information window, press the BRG Softkey again.
DME INFORMATION WINDOW
AFCS
The DME Information Window is displayed above the BRG1 Information Window on the 360˚ HSI and in
a box above and along side the Arc HSI. It shows the DME label, tuning mode (NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD),
frequency, and distance. When a signal is invalid, the distance is replaced by –.– – NM Refer to the Audio
Panel and CNS Section for information on tuning the DMEs.
Displaying the DME Information Window:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the DME Softkey to display the DME Information Window.
3) To remove the DME Information Window, press the DME Softkey again.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
61
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
COURSE DEVIATION INDICATOR (CDI)
NOTE: During a heading change of greater than 105˚ with respect to the course, the CDI on the Arc HSI
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
switches to the opposite side of the deviation scale and displays reverse sensing.
The Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) moves left or right from the course pointer along a lateral deviation
scale to display aircraft position relative to the course. If the course deviation data is not valid, the CDI is not
displayed.
EIS
360º HSI
Arc HSI
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation
Source
Flight
Phase
Scale
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Crosstrack
Error
Navigation
Source
Flight
Phase
CDI
CDI
Scale
CDI
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-21 Course Deviation Indicator
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The CDI can display two sources of navigation, GPS or VOR/LOC. The color indicates the current navigation
source, magenta for GPS and green for VOR and LOC. The full scale limits for the CDI are defined by a GPSderived distance when navigating GPS. When navigating using a VOR or localizer (LOC), the CDI uses the
same angular deviation as a mechanical CDI. If the CDI exceeds the maximum deviation on the scale (two dots)
while navigating with GPS, the crosstrack error (XTK) is displayed below the white aircraft symbol.
INDEX
Figure 2-22 Navigation Sources
62
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Changing navigation sources:
1) Press the CDI Softkey to change from GPS to VOR1 or LOC1. This places the cyan tuning box over the NAV1
standby frequency in the upper left corner of the PFD.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the CDI Softkey again to change from VOR1 or LOC1 to VOR2 or LOC2. This places the cyan tuning box
over the NAV2 standby frequency.
3) Press the CDI Softkey a third time to return to GPS.
NAV1 Selected for Tuning
NAV2 Selected for Tuning
EIS
LOC1
Selected
VOR2
Selected
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GPS
Selected
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selecting the CDI Softkey
Cycles through
Navigation Sources
Figure 2-23 Selecting a Navigation Source
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The system automatically switches from GPS to LOC navigation source and changes the CDI scaling accordingly
when all of the following occur:
• A localizer or ILS approach has been loaded into the active flight plan.
AFCS
• The final approach fix (FAF) is the active leg, the FAF is less than 15 nm away, and the aircraft is moving
toward the FAF.
• A valid localizer frequency has been tuned.
• The GPS CDI deviation is less than 1.2 times full-scale deflection.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
GPS steering guidance is still provided after the CDI automatically switches to LOC until LOC capture, up
to the Final Approach Fix (FAF) for an ILS approach, or until GPS information becomes invalid. Activating
a Vector-to-Final (VTF) also causes the CDI to switch to LOC navigation source. GPS steering guidance is not
provided after this switch.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
63
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
On some ILS approaches where the glideslope intercept point is at or in close proximity to the fix prior to
the FAF (see Figure 2-24), it is possible to be above the glideslope when the navigation source automatically
switches from GPS to LOC. The probability of this occurring varies based on air temperature.
EIS
Fix Prior to the FAF
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Glideslope Intercept Point
Figure 2-24 ILS Approach with Glideslope Intercept Point at Fix Prior to the FAF
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GPS CDI SCALING
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When GPS is the selected navigation source, the flight plan legs are sequenced automatically and
annunciations appear on the HSI for the flight phase. Flight phase annunciations are normally shown in
magenta, but when cautionary conditions exist the color changes to amber. If the current leg in the flight plan
is a heading leg, HDG LEG is annunciated in magenta beneath the aircraft symbol.
The current GPS CDI scale setting is displayed as System CDI on the AUX - System Setup Page and the fullscale deflection setting may also be changed (2.0 nm, 1.0 nm, 0.3 nm, or Auto) from this page. If the selected
scaling is smaller than the automatic setting for enroute and terminal phases, the CDI is scaled accordingly
and the selected setting is displayed rather than the flight phase annunciation.
AFCS
Changing the selected GPS CDI setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight Selected in the GPS CDI box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
5) To cancel the selection, press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key.
64
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 2-25 GPS CDI Settings
(AUX-System Setup Page)
Enroute
(Oceanic if >200 nm
from nearest airport)
Terminal
Approach
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
1.0 nm
2.0 nm
0.3 nm
CDI Full-scale Deflection
1.0 nm
Terminal
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Departure
Refer to accompanying
approach CDI scaling figures
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When set to Auto (default), the GPS CDI scale automatically adjusts to the desired limits based upon the
current phase of flight (Figure 2-26, Table 2-1).
Missed
Approach
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 2-26 Automatic CDI Scaling
• Once a departure procedure is activated, the CDI is scaled for departure (0.3 nm).
• The system switches from departure to terminal CDI scaling (1.0 nm) under the following conditions:
APPENDICES
- The next leg in the departure procedure is not aligned with the departure runway
- The next leg in the departure procedure is not a CA, CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FA, FC, FD, FM, IF, or TF (see
Glossary for leg type definitions)
- After any leg in the departure procedure that is not a CA or FA
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
INDEX
• At 30 nm from the departure airport, the enroute phase of flight is automatically entered and CDI scaling
changes to 2.0 nm over a distance of 1.0 nm, except under the following conditions:
65
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
- When navigating with an active departure procedure, the flight phase and CDI scale does not change
until the aircraft arrives at the last departure waypoint (if more than 30 nm from the departure airport) or
the leg after the last departure waypoint has been activated or a direct-to waypoint is activated.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• If after completing the departure procedure the nearest airport is more than 200 nm away from the aircraft
and the approach procedure has not yet commenced, the CDI is scaled for oceanic flight (2.0 nm).
• Within 31 nm of the destination airport (terminal area), the CDI scale gradually ramps down from 2.0 nm
to 1.0 nm over a distance of 1.0 nm; except under the following conditions:
EIS
- Upon reaching the first waypoint of an arrival route that is more than 31 nm from the destination airport,
the flight phase changes to terminal and the CDI scale begins to transition down from 2.0 nm to 1.0 nm
over a distance of 1.0 nm.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• During approach, the CDI scale ramps down even further (Figures 2-27 and 2-28). This transition normally
occurs within 2.0 nm of the final approach fix (FAF). The CDI switches to approach scaling automatically
once the approach procedure is activated or if Vectors-To-Final (VTF) are selected.
- If the active waypoint is the FAF, the ground track and the bearing to the FAF must be within 45° of the
final approach segment course.
2 nm
2 nm
FAF
AFCS
FAF
0.3 nm
Landing
Threshold
CDI scale varies if VTF is activated
CDI scale varies if VTF is activated
Figure 2-27 Typical LNAV and LNAV+V Approach Service Level
CDI Scaling
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
angle based
on database
information
course width
1.0 nm
CDI Full-scale Deflection
0.3 nm
angle set
by system
350 ft
CDI scale is set to the smaller of 0.3 nm
or an angle set by the system
1.0 nm
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
CDI Full-scale Deflection
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- If the active waypoint is part of the missed approach procedure, the active leg and the preceding missed
approach legs must be aligned with the final approach segment course and the aircraft must not have
passed the turn initiation point.
Figure 2-28 Typical LNAV/VNAV, LP, LP+V and LPV Approach
Service Level CDI Scaling
• When a missed approach is activated, the CDI scale changes to 0.3 nm.
APPENDICES
• The system automatically switches back to terminal mode under the following conditions:
- The next leg in the missed approach procedure is not aligned with the final approach path
- The next leg in the missed approach procedure is not a CA, CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FA, FC, FD, FM, IF, or TF
INDEX
- After any leg in the missed approach procedure that is not a CA or FA
66
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Approach
(Non-precision)
LNAV
1.0 nm decreasing to 350 feet depending on
variables (see Figure 2-27)
LNAV + V
EIS
L/VNAV
LP
LP+V
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1.0 nm decreasing to a specified course width, then
0.3 nm, depending on variables (see Figure 2-28)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Approach
(Non-precision with
Vertical Guidance)
Approach
(LNAV/VNAV)
Approach
(LP)
Approach
(LP+V)
Approach
(LPV)
Missed Approach
Automatic CDI Full-scale Deflection
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
2.0 nm
4.0 nm
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Annunciation*
DPRT
TERM
ENR
OCN
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Phase
Departure
Terminal
Enroute
Oceanic
LPV
MAPR
0.3 nm
* Flight phase annunciations are normally shown in magenta, but when cautionary
conditions exist the color changes to yellow.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Table 2-1 Automatic GPS CDI Scaling
OBS MODE
NOTE: VNV is inhibited while automatic waypoint sequencing has been suspended.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Enabling Omni-bearing Selector (OBS) Mode suspends the automatic sequencing of waypoints in a GPS
flight plan (GPS must be the selected navigation source), but retains the current Active-to waypoint as the
navigation reference even after passing the waypoint. OBS is annunciated to the lower right of the aircraft
symbol (Figure 2-29) when OBS Mode is selected.
APPENDICES
While OBS is enabled, a course line is drawn through the Active-to waypoint on the moving map. If
desired, the course to/from the waypoint can now be adjusted. When OBS Mode is disabled, the GPS flight
plan returns to normal operation, with automatic sequencing of waypoints, following the course set in OBS
Mode. The flight plan on the moving map retains the modified course line.
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
67
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
GPS
Selected
OBS Mode
Enabled
Extended
Course
Line
EIS
Pressing the OBS
Softkey Enables
OBS Mode
Pressing the OBS
Softkey Again
Disables OBS Mode
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 2-29 Omni-bearing Selector (OBS) Mode
Enabling/disabling OBS Mode while navigating a GPS flight plan:
1) Press the OBS Softkey to select OBS Mode.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the CRS Knob to select the desired course to/from the waypoint. Press the CRS Knob to synchronize the
Selected Course with the bearing to the next waypoint.
3) Press the OBS Softkey again to return to automatic waypoint sequencing.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
As the aircraft crosses the missed approach point (MAP), automatic approach waypoint sequencing is
suspended. SUSP appears on the HSI at the lower right of the aircraft symbol. The OBS Softkey label
changes to indicate the suspension is active as shown in Figure 2-30. Pressing the SUSP Softkey deactivates
the suspension and resumes automatic sequencing of approach waypoints.
APPENDICES
SUSP
Softkey
SUSP
Annunciation
INDEX
Figure 2-30 Suspending Automatic Waypoint Sequencing
68
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
2.2 SUPPLEMENTAL FLIGHT DATA
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Pressing the DFLTS Softkey turns off metric Altimeter display, the Inset Map and wind data display.
In addition to the flight instruments, the PFD also displays various supplemental information, including
temperatures, wind data, and Vertical Navigation (VNV) indications.
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE
EIS
The Outside Air Temperature (OAT) is displayed in degrees Celsius (°C) or Fahrenheit (°F) as selected by the
pilot, in the lower left of the PFD under normal display conditions. Temperature is displayed below the true
airspeed in reversionary mode.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Normal Display
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Reversionary Mode
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 2-31 Outside Air Temperature
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
69
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Changing temperature display units:
1) Select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD using the FMS Knob.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the TEMP field in the Display Units box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight either CELSIUS or FAHRENHEIT and press the ENT Key to confirm the
selection.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
5) To cancel the selection, press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 2-32 Temperature Selection
(AUX-System Setup Page)
70
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
WIND DATA
Option 2
Option 3
No Data
EIS
Option 1
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Wind direction and speed in knots can be displayed relative to the aircraft in a window to the upper left of
the HSI. When the window is selected for display, but wind information is invalid or unavailable, the window
displays NO WIND DATA. Wind data can be displayed in three different ways.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-33 Wind Data
Displaying wind data:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the WIND Softkey to display wind data below the selected heading.
3) Press one of the OPTN Softkeys to change how wind data is displayed:
• OPTN 1: Wind direction arrows with numeric headwind or tailwind and crosswind components
AFCS
• OPTN 2: Wind direction arrow and numeric speed
• OPTN 3: Total wind direction arrow with numeric headwind or tailwind and crosswind speed components
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) To remove the window, press the OFF Softkey.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
71
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
VERTICAL NAVIGATION (VNV) INDICATIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When a VNV flight plan has been activated, VNV indications (VNV Target Altitude, RVSI, VDI) appear on the
PFD in conjunction with the “TOD within 1 minute” message and “Vertical track” voice alert. See the Flight
Management and AFCS sections for details on VNV features. VNV indications are removed from the PFD
according to the criteria listed in the table.
Top of Descent Message
EIS
VNV Target
Altitude
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Required
Vertical Speed
Indicator
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GPS is the
Selected
Navigation
Source
Phase of
Flight
Figure 2-34 Vertical Navigation Indications (PFD)
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
VNV Indication Removed
Criteria
Required Vertical
Vertical
VNV Target
Speed (RVSI)
Deviation (VDI)
Altitude*
Aircraft > 1 min before the next TOD due to flight plan change
X
X
X
VNV cancelled (CNCL VNV Softkey pressed on MFD)
X
X
X
Distance to active waypoint cannot be computed due to
X
X
X
unsupported flight plan leg type (see Flight Management
Section)
Aircraft > 250 feet below active VNV Target Altitude
X
X
X
Current crosstrack or track angle error has exceeded limit
X
X
X
Active altitude-constrained waypoint can not be reached within
X
X
maximum allowed flight path angle and vertical speed
INDEX
Table 2-2 VNV Indication Removal Criteria
72
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
2.3 PFD ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTING FUNCTIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following annunciations and alerting functions are displayed on the PFD. Refer to Appendix A for more
information on alerts and annunciations.
SYSTEM ALERTING
EIS
Messages appear in the Alerts Window in the lower right corner of the PFD when a warning, caution, advisory
alert, or G1000 message advisory occurs. System alert messages are provided for awareness of G1000 system
problems or status and may or may not require pilot action. The Alerts Window allows system alerts to be
displayed simultaneously. The FMS Knob is used to scroll through the alert messages. The Alerts Window
is enabled/disabled by pressing the ALERTS Softkey. If the window is already open when a new message is
generated, pressing the ALERTS Softkey to acknowledge the message turns the softkey gray.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The ALERTS Softkey label changes to display the appropriate annunciation when an alert is issued. The
annunciation flashes and the appropriate aural alert sounds until acknowledged by pressing the softkey. The
softkey then reverts to the ALERTS label, and when pressed again opens the Alerts Window to display a
descriptive message of the alert.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Annunciation Window appears to the right of the Vertical Speed Indicator and displays abbreviated
annunciation text for aircraft alerts. Warnings appear in red, cautions in amber, advisory alerts in white,
and safe operating annunciations in green. New alerts are displayed at the top of the Annunciation Window,
regardless of priority. Once acknowledged, they are sequenced based on priority.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Annunciation
Window
Alerts
Window
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Softkey
Annunciations
APPENDICES
Figure 2-35 G1000 Alerting System
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
73
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
MARKER BEACON ANNUNCIATIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Marker Beacon Annunciations are displayed on the PFD to the left of the Selected Altitude. Outer marker
reception is indicated in blue, middle in amber, and inner in white. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section
for more information on Marker Beacon Annunciations.
Middle Marker
Inner Marker
EIS
Outer Marker
Altimeter
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 2-36 Marker Beacon Annunciations
TRAFFIC ANNUNCIATION
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Traffic is displayed symbolically on the PFD Inset Map, the MFD Navigation Map Page, and various other
MFD page maps. Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section and Appendix for more details about the Traffic
Information Service (TIS) and optional Traffic Advisory Systems (TAS). When a traffic advisory (TA) is detected,
the following automatically occur:
• The PFD Inset Map is enabled and displays traffic.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• A flashing black-on-amber TRAFFIC annunciation appears to the top left of the Attitude Indicator for five
seconds and remains displayed until no TAs are detected in the area.
• A single “TRAFFIC” voice alert is heard, unless an optional Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is installed. Refer
to the applicable TAS documentation for alerts generated by TAS equipment.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
If additional TAs appear, new aural and visual alerts are generated.
APPENDICES
Traffic
Symbols
INDEX
Figure 2-37 Traffic Annunciation and Inset Map with TAS Traffic Displayed
74
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ALTITUDE ALERTING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Altitude Alerting provides the pilot with a visual alert when approaching the Selected Altitude. Whenever the
Selected Altitude is changed, the Altitude Alerter is reset. The Altitude Alerter is independent of the Garmin
AFCS, but alerting tones and visual indications are only provided when the Garmin AFCS is installed. The
following occur when approaching the Selected Altitude:
• Upon passing through 1000 feet of the Selected Altitude an aural tone is heard. The Selected Altitude changes
to black text on a cyan background and flashes for five seconds.
EIS
• When the aircraft passes within 200 feet of the Selected Altitude, the Selected Altitude changes to cyan text
on a black background and flashes for five seconds.
Within 1000 ft
Within 200 ft
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• After reaching the Selected Altitude, if the pilot flies outside the deviation band (±200 feet of the Selected
Altitude) an aural tone is heard. The Selected Altitude changes to amber text on a black background and
flashes for five seconds.
Deviation of ±200 ft
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-38 Altitude Alerting Visual Annunciations
LOW ALTITUDE ANNUNCIATION
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: A Low Altitude Annunciation is available only when SBAS is available. If the optional Terrain-SVS
systems is installed, this annunciation is not applicable unless the installed terrain system is inhibited, has
failed, or is unavailable.
AFCS
When the Final Approach Fix (FAF) is the active waypoint in a GPS SBAS approach using vertical guidance,
a Low Altitude Annunciation may appear if the current aircraft altitude is at least 164 feet below the prescribed
altitude at the FAF. A black-on-amber LOW ALT annunciation appears to the top left of the Altimeter, flashing
for several seconds, then remaining displayed until the condition is resolved.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
LOW ALT
Annunciation
APPENDICES
Altimeter
Figure 2-39 Low Altitude on GPS SBAS Approach
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
75
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
MINIMUM DESCENT ALTITUDE/DECISION HEIGHT ALERTING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
For altitude awareness, a Minimum Descent Altitude (MDA) or Decision Height (DH), based on barometric
altitude, temperature compensated altitude or radar altitude, can be set in the Timer/References Window and is
reset when the power is cycled. When active, the altitude setting is displayed to the bottom left of the Altimeter.
Once the altitude is within the range of the tape, a bug appears at the reference altitude on the Altimeter. The
following visual annunciations occur when approaching the MDA or DH:
EIS
• When the aircraft altitude descends to within 2500 feet of the MDA/DH setting, the BARO MIN, RA MIN, or
COMP MIN box appears with the altitude in cyan text (or magenta for TEMP COMP). The bug appears in
cyan (or magenta for TEMP COMP) on the altitude tape at the corresponding altitude once in range.
• When the aircraft passes through 100 feet of the MDA/DH, the bug and text turn white.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Once the aircraft reaches MDA/DH, the bug and text turn amber and the voice alert, “Minimums. Minimums”,
is heard. When the radar altimeter is selected as the altitude source for the Minimum Descent Altitude
alerting function, the color of the current radar height changes to amber.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Within 2500 feet
Within 100 feet
Altitude Reached
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Barometric
Minimums Bug
Barometric
Minimums Box
Figure 2-40 Barometric MDA/DH Alerting Visual Annunciations
AFCS
Setting the Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height and bug:
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Minimums field.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired altitude source: barometric (BARO), temperature compensated
(TEMP COMP), or radar altimeter (RAD ALT). OFF is selected by default. Press the ENT Key or turn the large
FMS Knob to highlight the next field.
4) Use the small FMS Knob to enter the desired altitude for minimums.
APPENDICES
5) If using temperature compensated (TEMP COMP). use the small FMS Knob to enter destination air temperature.
INDEX
5) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the TMR/REF Softkey.
76
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Figure 2-41 Barometric MDA/DH
EIS
Alerting is inhibited while the aircraft is on the ground and until the aircraft reaches 150 feet above the MDA.
If the aircraft proceeds to climb after having reached the MDA, once it reaches 50 feet above the MDA, alerting
is disabled.
RADAR ALTIMETER
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
If an optional radar altimeter is installed, when the radar height (the aircraft altitude above ground level
detected by the radar altimeter) is between zero and 2500 feet, the current value is displayed in green to the
right of the current aircraft heading (Figure 2-42). Display of radar height becomes more sensitive as the height
above ground decreases (Table 2-3).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Radar Altimeter
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-42 Current Radar Height
Shown to Nearest
0 to 200 feet
5 feet
200 to 1500 feet
10 feet
1500 to 2500 feet
50 feet
AFCS
Radar Height Range
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 2-3 Radar Altimeter Sensitivity
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
77
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the radar altimeter is selected as the altitude source for the minimum descent altitude alerting function
(Figure 2-43), the color of the radar height changes to amber upon reaching at or below the MDA/DH (Figure
2-44).
EIS
Figure 2-43 RAD ALT Setting
(References Window)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 2-44 RA as Altitude Source for MDA/DH
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
A ground line (Figure 2-45) appears on the Altimeter to display the aircraft’s height relative to the ground.
Diagonal lines appear underneath the ground line. If the radar altimeter provides invalid data, the message “RA
FAIL” is displayed in amber in the RA box (Figure 2-46).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Radar
Altimeter
Ground
Line
Radar Altimeter
Minimums Box
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 2-45 Altimeter Displaying the Ground Line (RAD ALT)
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 2-46 Radar Altimeter with Invalid Data
78
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
2.4 ABNORMAL OPERATIONS
ABNORMAL GPS CONDITIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The annunciations listed in the table can appear on the HSI when abnormal GPS conditions occur.
Annunciation
LOI
DR
Description
Loss of Integrity Monitoring–GPS integrity is insufficient for the current
phase of flight
Integrity OK–GPS integrity has been restored to within normal limits
(annunciation displayed for 5 seconds)
Dead Reckoning–System is using projected position rather than GPS position
to compute navigation data and sequence active flight plan waypoints
EIS
INTEG OK
Location
Lower left of
aircraft symbol
Lower left of
aircraft symbol
Upper right of
aircraft symbol
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Table 2-4 Abnormal GPS Conditions Annunciated on HSI
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-47 Example HSI Annunciations
In Dead Reckoning (DR) Mode the CDI is removed from the display when GPS is the selected navigation
source. The following items on the PFD are then shown in amber:
AFCS
• Current Track Bug
• Wind Data (calculated based on GPS information)
• Distances in the Bearing Information Windows
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• GPS bearing pointers
It is important to note that estimated navigation data supplied by the system in DR Mode may become
increasingly unreliable and must not be used as a sole means of navigation. Refer to the Flight Management
Section for more information on DR Mode
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
79
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
UNUSUAL ATTITUDES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the aircraft enters an unusual pitch attitude, red chevrons pointing toward the horizon warn of extreme
pitch. The chevrons are displayed on the Attitude Indicator, starting at 50˚ above and 30˚ below the horizon
line.
Nose High
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Nose Low
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-48 Pitch Attitude Warnings
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If pitch exceeds +30˚/-20˚ or bank exceeds 65˚, some information displayed on the PFD is removed. The
Altimeter and Airspeed, Attitude, Vertical Speed, and Horizontal Situation indicators remain on the display
and the Bearing Information, Alerts, and Annunciation windows can be displayed during such situations. The
following information is removed from the PFD and their softkeys are disabled when the aircraft experiences
unusual attitudes:
• Traffic Annunciations
• PFD Setup Menu
• Vertical Deviation, Glideslope,
and Glidepath Indicators
• AFCS Annunciations
• Windows displayed in the lower
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
• Flight Director Command Bars
right corner of the PFD:
• Altimeter Barometric Setting
• Inset Map
– Timer/References
• Selected Altitude
• Outside Air Temperature (OAT)
– Nearest Airports
• VNV Target Altitude
• Wind Data
– Flight Plan
• DME Window
• Selected Heading Readout
– Messages
• True Airspeed
• Selected Course Readout
– Procedures
• Marker Beacon Indicator
• Transponder Status Box
• Minimum Descent Altitude/
Decision Height Readout
• Metric Altitude Display
INDEX
• System Time
80
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 3 ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM (EIS)
NOTE: Refer to the Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) for limitations.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 Engine Indication System (EIS) for the Diamond DA42NG displays critical engine, electrical, fuel,
and other system parameters on the left side of the Multi Function Display (MFD) during normal operations
(Figure 3-1).
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Display
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 3-1 Multi Function Display (Normal Operations)
EIS information is presented in three displays, accessed using the ENGINE Softkey on the MFD:
AFCS
• Engine Display – Default display, shows all critical engine and fuel indicators
• System Display – Shows graphic and numeric displays of critical engine, electrical indicators, and optional
deice fluid quantity
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Fuel Display – Shows numeric displays of fuel indicators and calculations, and total aircraft time in service
The engine load indicator and tachometer are present on all three displays.
APPENDICES
The EIS instrument types include vertical slider gauges, horizontal slide bar indicators, and digital displays.
Green bands indicate normal ranges of operation; yellow and red bands indicate caution and warning, respectively.
When unsafe operating conditions occur, displays and labels may change color corresponding to the level of the
condition. The pointers (labeled left, L, and right, R) on the horizontal bar indicators appear in white to indicate
normal operation and change to yellow or red to indicate caution or warning conditions.
If sensory data to an instrument becomes invalid or unavailable, a red “X” is shown across the instrument. If a
display value is out of range, dashes ‘---’ are shown instead of a digital display.
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
81
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In Reversionary Display mode, the operating display is configured to present PFD symbology with the EIS
Display (Figure 3-2). When a G1000 display enters Reversionary Mode, each EIS Display (Engine, System,
Fuel) and the softkey functionality remains the same (refer to the System Overview for information about display
Reversionary Mode).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
EIS
Display
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 3-2 Primary Flight Display (Reversionary Mode)
82
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The Engine softkeys provide access to the three EIS Displays (Engine, System, Fuel). To return to the Engine
Display from the System or Fuel Display, press the ENGINE or BACK Softkey.
ENGINE
SYSTEM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ENGINE
BACK
FUEL
Press the BACK Softkey to
return to the top-level softkeys.
ENGINE
SYSTEM
FUEL
DEC FUEL INC FUEL RST FUEL
BACK
EIS
Figure 3-3 EIS Softkeys
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Displays second-level engine softkeys
Displays the EIS System Display
Displays the EIS Fuel Display
Decreases displayed fuel remaining in 1-gal increments
Increases displayed fuel remaining in 1-gal increments
Resets displayed fuel remaining to maximum fuel capacity for aircraft and fuel used to zero
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ENGINE
SYSTEM
FUEL
DEC FUEL
INC FUEL
RST FUEL
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
83
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
3.1 ENGINE DISPLAY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The Fuel Quantity Indicator shows 25 gallons of fuel per side in the main tanks when full; the Fuel
Quantity Indicator does not account for fuel in the auxiliary tanks.
The Engine Display is the default EIS display and can be selected by pressing the ENGINE or BACK Softkey
when another EIS display is currently shown. Beneath the vertical slider gauges are displays for fuel flow and
horizontal bar indicators for oil temperature and pressure, coolant temperature, and fuel temperature and quantity.
EIS
1 Engine Load Indicator
(LOAD %)
2 Tachometer
Displays propeller speeds in revolutions per minute (rpm) on a vertical
slider gauge with digital displays below the gauge
Gauge indicators display propeller speed information provided by the
FADEC. Digital displays flash red to indicate an overspeed warning.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
(RPM)
3 Fuel Flow Indicator
Displays digital displays of current fuel flow for each engine in gallons per
hour (gph)
(FUEL FLOW GPH)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Displays current engine loads as percentages on a vertical slider gauge
with digital displays below the gauge
4 Oil Temperature Indicator
Displays engine oil temperature ranges
(OIL TEMP)
5 Oil Pressure Indicator
Displays engine oil pressure ranges
(OIL PRES)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6 Coolant Temperature Indicator
Displays coolant temperature ranges
(COOLANT TEMP)
7 Fuel Temperature Indicator
(FUEL TEMP)
8 Fuel Quantity Indicator
Displays the quantity in gallons (gal) of fuel in the tanks; pointers labeled
L and R indicate the fuel quantity in each tank
Indicator ranges from 0 to 25 gal per side with tick marks every 5 gal; the
red range indicates 1 gal of unusable fuel
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
(FUEL QTY GAL)
Displays fuel temperature range; pointers labeled L and R indicate the fuel
temperature in each tank
84
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3
4
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5
6
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
7
AFCS
8
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 3-4 Engine Display
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
85
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
3.2 SYSTEM DISPLAY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The System Display is accessed by pressing the SYSTEM Softkey. The instruments presented here, in addition to
the engine load indicator and tachometer, are separated into three categories: Electrical (voltmeter and ammeter),
Engine (gearbox and coolant temperature), and Oil (temperature and pressure). A horizontal bar indicator for
deice fluid is located at the bottom of the display as an option.
Accessing the EIS System Display:
1) Press the ENGINE Softkey.
EIS
2) Press the SYSTEM Softkey.
3) To return to the default Engine Display, press the ENGINE or BACK Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1 Engine Load Indicator
(LOAD %)
2 Tachometer
Displays propeller speeds in revolutions per minute (rpm) on a vertical
slider gauge with digital displays below the gauge
Gauge indicators display propeller speed information provided by the
FADEC. Digital displays flash red to indicate an overspeed warning.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
(RPM)
3 Voltmeter
Displays the primary bus voltage for each side with accompanying digital
displays
(VOLTS)
4 Ammeter
Displays each alternator load in amperes (amps) with accompanying
digital displays
(AMPS)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Displays current engine loads as percentages on a vertical bar gauge with
digital displays below the gauge
5 Gearbox Temperature Indicator
Displays the temperature of each gearbox in degrees Celsius (°C)
(GEARBOX °C)
6 Coolant Temperature Indicator
Displays the coolant temperature of each side in °C
(COOLANT °C)
AFCS
7 Oil Temperature Indicator
Displays oil temperature in °C
(OIL °C)
8 Oil Pressure Indicator
Displays oil pressure in bars
(OIL BAR)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
9 Deice Fluid Indicator
INDEX
APPENDICES
(DEICE FLUID)
(Optional)
Displays the quantity of deice fluid; tick marks are located at quarter
intervals
86
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3
4
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5
6
7
AFCS
8
9
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 3-5 System Display
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
87
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
3.3 FUEL DISPLAY
NOTE: Fuel calculations do not use the aircraft fuel quantity indicators and are calculated from the last time
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
the fuel was reset.
NOTE: If optional auxiliary fuel tanks are installed, the fuel remaining can be adjusted up to a maximum of
76.4 gal; the Fuel Quantity Indicator does not account for fuel in the auxiliary tanks.
EIS
The Fuel Display is accessed by pressing the FUEL Softkey. Besides the engine load indicator and tachometer,
all indications on this display are digital displays, separated into two categories: Fuel and Fuel Calculations. Total
aircraft time in service is at the bottom of the display.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Accessing the EIS Fuel Display:
1) Press the ENGINE Softkey.
2) Press the FUEL Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) To return to the default Engine Display, press the ENGINE or BACK Softkey.
1 Engine Load Indicator
(LOAD %)
2 Tachometer
Displays propeller speeds in revolutions per minute (rpm) on a vertical slider
gauge with digital displays below the gauge
Gauge indicators display propeller speed information provided by the
FADEC. Digital displays flash red to indicate an overspeed warning.
(RPM)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Displays current engine loads as percentages on a vertical bar gauge with
digital displays below the gauge
3 Fuel Quantity Indicator
Displays a digital display of fuel in the tanks, in gallons (gal)
(FUEL GAL)
4 Fuel Flow Indicator
Displays a digital display of current fuel flow for each engine in gallons per
hour (gph)
AFCS
(FUEL GPH)
5 Fuel Temperature Indicator
(FUEL °C)
6 Set Fuel Remaining
Displays current fuel remaining (gal) as set by the pilot and adjusted for fuel
burn since last set
(GAL REM)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Displays a digital display of fuel temperature for each tank in degrees Celsius
(°C)
7 Calculated Fuel Used
Displays quantity of fuel used (gal) based on fuel flow since last reset
(GAL USED)
8 Calculated Endurance
APPENDICES
(ENDUR)
9 Calculated Range
(RANGE NM)
10 Total Time in Service
Displays aircraft range in nautical miles (nm) based on the calculated fuel
remaining
Displays the aircraft’s total flight hours (hrs); activated when the aircraft
becomes airborne
INDEX
(TTL TIME IN SVC)
Displays flight time remaining (HH:MM) based on the calculated fuel
remaining
88
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Fuel calculations are based on the fuel flow totalizer and the displayed fuel remaining (GAL REM), adjusted by
the pilot using the following softkeys:
• DEC FUEL – Decreases totalizer-based fuel remaining in one-gallon increments
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• INC FUEL – Increases totalizer-based fuel remaining in one-gallon increments
• RST FUEL – Resets totalizer-based fuel remaining (GAL REM) relative to the aircraft’s fuel capacity and sets the
displayed fuel used (GAL USED) to zero
Adjusting the fuel totalizer quantity:
EIS
From the Fuel Display, press the DEC FUEL or INC FUEL Softkey to obtain the desired number of gallons
remaining (GAL REM).
Resetting the fuel totalizer:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
From the Fuel Display, press the RST FUEL Softkey. This resets the displayed fuel remaining (GAL REM) to 50
gallons (or 76.4 gallons if optional aux fuel tanks are installed). The fuel used (GAL USED) is reset to zero.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2
3
AFCS
4
5
6
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
7
8
9
APPENDICES
10
INDEX
Figure 3-6 Fuel Display
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
89
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
Blank Page
90
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 4 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4.1 OVERVIEW
The Communication/Navigation/Surveillance (CNS) system includes the Audio Panel, communication radios,
navigation radios, and Mode S transponder. The System Overview Section provides a block diagram description
of the Audio Panel and CNS system interconnection.
CNS operation in Diamond DA42NG aircraft is performed by the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
• Audio Panel
• Multifunction Display (MFD)
• Mode S Transponder
EIS
• Primary Flight Display (PFD)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Integrated Avionics Unit (2)
The MFD/PFD controls are used to tune the communication transceivers and navigation radios.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Audio Panel provides the traditional audio selector functions of microphone and receiver audio selection.
The Audio Panel includes an intercom system (ICS) between the pilot, copilot, and passengers, a marker beacon
receiver, and a COM clearance recorder. Ambient noise from the aircraft radios is reduced by a feature called
Master Avionics Squelch (MASQ). When no audio is detected, MASQ processing further reduces the amount of
background noise from the radios.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Mode S transponder is controlled with softkeys and the FMS Knob located on the Primary Flight Display
(PFD). The Transponder Data Box is located to the left of the System Time Box. The data box displays the active
four-digit code, mode, and reply status (Figure 4-1).
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
91
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
MFD/PFD CONTROLS AND FREQUENCY DISPLAY
2
3
4
6
5
7
8
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
9
10
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
11
12
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 4-1 MFD/PFD Controls, NAV/COM Frequency Tuning Boxes, and ADF/DME Tuning Window (PFD Shown)
92
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
5
COM Frequency Box – Displays COM standby and active frequency fields and volume. The selected COM
transceiver frequency is displayed in green.
6
COM Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the COM transceiver (large knob for MHz; small knob for
kHz). Press to move the tuning box (light blue box) and Frequency Transfer Arrow between COM1 and
COM2.
7
COM Frequency Transfer Key – Transfers the standby and active COM frequencies. Press and hold this key
for two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) automatically into the active frequency
field.
8
COM VOL/SQ Knob – Controls COM audio volume level. Press to turn the COM automatic squelch on
and off. Volume level is shown in the COM frequency field as a percentage.
9
ADF/DME Tuning Window – Displays ADF frequencies, volume setting, and modes, and DME tuning
selection. Display by pressing the ADF/DME Softkey.
10
ENT Key – Validates or confirms an ADF frequency or ADF/DME mode and Auto-tune selection.
11
FMS Knob – Flight Management System Knob, used to enter transponder codes, enter ADF frequencies,
select ADF/DME modes, and Auto-tune entries when ADF/DME Tuning Window or NRST Window is
present. Press the FMS Knob to turn the selection cursor on and off. The large knob moves the cursor in
the window. The small knob selects individual characters for the highlighted cursor location.
12
Transponder Data Box – Indicates the selected transponder code, operating mode, reply, and ident status
for the transponder.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NAV Frequency Box – Displays NAV standby and active frequency fields, volume, and station ID. The
frequency of the NAV radio selected for navigation is displayed in green.
AFCS
4
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NAV Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the NAV receiver (large knob for MHz; small knob for kHz).
Press to move the tuning box (light blue box) and Frequency Transfer Arrow between NAV1 and NAV2.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NAV Frequency Transfer Key – Transfers the standby and active NAV frequencies.
EIS
2
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NAV VOL/ID Knob – Controls NAV audio volume level. Press to turn the Morse code identifier audio on
and off. Volume level is shown in the NAV frequency field as a percentage.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
93
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
14
15
16
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2
13
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1
18
19
20
21
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AUDIO PANEL CONTROLS
22
23
17
24
AFCS
Figure 4-2 Audio Panel Controls
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: When a key is selected, a triangular annunciator above the key is illuminated.
94
1
COM1 MIC – Selects the #1 transmitter for transmitting. COM1 receive is simultaneously selected when
this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #1 COM receiver to be heard. COM2 receive can be
added by pressing the COM2 Key.
2
COM1 – When selected, audio from the #1 COM receiver can be heard.
3
COM2 MIC – Selects the #2 transmitter for transmitting. COM2 receive is simultaneously selected when
this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #2 COM receiver to be heard. COM1 receive can be
added by pressing the COM1 Key.
4
COM2 – When selected, audio from the #2 COM receiver can be heard.
5
COM3 MIC – Not used in DA42NG aircraft.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SPKR – Selects and deselects the cabin speaker. COM and NAV receiver audio can be heard on the
speaker.
11
MKR/MUTE – Selects marker beacon receiver audio. Mutes the currently received marker beacon receiver
audio. Unmutes automatically when new marker beacon audio is received. Also, stops play of recorded
COM audio.
12
HI SENS – Press to increase marker beacon receiver sensitivity. Press again to return to low sensitivity.
13
DME – Turns optional DME audio on or off.
14
NAV1 – When selected, audio from the #1 NAV receiver can be heard.
15
ADF – Turns optional ADF receiver audio on or off.
16
NAV2 – When selected, audio from the #2 NAV receiver can be heard.
17
AUX – Not used in DA42NG aircraft.
18
MAN SQ – Enables manual squelch for the intercom. When the intercom is active, press the PILOT Knob
to illuminate SQ. Turn the PILOT/PASS Knobs to adjust squelch.
19
PLAY – Press once to play the last recorded COM audio. Press again while audio is playing and the
previous block of recorded audio is played. Each subsequent press plays each previously recorded block.
Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key during play of a memory block stops play.
20
PILOT – Selects and deselects the pilot intercom isolation.
21
COPLT – Selects and deselects the copilot intercom isolation.
22
PILOT Knob – Press to switch between volume and squelch control as indicated by illumination of VOL
or SQ. Turn to adjust intercom volume or squelch. The MAN SQ Key must be selected to allow squelch
adjustment.
23
PASS Knob – Turn to adjust Copilot/Passenger intercom volume or squelch. The MAN SQ Key must be
selected to allow squelch adjustment.
24
DISPLAY BACKUP Button – Manually selects Reversionary Mode.
APPENDICES
10
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
PA – Not used in DA42NG aircraft.
AFCS
9
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TEL – When selected, audio from the satellite telephone can be heard (optional).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
COM 1/2 – Split COM Key. Allows simultaneous transmission on COM1 and COM2 by the pilot and copilot.
EIS
7
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
COM3 – Not used in DA42NG aircraft.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
95
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.2 COM OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
COM TRANSCEIVER SELECTION AND ACTIVATION
NOTE: When turning on the G1000 for use, the system remembers the last frequencies used and the active
COM transceiver state prior to shutdown.
EIS
The COM Frequency Box is composed of four fields; the two active frequencies are on the left side and the
two standby frequencies are on the right. The COM transceiver is selected for transmitting by pressing the
COM MIC Keys on the Audio Panel. During reception of audio from the COM radio selected for transmission,
audio from the other COM radio is muted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
An active COM frequency displayed in green indicates that the COM transceiver is selected on the Audio
Panel (COM1 MIC or COM2 MIC Key).
Frequencies in the standby field are displayed in either white or gray. The standby frequency in the tuning
box is white. The other standby frequency is gray.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Active
Fields
Standby
Fields
Top Section of
the Audio Panel
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Tuning Box
AFCS
COM2 Radio is Selected
on the Audio Panel
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-3 Selecting a COM Radio for Transmit
96
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TRANSMIT/RECEIVE INDICATIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
During COM transmission, a white TX appears by the active COM frequency replacing the Frequency
Transfer Arrow. On the Audio Panel, when the active COM is transmitting, the active transceiver COM MIC
Key Annunciator flashes approximately once per second.
During COM signal reception, a white RX appears by the active COM frequency replacing the Frequency
Transfer Arrow. Entertainment audio, if selected, is muted during active COM radio reception. Refer to
Additional Audio Panel Functions later in this section, and details on the Data Link Receiver in the Additional
Features Section.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Transmit and
Receive Indicators
Annunciator
Flashes During
Transmission
Figure 4-4 COM Radio Transmit and Receive Indications
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
COM TRANSCEIVER MANUAL TUNING
The COM frequency controls and frequency boxes are on the right side of the MFD and PFD.
Manually tuning a COM frequency:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Turn the COM Knob to tune the desired frequency in the COM Tuning Box (large knob for MHz; small knob for
kHz).
2) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the active field.
3) Adjust the volume level with the COM VOL/SQ Knob.
4) Press the COM VOL/SQ Knob to turn automatic squelch on and off.
AFCS
Turn the VOL/SQ Knob to adjust
volume. Press the Knob to Turn
Automatic Squelch On or Off
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press the Frequency Transfer
Key to Transfer COM
Frequencies Between Active
and Standby Frequency Boxes
Turn the COM Knob to
Tune the Frequency in
the Tuning Box
APPENDICES
Figure 4-5 COM Frequency Tuning
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
97
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SELECTING THE RADIO TO BE TUNED
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Press the small COM Knob to transfer the frequency tuning box and Frequency Transfer Arrow between the
upper and lower radio frequency fields.
EIS
Press the COM Knob to
Switch the Tuning Box From
One COM Radio to the Other
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-6 Switching COM Tuning Boxes
QUICK-TUNING AND ACTIVATING 121.500 MHZ
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pressing and holding the COM Frequency Transfer Key for two seconds automatically loads the emergency
COM frequency (121.500 MHz) in the active field of the COM radio selected for tuning (the one with the
transfer arrow). In the example shown, pressing the Audio Panel COM2 MIC Key activates the transceiver.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Press for Two Seconds to
Load 121.500 MHz
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 4-7 Quickly Tuning 121.500 MHz
98
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTO-TUNING THE COM FREQUENCY
COM frequencies can be automatically tuned from the following:
• Nearest Airports Window (PFD)
• NRST – Nearest Frequencies Page (ARTCC, FSS, WX)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• WPT – Airport Information Page
• NRST – Nearest Airspaces Page
• NRST – Nearest Airports Page
AUTO-TUNING FROM THE PFD
EIS
COM frequencies for the nearest airports can be automatically tuned from the Nearest Airports Window on
the PFD. When the desired frequency is entered, it becomes a standby frequency. Pressing the Frequency
Transfer Key places this frequency into the COM Active Frequency Field.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Auto-tuning a COM frequency for a nearby airport from the PFD:
1) Press the NRST Softkey on the PFD to open the Nearest Airports Window. A list of 25 nearest airport identifiers
and COM frequencies is displayed.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the list and highlight the desired COM frequency.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the COM Standby Tuning Box.
4) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Press the NRST
Softkey to Open
the Nearest
Airports Window
Figure 4-8 Nearest Airports Window (PFD)
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
99
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AUTO-TUNING FROM THE MFD
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Frequencies can be automatically loaded into the COM Frequency Box from pages in the NRST or WPT
page group by highlighting the frequency and pressing the ENT Key (Figures 4-9, 4-10, and 4-11).
Auto-tuning a COM frequency from the WPT and NRST Pages:
1) From any page that the COM frequency can be auto-tuned, activate the cursor by pressing the FMS Knob or the
appropriate softkey.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired COM frequency (Figure 4-11).
EIS
3) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the standby field of the selected COM radio.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
Press the ENT Key to
Load a Highlighted
Frequency into
the COM Standby
Frequency Box
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Turn the FMS
Knob to Scroll
Through a List
of Frequencies
Figure 4-9 Frequency Auto-Tuning from the MFD
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the page menu.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the menu options.
3) Press the ENT Key to place the cursor on the desired selection.
AFCS
4) Scroll through the frequency selections with the FMS Knob or the ENT Key.
5) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the standby field of the selected COM radio.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
INDEX
Nearest Airports Menu
Nearest Frequencies Menu
Nearest Airspaces Menu
Figure 4-10 Nearest Pages Menus
100
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
On the WPT - Airport Information Page, the cursor can be placed on the frequency field by pressing the
FMS Knob and scrolling through the list. The frequency is transferred to the COM Standby Field with the
ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Press Frequency
Transfer Key to Load
Frequency into COM
Active Frequency Field
Selected Airport
Identifier and
Information
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Runway
Information
Press INFO-x Softkey for
AIRPORT, RUNWAYS,
FREQUENCIES, and
AOPA Data
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-11 WPT – Airport Information Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Press ENT Key to Load
Frequency into COM
Standby Field. Cursor
then Advances to
Next Frequency.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
101
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
COM frequencies can also be auto-tuned from the NRST – Nearest Airspaces, NRST – Nearest Frequencies,
and NRST – Nearest Airports Pages on the MFD in a similar manner using the appropriate softkeys or MENU
Key, the FMS Knob, and the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-12 NRST – Nearest Airspaces, NRST – Nearest Airports, and NRST – Nearest Frequencies Pages
102
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FREQUENCY SPACING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 COM radios can tune either 25-kHz spacing (118.000 to 136.975 MHz) or 8.33-kHz spacing
(118.000 to 136.990 MHz) for 760-channel or 3040-channel configuration. When 8.33-kHz channel spacing
is selected, all of the 25-kHz channel spacing frequencies are also available in the complete 3040-channel list.
COM channel spacing is set on the System Setup Page of the AUX Page Group.
25-kHz Channel
Spacing
EIS
8.33-kHz Channel
Spacing
Figure 4-13 COM Channel Spacing
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Changing COM frequency channel spacing:
1) Select the AUX – System Setup 1 Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Channel Spacing Field in the COM Configuration Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired channel spacing.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the channel spacing selection.
While the COM CONFIG Window is selected, the G1000 softkeys are blank.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Select 8.33-kHz
or 25.0-kHz
COM Frequency
Channel Spacing
AUX - System
Setup Page
INDEX
Figure 4-14 AUX – System Setup Page
190-00962-04 Rev A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
103
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AUTOMATIC SQUELCH
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Automatic Squelch quiets unwanted static noise when no audio signal is received, while still providing good
sensitivity to weak COM signals. To disable Automatic Squelch, press the VOL/SQ Knob. When Automatic
Squelch is disabled, COM audio reception is always on. Continuous static noise is heard over the headsets and
speaker, if selected. Pressing the VOL/SQ Knob again enables Automatic Squelch.
EIS
Press the COM VOL/
SQ Knob to turn off
Automatic Squelch.
Press again to restore
Automatic Squelch.
Figure 4-15 Overriding Automatic Squelch
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
VOLUME
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
COM radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% using the VOL/SQ Knob. Turning the knob
clockwise increases volume, turning the knob counterclockwise decreases volume. When adjusting volume,
the level is displayed in place of the standby frequencies. Volume level indication remains for two seconds after
the change.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
COM Volume
Level Remains for
Two Seconds
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 4-16 COM Volume Level
104
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4.3 NAV OPERATION
NAV RADIO SELECTION AND ACTIVATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The NAV Frequency Box is composed of four fields; two standby fields and two active fields. The active
frequencies are on the right side and the standby frequencies are on the left.
EIS
A NAV radio is selected for navigation by pressing the CDI Softkey located on the PFD. The active NAV
frequency selected for navigation is displayed in green. Pressing the CDI Softkey once selects NAV1 as the
navigation radio. Pressing the CDI Softkey a second time selects NAV2 as the navigation radio. Pressing the
CDI Softkey a third time activates GPS mode. Pressing the CDI Softkey again cycles back to NAV1.
While cycling through the CDI Softkey selections, the NAV Tuning Box and the Frequency Transfer Arrow are
placed in the active NAV Frequency Field and the active NAV frequency color changes to green.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The three navigation modes that can be cycled through are:
• VOR1 (or LOC1) – If NAV1 is selected, a green single line arrow (not shown) labeled either VOR1 or LOC1
is displayed on the HSI and the active NAV1 frequency is displayed in green.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• VOR2 (or LOC2) – If NAV2 is selected, a green double line arrow (shown) labeled either VOR2 or LOC2 is
displayed on the HSI and the active NAV2 frequency is displayed in green.
• GPS – If GPS Mode is selected, a magenta single line arrow (not shown) appears on the HSI and neither NAV
radio is selected. Both active NAV frequencies are then displayed in white.
Active
Fields
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Standby
Fields
Tuning Box
AFCS
The NAV Radio is
Selected by Pressing
the CDI Softkey
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-17 Selecting a NAV Radio for Navigation
APPENDICES
See the Flight Instruments Section for selecting the DME and Bearing Information windows and using VOR
or ADF as the source for the bearing pointer.
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
105
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NAV radios are selected for listening by pressing the corresponding keys on the Audio Panel. Pressing the
NAV1, NAV2, ADF, or DME Key selects and deselects the navigation radio source. Selected audio can be heard over
the headset and the speaker (if selected). All radios can be selected individually or simultaneously.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-18 Selecting a NAV Radio Receiver
NAV RECEIVER MANUAL TUNING
The NAV frequency controls and frequency boxes are on the left side of the MFD and PFD.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Manually tuning a NAV frequency:
1) Turn the NAV Knob to tune the desired frequency in the NAV Tuning Box.
2) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
3) Adjust the volume level with the NAV VOL/ID Knob.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Press the NAV VOL/ID Knob to turn the Morse code identifier audio on and off.
AFCS
Turn VOL/ID Knob to adjust
volume. Press Knob to Turn
Morse Code On or Off.
Press the Frequency Transfer Key to
Transfer NAV Frequencies Between
Active and Standby Frequency Fields
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Turn the NAV Knob to
Tune the Frequency in
the Tuning Box
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 4-19 NAV Frequency Tuning
106
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SELECTING THE RADIO TO BE TUNED
Press the small NAV Knob to transfer the frequency tuning box and Frequency Transfer Arrow between the
upper and lower radio frequency fields.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Press the NAV Knob to
Switch the Tuning Box From
One NAV Radio to the Other
EIS
Figure 4-20 Switching NAV Tuning Boxes
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
VOR/LOC ID
When the Morse code Identifier audio is on for a NAV radio, a white ID appears to the left of the active
NAV frequency.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Morse Code Identifier
for the GHM VOR is On
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
In the example shown, in order to listen to either station identifier, press the NAV1 or NAV2 Key on the
Audio Panel. Pressing the VOL/ID Knob turns off the Morse code audio only in the radio with the NAV
Tuning Box. To turn off both NAV IDs, transfer the NAV Tuning Box between NAV1 and NAV2 with the small
NAV Knob and press the VOL/ID Knob again to turn the Morse code off in the other radio.
Station
Identifier
Figure 4-21 NAV Radio ID Indication
AFCS
VOLUME
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NAV Radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% using the VOL/ID Knob. Turning the knob
clockwise increases volume, counterclockwise decreases volume.
When adjusting, the level is displayed in place of the standby frequencies. Volume level indication remains
for two seconds after the change.
APPENDICES
NAV Volume
Level Remains
for Two Seconds
Figure 4-22 NAV Volume Levels
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
107
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTO-TUNING A NAV FREQUENCY FROM THE MFD
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
• WPT – VOR Information
• NRST – Nearest Frequencies (FSS, WX)
• NRST – Nearest Airports
• NRST – Nearest Airspaces
NAV frequencies can be selected and loaded from the following MFD pages:
• WPT – Airport Information
• NRST – Nearest VOR
EIS
The MFD provides auto-tuning of NAV frequencies from waypoint and nearest pages. During enroute
navigation, the NAV frequency is entered automatically into the NAV standby frequency field. During approach
activation the NAV frequency is entered automatically into the NAV active frequency field.
Frequencies can be automatically loaded into the NAV Frequency Box from pages in the NRST or WPT page
group by highlighting the frequency and pressing the ENT Key (Figures 4-23, 4-24, and 4-25).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Auto-tuning a NAV frequency from the WPT and NRST Pages:
1) From any page that the NAV frequency can be auto-tuned, activate the cursor by pressing the FMS Knob or the
appropriate softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired NAV identifier or NAV frequency.
3) On the Nearest VOR and Nearest Airports pages, press the FREQ Softkey to place the cursor on the NAV
frequency (Figure 4-25).
4) Press the ENT Key to load the NAV frequency into the standby field of the selected NAV radio.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
AFCS
Turn the FMS
Knob to Scroll
Through a List
of Frequencies
Press the ENT
Key to Load
a Highlighted
Frequency into
the NAV Standby
Frequency Box
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-23 NAV Frequency Auto-Tuning from the MFD
108
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Or:
1) When on the NRST pages, press the MENU Key to display the page menu.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the menu options.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key to place the cursor in the desired window.
4) Scroll through the frequency selections with the FMS Knob or the ENT Key.
5) Press the ENT Key to load the NAV frequency into the standby field of the selected NAV radio.
6) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Nearest VOR Menu
Nearest Frequencies Menu
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Nearest Airports Menu
Nearest Airspaces Menu
Figure 4-24 Nearest Pages Menus
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
109
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In the example shown, the VOR list is selected with the VOR Softkey or from the page menu. The FMS Knob
or ENT Key is used to scroll through the list. The cursor is placed on the frequency with the FREQ Softkey and
loaded into the NAV Tuning Box with the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Press the ENT
Key to Load
the Frequency
into the NAV
Standby Field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Press the VOR
Softkey to Place
the Cursor on the
VOR Identifier
Press the FREQ
Softkey to Place
the Cursor on the
VOR Frequency
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 4-25 Loading the NAV Frequency from the NRST – Nearest VOR Page
110
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
While enroute, NAV frequencies can also be auto-tuned from the NRST – Nearest Airports,
WPT – Airport Information, WPT – VOR Information, and NRST – Nearest Frequencies Pages on the MFD in
a similar manner using the appropriate softkeys or MENU Key, the FMS Knob, and the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 4-26 NRST – Nearest Frequencies, WPT – VOR Information, WPT – Airport Information, and
NRST – Nearest Airports Pages
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
111
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AUTO-TUNING NAV FREQUENCIES ON APPROACH ACTIVATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The primary NAV frequency is auto-tuned upon loading a VOR or ILS/Localizer approach.
NOTE: When an ILS/LOC approach has been activated while navigating by GPS, the system automatically
switches to LOC as the final approach course is intercepted (within 15 nm of the FAF). See the Flight
Management Section for details.
NAV frequencies are automatically loaded into the NAV Frequency Box on approach activation.
EIS
When loading or activating a VOR or ILS/LOC approach, the approach frequency is automatically transferred
to a NAV frequency field as follows:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• If the current CDI navigation source is GPS, the approach frequency is transferred to the NAV1 active
frequency field. The frequency that was previously in the NAV1 active frequency field is transferred to
standby.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• If the current CDI navigation source is GPS, and if the approach frequency is already loaded into the NAV1
standby frequency field, the standby frequency is transferred to active.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• If the current CDI navigation source is NAV1 or NAV2, the approach frequency is transferred to the standby
frequency fields of the selected CDI NAV radio.
112
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MARKER BEACON RECEIVER
NOTE: The marker beacon indicators operate independently of marker beacon audio and cannot be turned
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
off.
The marker beacon receiver is used as part of the ILS. The marker beacon receiver is always on and detects
any marker beacon signals within the reception range of the aircraft.
The receiver detects the three marker tones – outer, middle, and inner – and provides the marker beacon
annunciations located to the left of the Altimeter on the PFD.
Middle Marker
Indication
Inner Marker
Indication
EIS
Outer Marker
Indication
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 4-27 Marker Beacon Annunciations on the PFD
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-28 Marker Beacon Keys
AFCS
The Audio Panel provides three different states of marker beacon operation; On, Muted, and Deselected.
Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key selects and deselects marker beacon audio. The key annunciator indicates when
marker beacon audio is selected. Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key mutes the audio but does not affect the marker
annunciations (Figure 4-27).
Turning Marker Beacon Audio On
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
With the MKR/MUTE annunciator off, press the MKR/MUTE Key to enable marker beacon audio.
Muting Marker Beacon Audio
APPENDICES
During marker beacon audio reception, press the MKR/MUTE Key to mute the audio. The MKR/MUTE
annunciator remains lit, but the current marker tone is silenced. Audio muting deactivates automatically and
marker beacon audio is heard when the next marker beacon signal is received.
Deselecting Marker Beacon Audio
To deselect marker beacon audio, press the MKR/MUTE Key twice during marker beacon reception (once to
mute, once more to deselect) or once if a marker beacon signal is not detected.
INDEX
Pressing the HI SENS Key switches between high and low marker beacon receiver sensitivity. The HI SENS
function (annunciator illuminated) is used to provide an earlier indication when nearing a marker during an
approach. The LO SENS function (annunciator extinguished) results in a narrower marker dwell while over a
station.
190-00962-04 Rev A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
113
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADF/DME TUNING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
See the Flight Instruments Section for displaying the DME and bearing information windows (ADF) and
using the ADF as the source for the bearing pointer.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
The UHF DME frequency is tuned by pairing with a VHF NAV frequency. DME frequency pairing is automatic
and only the VHF NAV frequency is shown.
NOTE: When another auxiliary window is turned on, the ADF/DME Tuning Window is replaced on the PFD.
The G1000 system tunes the ADF receiver (optional) and DME transceiver (optional). The ADF is tuned by
entering the frequency in the ADF standby frequency field of the ADF/DME Tuning Window. (The softkey may
be labeled ADF/DME, ADF, or DME, depending on installed equipment.)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The following ADF/DME information is displayed in the ADF/DME Tuning Window:
• Active and standby ADF frequencies
• ADF receiver mode
• ADF receiver volume
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• DME tuning mode (DME transceiver pairing)
When the ADF/DME Tuning Window is displayed, the selection cursor is placed over the standby ADF
frequency field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Turning the large FMS Knob moves the selection cursor through the various fields (standby ADF frequency,
ADF receiver mode, ADF radio volume, and DME tuning mode). Pressing the FMS Knob activates/deactivates
the selection cursor in the ADF/DME Tuning Window. The ADF frequency is entered using the FMS Knob and
the ENT Key.
AFCS
Active ADF Frequency
Standby ADF Frequency
ADF
Mode
ADF
Volume
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
DME
Tuning
Mode
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 4-29 ADF/DME Tuning Window
114
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADF TUNING
ADF frequencies in the 190.0-kHz to 1799.5-kHz range are entered in the standby ADF frequency field of the
ADF/DME Tuning Window. The G1000 System does not tune the ADF emergency frequency, 2182.0‑kHz.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Tuning an ADF frequency:
1) Press the ADF/DME Softkey to display the ADF/DME Tuning Window.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the selection cursor over the standby ADF frequency field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to begin data entry and change each digit.
EIS
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next digit position.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete data entry for the standby frequency.
Turn the Small
FMS Knob to
Enter Data in
the Standby ADF
Frequency Field
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Press the
ENT Key to
Complete ADF
Frequency Entry
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Turn the Large
FMS Knob
to Move the
Cursor to the
Next Character
Figure 4-30 Entering ADF Standby Frequencies
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the CLR Key before completing frequency entry cancels the frequency change and reverts back to
the previously entered frequency.
Pressing the CLR Key when the cursor is flashing, clears the frequency and replaces the standby field with
0000.0.
AFCS
Transferring the active and standby ADF frequencies:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the selection cursor over the standby ADF frequency field.
2) Press the ENT Key to complete the frequency transfer.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press the ENT
Key to Transfer
the ADF
Frequencies
APPENDICES
Figure 4-31 Transferring ADF Frequencies
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
115
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SELECTING ADF RECEIVER MODE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
• ANT (Antenna) – The ADF bearing pointer parks on the HSI at 90 degrees. Best mode for listening to NDB
audio.
The following modes can be selected: (In all modes NDB audio can be heard by selecting the ADF Key on
the Audio Panel.)
• ADF (Automatic Direction Finder) – The ADF pointer points to the relative bearing of the NDB station.
EIS
• ADF/BFO (ADF/Beat Frequency Oscillator) – The ADF pointer points to the relative bearing of the NDB
station and an audible tone confirms signal reception. This mode allows identification of the interrupted
carrier beacon stations used in various parts of the world.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• ANT/BFO (Antenna/Beat Frequency Oscillator) – The ADF bearing pointer parks on the HSI at 90 degrees
while an audible tone is provided when a signal is received. This mode also allows identification of the
interrupted carrier beacon stations and confirms signal reception.
Selecting an ADF receiver mode:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the selection cursor over the ADF mode field.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired ADF receiver mode.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Turn the Small
FMS Knob
to Select the
Mode
Figure 4-32 Selecting ADF Receiver Mode
AFCS
ADF receiver volume level can be adjusted in the tuning window from 0 to 100%. The default volume level
is set to 50%. The ADF volume level is the same for both Audio Panels.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Adjusting ADF receiver volume:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the selection cursor over the ADF volume field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to adjust volume as desired.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Turn the Small
FMS Knob
to Select the
Volume
Figure 4-33 Adjusting ADF Receiver Volume
116
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DME TUNING
NOTE: When turning on the G1000 for use, the system remembers the last frequency used for DME tuning
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
and the NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD state prior to shutdown.
The DME transceiver is tuned by selecting NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD in the ADF/DME Tuning Window.
EIS
DME
Modes
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-34 ADF/DME Tuning Window, DME Modes
The following DME transceiver pairing can be selected:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• NAV1 – Pairs the DME frequency from the selected NAV1 frequency.
• NAV2 – Pairs the DME frequency from the selected NAV2 frequency.
• HOLD – When in the HOLD position, the DME frequency remains paired with the last selected NAV
frequency.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selecting DME transceiver pairing:
1) Press the ADF/DME Softkey to display the ADF/DME Tuning Window.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the DME tuning mode.
3) Press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
AFCS
Pressing the CLR Key or FMS Knob while in the process of DME pairing cancels the data entry and reverts
back to the previously selected DME tuning state. Pressing the FMS Knob activates/deactivates the cursor in
the ADF/DME Tuning Window.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
117
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.4 GTX 33 MODE S TRANSPONDER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The GTX 33 Mode S Transponder provides Mode A, Mode C, and Mode S interrogation and reply capabilities.
Selective addressing or Mode Select (Mode S) capability includes the following features:
• Level-2 reply data link capability (used to exchange information between aircraft and ATC facilities)
• Surveillance identifier capability
• Flight ID (Flight Identification) reporting – The Mode S Transponder reports aircraft identification as either the
aircraft registration or a unique Flight ID.
EIS
• Altitude reporting
• Airborne status determination
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Transponder capability reporting
• Mode S Elementary Surveillance (ELS) requirements
• Mode S Enhanced Surveillance (EHS) requirements
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Acquisition squitter – Acquisition squitter, or short squitter, is the transponder 24-bit identification address.
The transmission is sent periodically, regardless of the presence of interrogations. The purpose of acquisition
squitter is to enable Mode S ground stations and aircraft equipped with a Traffic Avoidance System (TAS) to
recognize the presence of Mode S-equipped aircraft for selective interrogation.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Extended squitter (optional) – If equipped with an extended squitter, the extended squitter is transmitted
periodically and contains information such as altitude (barometric and GPS), GPS position, and aircraft
identification. The purpose of extended squitter is to provide aircraft position and identification to ADS-B
Ground-Based Transceivers (GBTs) and other aircraft.
The Hazard Avoidance Section provides more details on traffic avoidance systems.
TRANSPONDER CONTROLS
AFCS
Transponder function is displayed on three levels of softkeys on the PFD: Top-level, Mode Selection, and
Code Selection. When the top-level XPDR Softkey is pressed, the Mode Selection softkeys appear: STBY, ON,
ALT, VFR, CODE, IDENT, ADS-B TX, BACK.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When the CODE Softkey is pressed, the number softkeys appear: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, IDENT, BKSP,
BACK. The digits 8 and 9 are not used for code entry. Pressing the numbered softkeys in sequence enters the
transponder code. If an error is made, the code selection cursor can be moved back to the left one digit with
each press of the BKSP Softkey.
APPENDICES
Pressing the BACK Softkey during code selection reverts to the Mode Selection Softkeys. Pressing the BACK
Softkey during mode selection reverts to the top-level softkeys.
The code can also be entered with the FMS Knob on the PFD. Code entry must be completed with either the
softkeys or the FMS Knob, but not a combination of both.
INDEX
Pressing the IDENT Softkey while in Mode or Code Selection initiates the ident function and reverts to the
top-level softkeys.
After 45 seconds of transponder softkey inactivity, the system reverts back to the top-level softkeys.
118
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
CODE
IDENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
IDENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
XPDR
(Optional)
STBY
ON
ALT
VFR
ADS-B TX
BACK
ALERTS
Pressing the BACK Softkey
returns to the top-level softkeys.
EIS
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
IDENT
BKSP
BACK
ALERTS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Pressing the BACK Softkey returns to the mode selection softkeys.
Figure 4-35 Transponder Softkeys (PFD)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TRANSPONDER MODE SELECTION
Mode selection can be automatic (Altitude Modes) or manual (Standby, ON, and Altitude Modes). The STBY,
ON, and ALT Softkeys can be accessed by pressing the XPDR Softkey.
Selecting a transponder mode:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the XPDR Softkey to display the Transponder Mode Selection Softkeys.
2) Press the desired softkey to activate the transponder mode.
STANDBY MODE (MANUAL)
AFCS
NOTE: In Standby Mode, the IDENT function is inoperative.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Standby Mode can be selected at any time by pressing the STBY Softkey. In Standby, the transponder
is powered and new codes can be entered, but no replies or squitters are transmitted.. When Standby is
selected, a white STBY indication and transponder code appear in the mode field of the Transponder Data
Box.
APPENDICES
STBY Mode (White
Code Number and
Mode)
Figure 4-36 Standby Mode
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
119
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
MANUAL ON MODE (MANUAL)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ON Mode can be selected at any time by pressing the ON Softkey. ON Mode generates Mode A and Mode S
replies as well as transmission of acquisition and extended squitters, including ADS-B out (if equipped).
Mode C altitude reporting is inhibited. In ON Mode, a green ON indication and transponder code appear in
the mode field of the Transponder Data Box.
EIS
ON Mode
(No Altitude
Reporting)
Figure 4-37 ON Mode
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ALTITUDE MODE (AUTOMATIC OR MANUAL)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The white Altitude Reporting Mode is normally selected automatically when the aircraft is on the ground.
White Altitude Mode may also be selected manually by pressing the ALT Softkey while on the ground.
White Altitude Mode generates Mode S replies to discrete interrogations as well as transmission of acquisition
squitters. If equipped with an optional ADS-B out capable transponder, White Altitude Reporting Mode will
also generate extended squitters. Mode A, Mode C, and Mode S all-call replies are inhibited.
If Altitude Mode is selected while on the ground, a white ALT indication and transponder code appear in
the mode field of the Transponder Data Box.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ALT Mode
(Mode C Altitude
Reporting)
AFCS
Figure 4-38 Altitude Mode
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The green Altitude Mode is automatically selected when the aircraft becomes airborne. Green Altitude
Mode may also be selected manually by pressing the ALT Softkey while airborne. Green Altitude Mode
generates Mode A, Mode C, and Mode S replies as well as transmissions of acquisition squitters. If equipped
with an optional ADS-B out capable transponder, Green Altitude Reporting Mode will also generate extended
squitters.
APPENDICES
If Altitude Mode is selected while airborne, a green ALT indication and transponder code appear in the
mode field of the Transponder Data Box, and all transponder replies requesting altitude information are
provided with pressure altitude information.
ALT Mode
(Mode C Altitude
Reporting)
INDEX
Figure 4-39 Altitude Mode
120
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
REPLY STATUS
When the transponder sends replies to interrogations, a white R indication appears momentarily in the
reply status field of the Transponder Data Box.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Reply to
Interrogation
Figure 4-40 Reply Indication
EIS
ENTERING A TRANSPONDER CODE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Entering a transponder code with softkeys:
1) Press the XPDR Softkey to display the Transponder Mode Selection Softkeys.
2) Press the CODE Softkey to display the Transponder Code Selection Softkeys, for digit entry.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the digit softkeys to enter the code in the code field. When entering the code, the next softkey in sequence
must be pressed within 10 seconds, or the entry is cancelled and restored to the previous code. Pressing the
BKSP Softkey moves the code selection cursor to the previous digit. Five seconds after the fourth digit has been
entered, the transponder code becomes active.
Entering
a Code
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-41 Entering a Code
AFCS
Entering a transponder code with the PFD FMS Knob:
1) Press the XPDR and the CODE Softkeys as in the previous procedure to enable code entry.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob on the PFD to enter the first two code digits.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next code field.
4) Enter the last two code digits with the small FMS Knob.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete code digit entry.
APPENDICES
Pressing the CLR Key or small FMS Knob before code entry is complete cancels code entry and restores the
previous code. Waiting for 10 seconds after code entry is finished activates the code automatically.
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
121
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Press the
ENT Key to
Complete
Code Entry
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Turn the Small
FMS Knob to
Enter Two Code
Digits at a Time
Turn the Large
FMS Knob
to Move the
Cursor to the
Next Code Field
Figure 4-42 Entering a Code with the FMS Knob
EIS
VFR CODE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The VFR code can be entered either manually or by pressing the XPDR Softkey, then the VFR Softkey.
When the VFR Softkey is pressed, the pre-programmed VFR code is automatically displayed in the code field
of the Transponder Data Box. Pressing the VFR Softkey again restores the previous identification code.
The pre-programmed VFR Code is set at the factory to 1200. If a VFR code change is required, contact a
Garmin-authorized service center for configuration.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
VFR Code
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-43 VFR Code
IDENT FUNCTION
NOTE: In Standby Mode, the IDENT Softkey is inoperative.
AFCS
Pressing the IDENT Softkey sends a distinct identity indication to Air Traffic Control (ATC). The indication
distinguishes the identing transponder from all the others on the air traffic controller’s screen. The IDENT
Softkey appears on all levels of transponder softkeys. When the IDENT Softkey is pressed, a green IDNT
indication is displayed in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box for a duration of 18 seconds.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
After the IDENT Softkey is pressed while in Mode or Code Selection, the system reverts to the top-level
softkeys.
IDNT
Indication
APPENDICES
Press the
IDENT Softkey
to Initiate the
ID Function
INDEX
Figure 4-44 IDENT Softkey and Indication
122
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADS-B TX
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If equipped with a GTX 33 with an extended squitter, the transmission of extended squitters containing
ADS-B out information is enabled/disabled by pressing the ADS-B TX Softkey. ADS-B transimssion defaults to
enabled at each power cycle. Do not disable ADS-B transmission unless requested by ATC.
Even with the ADS-B TX enabled, transmission of extended squitters containing ADS-B out information will
vary based on the current mode of the transponder.
ADS-B Transmission
Enabled
EIS
Figure 4-45 ADS-B TX Enabled
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
123
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
FLIGHT ID REPORTING
NOTE: If the Flight ID is required but the system is not configured for it, contact a Garmin-authorized service
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
center for configuration.
When the Flight ID must be entered before flight operation, the identifier is placed in the Timer/References
Window on the PFD. The Flight ID is not to exceed seven characters. No space is needed when entering
Flight ID. When a Flight ID contains a space, the system automatically removes it upon completion of Flight
ID entry.
EIS
Entering a Flight ID:
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey to display the Timer/References Window.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the selection cursor, if not already activated.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll down to the Flight ID.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the desired Flight ID.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Press the ENT Key to complete Flight ID entry.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If an error is made during Flight ID entry, pressing the CLR Key returns to the original Flight ID entry. While
entering a Flight ID, turning the FMS Knob counterclockwise moves the cursor back one space for each detent
of rotation. If an incorrect Flight ID is discovered after the unit begins operation, reenter the correct Flight ID
using the same procedure.
Flight ID
PFD Entry
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-46 Timer/References Window, Entering Flight ID
124
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4.5 ADDITIONAL AUDIO PANEL FUNCTIONS
POWER-UP
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Audio Panel performs a self-test during power-up. During the self-test all Audio Panel annunciator lights
illuminate for approximately two seconds. Once the self-test is completed, most of the settings are restored to
those in use before the unit was last turned off.
MONO/STEREO HEADSETS
EIS
Stereo headsets are recommended for use in this aircraft.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Using a monaural headset in a stereo jack shorts the right headset channel output to ground. While this does
not damage the Audio Panel, a person listening on a monaural headset hears only the left channel in both ears.
If a monaural headset is used at one of the passenger positions, any other passenger using a stereo headset hears
audio in the left ear only.
SPEAKER
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
All of the radios can be heard over the cabin speaker. Pressing the SPKR Key selects and deselects the cabin
speaker. Speaker audio is muted when the PTT is pressed. Certain aural alerts and warnings (autopilot, traffic,
altitude) are always heard on the speaker, even when the speaker is not selected.
The speaker volume is adjustable within a nominal range. Contact a Garmin-authorized service center for
volume adjustment.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-47 Passenger Address and Speaker Keys
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
125
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
INTERCOM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Audio Panel includes a four-position intercom system (ICS) for the pilot, copilot and up to two passengers.
The intercom provides Pilot and Copilot isolation from the passengers and aircraft radios.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Figure 4-48 Intercom Controls
PILOT KEY
Annunciator
COPLT KEY
Annunciator
Pilot Hears
Copilot Hears
Passenger Hears
OFF
OFF
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot, copilot,
passengers
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot, copilot,
passengers
Selected radios, aural alerts,
pilot, copilot, passengers
ON
OFF
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot
Copilot, passengers
Copilot, passengers
OFF
ON
Selected radios,
aural alerts, pilot;
passengers
Copilot
Selected radios, aural alerts,
pilot, passengers
ON
ON
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot, copilot
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot, copilot
Passengers
AFCS
Table 4-1 ICS Isolation Modes
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pilot isolation is selected when the PILOT Annunciator is illuminated. During Pilot isolation, the pilot can
hear the selected radios and aural alerts and warnings. The copilot and passengers can communicate with each
other. The copilot is isolated from aural alerts and warnings.
Copilot isolation is selected when the COPLT Annunciator is illuminated. The copilot is isolated from the
selected radios, aural alerts, and warnings, and everyone else. The pilot and passengers can hear the selected
radios, aural alerts, and communicate with each other.
APPENDICES
When both the PILOT and COPLT Annunciators are illuminated, the pilot and copilot can hear the selected
radios, aural alerts, and communicate with each other. The passengers are isolated from the pilot and copilot
but can communicate with each other.
INDEX
When both the PILOT and COPLT Annunciators are extinguished, everyone hears the selected radios, aural
alerts, and is able to communicate with everyone else.
126
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
INTERCOM VOLUME AND SQUELCH
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The PILOT/PASS Knob controls volume or manual squelch adjustment for the pilot and copilot/passenger.
The small knob controls the pilot volume and squelch. The large knob controls the copilot/passenger volume
and squelch. The VOL and SQ annunciations at the bottom of the unit indicate which function the knob is
controlling. Pressing the PILOT/PASS Knob switches between volume and squelch control as indicated by
the VOL or SQ annunciation being illuminated.
The MAN SQ Key allows either automatic or manual control of the squelch setting.
EIS
• When the MAN SQ Annunciator is extinguished (Automatic Squelch is on), the PILOT/PASS Knob
controls only the volume (pressing the PILOT/PASS Knob has no effect on the VOL/SQ selection).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• When the MAN SQ Annunciator is illuminated (Manual Squelch), the PILOT/PASS Knob controls
either volume or squelch (selected by pressing the PILOT/PASS Knob and indicated by the VOL or SQ
annunciation).
Manual Squelch Annunciator;
Off for Automatic Squelch, On
for Manual Squelch
Automatic/Manual Squelch
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pilot Volume or Manual
Squelch. Press to switch
between VOL and SQ. Turn
to adjust Squelch when SQ
Annunciation is lit, Volume
when VOL Annunciation is lit.
Copilot/Passenger
Volume or
Manual Squelch
Volume Annunciation
AFCS
Squelch Annunciation
Figure 4-49 Volume/Squelch Control
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
127
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
CLEARANCE RECORDER AND PLAYER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Audio Panel contains a digital clearance recorder that records up to 2.5 minutes of the selected COM
radio signal. Recorded COM audio is stored in separate memory blocks. Once 2.5 minutes of recording time
have been reached, the recorder begins recording over the stored memory blocks, starting from the oldest
block.
The PLAY Key controls the play function. Pressing the PLAY Key once plays the latest recorded memory
block. The PLAY Annunciator flashes to indicate when play is in progress. The PLAY Annunciator turns off
after the present memory block has finished playing.
EIS
Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key during play of a memory block stops play. If a COM input signal is detected
during play of a recorded memory block, play is halted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Pressing the PLAY Key while audio is playing begins playing the previously recorded memory block. Each
subsequent press of the PLAY Key selects the previously recorded memory block.
Powering off the unit automatically clears all recorded blocks.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
MKR/MUTE
Key Stops Play
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
PLAY Key
Controls the
Play Function
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 4-50 Marker Mute and Play Keys
128
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SPLIT COM
NOTE: Split COM performance is affected by the distance between the COM antennas and the separation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
of the tuned frequencies. If the selected COM1 and COM2 frequencies are too close together, interference
may be heard during transmission on the other radio.
During Split COM operation, both the pilot and the copilot can transmit simultaneously over separate radios.
The pilot can still monitor NAV1, NAV2, ADF, DME, and MKR Audio as selected, but the copilot is only able
to monitor COM2.
EIS
Pressing the COM 1/2 Key selects Split COM operation. The COM 1/2 Annunciator is illuminated indicating
Split COM operation. COM1 and COM2 frequencies are displayed in green indicating that both transceivers
are active. Split COM operation is cancelled by pressing the COM 1/2 Key again, at which time the annunciator
is extinguished.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When Split COM operation is selected, COM1 is used by the pilot and COM2 is used by the copilot. The
COM1 MIC Annunciator flashes when the pilot’s microphone PTT is pressed. The COM2 MIC Annunciator
flashes when the copilot’s microphone PTT is pressed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
COM1 Radio is Used
by the Pilot
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
COM2 Radio is Used
by the Copilot
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-51 Split COM Operation
ENTERTAINMENT INPUTS
APPENDICES
XM RADIO ENTERTAINMENT
XM Radio audio from the Data Link Receiver may be heard by the pilot and passengers simultaneously
(optional: requires subscription to XM Radio Service). Refer to the Additional Features Section for more
details on the Data Link Receiver.
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
129
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.6 AUDIO PANEL PREFLIGHT PROCEDURE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: If the pilot and/or copilot are using headsets that have a high/low switch or volume control knob,
verify that the switch is in the high position and the volume control on the headsets are at maximum volume
setting. On single‑pilot flights, verify that all other headsets are not connected to avoid excess noise in the
audio system.
NOTE: When the MAN SQ Key is pressed, the ICS squelch can be set manually by the pilot and copilot. If
EIS
manual squelch is set to full open (SQ annunciated and the knobs turned counterclockwise) background
noise is heard in the ICS system as well as during COM transmissions.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
After powering up the G1000 System, the following steps aid in maximizing the use of the Audio Panel as well
as preventing pilot and copilot induced issues. These preflight procedures should be performed each time a pilot
boards the aircraft to insure awareness of all audio levels in the Audio Panel and radios.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Automatic/Manual
Squelch
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pilot and
Copilot ICS
Isolation Keys
Pilot Volume
or Manual
Squelch
Copilot/Passenger
Volume or
Manual Squelch
Squelch
Annunciation
AFCS
Volume
Annunciation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-52 Audio Panel Controls
Setting the Audio Panel during preflight:
1) Verify that the PILOT and COPLT Annunciators are extinguished.
APPENDICES
2) Verify manual squelch is set to full open.
3) Turn the PILOT/PASS Knobs clockwise two full turns. This sets the intercom level to max volume (least amount
of attenuation).
4) Adjust radio volume levels (COM, NAV) to a suitable level.
5) Adjust the PILOT/PASS Knob volume to the desired intercom level.
INDEX
6) Reset squelch to automatic, or adjust to the appropriate level manually.
Once this procedure has been completed, the pilot and copilot can change settings, keeping in mind the notes
above.
130
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4.7 ABNORMAL OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Abnormal operation of the G1000 includes equipment failures of the G1000 components and failure of
associated equipment, including switches and external devices.
STUCK MICROPHONE
If the push-to-talk (PTT) Key becomes stuck, the COM transmitter stops transmitting after 35 seconds of
continuous operation. An alert appears on the PFD to advise the pilot of a stuck microphone.
EIS
The COM1 MIC or COM2 MIC Key Annunciator on the Audio Panel flashes as long as the PTT Key remains
stuck.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-53 Stuck Microphone Alert
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
COM TUNING FAILURE
In case of a COM system tuning failure, the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) is automatically tuned in
the radio in which the tuning failure occurred. Depending on the failure mode, a red X may appear on the
frequency display.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Emergency Channel
Loaded Automatically
Figure 4-54 COM Tuning Failure
AFCS
AUDIO PANEL FAIL-SAFE OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
If there is a failure of the Audio Panel, a fail-safe circuit connects the pilot’s headset and microphone directly
to the COM1 transceiver. Audio is not available on the speaker.
REVERSIONARY MODE
APPENDICES
The red DISPLAY BACKUP Button selects the Reversionary Mode. See the System Overview Section for
more information on Reversionary Mode.
INDEX
Figure 4-55 Display Backup Button
190-00962-04 Rev A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
131
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Blank Page
132
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 5 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5.1 INTRODUCTION
The G1000 is an integrated flight, engine, communication, navigation and surveillance system. This section of
the Pilot’s Guide explains flight management using the G1000.
EIS
The most prominent part of the G1000 are the two full color displays: a Primary Flight Display (PFD) and a
Multi Function Display (MFD). The information to successfully navigate the aircraft using the GPS sensors is
displayed on the PFD and the MFD. See examples in the Figure 5-1 and Figure 5-2. Detailed descriptions of flight
management functions are discussed later in this section.
A brief description of the flight management data on the PFD and MFD follows.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation mode indicates which sensor is providing the course data (e.g., GPS, VOR) and the flight plan phase
(e.g., Departure (DPRT), Terminal (TERM), Enroute (ENR), Oceanic (OCN), RNAV Approach (LNAV, LNAV+V, L/
VNAV, LP, LP+V, or LPV), or Missed Approach (MAPR)).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Inset Map is a small version of the MFD Navigation Map and can be displayed in the lower left corner of
the PFD. When the system is in reversionary mode, the Inset Map is displayed in the lower right corner. The
Inset Map is displayed by pressing the INSET Softkey. Pressing the INSET Softkey again, then pressing the OFF
Softkey removes the Inset Map.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Navigation Map displays aviation data (e.g., airports, VORs, airways, airspaces), geographic data (e.g.,
cities, lakes, highways, borders), topographic data (map shading indicating elevation), and hazard data (e.g.,
traffic, terrain, weather). The amount of displayed data can be reduced by pressing the DCLTR Softkey. The
Navigation Map can be oriented four different ways: North Up (NORTH UP), Track Up (TRK UP), Desired Track
Up (DTK UP), or Heading Up (HDG UP).
AFCS
An aircraft icon is placed on the Navigation Map at the location corresponding to the calculated present position.
The aircraft position and the flight plan legs are accurately based on GPS calculations. The basemap upon which
these are placed are from a source with less resolution, therefore the relative position of the aircraft to map features
is not exact. The leg of the active flight plan currently being flown is shown as a magenta line on the navigation
map. The other legs are shown in white.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
There are 28 different map ranges available, from 500 feet to 2000 nm. The current range is indicated in the
lower right corner of the map and represents the top-to-bottom distance covered by the map. To change the map
range on any map, turn the Joystick counter-clockwise to zoom in ( -, decreasing), or clockwise to zoom out (+,
increasing).
APPENDICES
The Direct-to Window, the Flight Plan Window, the Procedures Window, and the Nearest Airports Window
can be displayed in the lower right corner of the PFD. Details of these windows are discussed in detail later in
the section.
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
133
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Navigation Status Box
Navigation Mode
Inset Map
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Location of:
- Direct To Window
- Flight Plan Window
- Procedures Window
- Nearest Airports Window
Figure 5-1 GPS Navigation Information on the PFD
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Navigation Status Box
Map Orientation
Navigation Page Title
Navigation Map
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Aviation Data
- Geographic Data
- Topographic Data
- Hazard Data
Flight Plan Leg
Aircraft Icon
at Present Position
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Active Flight Plan Leg
Map Range
APPENDICES
Figure 5-2 GPS Navigation Information on the MFD Navigation Page
NAVIGATION STATUS BOX
INDEX
The Navigation Status Box located at the top of the PFD contains two fields displaying the following
information:
PFD Navigation Status Box
134
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• Active flight plan leg (e.g., ‘D-> KICT’ or ‘KIXD -> KCOS’) or flight plan annunciations (e.g., ‘Turn right to
021˚ in 8 seconds’)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Distance (DIS) and Bearing (BRG) to the next waypoint or flight plan annunciations (e.g., ‘TOD within 1
minute’)
The symbols used in the PFD status bar are:
Symbol
Description
Symbol
Description
Direct-to
Vector to Final
Right Procedure Turn
Right DME Arc / Radius to Fix Leg
Left Procedure Turn
Left DME Arc / Radius to Fix Leg
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Left Holding Pattern
EIS
Active Leg
Right Holding Pattern
GS
ISA
LDG
MSA
TAS
TKE
TRK
VSR
XTK
Ground Speed
ISA Relative Temperature
ETA at Final Destination
Minimum Safe Altitude
True Air Speed
Track Angle Error
Track
Vertical Speed Required
Crosstrack Error
AFCS
Bearing
Distance
Desired Track
Endurance
ETE to Final Destination
Enroute Safe Altitude
Estimated Time of Arrival
Estimated Time Enroute
Fuel on Board
Fuel over Destination
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
BRG
DIS
DTK
END
ENR
ESA
ETA
ETE
FOB
FOD
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Navigation Status Box located at the top of the MFD contains four data fields, each displaying one of the
following items:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
MFD Navigation Status Box
The navigation information displayed in the four data fields can be selected on the MFD Data Bar Fields Box
on the AUX - System Setup Page. The default selections (in order left to right) are GS, DTK, TRK, and ETE.
APPENDICES
Changing a field in the MFD Navigation Status Box:
1) Select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
INDEX
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field number in the MFD Data Bar Fields Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display and scroll through the data options list.
5) Select the desired data.
6) Press the ENT Key. Pressing the DFLTS Softkey returns all fields to the default setting.
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
135
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.2 USING MAP DISPLAYS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Map displays are used extensively in the G1000 to provide situational awareness in flight. Most G1000 maps
can display the following information:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
• Airports, NAVAIDs, airspaces, airways,
land data (highways, cities, lakes, rivers,
borders, etc.) with names
• Map range
•Wind direction and speed
• Map orientation
• Icons for enabled map features
• Aircraft icon (representing present position)
• Nav range ring
• Fuel range ring
• Map Pointer information (distance and
bearing to pointer, location of pointer,
name, and other pertinent information)
• Flight plan legs
• User waypoints
• Track vector
• Topography scale
• Topography data
• Obstacle data
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The information in this section applies to the following maps unless otherwise noted:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• All Map Group Pages (MAP)
• All Waypoint Group Pages (WPT)
• AUX - Trip Planning
• All Nearest Group Pages (NRST)
• Flight Plan Pages (FPL)
• Direct-to Window
• PFD Inset Map
• Procedure Loading Pages
MAP ORIENTATION
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Maps are shown in one of four different orientation options, allowing flexibility in determining aircraft
position relative to other items on the map (north up) or for determining where map items are relative to where
the aircraft is going (track up, desired track up, or heading up). The map orientation is shown in the upper
right corner of the map.
Figure 5-3 Map Orientation
INDEX
• North up (NORTH UP) aligns the top of the map display to north (default setting).
• Track up (TRK UP) aligns the top of the map display to the current ground track.
• Desired track up (DTK UP) aligns the top of the map display to the desired course.
• Heading up (HDG UP) aligns the top of the map display to the current aircraft heading.
136
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NOTE: When panning or reviewing active flight plan legs in a non-North Up orientation, the map does not
show the map orientation nor the wind direction and speed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Map orientation can only be changed on the Navigation Map Page. Any other displays that show
navigation data reflect the orientation selected for the Navigation Map Page.
Changing the Navigation Map orientation:
1) With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press the MENU Key. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Map Setup
Selection
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-4 Navigation Map Page Menu Window
2) Press the ENT Key to display the Map Setup Window.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob, or press the ENT Key once, to select the ‘ORIENTATION’ field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Map Group Selection
Orientation Field
AFCS
Auto North Up
- On/Off
- Minimum Range
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-5 Map Setup Menu Window - Map Group
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired orientation.
5) Press the ENT Key to select the new orientation.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the base page.
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
137
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
The map can be configured to switch automatically to a north up orientation when the map range reaches a
minimum range.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Enabling/disabling Auto North Up and selecting the minimum switching range:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
EIS
5) Highlight the ‘AUTO NORTH UP’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’ using the small FMS Knob.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the range field.
8) Use the small FMS Knob to select the desired range.
9) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option.
10) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
MAP RANGE
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
There are 28 different map ranges available, from 500 feet to 2000 nm. The current range is indicated in
the lower right corner of the map and represents the top-to-bottom distance covered by the map. When the
map range is decreased to a point that exceeds the capability of the G1000 to accurately represent the map,
a magnifying glass icon is shown to the left of the map range. To change the map range turn the Joystick
counter-clockwise to decrease the range, or clockwise to increase the range.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Range Overzoom
APPENDICES
Figure 5-6 Map Range
AUTO ZOOM
INDEX
Auto zoom allows the G1000 to change the map display range to the smallest range clearly showing the
active waypoint. Auto zoom can be overridden by adjusting the range with the Joystick, and remains until
the active waypoint changes, a terrain or traffic alert occurs, the aircraft takes off, or the manual override times
out (timer set on Map Setup Window).
If a terrain caution or warning occurs, all navigation maps automatically adjust to the smallest map range
clearly showing the potential impact points If a new traffic advisory alert occurs, any map page capable of
138
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
displaying traffic advisory alerts automatically adjusts to the smallest map range clearly showing the traffic
advisory. When terrain or traffic alerts clear, the map returns to the previous auto zoom range based on the
active waypoint.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The auto zoom function can be turned on or off independently for the PFDs and MFD. Control of the
ranges at which the auto zoom occurs is done by setting the minimum and maximum ‘look forward’ times
(set on the Map Setup Window for the Map Group). These settings determines the minimum and maximum
distance to display based upon the aircraft’s ground speed.
EIS
• Waypoints that are long distances apart cause the map range to increase to a point where many details on
the map are decluttered. If this is not acceptable, lower the maximum look ahead time to a value that limits
the auto zoom to an acceptable range.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Waypoints that are very short distances apart cause the map range to decrease to a point where situational
awareness may not be what is desired. Increase the minimum look ahead time to a value that limits the auto
zoom to a minimum range that provides acceptable situational awareness.
• Flight plans that have a combination of long and short legs cause the range to increase and decrease as
waypoints sequence. To avoid this, auto zoom can be disabled or the maximum/minimum times can be
adjusted.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• The ‘time out’ time (configurable on the Map Setup Page for the Map Group) determines how long auto
zoom is overridden by a manual adjustment of the range knob. At the expiration of this time, the auto
zoom range is restored. Setting the ‘time out’ value to zero causes the manual override to never time out.
• When the maximum ‘look forward’ time is set to zero, the upper limit becomes the maximum range available
(2000 nm).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• When the minimum ‘look forward’ time is set to zero, the lower limit becomes 1.5 nm.
Auto Zoom:
Manual Range Override
Expiration Time
Maximum Look Forward Time
Minimum Look Forward Time
AFCS
Off, MFD Only, PFD Only, All On
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-7 Map Setup Menu Window - Map Group, Auto Zoom
Configuring automatic zoom:
INDEX
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
139
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘AUTO ZOOM’ field.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
6) Select ‘Off’, ‘MFD Only’, ‘PFD Only’, or ‘ALL On’.
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the ‘MAX LOOK FWD’ field.
Times are from zero to 999 minutes.
8) Use the FMS Knobs to set the time. Press the ENT Key.
9) Repeat step 8 for ‘MIN LOOK FWD’ (zero to 99 minutes) and ‘TIME OUT’ (zero to 99 minutes).
EIS
10) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
MAP PANNING
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Map panning allows the pilot to:
• View parts of the map outside the displayed range without adjusting the map range
• Highlight and select locations on the map
• Review information for a selected airport, NAVAID or user waypoint
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Designate locations for use in flight planning
• View airspace and airway information
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When the panning function is selected by pressing the Joystick, the Map Pointer flashes on the map display.
A window also appears at the top of the map display showing the latitude/longitude position of the pointer,
the bearing and distance to the pointer from the aircraft’s present position, and the elevation of the land at the
position of the pointer.
AFCS
Map Pointer Information
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Map Pointer
INDEX
Figure 5-8 Navigation Map - Map Pointer Activated
140
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NOTE: The map is normally centered on the aircraft’s position. If the map has been panned and there has
been no pointer movement for about 60 seconds, the map reverts back to centered on the aircraft position
and the flashing pointer is removed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the Map Pointer is placed on an object, the name of the object is highlighted (even if the name was
not originally displayed on the map). When any map feature or object is selected on the map display, pertinent
information is displayed.
EIS
Information about Point
of Interest
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Map Pointer on
POI
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-9 Navigation Map - Map Pointer on Point of Interest
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
141
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the Map Pointer crosses an airspace boundary, the boundary is highlighted and airspace information
is shown at the top of the display. The information includes the name and class of airspace, the ceiling in feet
above Mean Sea Level (MSL), and the floor in feet MSL.
EIS
Information about
Airspace
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Map Pointer on
Airspace
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-10 Navigation Map - Map Pointer on Airspace
Panning the map:
1) Press the Joystick to display the Map Pointer.
2) Move the Joystick to move the Map Pointer around the map.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
3) Press the Joystick to remove the Map Pointer and recenter the map on the aircraft’s current position.
142
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Reviewing information for an airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint:
1) Place the Map Pointer on a waypoint.
2) Press the ENT Key to display the Waypoint Information Page for the selected waypoint.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the GO BACK Softkey, the CLR Key, or the ENT Key to exit the Waypoint Information Page and return to
the Navigation Map showing the selected waypoint.
EIS
NAVAID
Information
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GO BACK Softkey
Figure 5-11 Navigation Map - Information Window - NAVAID
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
143
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Viewing airspace information for a special-use or controlled airspace:
1) Place the Map Pointer on an open area within the boundaries of an airspace.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the ENT Key to display an options menu.
3) ‘Review Airspaces’ should already be highlighted, if not select it. Press the ENT Key to display the Airspace
Information Page for the selected airspace.
EIS
4) Press the CLR or ENT Key to exit the Airspace Information Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Airspace
Information
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 5-12 Navigation Map - Information Window - Airspace
144
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MEASURING BEARING AND DISTANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Distance and bearing from the aircraft’s present position to any point on the viewable navigation map may be
calculated using the ‘Measure Bearing and Distance’ selection from Navigation Map page menu. The bearing
and distance tool displays a dashed Measurement Line and a Measure Pointer to aid in graphically identifying
points with which to measure. Lat/Long, distance and elevation data for the Measure Pointer is provided in a
window at the top of the navigation map.
Measuring bearing and distance between any two points:
1) Press the MENU Key (with the Navigation Map Page displayed).
EIS
2) Highlight the ‘Measure Bearing/Distance’ field.
3) Press the ENT Key. A Measure Pointer is displayed on the map at the aircraft’s present position.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Move the Joystick to place the reference pointer at the desired location. The bearing and distance are displayed
at the top of the map. Elevation at the current pointer position is also displayed. Pressing the ENT Key changes
the starting point for measuring.
Measurement
Information
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) To exit the Measure Bearing/Distance option, press the Joystick; or select ‘Stop Measuring’ from the Page
Menu and press the ENT Key.
Pointer Lat/Long
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Measurement Line
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-13 Navigation Map - Measuring Bearing and Distance
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
145
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
TOPOGRAPHY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
All navigation maps can display various shades of topography colors representing land elevation, similar
to aviation sectional charts. Topographic data can be displayed or removed as described in the following
procedures. Topographic data can also be displayed on the selectable profile map at the bottom of the navigation
map.
Displaying/removing Profile View
1) From the Navigation Map Page, press the MAP Softkey.
EIS
2) Press the PROFILE Softkey to enable or disable Profile View.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Select ‘Show Profile View’ or ‘Hide Profile View’ and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Navigation Map
Black Background
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Navigation Map
Topographic Data
TOPO Softkey
Not Enabled
TOPO Softkey
Enabled
TOPO Off
TOPO On
AFCS
Figure 5-14 Navigation Map - Topographic Data
Displaying/removing topographic data on all pages displaying navigation maps:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the MAP Softkey (the INSET Softkey for the PFD Inset Map).
2) Press the TOPO Softkey.
APPENDICES
3) Press the TOPO Softkey again to remove topographic data from the Navigation Map. When topographic data
is removed from the page, all navigation data is presented on a black background.
Displaying/removing topographic data (TOPO DATA) using the Navigation Map Page Menu:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
INDEX
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘TOPO DATA’ field.
146
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
TOPO DATA
Range
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TOPO DATA
On/Off
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-15 Navigation Map Setup Menu - TOPO DATA Setup
The topographic data range is the maximum map range on which topographic data is displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: Since the PFD Inset Map is much smaller than the MFD navigation maps, items are removed on the
PFD Inset Map two range levels smaller than the range selected in the Map Setup pages (e.g., a setting
of 100 nm removes the item at ranges above 100 nm on MFD navigation maps, while the PFD Inset Map
removes the same item at 50 nm).
Selecting a topographical data range (TOPO DATA):
AFCS
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘TOPO DATA’ range field. TOPO ranges are from 500 ft to 2000 nm.
6) To change the TOPO range setting, turn the small FMS Knob to display the range list.
APPENDICES
7) Select the desired range using the small FMS Knob.
8) Press the ENT Key.
9) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
INDEX
In addition, the Navigation Map can display a topographic scale (located in the lower right hand side of the
map) showing a scale of the terrain elevation and current elevation values.
147
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Maximum Displayed Elevation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Minimum Displayed Elevation
Range of
Displayed
Elevations
Aircraft Altitude (MSL)
EIS
Ground Elevation at Map Pointer
Location (only visible when Map
Pointer is displayed)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-16 Navigation Map - TOPO SCALE
Displaying/removing the topographic scale (TOPO SCALE):
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group and select the ENT Key.
4) Highlight the ‘TOPO SCALE’ field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
APPENDICES
TOPO SCALE
On/Off
INDEX
Figure 5-17 Navigation Map Setup Menu - TOPO SCALE Setup
148
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MAP SYMBOLS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
This section discusses the types of land and aviation symbols that can be displayed. Each listed type of symbol
can be turned on or off, and the maximum range to display each symbol can be set. The decluttering of the
symbols from the map using the DCLTR Softkey is also discussed.
LAND SYMBOLS
The following items are configured on the land menu:
Land Symbols
Symbol
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
EIS
(Text label size can be None, Small, Medium (Med), or Large
(Lrg))
Latitude/Longitude (LAT/LON)
Off
2000
Interstate Highway (FREEWAY)
300
800
International Highway (FREEWAY)
300
800
US Highway (NATIONAL HWY)
30
80
State Highway (LOCAL HWY)
15
30
8
15
Railroads (RAILROAD)
15
30
LARGE CITY (> 200,000)
800
1500
MEDIUM CITY (> 50,000)
100
200
SMALL CITY (> 5,000)
States and Provinces (STATE/PROV)
20
800
50
1500
Rivers and Lakes (RIVER/LAKE)
200
500
USER WAYPOINT
150
300
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
N/A
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Local Road (LOCAL ROAD)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Highways and Roads
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Table 5-1 Land Symbol Information
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
149
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AVIATION SYMBOLS
The following items are configured on the aviation menu:
Aviation Symbols
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
(Text label size can be None, Small, Medium (Med),
or Large (Lrg))
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
Active Flight Plan Leg (ACTIVE FPL)
2000
2000
Non-active Flight Plan Leg (ACTIVE FPL)
2000
2000
2000
250
2000
500
150
300
50
100
3
Off
15
20
100
30
Non-directional Beacon (NDB WAYPOINT)
15
30
VOR (VOR WAYPOINT)
150
300
VRP (VRP WAYPOINT)
15
30
Class B Airspace/TMA (CLASS B/TMA)
200
500
Class C Airspace/TCA (CLASS C/TCA)
200
500
Class D Airspace (CLASS D)
150
300
Restricted Area (RESTRICTED)
200
500
Military Operations Area [MOA(MILITARY)]
200
500
Other/Air Defense Interdiction Zone (OTHER/ADIZ)
200
500
Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR)
500
2000
Active Flight Plan Waypoint (ACTIVE FPL WPT)
Large Airports (LARGE APT) (Longest Runway ≥ 8100 ft)
Medium Airports (MEDIUM APT) (8100 ft > Longest
Runway ≥ 5000 ft)
Small Airports (SMALL APT) (Longest Runway < 5000 ft)
(Medium Airport if it has a tower frequency)
Taxiways (SAFETAXI)
Runway Extension (RWY EXTENSION)
Intersection (INT WAYPOINT)
APPENDICES
Symbol
See Airports, NAVAIDs
See Additional Features
N/A
INDEX
Table 5-2 Aviation Symbol Information
150
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYMBOL SETUP
All pages with maps can display land symbols (roads, lakes, borders, etc). Land symbols can be removed
totally (turned off).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Displaying/removing all land symbols:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The Page Menu is displayed and the cursor
flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Group Menu is displayed and the cursor flashes on the ‘Map’ option.
EIS
3) Highlight the ‘LAND DATA’ field.
4) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
5) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
LAND DATA
On/Off
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 5-18 Navigation Map Setup Menu - LAND DATA Setup
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The label size (TEXT) sets the size at which labels appear on the display (none, small, medium, and large).
The range (RNG) sets the maximum range at which items appear on the display.
Selecting a ‘Land’ or ‘Aviation’ group item text size and range:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
APPENDICES
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Land’ or ‘Aviation’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on the first field.
5) Select the desired land option.
INDEX
6) Select the desired text size.
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected size.
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
151
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
8) Select the desired range.
9) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected range.
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
10) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Text Label Size
(None, Small, Med, or Lrg)
Maximum Display Range
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-19 Navigation Map Setup Menu - LAND GROUP Setup
Maximum Display Range
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Text Label Size
(None, Small, Med, or Lrg)
APPENDICES
Figure 5-20 Navigation Map Setup Menu - AVIATION GROUP Setup
NOTE: Since the PFD Inset Map is much smaller than the MFD navigation maps, items are removed on the
INDEX
PFD Inset Map two range levels smaller than the range selected in the Map Setup pages (e.g., a setting
of 100 nm removes the item at ranges above 100 nm on MFD navigation maps, while the PFD Inset Map
removes the same item at 50 nm).
152
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MAP DECLUTTER
The declutter feature allows the pilot to progressively step through four levels of removing map information.
The declutter level is displayed in the DCLTR Softkey and next to the Declutter Menu Option.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Declutter Level
EIS
DCLTR Softkey
Navigation Map Page Menu
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-21 Navigation Map - Declutter Level Indications
Decluttering the map:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Press the DCLTR Softkey with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The current declutter level is shown. With
each softkey selection, another level of map information is removed.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed.
2) Select ‘Declutter’. The current declutter level is shown.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the ENT Key.
Decluttering the PFD Inset Map:
1) Press the INSET Softkey.
AFCS
2) Press the DCLTR Softkey. The current declutter level is shown. With each selection, another level of map
information is removed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
153
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Table 5-3 lists the items that are decluttered at each map detail level. The ‘X’ represents map items
decluttered for each level of detail.
Item
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Data Link Radar Precipitation
Data Link Lightning
Graphical METARs
Airports
Safe Taxi
Runway Labels
TFRs
Restricted
MOA (Military)
User Waypoints
Latitude/Longitude Grid
NAVAIDs (does not declutter if used to define airway)
Intersections (does not declutter if used to define airway)
Class B Airspaces/TMA
Class C Airspaces/TCA
Class D Airspaces
Other Airspaces/ADIZ
Obstacles
Cities
Roads
Railroads
State/Province Boundaries
Declutter-1 Declutter-2 Declutter-3
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 5-3 Navigation Map Items Decluttered for each Detail Level
154
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AIRWAYS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
This airways discussion is based upon the North American airway structure. The airway structure in places
other than North America vary by location, etc. and are not discussed in this book. Low Altitude Airways
(Victor Airways or T-Routes) start 1,200 feet above ground level (AGL) and extend up to 18,000 feet mean sea
level (MSL). Low Altitude Airways are designated with a “V” or a “T” before the airway number.
High Altitude Airways (Jet Routes or Q-Routes) start at 18,000 feet MSL and extend upward to 45,000 feet
MSL. High Altitude Airways are designated with a “J” or a “Q” before the airway number.
EIS
Low Altitude Airways are drawn in gray (the same shade used for roads). High Altitude Airways are drawn
in green. When both types of airways are displayed, High Altitude Airways are drawn on top of Low Altitude
Airways.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When airways are selected for display on the map, the airway waypoints (VORs, NDBs and Intersections) are
also displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Low Altitude
Airway
(T-Route)
Low Altitude
Airway
(Victor Airway)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-22 Airways on MFD Navigation Map
High Altitude
Airway
(Jet Route)
High Altitude
Airway
(Q-Route)
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
155
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Airways may be displayed on the map at the pilot’s discretion using either a combination of AIRWAYS Softkey
presses, or menu selections using the MENU Key from the Navigation Map Page. The Airway range can also be
programmed to only display Airways on the MFD when the map range is at or below a specific number.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Displaying/removing airways:
1) Press the MAP Softkey.
2) Press the AIRWAYS Softkey. Both High and Low Altitude Airways are displayed (AIRWY ON).
3) Press the softkey again to display Low Altitude Airways only (AIRWY LO).
EIS
4) Press the softkey again to display High Altitude Airways only (AIRWY HI).
5) Press the softkey again to remove High Altitude Airways. No airways are displayed (AIRWAYS).
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Airways’ group, and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘AIRWAYS’ field.
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Off’, ‘All’, ‘LO Only’, or ‘HI Only’, and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Airway Display Selection
Off, All, LO Only, HI Only
Low Altitude Airway Range
High Altitude Airway Range
AFCS
Figure 5-23 Navigation Map Setup Menu - AIRWAYS Setup
The airway range is the maximum map range on which airways are displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selecting an airway range (LOW ALT AIRWAY or HI ALT AIRWAY):
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Airways’ group and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
4) Highlight the ‘LOW ALT AIRWAY’ or ‘HI ALT AIRWAY’ range field.
5) To change the range setting, turn the small FMS Knob to display the range list.
6) Select the desired range using the small FMS Knob.
7) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
156
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The following range items are configurable on the airways menu:
Airway Type
Symbol
Low Altitude Airway (LOW ALT AIRWAY)
High Altitude Airway (HI ALT AIRWAY)
300
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
200
500
500
Table 5-4 Airway Range Information
EIS
TRACK VECTOR
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Navigation Map can display a track vector that is useful in minimizing track angle error. The track vector
is a solid cyan line segment extended to a predicted location. The track vector look-ahead time is selectable (30
sec, 60 sec (default), 2 min, 5 min, 10 min, 20 min) and determines the length of the track vector. The track
vector shows up to 90 degrees of a turn for the 30 and 60 second time settings.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Track Vector
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-24 Navigation Map -Track Vector
Displaying/removing the track vector:
AFCS
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘TRACK VECTOR’ field.
APPENDICES
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’. Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the look
ahead time field. Use the FMS Knob to select the desired time. Press the ENT Key.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
157
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Nav Range Ring On/Off
Track Vector
- On/Off
- Look Ahead Time
Selected Altitude Arc On/Off
Fuel Range
- On/Off
- Fuel Reserve Time
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Wind Vector On/Off
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-25 Navigation Map Setup Menu -TRACK VECTOR, WIND VECTOR, NAV RANGE RING, FUEL RANGE RING,
SELECTED ALTITUDE ARC Setup
WIND VECTOR
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The map displays a wind vector arrow in the upper right-hand portion of the screen. Wind vector information
is displayed as a white arrow pointing in the direction in which the wind is moving for wind speeds greater than
or equal to 1 kt.
Wind Direction
Wind Speed
AFCS
Figure 5-26 Navigation Map - Wind Vector
NOTE: The wind vector is not displayed until the aircraft is moving. It is not displayed on the Waypoint
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Information pages.
Displaying/removing the wind vector:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
APPENDICES
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘WIND VECTOR’ field.
INDEX
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
158
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NAV RANGE RING
The Nav Range Ring shows the direction of travel (ground track) on a rotating compass card. The range is
determined by the map range. The range is 1/4 of the map range (e.g., 37.5 nm on a 150 nm map).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Range (radius)
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Nav Range Ring
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-27 Navigation Map - Nav Range Ring
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: The Nav Range Ring is not displayed on the Waypoint Information pages, Nearest pages, or Direct-to
Window map.
Displaying/removing the Nav Range Ring:
AFCS
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘NAV RANGE RING’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
APPENDICES
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
NOTE: The Nav Range Ring is referenced to either magnetic or true north, based on the selection on the AUX
- System Setup Page.
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
159
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FUEL RANGE RING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The map can display a fuel range ring which shows the remaining flight distance. A dashed green circle
indicates the selected range to reserve fuel. A solid green circle indicates the total endurance range. If only
reserve fuel remains, the range is indicated by a solid amber circle.
Total Endurance Range
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Time to Reserve Fuel
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Range to Reserve Fuel
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-28 Navigation Map - Fuel Range Ring
Displaying/removing the fuel range ring and selecting a fuel range time:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
AFCS
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘FUEL RNG (RSV)’ field.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Highlight the fuel reserve time field. This time should be set to the amount of flight time equal to the amount
of fuel reserve desired.
APPENDICES
8) To change the reserve fuel time, enter a time (00:00 to 23:59; hours:minutes). The default setting is 00:45
minutes.
9) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
10) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
160
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FIELD OF VIEW (SVS)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The map can display the boundaries of the PFD Synthetic Vision System (SVS) lateral field of view. The field
of view is shown as two dashed lines forming a V shape in front of the aircraft symbol on the map. This is only
available if SVS is installed on the aircraft.
EIS
Lateral Field
of View
Boundaries
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-29 Navigation Map - Field of View
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Displaying/removing the field of view:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘FIELD OF VIEW’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
AFCS
7) Press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
161
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SELECTED ALTITUDE INTERCEPT ARC
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The map can display the location along the current track where the aircraft will intercept the selected altitude.
The location will be shown as a cyan arc when the aircraft is actually climbing or descending.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Range to
Altitude Arc
Figure 5-30 Navigation Map - Range to Altitude Arc
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Displaying/removing the selected altitude intercept arc:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘SEL ALT ARC’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
162
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.3 WAYPOINTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Waypoints are predetermined geographical positions (internal database) or pilot-entered positions, and are
used for all phases of flight planning and navigation.
Communication and navigation frequencies can be tuned “automatically” from various Waypoint Information
(WPT) pages, Nearest (NRST) pages, and the Nearest Airports Window (on PFD). This auto-tuning feature
simplifies frequency entry over manual tuning. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS section for details on autotuning.
- Waypoint Identifier
- Type (symbol)
- Facility Name
- City
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
City Entry Field
Facility
Entry Field
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Identifier Entry Field
EIS
Waypoints can be selected by entering the ICAO identifier, entering the name of the facility, or by entering
the city name. See the System Overview section for detailed instructions on entering data in the G1000. As a
waypoint identifier, facility name, or location is entered, the G1000’s Spell’N’Find™ feature scrolls through the
database, displaying those waypoints matching the characters which have been entered to that point. A direct-to
navigation leg to the selected waypoint can be initiated by pressing the Direct-to Key on any of the waypoint
pages.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Entered Waypoint on
Map
Map Area Showing
Entered Waypoint
AFCS
Waypoint Location
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-31 Waypoint Information Window
APPENDICES
If duplicate entries exist for the entered facility name or location, additional entries may be viewed by continuing
to turn the small FMS Knob during the selection process. If duplicate entries exist for an identifier, a Duplicate
Waypoints Window is displayed when the ENT Key is pressed.
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
163
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Identifier with
Duplicates
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Duplicate
Waypoints
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Duplicate Message
AIRPORTS
Figure 5-32 Waypoint Information Window - Duplicate Identifier
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: ‘North Up’ orientation on the Airport Information Page cannot be changed; the pilot needs to be
aware of proper orientation if the Navigation Map orientation is different from the Airport Information Page
Map.
AFCS
The Airport Information Page is the first page in WPT group and allows the pilot to view airport information,
load frequencies (COM, NAV, and lighting), review runways, and review instrument procedures that may be
involved in the flight plan. See the Audio Panel and CNS Section for more information on loading frequencies
(auto-tuning). After engine startup, the Airport Information Page defaults to the airport where the aircraft is
located. After a flight plan has been loaded, it defaults to the destination airport. On a flight plan with multiple
airports, it defaults to the airport which is the current active waypoint.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected airport and surrounding area, the Airport Information
Page displays airport information in three boxes labeled ‘AIRPORT’, ‘RUNWAYS’, and ‘FREQUENCIES’. For
airports with multiple runways, information for each runway is available. This information is viewed on the
Airport Information Page by pressing the INFO softkey until INFO-1 is displayed.
164
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Airport Information
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- ID/Facility/City
- Usage Type/Region
- Lat/Long/Elev
- Fuel Available
- Time Zone (UTC Offset)
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
Airport
Runway Information
- Designation
- Length/Width/Surface
- Lighting Available
EIS
COM/NAV Freq. Info.
Airport/Runway
Diagram
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Identification
- Frequency
- Availability
- Additional Information
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Softkeys
Figure 5-33 Airport Information Page
The following descriptions and abbreviations are used on the Airport Information Page:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Usage type: Public, Military, Private, or Heliport
• Runway surface type: Hard, Turf, Sealed, Gravel, Dirt, Soft, Unknown, or Water
• Runway lighting type: No Lights, Part Time, Full Time, Unknown, or PCL Freq (for pilot-controlled
lighting)
• COM Availability: TX (transmit only), RX (receive only), PT (part time), i (additional information available)
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
165
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Airport Directory
Information
Airport Information
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- ID/Facility/City
- Usage Type/Region
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Softkeys
Figure 5-34 Airport Directory Page Example
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The airport directory information is viewed on the Airport Directory Page by pressing the INFO softkey
until INFO-2 is displayed. The following are types of airport directory information shown (if available) on the
Airport Directory Page:
• Airport:
Identifier, Site
Number, Name, City, State
• Phones: Phone/Fax Numbers
AFCS
• Hours: Facility Hours, Light
Hours, Tower Hours, Beacon
Hours
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Location: Sectional, Magnetic
Variation
• Frequencies: Type/Frequency
• Runway: Headings, Length,
Width, Obstructions, Surface
• Obstructions: General Airport
Obstructions
• Special
Operations
at
Airport
• Instrument
Approaches:
Published
Approach,
Frequency
• NAVAIDS: Type, Identifier,
Frequency, Radial, Distance
• Noise:
Noise Abatement
Procedures
• Charts: Low Altitude Chart
Number
• Services Available: Category,
Specific Service
• Notes: Airport Notes
• Pilot Controlled Lighting:
High/Med/Low Clicks/Second
• FBO:
Type, Frequencies,
Services, Fees, Fuel, Credit
Cards, Phone/Fax Numbers
INDEX
APPENDICES
• Transportation:
Ground
Transportation Type Available
• Approach: Approach Facility
Name, Frequency, Frequency
Parameter
• Traffic Pattern Altitudes
(TPA): Aircraft Class/Altitude
• Weather:
Service Type,
Frequency, Phone Number
• Flight Service Station (FSS):
FSS Name, Phone Numbers
166
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting an airport for review by identifier, facility name, or location:
1) From the Airport Information Page, press the FMS Knob.
2) Use the FMS Knobs and enter an identifier, facility name, or location.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
Selecting a runway:
1) With the Airport Information Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
EIS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the ‘RUNWAYS’ Box, on the runway designator.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the desired runway (if more than one) for the selected airport.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) To remove the flashing cursor, press the FMS Knob.
Viewing a destination airport:
From the Airport Information Page press the MENU Key. Select ‘View Destination Airport’. The Destination
Airport is displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Airport Frequencies Box uses the descriptions and abbreviations listed in the following table:
Navigation Frequencies
ILS
LOC
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Communication Frequencies
Approach * Control
Pre-Taxi
Arrival *
CTA *
Radar
ASOS
Departure * Ramp
ATIS
Gate
Terminal *
AWOS
Ground
TMA *
Center
Helicopter
Tower
Class B *
Multicom
TRSA *
Class C *
Other
Unicom
Clearance
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
* May include Additional Information
Table 5-5 Airport Frequency Abbreviations
APPENDICES
A departure, arrival, or approach can be loaded using the softkeys on the Airport Information Page. See the
Procedures section for details. METARs or TAFs applicable to the selected airport can be selected for display (see
the Hazard Avoidance section for details about weather).
The G1000 provides a NRST Softkey on the PFD, which gives the pilot quick access to nearest airport
information (very useful if an immediate landing is required). The Nearest Airports Window displays a list of
up to the 25 nearest airports (three entries can be displayed at one time). If there are more than three they are
displayed in a scrollable list. If there are no nearest airports available, “NONE WITHIN 200NM” is displayed.
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
167
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Bearing/Distance to Airport
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Airport Identifier/
Type
Approach Available
Length of Longest
Runway
COM Freq. Info.
- Identification
- Frequency
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Additional Airports
(within 200 nm)
NRST Softkey
Figure 5-35 Nearest Airports Window on PFD
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pressing the ENT Key displays the PFD Airport Information Window for the highlighted airport. Pressing the
ENT Key again returns to the Nearest Airports Window with the cursor on the next airport in the list. Continued
presses of the ENT Key sequences through the information pages for all airports in the Nearest Airports list.
Airport Information
- ID/Type/City
- Facility
Airport Information
- Usage/Time/Elev
- Region
AFCS
Airport Information
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Lat/Long
APPENDICES
Figure 5-36 Airport Information Window on PFD
The Nearest Airports Page on the MFD is first in the group of NRST pages because of its potential use in
the event of an in-flight emergency. In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected airport and
surrounding area, the page displays nearest airport information in five boxes labeled ‘NEAREST AIRPORTS’,
‘INFORMATION’, ‘RUNWAYS’, ‘FREQUENCIES’, and ‘APPROACHES’.
INDEX
The selected airport is indicated by a white arrow, and a dashed white line is drawn on the navigation map
from the aircraft position to the nearest airport. Up to five nearest airports, one runway, up to five frequencies,
and up to five approaches are visible at one time. If there are more than can be shown, each list can be scrolled.
168
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
If there are no items for display in a boxed area, text indicating that fact is displayed. The currently selected
airport remains in the list until it is unselected.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Nearest Airports
- ID/Type
- Bearing/Distance
Airport Information
- Facility/City/Elevation
EIS
Runway Information
Nearest Airport
- Designation/Surface
- Length/Width
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
COM/NAV Freq. Info.
- Identification
- Frequency
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
Airport
Approaches Available
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Window Selection
Softkeys
LD APR Softkey (only
available if an approach is
highlighted)
Figure 5-37 Nearest Airport Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Viewing information for a nearest airport on the PFD:
1) Press the NRST Softkey to display the Nearest Airports Window. Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Highlight the airport identifier with the FMS Knob and press the ENT Key to display the Airport Information
Window.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) To return to the Nearest Airports Window press the ENT Key (with the cursor on ‘BACK’) or press the CLR
Key. The cursor is now on the next airport in the nearest airports list. (Repeatedly pressing the ENT Key
moves through the airport list, alternating between the Nearest Airports Window and the Airport Information
Window.)
4) Press the CLR Key or the NRST Softkey to close the PFD Nearest Airports Window.
Viewing information for a nearest airport on the MFD:
APPENDICES
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the NRST page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Nearest Airports Page (it is the first page of the group, so it may already
be selected). If there are no Nearest Airports available, “NONE WITHIN 200 NM” is displayed.
INDEX
3) Press the APT Softkey; or press the FMS Knob; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Airport Window’ and
press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘NEAREST AIRPORTS’ Box. The first airport in the nearest airports
list is highlighted.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired airport. (Pressing the ENT Key also moves to the next airport.)
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
169
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Viewing runway information for a specific airport:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired runway.
1) With the Nearest Airports Page displayed, press the RNWY Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select
Runway Window’; and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘RUNWAYS’ Box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
See the Audio Panel and CNS Section for frequency selection and the Procedures section for approaches.
EIS
The Nearest Airports Box on the System Setup Page defines the minimum runway length and surface type
used when determining the 25 nearest airports to display on the MFD Nearest Airports Page. A minimum
runway length and/or surface type can be entered to prevent airports with small runways or runways that are
not appropriately surfaced from being displayed. Default settings are 0 feet (or meters) for runway length and
“HARD/SOFT” for runway surface type.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selecting nearest airport surface matching criteria:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the runway surface field in the Nearest Airports Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired runway option (ANY, HARD ONLY, HARD/SOFT, WATER).
5) Press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Selecting nearest airport minimum runway length matching criteria:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
AFCS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the minimum length field in the Nearest Airport Box.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter the minimum runway length (zero to 25,000 feet) and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Nearest Airport Criteria
INDEX
- Type of Runway Surface
- Minimum Runway Length
Figure 5-38 System Setup Page - Nearest Airport Selection Criteria
170
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
INTERSECTIONS
NOTE: The VOR displayed on the Intersection Information Page is the nearest VOR, not necessarily the VOR
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
used to define the intersection.
The Intersection Information Page is used to view information about intersections. In addition to displaying
a map of the currently selected intersection and surrounding area, the Intersection Information Page displays
intersection information in three boxes labeled ‘INTERSECTION’, ‘INFORMATION’, and ‘NEAREST VOR’.
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
Intersection
EIS
Intersection Identifier
Intersection Info
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Region
- Lat/Long
Nearest VOR Info
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Radial to VOR
- Distance to VOR
Selected Intersection
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-39 Intersection Information Page
AFCS
Selecting an intersection:
1) With the Intersection Information Page displayed, enter an identifier in the Intersection Box.
2) Press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the Nearest Intersections Page displayed, press the FMS Knob.
APPENDICES
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest Intersection Box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
171
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
The Nearest Intersections Page can be used to quickly find an intersection close to the flight path. In addition
to displaying a map of the surrounding area, the page displays information for up to 25 nearest intersections in
three boxes labeled ‘NEAREST INT’, ‘INFORMATION’, and ‘REFERENCE VOR’.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The selected intersection is indicated by a white arrow. Up to eleven intersections are visible at a time. If
there are more than can be shown, the list can be scrolled. If there are no items for display, text indicating that
fact is displayed.
EIS
NOTE: The list only includes waypoints that are within 200 nm.
Intersection Information
- Identifier/Symbol
- Bearing/Distance to
intersection from
aircraft position
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
Intersection
Intersection Lat/Long
Reference VOR Info
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- VOR Frequency
- Bearing/Distance to VOR
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Nearest
Intersection
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 5-40 Nearest Intersections Page
172
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NDBS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The NDB Information Page is used to view information about NDBs. In addition to displaying a map of
the currently selected NDB and surrounding area, the page displays NDB information in four boxes labeled
‘NDB’, ‘INFORMATION’, ‘FREQUENCY’, and ‘NEAREST AIRPORT’.
NDB Identifier/Type
- Facility Name
- Nearest City
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
NDB
NDB Information
EIS
- Type
- Region
- Lat/Long
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NDB Frequency
Selected NDB
Nearest Airport Info
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Bearing/Distance to
Airport
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-41 NDB Information Page
NOTE: Compass locator (LOM, LMM): a low power, low or medium frequency radio beacon installed in
conjunction with the instrument landing system. When LOM is used, the locator is at the Outer Marker;
when LMM is used, the locator is at the Middle Marker.
AFCS
Selecting an NDB:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) With the NDB Information Page displayed, enter an identifier, the name of the NDB, or the city in which it’s
located in the NDB Box.
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
APPENDICES
1) With the Nearest NDB Page displayed, press the FMS Knob.
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest NDB Box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
173
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
The Nearest NDB Page can be used to quickly find a NDB close to the flight path. In addition to displaying
a map of the surrounding area, the page displays information for up to 25 nearest NDBs in three boxes labeled
‘NEAREST NDB’, ‘INFORMATION’, and ‘FREQUENCY’.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A white arrow before the NDB identifier indicates the selected NDB. Up to eleven NDBs are visible at a time.
If there are more than can be shown, each list can be scrolled. The list only includes waypoints that are within
200nm. If there are no NDBs in the list, text indicating that there are no nearest NDBs is displayed. If there are
no nearest NDBs in the list, the information and frequency fields are dashed.
NDB Identifier/Symbol
- Bearing/Distance to
NDB from aircraft
position
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
NDB
Nearest NDB
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NDB Information
- Facility Name/City
- Type
- Lat/Long
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NDB Frequency
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 5-42 Nearest NDB Page
174
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VORS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The VOR Information Page can be used to view information about VOR and ILS signals (since ILS signals
can be received on a NAV receiver), or to quickly auto-tune a VOR or ILS frequency. Localizer information
cannot be viewed on the VOR Information Page. If a VOR station is combined with a TACAN station it is
listed as a VORTAC on the VOR Information Page and if it includes only DME, it is displayed as VOR-DME.
In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected VOR and surrounding area, the VOR Information
Page displays VOR information in four boxes labeled ‘VOR’, ‘INFORMATION’, ‘FREQUENCY’, and ‘NEAREST
AIRPORT’.
EIS
VOR Identifier/Type
- Facility Name
- Nearest City
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation Map
Showing
Selected VOR
VOR Information
- Class/Magnetic Variation
- Region
- Lat/Long
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
VOR Frequency
Nearest Airport Info
Selected VOR
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Bearing/Distance to
Airport
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-43 VOR Information Page
AFCS
The VOR classes used in the VOR information box are: LOW ALTITUDE, HIGH ALTITUDE, and
TERMINAL.
Selecting a VOR:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) With the VOR Information Page displayed, enter an identifier, the name of the VOR, or the city in which it’s
located in the VOR Box.
2) Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the Nearest VOR Page displayed, press the FMS Knob or press the VOR Softkey.
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest VOR Box.
INDEX
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
175
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
1) With the Nearest VOR Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘Select VOR Window’, and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest VOR Box.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
EIS
The Nearest VOR Page can be used to quickly find a VOR station close to the aircraft. Also, a NAV frequency
from a selected VOR station can be loaded from the Nearest VOR Page. In addition to displaying a map of
the surrounding area, the Nearest VOR Page displays information for up to 25 nearest VOR stations in three
boxes labeled ‘NEAREST VOR’, ‘INFORMATION’, and ‘FREQUENCY’. The list only includes waypoints that
are within 200 nm.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
A white arrow before the VOR identifier indicates the selected VOR. Up to eleven VORs are visible at a
time. If there are more than can be shown, each list can be scrolled. If there are no VORs in the list, text
indicating that there are no nearest VORs is displayed. If there are no nearest VORs in the list, the information
is dashed.
VOR Identifier/Symbol
- Bearing/Distance to VOR
from aircraft position
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
VOR
VOR Information
AFCS
- Facility Name/City
- Class/Magnetic Variation
- Lat/Long
VOR Frequency
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Nearest VOR
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-44 Nearest VOR Page
176
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VRPS
Selected VRP
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The VRP Information Page is used to view information about visual reporting points (VRPs). In addition to
displaying a map of the currently selected VRP and surrounding area, the VRP Information Page displays VRP
information in two boxes labeled ‘VRP’ and ‘INFORMATION’’.
Navigation Map Showing Selected VRP
VRP Identifier/Symbol
EIS
- VRP Name
VRP Information
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Country
- Bearing/Distance to VRP
from aircraft position
- Lat/Long
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-45 VRP Information Page
AFCS
Selecting a VRP:
1) With the VRP Information Page displayed, enter the identifier or the name of the VRP in the VRP Box.
2) Press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the Nearest VRP Page displayed, press the FMS Knob.
APPENDICES
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest VRP Box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
177
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
The Nearest VRP Page can be used to quickly find a VRP close to the aircraft. In addition to displaying a
map of the surrounding area, the Nearest VRP Page displays information for up to 25 nearest VRPs in two
boxes labeled ‘NEAREST VRP’ and ‘INFORMATION’. The list only includes VRPs that are within 200 nm.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A white arrow before the VRP identifier indicates the selected VRP. Up to eleven VRPs are visible at a time.
If there are more than can be shown, the list can be scrolled. If there are no VRPs in the list, text indicating
that there are no nearest VRPs is displayed. If there are no nearest VRPs in the list, the information is dashed.
Nearest VRP
EIS
Navigation Map Showing Nearest VOR
VRP Identifier/Symbol
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Bearing/Distance to VRP
from aircraft position
VRP Information
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- VRP Name
- Country
- Lat/Long
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 5-46 Nearest VRP Page
178
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
USER WAYPOINTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 can create and store up to 1,000 user-defined waypoints. User waypoints can be created from any
map page (except PFD Inset Map, AUX-Trip Planning Page, or Procedure Pages) by selecting a position on the
map using the Joystick, or from the User Waypoint Information Page by referencing a bearing/distance from
an existing waypoint, bearings from two existing waypoints, or latitude and longitude. Once a waypoint has
been created, it can be renamed, deleted, or moved. Temporary user waypoints are erased upon system power
down.
EIS
User Waypoint Info
- Identifier
- Temporary/Normal
- Waypoint Type
User Wpt Comment
Reference Wpt/Info
Selected User
Waypoint
User Waypoint List
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
User Waypoint
- Identifier/Rad/Dist or
- Identifiers/Radials or
- Region/Lat/Long
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Identifier
- Comment
# User Wpts Used
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GO BACK displayed if
User Wpt was created
on map page
Softkeys
Figure 5-47 User Waypoint Information Page
AFCS
Selecting a User Waypoint:
1) With the User Waypoint Information Page displayed, enter the name of the User Waypoint, or scroll to the
desired waypoint in the User Waypoint List using the large FMS Knob.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
APPENDICES
1) With the Nearest User Waypoints Page displayed, press the FMS Knob.
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest USR Box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
179
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Nearest User Wpt List
- Identifier
- Bearing/Distance from
aircraft position
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
User Waypoint
EIS
User Waypoint Info
- Comment
- Lat/Long
Reference Wpt Info
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selected User
Waypoint
- Identifier
- Radial/Distance
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-48 Nearest User Waypoint Page
CREATING USER WAYPOINTS
User waypoints can be created from the User Waypoint Information Page in the following ways:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Creating user waypoints from the User Waypoint Information Page:
1) Press the NEW Softkey, or press the MENU Key and select ‘Create New User Waypoint’.
2) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
3) Press the ENT Key. The current aircraft position is the default location of the new waypoint.
AFCS
4) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Or:
Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
APPENDICES
Or:
Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the INFORMATION window using the FMS Knobs.
5) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
INDEX
6) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to “TEMPORARY” or “NORMAL” by moving the cursor
to “TEMPORARY” and pressing the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box.
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
180
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key. The message ‘Are you sure you want to create the new User Waypoint AAAAAA?’ is
displayed.
4) With ‘YES’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
5) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
EIS
Or:
Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Or:
Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the INFORMATION window using the FMS Knobs.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
7) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to “TEMPORARY” or “NORMAL” by moving the cursor
to “TEMPORARY” and pressing the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-49 User Waypoint Information Page Menu
Creating user waypoints from map pages:
APPENDICES
1) Press the Joystick to activate the panning function and pan to the map location of the desired user waypoint.
2) Press the ENT Key. The User Waypoint Information Page is displayed with the captured position.
NOTE: If the pointer has highlighted a map database feature, one of three things happens upon pressing
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
INDEX
the ENT Key: 1) information about the selected feature is displayed instead of initiating a new waypoint,
2) a menu pops up allowing a choice between ‘Review Airspaces’ or ‘Create User Waypoint’, or 3) a new
waypoint is initiated with the default name being the selected map item.
181
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
3) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected name. The first reference waypoint box is highlighted.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
EIS
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the INFORMATION window using the FMS Knobs.
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
7) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to “TEMPORARY” or “NORMAL” by moving the cursor
to “TEMPORARY” and pressing the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
9) Press the GO BACK Softkey to return to the map page.
EDITING USER WAYPOINTS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Editing a user waypoint comment or location:
1) With the User Waypoint Information Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Select a user waypoint in the User Waypoint List, if required, and press the ENT Key.
3) Move the cursor to the desired field.
AFCS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to make any changes.
5) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Renaming user waypoints:
1) Highlight a user waypoint in the User Waypoint List. Press the RENAME Softkey, or press the MENU Key and
select ‘Rename User Waypoint’.
APPENDICES
2) Enter a new name.
3) Press the ENT Key. The message ‘Do you want to rename the user waypoint AAAAAA to BBBBBB?’ is
displayed.
4) With ‘YES’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
INDEX
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
182
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Changing the location of an existing waypoint to the aircraft present position:
1) Enter a waypoint name or select the waypoint in the User Waypoint List, then press the ENT Key.
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Select ‘Use Present Position’.
4) Press the ENT Key twice. The new waypoint’s location is saved.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
EIS
A system generated comment for a user waypoint incorporates the reference waypoint identifier, bearing,
and distance. If a system generated comment has been edited, a new comment can be generated.
Resetting the comment field to the system generated comment:
1) Enter a waypoint name or select the waypoint in the User Waypoint List, then press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Auto Comment’.
4) Press the ENT Key. The generated comment is based on the reference point used to define the waypoint.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The default type of user waypoint (normal or temporary) can be changed using the user waypoint information
page menu. Temporary user waypoints are automatically deleted upon the next power cycle.
Changing the user waypoint storage duration default setting:
1) With the User Waypoint Information Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Move the cursor to select ‘Waypoint Setup’, and press the ENT Key.
3) Select ‘NORMAL’ or ‘TEMPORARY’ as desired, and press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor and return to the User Waypoint Information Page.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
183
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
DELETING USER WAYPOINTS
Deleting a single user waypoint:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Highlight a User Waypoint in the User Waypoint List, or enter a waypoint in the User Waypoint field.
2) Press the DELETE Softkey or press the CLR Key. ‘Yes’ is highlighted in the confirmation window.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
EIS
1) Highlight a User Waypoint in the User Waypoint List, or enter a waypoint in the User Waypoint field.
2) Press the MENU Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Select ‘Delete User Waypoint’.
4) Press the ENT Key twice to confirm the selection.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: The option to ‘Delete All User Waypoints’ is not available while the aircraft is in flight.
Deleting all user waypoints:
1) Highlight a User Waypoint in the User Waypoint List.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Delete All User Waypoints’.
4) Press the ENT Key twice to confirm the selection.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
184
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.4 AIRSPACES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 can display the following types of airspaces: Class B/TMA, Class C/TCA, Class D, Restricted, MOA
(Military), Other Airspace, Air Defense Interdiction Zone (ADIZ), and Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR).
Class D Airspace
MOA (Military)
Class B Airspace
EIS
Restricted Area
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Alert Area
Class C Airspace
AFCS
ADIZ
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Warning Area
APPENDICES
Figure 5-50 Airspaces
The Nearest Airspaces Page, Airspace Alerts Window, and Airspace Alerts on the PFD provide additional
information about airspaces and the location of the aircraft in relationship to them.
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
INDEX
The Airspace Alerts Box allows the pilot to turn the controlled/special-use airspace message alerts on or off.
This does not affect the alerts listed on the Nearest Airspaces Page or the airspace boundaries depicted on the
Navigation Map Page. It simply turns on/off the warning provided when the aircraft is approaching or near an
airspace.
185
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
An altitude buffer is also provided which “expands” the vertical range above or below an airspace. For example,
if the buffer is set at 500 feet, and the aircraft is more than 500 feet above/below an airspace, an alert message is
not generated, but if the aircraft is less than 500 feet above/below an airspace and projected to enter it, the pilot
is notified with an alert message. The default setting for the altitude buffer is 200 feet.
Changing the altitude buffer distance setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the altitude buffer field in the Airspace Alerts Box.
EIS
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter an altitude buffer value and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Turning an airspace alert on or off:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the Airspace Alerts Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the airspace alert ON or counterclockwise to turn the alert OFF.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Airspace Alerts Box
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
- Airspace Altitude Buffer
- Alert On/Off
(Default Settings Shown)
DFLTS Softkey
Figure 5-51 System Setup Page - Airspace Alerts
INDEX
Map ranges for the airspace boundaries are selected from the Aviation Group in the Map Setup Menu. See Table
5-2 for the default and maximum ranges for each type of airspace and the symbol used to define the airspace area.
186
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The Nearest Airspaces Page can be used to quickly find airspaces close to the flight path. In addition, a selected
frequency associated with the airspace can be loaded from the Nearest Airspaces Page. In addition to displaying
a map of airspace boundaries and surrounding area, the Nearest Airspaces Page displays airspace information in
four boxes labeled ‘AIRSPACE ALERTS’, ‘AIRSPACE, AGENCY’, ‘VERTICAL LIMITS’, and ‘FREQUENCIES’.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Airspace Alerts Info
Airspace 1
EIS
- Name
- Proximity (Ahead, Inside,
Ahead < 2nm, Within 2nm)
- Time till Intercept (only if
Ahead or Ahead < 2nm)
Airspace/Agency Info
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Airspace Type
- Controlling Agency
Airspace Vertical Limits
- Ceiling
- Floor
Airspace 2
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Associated Frequencies
- Type
- Availability/Info
- Frequency
Softkeys
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-52 Nearest Airspaces Page
Airspace alerts and associated frequencies are shown in scrollable lists on the Nearest Airspaces Page. The
ALERTS and FREQ softkeys place the cursor in the respective list. The FREQ Softkey is enabled only if one or
more frequencies exist for a selected airspace.
AFCS
Selecting and viewing an airspace alert with its associated information:
1) Select the Nearest Airspaces Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the ALERTS Softkey; or press the FMS Knob; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Alerts Window’,
and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘AIRSPACE ALERTS’ Box.
3) Select the desired airspace.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
187
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Pressing the PFD ALERTS Softkey displays the message window on the PFD. The following airspace alerts are
displayed in the message window:
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
INSIDE ARSPC – Inside airspace.
ARSPC AHEAD – Airspace ahead –
less than 10 minutes.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near and
ahead.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near –
less than 2 nm.
Comments
The aircraft is inside the airspace.
Special use airspace is ahead of aircraft. The aircraft penetrates the airspace within 10
minutes.
Special use airspace is near and ahead of the aircraft position.
Special use airspace is within 2 nm of the aircraft position.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Table 5-6 PFD Airspace Alert Messages
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Smart Airspace function de-emphasizes airspaces above or below the current aircraft altitude. The function
does not require the aircraft present position or flight path to enter the lateral boundaries of the airspace. If the
current aircraft altitude is within 1100 feet of the vertical boundaries of the airspace, the airspace boundary is
shown normally. If the current aircraft altitude is not within 1100 feet of the vertical boundaries of the airspace,
the airspace boundary is shown subdued.
Smart Airspace Off
Smart Airspace On
Figure 5-53 Smart Airspace
APPENDICES
Turning smart airspace on or off:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key, and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘GROUP’ Box.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Aviation’ in the ‘GROUP’ Box and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘SMART AIRSPACE’ field in the Aviation Map Setup Window.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn smart airspace On or counterclockwise to turn smart airspace Off
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
188
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.5 DIRECT-TO-NAVIGATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Direct-to method of navigation, initiated by pressing the Direct-to Key on either the MFD or PFD, is
quicker to use than a flight plan when the desire is to navigate to a single point such as a nearby airport.
Once a direct-to is activated, the G1000 establishes a point-to-point course line from the present position to the
selected direct-to destination. Course guidance is provided until the direct-to is replaced with a new direct-to or
flight plan, or cancelled.
EIS
A vertical navigation (VNV) direct-to creates a descent path (and provides guidance to stay on the path) from
the current altitude to a selected altitude at the direct-to waypoint. Vertical navigation is based on barometric
altitudes, not on GPS altitude, and is used for cruise and descent phases of flight.
The Direct-to Window allows selection and activation of direct-to navigation. The Direct-to Window displays
selected direct-to waypoint data on the PFD and the MFD.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Direct-to Point Info
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Identifier/Symbol/Region
- Facility Name
- City
VNV Constraints
- Altitude at Arrival
- Along Track Offset
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Map of Selected Point
Location of Destination
AFCS
- Bearing/Distance
Desired Course
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-54 Direct-to Window - MFD
APPENDICES
Direct-to Point Info
- Identifier/Symbol/City
- Facility Name
VNV Constraints
- Altitude at Arrival
- Along Track Offset
Direct-to Point Info
INDEX
- Bearing/Distance
- Desired Course
Activation Command
Figure 5-55 Direct-to Window - PFD
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
189
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Any waypoint can be entered as a direct-to destination from the Direct-to Window.
Entering a waypoint identifier, facility name, or city as a direct-to destination:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed (with the active flight plan waypoint as the default
selection or a blank waypoint field if no flight plan is active).
EIS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to begin entering a waypoint identifier (turning it counter-clockwise brings
up the waypoint selection submenu - press the CLR Key to remove it), or turn the large FMS Knob to select the
facility name, or city field and turn the small FMS Knob to begin entering a facility name or city. If duplicate
entries exist for the entered facility or city name, additional entries can be viewed by turning the small FMS
Knob during the selection process.
3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate?’ field is highlighted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the direct-to.
Any waypoint contained in the active flight plan can be selected as a direct-to waypoint from the Direct-to
Window, the Active Flight Plan Page, or the Active Flight Plan Window.
Waypoint Submenu
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Flight Plan Waypoints
- Nearest Airports
- Recent Waypoints
- User Waypoints
- Airway Waypoints
(only available when
active leg is part of an
airway)
Figure 5-56 Waypoint Submenu
Selecting an active flight plan waypoint as a direct-to destination:
AFCS
1) While navigating an active flight plan, press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed with the
active flight plan waypoint as the default selection.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of flight plan waypoints (the FPL list is populated
only when navigating a flight plan).
3) Select the desired waypoint.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
APPENDICES
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Or:
1) Select the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD, or the Active Flight Plan Window on the PFD.
2) Select the desired waypoint.
INDEX
3) Press the Direct-to Key.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
190
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Any NRST, RECENT, USER, or AIRWAY waypoints can be selected as a direct-to destination in the Direct-to
Window.
Selecting a NRST, RECENT, USER, or AIRWAY waypoint as a direct-to destination:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed (with the active flight plan destination as the
default selection or a blank destination if no flight plan is active).
2) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of FPL waypoints (the FPL list is populated only
when navigating a flight plan, and the AIRWAY list is available only when the active leg is part of an airway).
3) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the NRST, RECENT, USER, or AIRWAY waypoints.
EIS
4) Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select the desired waypoint.
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Direct-to Window can be displayed from any page and allows selection and activation of direct-to navigation.
If the direct-to is initiated from any page except the WPT pages, the default waypoint is the active flight plan
waypoint (if a flight plan is active) or a blank waypoint field. Direct-to requests on any WPT page defaults to the
displayed waypoint.
Selecting any waypoint as a direct-to destination:
1) Select the page or window containing the desired waypoint type and select the desired waypoint.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window with the selected waypoint as the direct-to
destination.
3) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
4) Press ENT again to activate the direct-to.
Selecting a nearby airport as a direct-to destination:
AFCS
1) Press the NRST Softkey on the PFD; or turn the FMS Knob to display the Nearest Airports Page and press the
FMS Knob.
2) Select the desired airport (the nearest one is already selected).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the Direct-to Key.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
APPENDICES
Direct-to destinations may also be selected by using the pointer on the navigation map pages. If no airport,
NAVAID, or user waypoint exists at the desired location, a temporary waypoint named ‘MAPWPT’ is automatically
created at the location of the map arrow.
Selecting a waypoint as a direct-to destination using the pointer:
1) From a navigation map page, press the Joystick to display the pointer.
INDEX
2) Move the Joystick to place the pointer at the desired destination location.
3) If the pointer is placed on an existing airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint, the waypoint name is highlighted.
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
191
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
4) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window with the selected point entered as the direct-to
destination.
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
6) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Cancelling a Direct-to:
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window.
2) Press the MENU Key.
EIS
3) With ‘Cancel Direct-To NAV’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. If a flight plan is still active, the G1000 resumes
navigating the flight plan along the closest leg.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Page Menu
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Cancel Direct-To
Navigation
AFCS
Figure 5-57 Direct-to Window - Cancelling Direct-to Navigation
When navigating a direct-to, the G1000 sets a direct great circle course to the selected destination. The course
to a destination can also be manually selected using the course field (‘COURSE’) on the Direct-to Window.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selecting a manual direct-to course:
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed with the destination field highlighted.
2) Highlight the course field.
APPENDICES
3) Enter the desired course.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Reselecting the direct course from the current position:
INDEX
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed with the destination field highlighted.
2) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
3) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
192
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A direct-to with altitude constraints creates a descent path (and provides guidance to stay on the path) from the
aircraft’s current altitude to the altitude of the direct-to waypoint. The altitude is reached at the waypoint, or at the
specified distance along the flight path if an offset distance has been entered. All VNV altitudes prior to the directto destination are removed from the active flight plan upon successful activation of a direct-to destination that is
part of the active flight plan. All VNV altitudes following the direct-to waypoint are retained. See the section on
Vertical Navigation for more information regarding the use and purpose of VNV altitudes and offset distances.
Entering a VNV altitude and along-track offset for the waypoint:
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window.
EIS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor over the ‘VNV’ altitude field.
3) Enter the desired altitude.
4) Press the ENT Key. The option to select MSL or AGL is now displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘MSL’ or ‘AGL’.
6) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now flashing in the VNV offset distance field.
7) Enter the desired along-track distance before the waypoint.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate?’ field is highlighted.
9) Press the ENT Key to activate.
Removing a VNV altitude constraint:
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Clear Vertical Constraints’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
AFCS
Page Menu
- Clear Vertical Navigation
Constraints
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 5-58 Direct-to Window - Clearing Vertical Constraints
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
193
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.6 FLIGHT PLANNING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight planning on the G1000 consists of building a flight plan by entering waypoints one at a time, adding
waypoints along airways, and inserting departures, airways, arrivals, or approaches as needed. The G1000 allows
flight planning information to be entered from either the MFD or PFD. The flight plan is displayed on maps using
different line widths, colors, and types, based on the type of leg and the segment of the flight plan currently being
flown (departure, enroute, arrival, approach, or missed approach).
Flight Plan Leg Type
Symbol
EIS
Active non-heading Leg (TOPO On)
Active non-heading Leg (TOPO Off)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Active heading Leg (TOPO On)
Active heading Leg (TOPO Off)
Non-heading Leg in the current flight segment (TOPO On)
Non-heading Leg in the current flight segment (TOPO Off)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Heading Leg not in the current flight segment (TOPO On)
Heading Leg not in the current flight segment (TOPO Off)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Non-heading Leg not in the current flight segment (TOPO On)
Non-heading Leg not in the current flight segment (TOPO Off)
Turn Anticipation Arc (TOPO On/TOPO Off)
AFCS
Table 5-7 Flight Plan Leg Symbols
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Up to 99 flight plans with up to 100 waypoints each can be created and stored in memory. One flight plan can
be activated at a time and becomes the active flight plan. The active flight plan is erased when the system is turned
off and overwritten when another flight plan is activated. When storing flight plans with an approach, departure,
or arrival, the G1000 uses the waypoint information from the current database to define the waypoints. If the
database is changed or updated, the G1000 automatically updates the information if the procedure has not been
modified. If an approach, departure, or arrival procedure is no longer available, the procedure is deleted from the
affected stored flight plan(s), and an alert is displayed (see Miscellaneous Messages in Appendix A) advising that
one or more stored flight plans need to be edited.
INDEX
Whenever an approach, departure, or arrival procedure is loaded into the active flight plan, a set of approach,
departure, or arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan along with a header line describing the instrument
procedure the pilot selected. The original enroute portion of the flight plan remains active (unless an instrument
procedure is activated) when the procedure is loaded.
194
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the database is updated, the airways need to be reloaded also. Each airway segment is reloaded from
the database given the entry waypoint, the airway identifier and the exit waypoint. This reloads the sequence of
waypoints between the entry and exit waypoints (the sequence may change when the database is updated). The
update of an airway can fail during this process. If that happens, the airway waypoints are changed to regular
(non-airway) flight plan waypoints, and an alert is displayed (see Miscellaneous Messages in Appendix A).
The following could cause the airway update to fail:
• Airway identifier, entry waypoint or exit waypoint not found in the new database.
• Airway entry/exit waypoint is not an acceptable waypoint for the airway – either the waypoint is no longer on
the airway, or there is a new directional restriction that prevents it being used.
EIS
• Loading the new airway sequence would exceed the capacity of the flight plan.
FLIGHT PLAN CREATION
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
There are three methods to create or modify a flight plan:
• Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD (create/modify the active flight plan)
• Active Flight Plan Window on the PFD (create/modify the active flight plan)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Flight Plan Catalog Page on the MFD (create/modify a stored flight plan)
Active FPL Waypoint List
Active Flight
Plan Leg
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Comment
- Procedure Header
- Waypoint Identifier
- Airway Identifier
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Waypoint Altitude Constraint
AFCS
Turn Anticipation
Arc
Vertical Navigation Profile
Non-Active,
Flight Plan Leg
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Active Vertical WPT Alt/ID
- Vertical Speed Target
- Flight Path Angle
- Vertical Speed Target
- Time to Top of Descent
- Vertical Deviation
Figure 5-59 Active Flight Plan Page
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
195
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Active Flight Plan Comment
Active Flight
Plan Leg
Active Flight Plan Waypoint List
EIS
- Waypoint ID
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Airway Identifier
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-60 Active Flight Plan Window on PFD
Catalog Contents
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- # Used
- # Empty
Flight Plan List
- Comment
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected
Flight Plan
Map
Selected FPL Info
AFCS
- Departure Waypoint
- Destination Waypoint
- Total Flight Plan Distance
- Enroute Safe Altitude
Softkeys
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-61 Flight Plan Catalog Page
APPENDICES
The active flight plan is listed on the active Flight Plan Page on the MFD, and in the Active Flight Plan
Window on the PFD. It is the flight plan to which the G1000 is currently providing guidance, and is shown
on the navigation maps. Stored flight plans are listed on the Flight Plan Catalog Page, and are available for
activation (becomes the active flight plan).
NOTE: The system supports AFCS lateral guidance for all leg types (using NAV or FMS APPR mode). The
INDEX
system does not support course deviation for any heading leg types (VA, VD, VI, VM, or VR).
196
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Creating an active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (only on MFD).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window with a
waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway waypoints).
4) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of
waypoints and press the ENT Key. The active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
EIS
5) Repeat step numbers 3 and 4 to enter each additional flight plan waypoint.
6) When all waypoints have been entered, press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Creating a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the NEW Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Create New Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key to
display a blank flight plan for the first empty storage location.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window
with a waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway
waypoints).
5) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of
waypoints and press the ENT Key.
6) Repeat step numbers 4 and 5 to enter each additional flight plan waypoint.
AFCS
7) When all waypoints have been entered, press the FMS Knob to return to the Flight Plan Catalog Page. The new
flight plan is now in the list.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
197
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Flight plans can be imported from an SD Card or exported to an SD Card from the Stored Flight Plan Page.
Importing a Flight Plan from an SD Card
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Insert the SD card containing the flight plan in the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
4) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
5) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight an empty or existing flight plan.
EIS
6) Press the IMPORT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Import Flight Plan”, and press the ENT Key.
If an empty slot is selected, a list of the available flight plans on the SD card will be displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Or:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If an existing flight plan is selected, an “Overwrite existing flight plan? OK or CANCEL” prompt is displayed.
Press the ENT Key to choose to overwrite the selected flight plan and see the list of available flight plans on the
SD card. If overwriting the existing flight plan is not desired, select “CANCEL” using the FMS Knob, press the
ENT Key, select another flight plan slot, and press the IMPORT Softkey again.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan for importing.
8) Press the ENT Key to initiate the import.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
9) Press the ENT Key again to confirm the import.
Import/Export Softkeys
List of Flight Plans to Import &
Details for the Selected File
Import Successful
INDEX
Figure 5-62 Flight Plan Import
198
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NOTE: If the imported flight plan contains a waypoint with a name that duplicates the name of a waypoint
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
already stored on the system, the system compares the coordinates of the imported waypoint with those of
the existing waypoint. If the coordinates are different, the imported waypoint is automatically renamed by
adding characters to the end of the name.
Exporting a Flight Plan to an SD Card
1) Insert the SD card into the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
EIS
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
4) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be exported.
6) Press the EXPORT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Export Flight Plan”.
7) If desired, change the name for the exported file by turning the large FMS Knob to the left to highlight the
name, then use the small and large FMS knobs to enter the new name, and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8) Press the ENT Key to initiate the export.
9) Press the ENT Key to confirm the export.
NOTE: The exported flight plan will not contain any procedures or airways.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Import/Export Softkeys
Stored Flight Plan to be Exported &
Exported Flight Plan Name
Export Successful
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
INDEX
Figure 5-63 Flight Plan Export
199
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Flight plans can be transferred to the system from a mobile device via the Flight Stream 210 Bluetooth
wireless connection.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Previewing a flight plan transfer from a wireless connection:
1) When a flight plan transfer has been initiated from a mobile device, a Pending Flight Plan pop-up alert appears
in the lower right corner of the MFD, and an Connext annunciation appears to the right of the MFD page name.
2) Press the ENT Key to display the Preview Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
Or:
EIS
Select the PREVIEW Softkey to display the Preview Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Press the MENU Key, select ‘Preview Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The Preview Flight Plan Page is
displayed.
Ignoring a flight plan transfer from a wireless connection:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) When a flight plan transfer has been initiated from a mobile device, a Pending Flight Plan pop-up alert appears
in the lower right corner of the MFD, and an Connext annunciation appears to the right of the MFD page name.
2) Press the CLR Key to remove the pop-up alert and ignore the pending flight plan. The pending flight plan will
still be available on the Flight Plan Catalog page.
Or:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Select the IGNORE Softkey to remove the pop-up alert and ignore the pending flight plan. The pending flight
plan will still be available on the Flight Plan Catalog page.
AFCS
Pending Connext Action
Annunciator
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pending Flight Plan
Pending Flight Plan
Pop-Up Alert
INDEX
IGNORE Softkey
PREVIEW Softkey
Figure 5-64 Pending Flight Plan Transfer
200
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pending Connext Action
Annunciator
Pending Flight Plan
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
STORE? or ACTIVATE
Selection
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
DELETE Softkey
PREVIEW Softkey
STORE Softkey
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-65 Preview Flight Plan Page
Storing a pending flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the pending flight plan.
3) Press the ENT Key to display the Preview Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
4) Select the STORE Softkey to store the flight plan.
Or:
AFCS
Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘STORE?’. Press the ENT Key
to store the flight plan.
Or:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press the MENU Key, select ‘Store Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key to store the flight plan.
5) The pending flight plan is stored and the pending annunciation is removed.
Activating a pending flight plan:
APPENDICES
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the pending flight plan.
3) Press the ENT Key to display the Preview Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
4) Select the ACTIVATE Softkey to activate the flight plan.
190-00962-04 Rev. A
INDEX
Or:
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
201
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘ACTIVATE?’. Press the ENT Key
to activate the flight plan.
Or:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Press the MENU Key, select ‘Activate Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key to activate the flight plan.
5) The pending flight plan becomes the active flight plan and is removed from the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
Deleting a pending flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
EIS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired pending flight plan.
3) Select the DELETE Softkey; press the CLR Key; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’, and press
the ENT Key. The ‘Delete Flight Plan XX?’ window is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the pending flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR
Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Deleting all pending flight plans:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘Delete All Pending’ and press the ENT Key. A ‘Delete all pending flight plans?’ confirmation window
is displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4)
With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete all pending flight plans. To cancel the request, press the
CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
ADDING WAYPOINTS TO AN EXISTING FLIGHT PLAN
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Waypoints can be added to the active flight plan or any stored flight plan. Choose the flight plan, select the
desired point of insertion, enter the waypoint, and it is added in front of the selected waypoint. Flight plans are
limited to 100 waypoints (including waypoints within airways and procedures). If the number of waypoints in
the flight plan exceeds 100, the message “Flight plan is full. Remove unnecessary waypoints.” appears and the
new waypoint(s) are not added to the flight plan.
202
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Stored Flight Plan Selected
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- Memory Slot
- Comment
- Procedure Identifier
- Waypoint Identifier
- Airway Identifier
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Waypoint Altitude Constraint
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Softkeys
Figure 5-66 Stored Flight Plan Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Flight Plan Full Message
Figure 5-67 Active Flight Plan Page - FPL Full
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Adding a waypoint to a stored flight plan:
1) On the Flight Plan Catalog Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Highlight the desired flight plan.
APPENDICES
3) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the ENT Key, turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select “EDIT” and press the
ENT Key. The Stored Flight Plan Page is displayed.
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
203
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
4) Select the point in the flight plan to add the new waypoint. The new waypoint is placed directly in front of the
highlighted waypoint.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window
with a waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway
waypoints).
6) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of waypoints
and press the ENT Key. The new waypoint now exists in the flight plan.
EIS
NOTE: If the identifier entered in the Waypoint Information Window has duplicates, a Duplicate Waypoint
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Window is displayed. Use the FMS Knob to select the correct waypoint.
Figure 5-68 Duplicate Waypoints Window
Adding a waypoint to the active flight plan:
AFCS
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Select the point in the flight plan before which to add the new waypoint. The new waypoint is placed directly
in front of the highlighted waypoint.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window with a
waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, or airway waypoints).
APPENDICES
5) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of waypoints
and press the ENT Key. The active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
Creating and adding user waypoints to the active flight plan:
INDEX
1) Press the Joystick to activate the panning function on the Active Flight Plan Page and pan to the map location
of the desired user waypoint.
2) Press the LD WPT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Load Waypoint’, and press the ENT Key. The user
waypoint is created with a name of USRxxx (using the next available in sequence) and is added to the end of
the active flight plan.
204
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDING AIRWAYS TO A FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Airways can be added to the active flight plan or any stored flight plan. Choose a flight plan (add the desired
airway entry point if not already in the flight plan), select the waypoint after the desired airway entry point,
select the airway, and it is added in front of the selected waypoint. An airway can only be loaded if there is a
waypoint in the flight plan that is part of the desired airway and is not part of an arrival or approach procedure.
The G1000 also anticipates the desired airway and exit point based on loaded flight plan waypoints.
Airway Entry Waypoint
EIS
Selected Airway
Airways Available at TOP
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Airway Waypoint
Sequence
Preview of
Selected Airway
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-69 Select Airway Page - Selecting Airway
Adding an airway to a flight plan:
AFCS
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the waypoint after the desired airway entry point. If this waypoint is not
a valid airway entry point, a valid entry point should be entered at this time.
APPENDICES
4) Turn the small FMS Knob one click clockwise and press the LD AIRWY Softkey, or press the MENU Key and
select “Load Airway”. The Select Airway Page is displayed. The LD AIRWY Softkey or the “Load Airway” menu
item is available only when a valid airway entry waypoint has been chosen (the waypoint ahead of the cursor
position).
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired airway from the list, and press the ENT Key. Low altitude airways are
shown first in the list, followed by “all” altitude airways, and then high altitude airways.
6) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired airway exit point from the list, and press the ENT Key. ‘LOAD?’ is
highlighted.
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
INDEX
7) Press the ENT Key. The system returns to editing the flight plan with the new airway inserted.
205
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Airway Entry Waypoint
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected Airway
Selected Exit Point
Preview of
Selected Airway
Selected Airway Exit
Point
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Airway Exit Points
Available
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-70 Select Airway Page - Selecting Exit Point
Inserted Airway Header
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
- Airway Identifier: [airway
identifier].[exit waypoint identifier]
(e.g., V4.SLN)
Figure 5-71 Active Flight Plan Page - Airway Inserted
RESTRICTIONS ON ADDING AIRWAYS
INDEX
Some airways have directional restrictions on all or part of the route. Airway “A2” in Europe has a directional
restriction over the whole route such that it can be flown only in the direction MTD-ABB-BNE-DEVAL.
Airway “UR975” in North Africa has more complicated directional restrictions within the list of airway
waypoints AMANO, VAKOR, LIBRO, NELDA, DIRKA, GZO, KOSET, and SARKI:
206
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• Starting from AMANO, the airway can be flown only to LIBRO.
• Starting from SARKI, the airway can be flown only to LIBRO.
• Between NELDA and GZO, the airway can be flown in either direction.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In the US, airways that are “one-way” for specified hours of operation are not uncommon. These airways
are always bidirectional in the G1000 database.
The system only allows correct airway sequences to be inserted. If the pilot subsequently inverts the flight
plan, the system inverts the airway waypoint sequence and removes the airway header.
EIS
ADDING PROCEDURES TO A STORED FLIGHT PLAN
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The G1000 allows the pilot to insert pre-defined instrument procedures from the navigation database into a
flight plan. The procedures are designed to facilitate routing of traffic leaving an airport (departure), arriving at
an airport (arrival), and landing at an airport (approach). See the procedures section for more details.
Flight Plan Name
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Flight Plan Waypoint
List
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Softkeys
AFCS
Load Departure Load Arrival Load Approach Activate Flight Plan -
Figure 5-72 Stored Flight Plan Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
207
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
DEPARTURE (DP)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Departure Procedure (DP) is loaded at the departure airport in the flight plan. Only one departure can
be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route is defined by selection of a departure, the transition waypoints,
and a runway.
Departure Airport
EIS
Selected
Departure
Departures Available at
KMKC
Departure Waypoint
Sequence
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Preview of
Selected
Departure
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-73 Departure Loading Page - Selecting the Departure
Loading a departure procedure into a stored flight plan:
1) Select a stored flight plan from the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
AFCS
2) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
3) Press the LD DP Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Load Departure”, and press the ENT Key. The
Departure Loading Page is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Select a departure. Press the ENT Key.
5) Select a runway served by the selected departure, if required. Press the ENT Key.
6) Select a transition for the selected departure. Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
7) Press the ENT Key to load the selected departure procedure.
208
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Departure Airport
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected
Departure
Selected Runway
Preview of
Selected
Departure
Selected
Departure End
Point
Selected Transition
EIS
Departure Transition Points
Available
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-74 Departure Loading Page - Selecting Transition
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Inserted Departure Header
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Departure Identifier: [departure
airport]-[departure runway].
[departure transition].
[departure end point]
(e.g., KMKC-ALL.WLDCT2.SLN)
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-75 Stored Flight Plan Page - Departure Inserted
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
209
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
ARRIVAL (STAR)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) is loaded at the destination airport in the flight plan. Only one arrival
can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route is defined by selection of an arrival, the transition waypoints,
and a runway.
Destination Airport
EIS
Selected Arrival
Arrivals Available at KCOS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selected Runway
Arrival Waypoint Sequence
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Preview of
Selected Arrival
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-76 Arrival Loading Page - Selecting the Arrival
Loading an arrival procedure into a stored flight plan:
1) Select a stored flight plan from the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
AFCS
2) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
3) Press the LD STAR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Load Arrival”, and press the ENT Key. The Arrival
Loading Page is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Select an arrival. Press the ENT Key.
5) Select a transition for the selected arrival. Press the ENT Key.
6) Select a runway served by the selected arrival, if required. Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
7) Press the ENT Key to load the selected arrival procedure.
210
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Destination Airport
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected Arrival
Selected Transition
Transitions Available with
DBRY1
EIS
Arrival Waypoint Sequence
Preview of
Selected Arrival
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-77 Arrival Loading Page - Selecting the Transition
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Inserted Arrival Header
AFCS
- Arrival Identifier:
[arrival airport]-[arrival transition].
[arrival].[arrival runway]
(e.g., KCOS-TBE.DBRY1.ALL)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-78 Stored Flight Plan Page - Arrival Inserted
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
211
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
APPROACH (APPR)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
An Approach Procedure (APPR) can be loaded at any airport that has an approach available. Only one
approach can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route for a selected approach is defined by designating
transition waypoints.
EIS
Destination Airport
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selected
Approach
Approaches Available at
KCOS
Barometric Minimum
Preview of
Selected
Approach
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Approach Waypoint
Sequence
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-79 Approach Loading Page - Selecting the Approach
Loading an approach procedure into a stored flight plan:
1) Select a stored flight plan from the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
AFCS
2) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
3) Press the LD APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Load Approach”, and press the ENT Key. The
Approach Loading Page is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Select the airport and approach:
a) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.
b) Select an approach from the list and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
Or:
a) If necessary, push the FMS Knob to exit the approach list, and use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor
to the APPROACH CHANNEL field.
b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the approach channel number, and press the ENT Key to accept the approach
channel number. The airport and approach are selected.
INDEX
5) Select a transition for the selected approach. Press the ENT Key.
6) Press the ENT Key to load the selected approach procedure.
212
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Destination Airport
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected
Approach
Selected Transition
Barometric Minimum
EIS
Transitions Available with
Selected Approach
Preview of
Selected
Approach
Approach Waypoint
Sequence
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Load Approach?
Figure 5-80 Approach Loading Page - Selecting the Transition
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Inserted Approach Header
- Approach Identifier: [approach
airport].[runway and approach type]
(e.g., KCOS-RNAV 35RGPS LPV)
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-81 Stored Flight Plan Page - Approach Inserted
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
213
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT PLAN STORAGE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 can store up to 99 flight plans, numbered 1 through 99. The active flight plan is erased when
the G1000 is powered off or when another flight plan is activated. Details about each stored flight plan can be
viewed on the Flight Plan Catalog Page and on the Stored Flight Plan Page.
Viewing information about a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
EIS
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
4) The Flight Plan Information is displayed showing departure, destination, total distance, and enroute safe altitude
information for the selected Flight Plan.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Press the EDIT Softkey to open the Stored Flight Plan Page and view the waypoints in the flight plan.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) Press the FMS Knob to exit the Stored Flight Plan Page.
Flight Plan Name
(Comment)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected Flight Plan
Preview of Selected
Flight Plan
Stored Flight Plan Info
AFCS
- Departure Airport
- Destination Airport
- Total Flight Plan Distance
- Enroute Safe Altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Stored FPL Editing
Softkeys
Figure 5-82 Stored Flight Plan Information
APPENDICES
Storing an active flight plan from the Active Flight Plan Page or the Active Flight Plan Window:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘Store Flight Plan’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. The flight plan is stored in the next available position in the flight
plan list on the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
214
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ACTIVATE A FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Activating a stored flight plan erases the active flight plan and replaces it with the flight plan being activated.
Inverting a stored flight plan reverses the waypoint order, erases the active flight plan, and replaces it with the
flight plan being activated (the stored flight plan is not changed).
Activating a stored flight plan on the MFD:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
EIS
3) Press the ACTIVE Softkey; or press the ENT Key twice; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Activate Flight Plan’,
and press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate Stored Flight Plan?’ window is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, select the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
Inverting and activating a stored flight plan on the MFD:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Press the INVERT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert & Activate FPL?’, and press the ENT Key.
The ‘Invert and activate stored flight plan?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
COPY A FLIGHT PLAN
The G1000 allows copying a flight plan into a new flight plan memory slot, allowing editing, etc., without
affecting the original flight plan. This can be used to duplicate an existing stored flight plan for use in creating
a modified version of the original stored flight plan.
AFCS
Copying a stored flight plan on the MFD:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Press the COPY Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Copy Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Copy
to Flight Plan XX?’ window is displayed.
APPENDICES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to copy the flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
215
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
DELETE A STORED FLIGHT PLAN
Individual or all stored flight plans can be deleted from the G1000 memory.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Deleting a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Press the DELETE Softkey; press the CLR Key; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’, and press
the ENT Key. The ‘Delete Flight Plan XX?’ window is displayed.
EIS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: The option to delete all stored flight plans is not available while the aircraft is in flight.
Deleting all stored flight plans:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘Delete All’ and press the ENT Key. A ‘Delete all flight plans?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete all flight plans. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT PLAN EDITING
The active flight plan or any stored flight plan can be edited. The edits made to the active flight plan affect
navigation as soon as they are entered.
AFCS
DELETING THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
The G1000 allows deleting an active flight plan. Deleting the active flight plan suspends navigation by the
G1000.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Deleting the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Delete all waypoints in flight
plan?’ window is displayed.
APPENDICES
DELETING FLIGHT PLAN ITEMS
INDEX
3) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the active flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR
Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Individual waypoints, entire airways, and entire procedures can be deleted from a flight plan. Some waypoints
in the final approach segment (such as the FAF or MAP) can not be deleted individually. Attempting to delete
a waypoint that is not allowed results in a window displaying ‘Invalid flight plan modification.’
216
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Deleting an individual waypoint from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint to be deleted.
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove XXXXX?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
EIS
Deleting an entire airway from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the white header of the airway to be deleted.
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <airway name>?’ window is displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Deleting an entire procedure from the active flight plan:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the white header of the procedure to be deleted.
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
AFCS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu and turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Remove <procedure>’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
APPENDICES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
Deleting an individual waypoint from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
INDEX
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
217
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
4) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the waypoint to be deleted.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove XXXXX?’ window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
EIS
Deleting an entire airway from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <airway name>?’ window is displayed.
4) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the white header of the airway to be deleted.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Deleting an entire procedure from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
AFCS
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the white header of the procedure to be deleted.
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
INDEX
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
218
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
5) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu and turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Remove <procedure>’.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
6) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
EIS
CHANGING FLIGHT PLAN COMMENTS (NAMES)
The comment field (or name) of each flight plan can be changed to something that is useful for identification.
Changing the active flight plan comment:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the comment field.
3) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the comment.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Changing a stored flight plan comment:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
AFCS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the comment field.
6) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the comment.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
ALONG TRACK OFFSETS
APPENDICES
A waypoint having an “along track offset” distance from an existing waypoint can be entered into a flight plan.
Along track offset waypoints lie along the path of the existing flight plan, and can be used to make the system
reach a specified altitude before or after reaching the specified flight plan waypoint. Offset distances can be
entered from 1 to 999 nm in increments of 1 nm. Entering a negative offset distance results in an along track
offset waypoint inserted before the selected waypoint, whereas entering a positive offset distance results in an
along track offset waypoint inserted after the selected waypoint. Multiple offset waypoints are allowed.
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
219
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A waypoint must be adjacent to its parent waypoint in the flight plan, so the system limits the along-track
distance to less than the length of the leg before or after the selected waypoint. If the selected waypoint is the
active waypoint, the distance is limited to less than the distance to go to the active waypoint. Assigning an along
track offset to a leg with indeterminate length is not permitted. An along track offset is not allowed at or after
the final approach fix of an approach.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
An along track offset distance cannot be modified once entered. If the along track offset distance must be
changed, the existing along track offset waypoint must be deleted and a new one created with the new offset
distance.
Along Track Offset
Waypoint and Distance
from Flight Plan Waypoint
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Along Track
Offset Waypoint
and Distance
Figure 5-83 Along Track Offset
AFCS
Entering an along track offset distance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint for the along track offset.
3) Press the ATK OFST Softkey (MFD only); or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Create ATK Offset Waypoint’, and
press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
4) Enter a positive or negative offset distance in the range of +/- 1 to 999 nm (limited by leg distances).
5) Press the ENT Key to create the offset waypoint.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the desired altitude for the offset.
INDEX
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
220
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PARALLEL TRACK
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Parallel Track (PTK) feature allows creation of a parallel course offset of 1 to 50 nm left or right of the
current flight plan. When Parallel Track is activated, the course line drawn on the map pages shows the parallel
course, and waypoint names have a lower case “p” placed after the identifier.
Using direct-to, loading an approach, a holding pattern, or editing and activating the flight plan automatically
cancels Parallel Track. Parallel Track is also cancelled if a course change occurs greater than 120° or the parallel
tracks overlap as a result of the course change.
NOTE: Vertical navigation is unavailable while the Parallel Track feature is active.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Active Flight Plan prior to Parallel Track
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selecting Parallel
Track
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-84 Active Flight Plan Window - Selecting Parallel Track
Activating parallel track:
AFCS
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Parallel Track’, and press the ENT Key. The Parallel Track Window is displayed
with the direction field highlighted.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Left’ or ‘Right’ and press the ENT Key. The ‘DISTANCE’ field is highlighted.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter a distance from 1-99 nm and press the ENT Key. ‘ACTIVATE PARALLEL
TRACK’ is highlighted.
APPENDICES
5) Press the ENT Key to activate parallel track. Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to cancel the parallel track
activation.
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
221
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Offset Direction
Offset Distance
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Activation Prompt
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-85 Parallel Track Window
Parallel Track Waypoints
- TIFTO-p
- TOP-p
- SLN-p
- HYS-p
- LAA-p
- ...
Activating Parallel Track
affects the active flight
plan from the current
position on (will not affect
an approach)
AFCS
Original Track
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Parallel Track
APPENDICES
Figure 5-86 Parallel Track Active
INDEX
If the parallel track proposed by the offset direction and distance is not allowed by the system, the activation
prompt is displayed, but disabled. Parallel Track cannot be activated if a course is set using direct-to or if the
active leg is the first leg of the departure procedure. Attempting to activate parallel track with these conditions
results in the message ‘Parallel Track Unavailable Invalid Route Geometry’. If an approach leg is active the status
indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track with the message ‘Parallel Track Unavailable
Approach Leg Active’. If the offset direction and distance results in an unreasonable route geometry the status
indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track because of invalid geometry.
222
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Subdued Prompt
(Unavailable)
Unavailable Status
Invalid
Geometry
Approach
Active
EIS
Figure 5-87 Parallel Track Unavailable
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
If the active leg is not a track between two fixes (TF) or a course to a fix (DF) leg, the status
indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track because parallel track is not available for the
active leg type.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Offset Direction &
Distance Subdued
(Unavailable)
Cancel Prompt
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Active Status
AFCS
Figure 5-88 Cancelling Parallel Track
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Cancelling parallel track:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
APPENDICES
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Parallel Track’, and press the ENT Key. The Parallel Track Window is displayed
with ‘CANCEL PARALLEL TRACK?’ highlighted.
3) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
223
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ACTIVATING A FLIGHT PLAN LEG
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Activating a flight plan leg:
The G1000 allows selection of a highlighted leg as the “active leg” (the flight plan leg which is currently
used for navigation guidance).
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the destination waypoint for the desired leg.
EIS
3) Press the ACT LEG Softkey (MFD only); or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Activate Leg’, and press the ENT Key.
A confirmation window is displayed with ‘ACTIVATE’ highlighted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the flight plan leg. To cancel, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press
the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Current
Active Leg
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected Destination
Waypoint
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Activate Leg Softkey
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-89 Active Flight Plan Page - Selecting the Leg Destination Waypoint
224
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
New Active
Flight Plan Leg
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Confirmation Window
Figure 5-90 Active Flight Plan Page - New Active Leg
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
INVERTING A FLIGHT PLAN
Any flight plan may be inverted (reversed) for navigation back to the original departure point.
Inverting the active flight plan:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. An ‘Invert Active Flight Plan?’
confirmation window is displayed.
3) Select ‘OK’.
AFCS
4) Press the ENT Key to invert and activate the active flight plan. To cancel, press the CLR Key, or highlight
‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Inverting and activating a stored flight plan:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Press the INVERT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert & Activate FPL?’, and press the ENT Key.
The ‘Invert and activate stored flight plan?’ window is displayed.
APPENDICES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
225
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT PLAN VIEWS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Information about flight plans can be viewed in more than one way. The active flight plan can be configured
to show cumulative distance over the length of the flight plan or the distance for each leg of the flight plan;
and the active flight plan can be viewed in a narrow or wide view. In the wide view, additional information is
displayed: Fuel Remaining (FUEL REM), Estimated Time Enroute (ETE), Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA), and
Bearing to the waypoint (BRG).
Switching between leg-to-leg waypoint distance and cumulative waypoint distance:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
EIS
2) Press the VIEW Softkey to display the CUM and LEG-LEG Softkeys.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the CUM Softkey to view cumulative waypoint distance, or press the LEG-LEG Softkey to view leg-to-leg
waypoint distance.
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the top level active flight plan softkeys.
Active Flight Plan Cumulative Distance
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Active Flight Plan Leg to Leg Distance
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
WIDE Softkey, NARROW Softkey, LEG-LEG Softkey, CUM Softkey
Figure 5-91 Active Flight Plan - Leg to Leg vs. Cumulative Distance
APPENDICES
Switching between wide and narrow view:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Press the VIEW Softkey to display the WIDE and NARROW Softkeys.
3) Press the WIDE Softkey to display the wide view, or press the NARROW Softkey to display the narrow view.
INDEX
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the top level active flight plan softkeys.
226
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Active Flight Plan Narrow View
Active Flight Plan Wide View
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
WIDE Softkey, NARROW Softkey, LEG-LEG Softkey, CUM Softkey
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-92 Active Flight Plan - Wide vs. Narrow View
COLLAPSING AIRWAYS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The G1000 allows airways on the active flight plan to be collapsed or expanded from the Active Flight Plan
Page/Window. When airways have been collapsed, it is indicated on the airway heading.
When airways are collapsed, leg-to-leg computed values such as DIS or ETE shown for the exit waypoint
reflect the total of all the legs on the airway that have been hidden in the collapsed display. The DTK value is
inhibited because it is not usable in this context.
AFCS
The Active Flight Plan Page always keeps the following three waypoints visible: “From” waypoint, “To”
waypoint, and “Next” waypoint. To prevent one or more of these waypoints from being hidden in a collapsed
airway segment, the airway segment that contains either the “To” or the “Next” waypoint is automatically
expanded. When an airway is loaded, airways are automatically expanded to facilitate flight plan review.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Q3.FEPOT Airway
Collapsed View
Expanded View
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 5-93 Expanded/Collapsed Airways
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
227
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Collapsing/expanding the airways in the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Collapse Airways’ or ‘Expand Airways’, and press the ENT Key. The airways are
collapsed/expanded.
CLOSEST POINT OF FPL
EIS
‘Closest Point of FPL’ calculates the bearing and closest distance at which a flight plan passes a reference
waypoint, and creates a new user waypoint along the flight plan at the location closest to a chosen reference
waypoint.
Determining the closest point along the active flight plan to a selected waypoint:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Closest Point Of FPL’’, and press the ENT Key. A window appears with the
reference waypoint field highlighted.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Enter the identifier of the reference waypoint and press the ENT Key. The G1000 displays the bearing (BRG) and
distance (DIS) to the closest point along the flight plan to the selected reference waypoint and creates a user
waypoint at this location. The name for the new user waypoint is derived from the identifier of the reference
waypoint.
USER-DEFINED HOLDING PATTERNS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
A holding pattern can be defined at any active flight plan waypoint, at the aircraft present position, or at a
direct-to waypoint.
Creating a user-defined hold at an active flight plan waypoint:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
AFCS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint for the hold.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Hold At Waypoint’, and press the ENT Key. The HOLD AT window appears with
the course field highlighted.
4) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the entry course, and press the ENT Key.
5) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘INBOUND’ or ‘OUTBOUND’ course direction, and press the ENT Key.
6) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘TIME’ or ‘DIST’ length mode, and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
7) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
8) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘RIGHT’ or ‘LEFT’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
9) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC TIME), and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
10) Press the ENT Key while ‘LOAD?’ is highlighted to insert the hold into the flight plan.
228
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Waypoint
Selected
Hold At
Wpt Menu
Selection
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Location of Hold
Hold Entry Course
Course Direction
(INBOUND or OUTBOUND)
(TIME or DIST))
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Leg Length Mode Button
Leg Length
(Time in nm or Distance in minutes)
Turn Direction
(RIGHT or LEFT)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Map of Hold Location
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Expect Further Clearance Time
APPENDICES
Load Hold in Active Flight Plan
Figure 5-94 Creating a User Defined Holding Pattern at an Active Flight Plan Waypoint
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
229
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Creating a user-defined hold at the aircraft present position:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Hold At Present Position’, and press the ENT Key. The HOLD AT window appears
with the course field highlighted.
3) If desired, use the FMS Knobs to edit the entry course, and press the ENT Key.
4) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘INBOUND’ or ‘OUTBOUND’ course direction, and press the ENT Key.
5) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘TIME’ or ‘DIST’ length mode, and press the ENT Key.
EIS
6) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
7) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘RIGHT’ or ‘LEFT’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
8) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC TIME), and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
9) Press the ENT Key while ‘ACTIVATE?’ is highlighted to create an Offroute Direct-to hold waypoint at the aircraft
present position and activate the hold.
Creating a user-defined hold at a direct-to waypoint:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press a Direct-to Key and set up the direct-to waypoint as desired, but select ‘HOLD?’ instead of ‘ACTIVATE?’
when finished (MFD or PFD).
2) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the entry course, and press the ENT Key.
3) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘INBOUND’ or ‘OUTBOUND’ course direction, and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘TIME’ or ‘DIST’ length mode, and press the ENT Key.
5) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
6) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘RIGHT’ or ‘LEFT’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC TIME), and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
8) Press the ENT Key while ‘ACTIVATE?’ is highlighted to activate the direct-to with the user-defined hold defined
at the direct-to waypoint. (If the direct-to waypoint is part of the active flight plan, the HOLD is inserted into
the active flight plan. If the direct-to waypoint is not part of the active flight plan, an off-route direct-to hold is
created.)
Exiting a user-defined hold inserted into the active flight plan:
Press the SUSP Softkey. The system will provide guidance to follow the holding pattern to the inbound course
and resume automatic waypoint sequencing.
APPENDICES
Removing a user-defined hold inserted into the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the HOLD waypoint.
INDEX
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove Holding Pattern?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) Select ‘OK’ and press the ENT Key. The holding pattern is removed from the active flight plan. Select ‘CANCEL’
and press the ENT Key to cancel the removal of the holding pattern.
230
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Removing a user-defined hold at an off-route direct-to:
1) Press a Direct To Key to display the DIRECT TO Window (PFD or MFD).
2) Press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU with the cursor on the ‘Cancel Direct-To NAV’ selection.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key. The holding pattern is removed.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Hold At
Present
Position
Menu
Selection
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Location of Hold
Hold Entry Course
Course Direction
Leg Length Mode Button
(TIME or DIST))
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
(INBOUND or OUTBOUND)
Leg Length
(Time in nm or Distance in minutes)
Turn Direction
(RIGHT or LEFT)
AFCS
Map of Hold Location
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Expect Further Clearance Time
INDEX
Activate Hold
Figure 5-95 Creating a User Defined Holding Pattern at the Aircraft Present Position
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
231
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
EIS
Waypoint
Selected
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Hold Entry Course
Location of Hold
Course Direction
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Leg Length
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
(INBOUND or OUTBOUND)
Leg Length Mode Button
(Time in nm or
Distance in minutes)
Turn Direction
(RIGHT or LEFT)
(TIME or DIST))
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Map of Hold Location
APPENDICES
Expect Further
Clearance Time
Load Hold and
Activate Direct To
Hold At Direct To
Waypoint Selection
INDEX
Figure 5-96 Creating a User Defined Holding Pattern at a Direct To Waypoint
232
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.7 VERTICAL NAVIGATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The system supports vertical path guidance and altitude constraints for the following leg types: AF,
CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FC, FD, PI, RF, and TF. Altitude constraints are not retained in stored flight plans.
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
EIS
The G1000 system Vertical Navigation (VNV) feature provides vertical profile guidance during the enroute
and terminal phases of flight. Guidance based on specified altitudes at waypoints in the active flight plan or to
a direct-to waypoint is provided. It includes vertical path guidance to a descending path, which is provided as a
linear deviation from the desired path. The desired path is defined by a line joining two waypoints with specified
altitudes or as a vertical angle from a specified waypoint/altitude. The vertical waypoints are integrated into the
active flight plan. Both manual and autopilot-coupled guidance are supported.
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
Enabled (valid data)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Disabled (fields dashed)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ENBL VNV Softkey
CNCL VNV Softkey
Figure 5-97 Enabling/Disabling Vertical Navigation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Enabling VNV guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
APPENDICES
2) Press the ENBL VNV Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Enable VNV’, and press the ENT Key. Vertical
navigation is enabled, and vertical guidance begins with the waypoint shown in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box
(defaults first waypoint in the active flight plan with an altitude enabled for vertical navigation (e.g., HABUK)).
Disabling VNV guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
INDEX
2) Press the CNCL VNV Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Cancel VNV’, and press the ENT Key. Vertical
navigation is disabled.
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
233
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Canceling vertical navigation results in vertical deviation (V DEV), vertical speed required (VS REQ), and time
to top of descent/bottom of descent (TIME TO TOD/BOD) going invalid. The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI)
and Required Vertical Speed Indicator (RVSI) on the PFD are removed, and the V DEV, VS REQ, and TIME TO
TOD items displayed in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box are dashed. VNV remains disabled until manually
enabled. Vertical guidance in reversionary mode can only be enabled for a direct-to waypoint.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The G1000 allows a vertical navigation direct-to to any waypoint in the active flight plan with an altitude
constraint “designated” for vertical guidance. Pressing the VNV Direct-to Softkey on the Active Flight Plan Page
allows the flight plan to be flown, while vertical guidance based on the altitude constraint at the VNV direct-to
waypoint is provided. The altitude change begins immediately and is spread along the flight plan from current
position to the vertical direct-to waypoint, not just along the leg for the direct-to waypoint. A direct-to with
altitude constraint activated by pressing the Direct-to Key also provides vertical guidance, but would bypass
flight plan waypoints between the current position in the flight plan and the direct-to waypoint. A top of descent
(TOD) point is computed based on the default flight path angle; descent begins once the TOD is reached.
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
After VNV Direct-to
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Prior to VNV Direct-to
VNV Direct-To Softkey
VNV PROF Softkey
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-98 Vertical Navigation Direct-To
Activating a vertical navigation direct-to:
APPENDICES
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired waypoint.
NOTE: The selected waypoint must have a designated altitude constraint (cyan number) to be used. If not,
INDEX
the first waypoint in the flight plan with a designated altitude constraint is selected.
234
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3) Press the VNV Direct-To Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘VNV Direct-To’, and press the ENT Key.
An ‘Activate vertical Direct-to to: NNNNNFT at XXXXXX?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) Press the ENT Key. Vertical guidance begins to the altitude constraint for the selected waypoint.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
The vertical navigation profile can be modified by directly entering a vertical speed target (VS TGT) and/or flight
path angle (FPA) in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box.
Modifying the VS TGT and FPA:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
EIS
2) Press the VNV PROF Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select VNV Profile Window’, and press the ENT
Key. The cursor is now located in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Turn the FMS Knobs as needed to edit the values.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
ALTITUDE CONSTRAINTS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The G1000 system can use altitude constraints associated with lateral waypoints to give guidance for vertical
navigation. These altitudes are, depending on the specific instance, manually entered or retrieved from the
published altitudes in the navigation database. The navigation database only contains altitudes for procedures
that call for “Cross at” altitudes. If the procedure states “Expect to cross at,” then the altitude is not in the
database. In this case the altitude may be entered manually.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Displayed Text
Examples
Cross AT
or ABOVE
5,000 ft
Large White Text
AFCS
Large Cyan Text
Cross AT
2,300 ft
Small Cyan Text
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Cross AT
or BELOW
3,000 ft
Small Cyan Subdued
Text
Altitude Constraint
Examples
Small White Text with
Altitude Restriction Bar
APPENDICES
Figure 5-99 Waypoint Altitude Constraints
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
235
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
White Text
Cyan Text
Cyan Subdued Text
Large Altitude calculated by the system
Text estimating the altitude of the aircraft as
it passes over the navigation point. This
altitude is provided as a reference and is
not designated to be used in determining
vertical speed and deviation guidance.
Altitude has been entered manually.
Altitude is designated for use in giving
vertical speed and deviation guidance.
Altitude does not match the published
altitude in navigation database or no
published altitude exists.
The system cannot use this
altitude in determining vertical
speed and deviation guidance
because of an invalid constraint
condition.
Small
Text
Altitude is designated for use in giving
vertical speed and deviation guidance.
Altitude has been retrieved from the
navigation database or has been entered
manually and matches a published
altitude in the navigation database.
The system cannot use this
altitude in determining vertical
speed and deviation guidance
because of an invalid constraint
condition.
Altitude is not designated to be used in
determining vertical speed and deviation
guidance. Altitude has been retrieved
from the navigation database and is
provided as a reference.
Table 5-8 Altitude Constraint Size and Color Coding
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Altitudes associated with approach procedures are “auto-designated”. This means the system automatically
uses the altitudes loaded with the approach for giving vertical speed and deviation guidance. Note that these
altitudes are displayed as cyan text up to, but not including, the FAF. The FAF is always a “reference only”
altitude and cannot be designated, unless the selected approach does not provide vertical guidance. In this case,
the FAF altitude can be designated.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Altitudes that have been designated for use in vertical guidance can be “un-designated” using the CLR Key.
The altitude is now displayed only as a reference. It is not used to give vertical guidance. Other displayed
altitudes may change due to re-calculations or be rendered invalid as a result of manually changing an altitude
to a non-designated altitude.
Designating a waypoint altitude to be used for vertical guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
AFCS
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter editing mode.
4) Press the ENT Key. The altitude is now shown in cyan, indicating it is usable for vertical guidance.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Designating a procedure waypoint altitude to be used for vertical guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude.
INDEX
APPENDICES
3) Press the ENT Key. The altitude is now shown in cyan, indicating it is usable for vertical guidance.
236
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Altitude constraints are displayed and entered in feet mean sea level (MSL) values to the nearest hundred. An
altitude constraint in feet above ground level (AGL) format is supported for airports. When a database altitude
restriction is displayed, the G1000 allows entry of a different altitude when creating a waypoint, effectively
overriding the database restriction (only before the FAF). When a database altitude restriction of type “AT or
ABOVE” or “AT or BELOW” is activated, the system uses the “AT” portion of the restriction to define the vertical
profile.
An altitude constraint is invalid if:
• Meeting the constraint requires the aircraft to climb
• Meeting the constraint requires the maximum flight path angle or maximum vertical speed to be exceeded
EIS
• The altitude constraint results in a TOD behind the aircraft present position
• The constraint is within a leg type for which altitude constraints are not supported
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• The altitude constraint is added to the FAF of an approach that provides vertical guidance (i.e., ILS or GPS
SBAS approach)
• The altitude constraint is added to a waypoint past the FAF.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Entering/modifying an altitude constraint:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Enter an altitude constraint value using the FMS Knobs. To enter altitudes as a flight level, turn the small
FMS Knob counter-clockwise past zero or clockwise past 9 on the first character, and the system automatically
changes to show units of Flight Level. Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to highlight the first zero and enter
the three digit flight level.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the altitude constraint; if the selected waypoint is an airport, an additional choice
is displayed. Turn the small FMS Knob to choose ‘MSL’ or ‘AGL’, and press the ENT Key to accept the altitude.
AFCS
Altitude constraints can be modified or deleted after having been added to the flight plan. In the event
an altitude constraint is deleted and the navigation database contains an altitude restriction for the lateral
waypoint, the G1000 displays the altitude restriction from the database provided no predicted altitude
can be provided. The G1000 also provides a way to reinstate a published altitude constraint that has been
edited.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Deleting an altitude constraint provided by the navigation database:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
APPENDICES
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove VNV altitude constraint?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) Select ‘OK’ and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
237
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Deleting an altitude constraint that has been manually entered:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’ confirmation window is
displayed.
4) Select ‘REMOVE’ and press the ENT Key. The manually entered altitude is deleted (it is replaced by a system
calculated altitude, if available).
EIS
Reverting a manually entered altitude constraint back to the navigation database value:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’ confirmation window is
displayed.
4) Select ‘REVERT’ and press the ENT Key. The altitude is changed to the navigation database value.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Modifying a system calculated altitude constraint:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the CLR Key. An ‘Edit or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’ confirmation window is
displayed.
4) Select ‘EDIT’ and press the ENT Key.
5) Edit the value using the FMS Knobs, and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
238
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.8 PROCEDURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 can access the whole range of instrument procedures available. Departures (DPs), arrivals (STARs),
and non-precision and precision approaches (APPRs) are stored within the database and can be loaded using the
Procedures (PROC) Key.
EIS
The selected procedure for the departure or arrival airport is added to the active flight plan. No waypoints are
required to be in the active flight plan to load procedures; however, if the departure and arrival airport are already
loaded, the procedure loading window defaults to the appropriate airport, saving some time selecting the correct
airport on the Procedure Loading Page. Whenever an approach is selected, the choice to either “load” or “activate”
is given. “Loading” adds the approach to the end of the flight plan without immediately using it for navigation
guidance. This allows continued navigation via the intermediate waypoints in the original flight plan, but keeps
the procedure available on the Active Flight Plan Page for quick activation when needed. “Activating” also adds
the procedure to the end of the flight plan but immediately begins to provide guidance to the first waypoint in
the approach.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The system adds terminal procedures to the flight plan based on leg types coded within that procedure in the
navigation database. If the terminal procedure in the flight plan contains an identifier like ‘6368ft’, that indicates
a leg that terminates when the specified altitude (6368 feet) has been exceeded. A heading leg in the flight plan
displays ‘hdg’ preceding the DTK (e.g. ‘hdg 008°’). A flight plan leg requiring the pilot to manually initiate
sequencing to the next leg displays ‘MANSEQ’ as the identifier.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Heading Leg Terminating at the
Specified Altitude
Manually Sequenced Heading Leg
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-100 Procedure Leg Identifiers
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
239
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
DEPARTURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Departure Procedure (DP) is loaded at the departure airport in the flight plan. Only one departure can be
loaded at a time in a flight plan. If a departure is loaded when another departure is already in the active flight
plan, the new departure replaces the previous departure. The route is defined by selection of a departure, the
transition waypoints, and a runway.
LOADING A DEPARTURE INTO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
Loading a departure into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
EIS
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘SELECT DEPARTURE’.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the ENT Key. The Departure Loading Page is displayed.
7) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key. ‘LOAD?’ is highlighted.
5) Select a departure from the list and press the ENT Key.
6) Select a runway (if required) and press the ENT Key.
8) Press the ENT Key to load the departure procedure.
Available Procedure Actions
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Departure Airport
APPENDICES
Loaded Procedures
Departure Preview
Departure Choices
INDEX
Figure 5-101 Departure Selection
240
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selected Departure
Loaded Departure
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys
Figure 5-102 Departure Loading
Viewing available departures at an airport:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), press the DP Softkey. The Departure Information
Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport information Page.
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Departure. The departure is previewed on the map.
AFCS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available departures. Press the ENT Key to select the departure. The cursor
moves to the Runway box. The departure is previewed on the map.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runways. Press the ENT Key to select the runway. The cursor
moves to the Transition box (only if there are available transitions). The departure is previewed on the map.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The cursor
moves to the Sequence box. The departure is previewed on the map.
7) Press the INFO-1/2 Softkey to return to the Airport Information Page.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
241
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Loading a departure into the active flight plan from the Departure Information Page:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), press the DP Softkey. The Departure Information
Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport information Page.
3) Select a different departure, if desired.
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Departure. The departure is previewed on the map.
EIS
b) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available departures. Press the ENT Key to select the departure. The
cursor moves to the Runway box. The departure is previewed on the map.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
c) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runways. Press the ENT Key to select the runway. The cursor
moves to the Transition box (only if there are available transitions). The departure is previewed on the map.
d) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The
cursor moves to the Sequence box. The departure is previewed on the map.
4) Press the MENU Key to display the Departure Information Page Menu.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Load Departure’.
6) Press the ENT Key to load the departure procedure into the active flight plan.
REMOVING A DEPARTURE FROM THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When plans change while flying IFR, departures can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
Removing a departure procedure from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Departure’.
AFCS
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the departure procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the departure header in the active flight plan.
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the departure procedure.
APPENDICES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
INDEX
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
242
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ARRIVALS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) can be loaded at any airport that has one available. Only one arrival
can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. If an arrival is loaded when another arrival is already in the active
flight plan, the new arrival replaces the previous arrival. The route is defined by selection of an arrival, the
transition waypoints, and a runway.
LOADING AN ARRIVAL INTO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
Loading an arrival into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
EIS
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘SELECT ARRIVAL’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Arrival Loading Page is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.
5) Select an arrival from the list and press the ENT Key.
6) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
7) Select a runway (if required) and press the ENT Key. ‘LOAD?’ is highlighted.
8) Press the ENT Key to load the arrival procedure.
Available Procedure Actions
Destination Airport
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Arrival Preview
Arrival Choices
APPENDICES
Loaded Procedures
Figure 5-103 Arrival Selection
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
243
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Loaded Arrival
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected Arrival
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys
Figure 5-104 Arrival Loading
Viewing available arrivals at an airport:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), press the STAR Softkey. The Arrival Information
Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport Information Page.
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
AFCS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Arrival. The arrival is previewed on the map.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available arrivals. Press the ENT Key to select the arrival. The cursor moves
to the Transition box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The cursor
moves to the Runway box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runways. Press the ENT Key to select the runway. The cursor
moves to the Sequence box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
INDEX
APPENDICES
7) Press the INFO-1 Softkey or the INFO-2 Softkey to return to the Airport Information Page.
244
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Loading an arrival into the active flight plan from the Arrival Information Page:
1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), press the STAR Softkey. The Arrival Information
Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport information Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
3) Select a different arrival, if desired.
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the arrival. The arrival is previewed on the map.
EIS
b) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available arrivals. Press the ENT Key to select the arrival. The cursor
moves to the Transition box (only if there are available transitions). The arrival is previewed on the map.
c) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The
cursor moves to the Runway box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
d) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runways. Press the ENT Key to select the runway. The cursor
moves to the Sequence box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
4) Press the MENU Key to display the Arrival Information Page Menu.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Load Arrival’.
6) Press the ENT Key to load the arrival procedure into the active flight plan.
REMOVING AN ARRIVAL FROM THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
When plans change while flying IFR, arrivals can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Removing an arrival from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Arrival’.
AFCS
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the arrival procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the arrival header in the active flight plan.
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the arrival procedure.
APPENDICES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
245
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
APPROACHES
NOTE: If certain GPS parameters (SBAS, RAIM, etc.) are not available, some published approach procedures
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
for the desired airport may not be displayed in the list of available approaches.
EIS
An Approach Procedure (APPR) can be loaded at any airport that has one available, and provides guidance
for non-precision and precision approaches to airports with published instrument approach procedures.
Only one approach can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. If an approach is loaded when another approach
is already in the active flight plan, the new approach replaces the previous approach. The route is defined by
selection of an approach and the transition waypoints.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Whenever an approach is selected, the choice to either “load” or “activate” is given. “Loading” adds the
approach to the end of the flight plan without immediately using it for navigation guidance. This allows
continued navigation via the intermediate waypoints in the original flight plan, but keeps the procedure
available on the Active Flight Plan Page for quick activation when needed. “Activating” also adds the
procedure to the end of the flight plan but immediately begins to provide guidance to the first waypoint in
the approach.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When selecting an approach, a “GPS” designation to the right of the procedure name indicates the procedure
can be flown using the GPS receiver. Some procedures do not have this designation, meaning the GPS
receiver can be used for supplemental navigation guidance only. If the GPS receiver cannot be used for
primary guidance, the appropriate navigation receiver must be used for the selected approach (e.g., VOR or
ILS). The final course segment of ILS approaches, for example, must be flown by tuning the NAV receiver to
the proper frequency and selecting that NAV receiver on the CDI.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The G1000 SBAS GPS allows for flying LNAV, LNAV+V, LNAV/VNAV, LP, LP+V and LPV approach service
levels according to the published chart. The ‘+V’ designation adds advisory vertical guidance for assistance in
maintaining a constant vertical glidepath similar to an ILS glideslope on approach. This guidance is displayed
on the system PFD in the same location as the ILS glideslope using a magenta diamond. The active approach
service level is annunciated on the HSI as shown in the following table
246
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Example on HSI
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Approach Service Level
EIS
- LNAV, LNAV+V, L/VNAV, LP, LP+V, LPV
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
HSI Annunciation
Description
LNAV
RNAV GPS approach using published LNAV
minima
LNAV+V
RNAV GPS approach using published LNAV
minima. Advisory vertical guidance is provided
L/VNAV
RNAV GPS approach using published LNAV/
(available only if VNAV minima (downgrades to LNAV if SBAS
SBAS available) unavailable)
LP
RNAV GPS approach using published LP minima
(available only if (downgrades to LNAV if SBAS unavailable)
SBAS available)
LP+V
RNAV GPS approach using published LP minima
(available only if Advisory vertical guidance is provided
SBAS available) (downgrades to LNAV if SBAS unavailable)
LPV
RNAV GPS approach using published LPV
(available only if minima
SBAS available)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Table 5-9 Approach Types
LOADING AN APPROACH INTO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
Loading an approach into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘SELECT APPROACH’, and press the ENT Key. The Approach Loading Page is displayed.
3) Select the airport and approach:
a) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
b) Select an approach from the list and press the ENT Key.
Or:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
a) If necessary, push the FMS Knob to exit the approach list, and use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor
to the APPROACH CHANNEL field.
b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the approach channel number, and press the ENT Key to accept the approach
channel number. The airport and approach are selected.
4) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
5) Minimums
a) To set ‘MINIMUMS’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’ or ‘TEMP COMP’ or ‘RAD ALT’, and press
the ENT Key. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
b) If ‘TEMP COMP’ was selected, the cursor moves to the temperature field. Turn the small FMS Knob to
select the temperature, and press the ENT Key.
Or:
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
247
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
6) Press the ENT Key with ‘LOAD?’ highlighted to load the approach procedure; or turn the large FMS Knob to
highlight ‘ACTIVATE’ and press the ENT Key to load and activate the approach procedure.
NOTE: When GPS is not approved for the selected final approach course, the message ‘NOT APPROVED
FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the approach, but the HSI must to be switched to a NAV
receiver to fly the final course of the approach.
Available Procedure Actions
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Destination Airport
Loaded Procedures
Approach Preview
Approach Choices
Figure 5-105 Approach Selection
Loaded Approach
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Selected Approach
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys
LOAD or ACTIVATE? Annunciation
Figure 5-106 Approach Loading
248
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Viewing available approaches at an airport:
1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), press the APR Softkey. The Approach
Information Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport information Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob, then turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Approach. The approach is previewed on
the map.
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available approaches. Press the ENT Key to select the approach. The
cursor moves to the Transition box. The approach is previewed on the map.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The cursor
moves to the Minimums box. The approach is previewed on the map.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select minimums on or off. Press the ENT Key.
a) When minimums are selected on, the cursor moves to the minimum altitude field . Use the small FMS Knob
to select the altitude. Press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
b) If temperature compensated minimums was selected, the cursor moves to the temperature field. Use the
small FMS Knob to select the temperature. Press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to the Sequence box. The
approach is previewed on the map.
Or:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When minimums are selected off, the cursor moves to the Sequence box. The approach is previewed on the
map.
7) Press the INFO-1 or the INFO-2 Softkey to return to the Airport Information Page.
Loading an approach into the active flight plan from the Nearest Airport Page:
1) Select the Nearest Airports Page.
AFCS
2) Press the FMS Knob, then turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired nearest airport. The airport is
previewed on the map.
3) Press the APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Approach Window’, and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired approach.
5) Press the LD APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Load Approach’, and press the ENT Key. The
Approach Loading Page is displayed with the transitions field highlighted.
6) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired transition, and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
7) Minimums
a) To set ‘MINIMUMS’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’ or ‘TEMP COMP’ or ‘RAD ALT’, and press
the ENT Key. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
b) If ‘TEMP COMP’ was selected, the cursor moves to the temperature field. Turn the small FMS Knob to
select the temperature, and press the ENT Key.
Or:
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
249
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key. The ‘LOAD?’ field is highlighted.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
8) Press the ENT Key with ‘LOAD?’ highlighted to load the approach procedure; or turn the large FMS Knob to
highlight ‘ACTIVATE’ and press the ENT Key to load and activate the approach procedure. The system continues
navigating the current flight plan until the approach is activated. When GPS is not approved for the selected
final approach course, the message ‘NOT APPROVED FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the
approach, but the HSI must to be switched to a NAV receiver to fly the final course of the approach.
ACTIVATING AN APPROACH
EIS
A previously loaded approach can be activated from the Procedures Window.
Activating a previously loaded approach:
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed with ‘Activate Approach’ highlighted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the ENT Key to activate the approach.
In many cases, it may be easiest to “load” the full approach while still some distance away, enroute to the
destination airport. Later, if vectored to final, use the steps above to select ‘Activate Vector-To-Final’ — which
makes the inbound course to the FAF waypoint active.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Activating a previously loaded approach with vectors to final:
1) Press the PROC Key to display the Procedures Window.
2) Highlight ‘ACTIVATE VECTOR-TO-FINAL’ and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Loading and activating an approach using the MENU Key:
1) From the Approach Loading Page, press the MENU Key. The page menu is displayed with ‘Load & Activate
Approach’ highlighted.
AFCS
2) Press the ENT Key. When GPS is not approved for the selected final approach course, the message ‘NOT
APPROVED FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the approach, but the HSI must to be switched to
a NAV receiver to fly the final course of the approach.
REMOVING AN APPROACH FROM THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When plans change while flying IFR, approaches can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
Removing an approach from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
APPENDICES
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Approach’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the approach procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Or:
INDEX
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the approach header in the active flight plan.
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the approach procedure.
250
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
MISSED APPROACH
Activating a missed approach in the active flight plan:
Press the Go Around Button.
Or:
Fly past the MAP, and press the SUSP Softkey on the PFD.
EIS
Or:
1) Press the PROC Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘ACTIVATE MISSED APPROACH’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The aircraft automatically sequences to the MAHP.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
In this missed approach procedure, the altitude immediately following the MAP (in this case ‘6368ft’) is
not part of the published procedure. It is simply a Course to Altitude (CA) leg which guides the aircraft along
the runway centerline until the altitude required to safely make the first turn toward the MAHP is exceeded.
This altitude is provided by the navigation database, and may be below, equal to, or above the published
minimums for this approach. In this case, if the aircraft altitude is below the specified altitude (6,368 feet)
after crossing the MAP, a direct-to is established to provide a course on runway heading until an altitude of
6,368 feet is reached. After reaching 6,368 feet, a direct-to is established to the published MAHP (in this case
MOGAL). If the aircraft altitude is above the specified altitude after crossing the MAP, a direct-to is established
to the published fix (MOGAL) to begin the missed approach procedure.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Course to Altitude Leg
APPENDICES
Figure 5-107 Course to Altitude
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
INDEX
In some missed approach procedures this Course to Altitude leg may be part of the published procedure.
For example, a procedure may dictate a climb to 5,500 feet, then turn left and proceed to the Missed Approach
Hold Point (MAHP). In this case, the altitude would appear in the list of waypoints as ‘5500ft’. Again, if the
aircraft altitude is lower than the prescribed altitude, a direct-to is established on a Course to Altitude leg
when the missed approach procedure is activated.
251
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
TEMPERATURE COMPENSATED ALTITUDE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If desired, the system can compensate the loaded approach altitudes based on a pilot-supplied temperature
at the destination. For example, if the pilot enters a destination temperature of -40º C, the system increases
the approach altitudes accordingly. A temperature compensated altitude is displayed in slanted text.
Activating temperature compensated altitude:
1) From the Active Flight Plan Page, press the MENU Key. The Page Menu is displayed.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Temperature Compensation’.
EIS
3) Press the ENT Key. The TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION Window is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Use the small FMS Knob to select the temperature at the <airport>. The compensated altitude is computed as
the temperature is selected.
NOTE: The temperature at the destination can be entered in the TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION Window
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
on the MFD, or in the REFERENCES Window on the PFD. There is only one compensation temperature for
the system, therefore, changing the temperature will affect both the loaded approach altitudes and the
minimums. Refer to the Flight Instruments section for information about applying temperature compensation
to the MDA/DH.
5) Press the ENT Key. ‘ACTIVATE COMPENSATION?’ is highlighted.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Press the ENT Key. The compensated altitudes for the approach are shown in the flight plan.
AFCS
Selected
Temperature
FAF Altitude
Compensated
Altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Temperature
Compensation
Selected
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-108 Temperature Compensation
252
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ACTIVATE
COMPENSATION?
Highlighted
CANCEL
COMPENSATION?
Highlighted
EIS
Figure 5-109 Activating/Cancelling Temperature Compensation
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Compensated
Altitudes
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Uncompensated
Altitudes
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-110 Temperature Compensation in the Active Flight Plan
Cancelling temperature compensated altitude:
1) From the Active Flight Plan Page, press the MENU Key. The Page Menu is displayed.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Temperature Compensation’.
AFCS
3) Press the ENT Key. The TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION Window is displayed.
4) Press the ENT Key. ‘CANCEL COMPENSATION?’ is highlighted.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Press the ENT Key. The temperature compensated altitude at the FAF is cancelled.
NOTE: Activating/cancelling temperature compensation for the loaded approach altitudes does not select/
deselect temperature compensated minimums (MDA/DH), nor does selecting/deselecting temperature
compensated minimums activate/cancel temperature compensated approach altitudes.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
253
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.9 TRIP PLANNING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G1000 allows the pilot to view trip planning information, fuel information, and other information for
a specified flight plan or flight plan leg based on automatic data, or based on manually entered data. Weight
planning is also available, based on manually entered fuel data and the active flight plan (to estimate remaining
fuel).
TRIP PLANNING
EIS
All of the input of data needed for calculation and viewing of the statistics is done on the Trip Planning Page
located in the AUX Page Group.
Selected Flight Plan Segment
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- FPL Number/Cumulative Legs (CUM or REM) or Leg Number (NN)
- Waypoints Defining Selected Flight Plan/Flight Plan Leg
Trip Planning Page Mode
- Automatic/Manual
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Preview of Selected
Flight Plan/
Flight Plan Leg
Trip Input Data (sensor/pilot)
- Departure Time (local)
- Ground Speed
- Fuel Flow
- Fuel On Board Aircraft
- Calibrated Airspeed
- Indicated Altitude
- Barometric Pressure
- Total Air Temperature
Trip Statistics
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Desired Track Distance Est. Time Enroute Est. Time of Arrival Enroute Safe Altitude Sunrise Time (local) Sunset Time (local) -
Other Statistics
- Density Altitude
- True Airspeed (TAS)
AFCS
Fuel Statistics
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Efficiency Total Endurance Remaining Fuel Remaining Endurance Fuel Required Total Range -
Softkeys
- Automatic/Manual Page Mode
- Flight Plan/Waypoint Mode
Figure 5-111 Trip Planning Page
APPENDICES
The trip planning inputs are based on sensor inputs (automatic page mode) or on pilot inputs (manual page
mode). Some additional explanation of the sources for some of the inputs is as follows:
• Departure time (DEP TIME) - This defaults to the current time in automatic page mode. The computations
are from the aircraft present position, so the aircraft is always just departing.
• Calibrated airspeed (CALIBRATED AS) - The primary source is from the air data system, and the secondary
source of information is GPS ground speed.
INDEX
• Indicated altitude (IND ALTITUDE) - The primary source is the barometric altitude, and the secondary source
of information is GPS altitude.
254
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TRIP STATISTICS
The trip statistics are calculated based on the selected starting and ending waypoints and the trip planning
inputs.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In flight plan mode (FPL) with a stored flight plan selected (NN), and the entire flight plan (CUM) selected,
the waypoints are the starting and ending waypoints of the selected flight plan.
In flight plan mode (FPL) with a stored flight plan selected (NN), and a specific leg (NN) selected, the
waypoints are the endpoints of the selected leg.
EIS
In flight plan mode (FPL) with the active flight plan selected (00), and the remaining flight plan (REM)
selected, the ‘from’ waypoint is the present position of the aircraft and the ‘to’ waypoint is the endpoint of the
active flight plan.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
In flight plan mode (FPL) with the active flight plan selected (00), and a specific leg (NN) selected, the
‘from’ waypoint is the current aircraft position and the ‘to’ waypoint is the endpoint of the selected leg.
In waypoint (WPTS) mode these are manually selected waypoints (if there is an active flight plan, these
default to the endpoints of the active leg).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Some of the calculated trip statistics are dashed when the selected leg of the active flight plan has already
been flown.
• Desired Track (DTK) - DTK is shown as nnn° and is the desired track between the selected waypoints.
It is dashed unless only a single leg is selected.
• Distance (DIS) - The distance is shown in tenths of units up to 99.9, and in whole units up to 9999.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Estimated time enroute (ETE) - ETE is shown as hours:minutes until less than an hour, then it is shown
as minutes:seconds.
• Estimated time of arrival (ETA) - ETA is shown as hours:minutes and is the local time at the
destination.
- If in waypoint mode then the ETA is the ETE added to the departure time.
AFCS
- If a flight plan other than the active flight plan is selected it shows the ETA by adding to the departure
time all of the ETEs of the legs up to and including the selected leg. If the entire flight plan is selected,
then the ETA is calculated as if the last leg of the flight plan was selected.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- If the active flight plan is selected the ETA reflects the current position of the aircraft and the current
leg being flown. The ETA is calculated by adding to the current time the ETEs of the current leg up to
and including the selected leg. If the entire flight plan is selected, then the ETA is calculated as if the
last leg of the flight plan was selected.
APPENDICES
• Enroute safe altitude (ESA) - The ESA is shown as nnnnnFT
• Destination sunrise and sunset times (SUNRISE, SUNSET) - These times are shown as hours:minutes
and are the local time at the destination.
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
255
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FUEL STATISTICS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The fuel statistics are calculated based on the selected starting and ending waypoints and the trip planning
inputs. Some of the calculated trip statistics are dashed when the selected leg of the active flight plan has
already been flown.
• Fuel efficiency (EFFICIENCY) - This value is calculated by dividing the current ground speed by the
current fuel flow.
• Time of fuel endurance (TOTAL ENDUR) - This time is shown as hours:minutes. This value is obtained
by dividing the amount of fuel on board by the current fuel flow.
EIS
• Fuel on board upon reaching end of selected leg (REM FUEL) - This value is calculated by taking the
amount of fuel onboard and subtracting the fuel required to reach the end of the selected leg.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Fuel endurance remaining at end of selected leg (REM ENDUR) - This value is calculated by taking the time
of fuel endurance and subtracting the estimated time enroute to the end of the selected leg.
• Fuel required for trip (FUEL REQ) - This value is calculated by multiplying the time to go by the fuel
flow.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Total range at entered fuel flow (TOTAL RANGE) - This value is calculated by multiplying the time of fuel
endurance by the ground speed.
OTHER STATISTICS
These statistics are calculated based on the system sensor inputs or the manual trip planning inputs.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Density altitude (DENSITY ALT)
• True airspeed (TRUE AIRSPEED)
The pilot may select automatic (AUTO) or manual (MANUAL) page mode, and flight plan (FPL) or waypoint
(WPTS) mode. In automatic page mode, only the FPL, LEG, or waypoint IDs are editable (based on FPL/WPTS
selection).
AFCS
Selected Flight Plan NN -
Selected Leg(s)
00 is Active FPL
01-99 are Stored FPLs
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Starting and Ending Waypoint of
Selected Flight Plan Segment
Stored Flight Plan
- CUM: Beginning to End of FPL
- NN: Beginning to End of Selected Leg
Active Flight Plan
- REM: Pres. Pos. to End of FPL
- NN: Pres. Pos. to End of Selected Leg
Figure 5-112 Trip Planning Page - Flight Plan Mode
APPENDICES
Selected Flight Plan
Selected Leg(s)
Not Available
Not Available
Selected Starting and Ending Waypoints
INDEX
Figure 5-113 Trip Planning Page - Waypoint Mode
256
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting automatic or manual page mode:
Press the AUTO Softkey or the MANUAL Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Auto Mode’ or ‘Manual
Mode’, and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting flight plan or waypoint mode:
Press the FPL Softkey or the WPTS Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Flight Plan Mode’ or ‘Waypoints
Mode’, and press the ENT Key.
Selecting a flight plan and leg for trip statistics:
EIS
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor in the flight plan number field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired flight plan number.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘CUM’ or ‘REM’. The statistics for each leg can be viewed by turning the
small FMS Knob to select the desired leg. The Inset Map also displays the selected data.
Selecting waypoints for waypoint mode:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the WPTS Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Waypoints Mode’, and press the ENT Key. The
cursor is positioned in the waypoint field directly below the FPL field.
2) Turn the FMS knobs to select the desired waypoint (or select from the Page Menu ‘Set WPT to Present Position’
if that is what is desired), and press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to the second waypoint field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Turn the FMS knobs to select the desired waypoint, and press the ENT Key. The statistics for the selected leg
are displayed.
In manual page mode, the other eight trip input data fields must be entered by the pilot, in addition to flight
plan and leg selection.
Entering manual data for trip statistics calculations:
AFCS
1) Press the MANUAL Softkey or select ‘Manual Mode’ from the Page Menu, and press the ENT Key. The cursor
may now be positioned in any field in the top right two boxes.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the FMS Knobs to move the cursor onto the DEP TIME field and enter the desired value. Press the ENT Key.
The statistics are calculated using the new value and the cursor moves to the next entry field. Repeat until all
desired values have been entered.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
257
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.10 RAIM PREDICTION
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
RAIM (Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring) is a GPS receiver function that performs a consistency
check on all tracked satellites. RAIM ensures that the available satellite geometry allows the receiver to calculate
a position within a specified RAIM protection limit (2.0 nm for oceanic, 2.0 nm for enroute, 1.0 nm for terminal,
and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). During oceanic, enroute, and terminal phases of flight, RAIM is
available nearly 100% of the time. The RAIM prediction function also indicates whether RAIM is available at a
specified date and time. RAIM computations predict satellite coverage within ±15 min of the specified arrival
date and time. Because of the tighter protection limit on approaches, there may be times when RAIM is not
available. RAIM prediction must be initiated manually if there is concern over SBAS coverage at the destination
or some other reason that compromises navigation precision. If RAIM is not predicted to be available for the
final approach course, the approach does not become active. If RAIM is not available when crossing the FAF, the
missed approach procedure must be flown.
RAIM PREDICTION Box
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Prediction Waypoint
- Arrival Time
- Arrival Date
- RAIM Status
RAIM Softkey
SBAS Softkey
(displays SBAS Selection)
(displays RAIM
PREDICTION)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-114 RAIM Prediction
258
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Predicting RAIM availability at a selected waypoint:
1) Select the AUX-GPS Status Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob. The RAIM Prediction ‘WAYPOINT’ field is highlighted.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window with a
waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway waypoints).
4) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint; or select a waypoint from the submenu of
waypoints and press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
EIS
5) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
6) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7) Press the ENT Key with ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’ highlighted to begin the computation.
Predicting RAIM availability at the aircraft present position:
1) Select the AUX-GPS Status Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the FMS Knob. The RAIM Prediction ‘WAYPOINT’ field is highlighted.
3) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Set WPT to Present Position’, and press the ENT Key.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
5) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
7) Press the ENT Key with ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’ highlighted to begin the computation.
Status of the RAIM computation for the selected waypoint, time, and date is displayed at the bottom of the
RAIM PREDICTION Box as follows:
• ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’ - RAIM has not been computed.
AFCS
• ‘COMPUTING AVAILABILITY’ - RAIM calculation is in progress.
• ‘RAIM AVAILABLE’ - RAIM is predicted to be available.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• ‘RAIM NOT AVAILABLE’ - RAIM is predicted to be unavailable.
The Satellite Based Augmentation System (SBAS) provides increased navigation accuracy when available. SBAS
can be enabled or disabled manually on the GPS Status Page.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
259
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SBAS Status
SBAS SELECTION Box
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
- EGNOS Enable/Disable
- MSAS Enable/Disable
- WAAS Enable/Disable
RAIM Softkey
SBAS Softkey
(displays SBAS Selection)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
(displays RAIM
PREDICTION)
Figure 5-115 SBAS Display - Active
Enabling/Disabling SBAS:
1) Select the AUX-GPS Status Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the SBAS Softkey.
3) Press the FMS Knob, and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘EGNOS’, ‘MSAS’ or ‘WAAS’.
AFCS
4) Press the ENT Key to disable SBAS. Press the ENT Key again to enable SBAS.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
SBAS Status
SBAS SELECTION Box
APPENDICES
- EGNOS Enable/Disable
- MSAS Enable/Disable
- WAAS Enable/Disable
INDEX
RAIM Softkey
(displays RAIM
PREDICTION)
260
SBAS Softkey
(displays SBAS Selection)
Figure 5-116 SBAS Display - Disabled
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.11 NAVIGATING A FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following discussion is an example of navigating a flight plan with the SBAS capable GPS system while the
G1000 provides vertical guidance through descents. A lateral flight plan (LNAV) would be navigated in much the
same way, but would not include vertical guidance when the final approach course is active.
NOTE: The following example flight plan is for instructional purposes only. All database information depicted
should be considered not current.
EIS
The example is a flight plan from KMKC to KCOS filed using the TIFTO2 departure, various Victor Airways,
and the DBRY1 arrival with the transition at TBE. The flight plan includes an enroute altitude of 12,000 feet, an
LPV (WAAS) RNAV approach selected for runway 35R, and a missed approach executed at the Missed Approach
Point (MAP). A few enroute changes are demonstrated.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Prior to departure, the TIFTO2 departure, the airways, and the DBRY1 arrival at KCOS are loaded. See the
Procedures section for loading departures and arrivals. Note the magenta arrow in Figure 5-117 indicating the
active departure leg.
After takeoff, ATC assigns a heading of 240º.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Figure 5-117 shows the aircraft on the assigned heading of 240º. ‘TERM’ (Terminal) is the current CDI flight
phase displayed on the HSI indicating 1.0 nm CDI scaling.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-117 Assigned Heading of 240º
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
261
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) ATC now assigns routing to join V4. A heading of 290º is assigned to intercept V4. The aircraft turns to heading
290° as seen in Figure 5-118.
Figure 5-118 Assigned Heading of 290º
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Enter V4 into the flight plan.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
262
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
b) The desired entry point for V4 (TOP) must be entered. Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired
flight plan insertion point (SLN) as shown in Figure 5-119. When the V4 entry point (TOP) is inserted, it is
placed immediately above the highlighted waypoint (SLN).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-119 Begin Adding V4 to the Flight Plan
c) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. Enter the desired entry point for
V4, Topeka VOR (TOP), as shown in Figure 5-120.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-120 Entering V4 Entry Point
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
263
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
d) Press the ENT Key. TOP is inserted into the flight plan as in Figure 5-121.
Figure 5-121 TOP Inserted into the Flight Plan
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
e) With SLN still highlighted as in Figure 5-122, turn the small FMS Knob clockwise. The Waypoint Information
Page is displayed and the LD AIRWY Softkey is now available.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
f) Press the LD AIRWY Softkey to display the list of available airways for TOP as seen in Figure 5-122.
APPENDICES
Figure 5-122 List of Available Airways for TOP
INDEX
g) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight V4 in the list as seen in Figure 5-122.
264
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
h) Press the ENT Key. The list of available exits for V4 is now displayed as in Figure 5-123.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-123 List of Available Exits for V4
If necessary, turn either FMS Knob to select the desired exit. In this case Salina VOR (SLN) is selected as in
Figure 5-123.
j)
Press the ENT Key. The selected airway and exit are displayed, and the prompt “LOAD?” highlighted as in
Figure 5-124.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
i)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-124 Ready to Load V4
APPENDICES
k) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
265
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
V4 is now loaded into the flight plan as shown in Figure 5-125.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
l)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-125 V4 is Loaded in the Flight Plan
5) Making V4 the active leg of the flight plan.
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
b) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight SLN. The TO waypoint of the leg is selected in order to activate the
leg.
AFCS
c) Press the ACT LEG Softkey. The confirmation window is now displayed as in Figure 5-126. Note the TOP
to SLN leg is actually part of V4.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-126 Comfirm Active Leg
266
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
d) Verify the displayed leg is the desired leg and press the ENT Key. Note in Figure 5-127, the magenta arrow
in the flight plan window and magenta line on the map indicating V4 is now the active flight plan leg. Note
the phase of flight remained in Terminal (TERM) mode up to this point because a departure leg was active.
Since a leg after the departure is now active, the current CDI flight phase is ENR (Enroute) and CDI scaling
has changed to 2.0 nm.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-127 V4 Now Active Leg
6) The aircraft continues on heading 290º. When crosstrack distance is less than 2.0 nm, the XTK disappears from
the HSI and the CDI is positioned on the last dot indicating a 2.0 nm distance from the centerline of the next
course.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
267
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
7) As the CDI approaches center, the aircraft turns onto the active leg as seen in Figure 5-128.
Figure 5-128 Turn on to Active Leg
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) At SLN, Victor Airway 244 (V244) is intercepted. Turn prompts are displayed in the PFD Navigation Status Box
as seen in Figure 5-129.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-129 Turn to Intercept V244
268
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
9) As seen in Figure 5-130, V244 is now the active flight plan leg.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-130 V244 Now Active Leg
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
269
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
10) At Lamar VOR (LAA) V263 is intercepted. See Figure 5-131.
Figure 5-131 HYS to LAA Leg Active
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
11) ATC grants clearance to proceed direct to the OPSHN intersection to begin the arrival procedure. ATC advises
to expect an altitude of 10,000 feet at OPSHN.
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
b) Turn the large FMS Knob to select OPSHN in the flight plan list.
) Key. The Direct-to Window is now displayed as shown in Figure 5-132.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
c) Press the Direct-to (
Figure 5-132 Direct To OPSHN
270
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
d) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the VNV altitude field as shown in Figure 5-133.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-133 Enter VNV Altitude
e) An altitude of 10,000 feet is entered as requested by ATC.
f) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed in the VNV offset field as shown in Figure 5-134.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-134 Enter VNV Offset Distance
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
INDEX
g) Enter the offset, or distance from the waypoint at which to reach the selected altitude. In this case, three
miles prior to OPSHN is entered. In other words, the G1000 gives vertical guidance so the aircraft arrives
at an altitude of 10,000 feet three miles prior to OPSHN.
271
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
h) Press the ENT Key twice to activate the direct-to. Note, in Figure 5-135, the magenta arrow indicating
the direct-to OPSHN after the offset waypoint for OPSHN. The preceding offset waypoint indicates the
offset distance and altitude that were previously entered. The remaining waypoints in the loaded arrival
procedure have no database specified altitudes, therefore, dashes are displayed. Keep the CDI centered
and maintain a track along the magenta line to OPSHN.
Note the Direct-to waypoint is within the loaded arrival procedure, therefore, phase of flight scaling for the
CDI changes to Terminal Mode and is annunciated by displaying ‘TERM’ on the HSI.
NOTE: If the loaded arrival procedure has waypoints with altitude constraints retrieved from the database
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
to be used as is, the altitude must be manually accepted by placing the cursor over the desired altitude, then
pressing the ENT Key. The altitude is now displayed as cyan meaning it is used by the system to determine
vertical speed and deviation guidance.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-135 Direct-to Active
12) The aircraft is proceeding to OPSHN. The expected approach is the RNAV LPV approach to runway 35R, so it is
selected.
INDEX
APPENDICES
a) Press the PROC Key to display the Procedures Window.
272
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
b) ‘SELECT APPROACH’ should be highlighted as shown in Figure 5-136.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-136 Procedures Window
c) Press the ENT Key. A list of available approaches for the destination airport is displayed as in Figure 5-137.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-137 List of Available Approaches
d) Turn either FMS Knob to select the RNAV LPV approach for 35R as shown in Figure 5-137.
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
273
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
e) Press the ENT Key. A list of available transitions for the selected approach is displayed as in Figure 5-138.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
f) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired transition. In this case, the Initial Approach Fix (IAF) at HABUK
is used.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-138 List of Available Transitions
To set ‘MINIMUMS’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’, and press the ENT Key. Turn the small
FMS Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key.
g) Press the ENT Key.
h) Barometric Minimums
Or:
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key.
274
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-139 Barometric Minimums Set
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
i)
With ‘LOAD?’ highlighted, again press the ENT Key. The selected approach is added to the flight plan as
seen in Figure 5-140.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-140 Loaded Approach
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
275
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
13) Note the altitude constraints associated with each of the approach waypoints as seen in Figure 5-141. These
altitudes are loaded from the database and are displayed as cyan text, indicating these values are “designated”
for use in computing vertical deviation guidance.
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Note: To no longer use the displayed altitude for calculating vertical deviation guidance, perform the
following:
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
b) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired altitude.
c) Press the CLR Key.
d) Press the FMS Knob to deactivate the cursor.
After making the altitude “non-designated”, it is displayed as white text.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Altitude constraint values associated with the Final Approach Fix (FAF) and waypoints beyond the FAF
cannot be designated for vertical guidance. These altitude values are always displayed as white text, as in
Figure 5-141. Vertical guidance from the FAF and on to the Missed Approach Point (MAP) is given using
the WAAS GPS altitude source, therefore, the displayed altitude values are for reference only.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-141 Vertical Guidance is Active to the FAF
276
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
14) As the aircraft approaches OPSHN, it may be desirable to adjust the speed, or steepness of the upcoming
descent. The default Flight Path Angle (FPA) is -3.0 degrees and a required vertical speed is computed to
maintain the -3.0 FPA. To change the vertical flight path, perform the following steps.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
a) Press the VNV PROF Softkey to place the cursor in the target vertical speed field (VS TGT) as shown in
Figure 5-142.
b) At this point, the descent vertical speed can be selected, or the FPA can be selected. Turn the large FMS
Knob to select the desired selection field, then turn the small FMS Knob to enter the desired value.
EIS
Note the information now displayed in the ‘CURRENT VNV PROFILE’ box. Also, note the offset waypoint
(orange box) and gray circle are now displayed on the map. The gray circle marks the Top of Descent (TOD).
In this example, vertical guidance is provided at the TOD that results in a -3.0 degree FPA descent to an
altitude of 10,000 feet upon reaching the offset waypoint.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 5-142 Adjusting the Descent
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
c) Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
277
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
15) As seen in Figure 5-143, the aircraft is approaching TOD. Note the target vertical speed required to reach the
selected altitude. The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI) and the Required Vertical Speed Indicator (RVSI) are
now displayed on the PFD as shown in Figure 5-144. When the aircraft is within one minute of the TOD, it is
annunciated as shown in Figure 5-144, and an aural alert ‘Vertical track’ will be heard.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-143 Approaching Top of Descent (TOD)
AFCS
Target Altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Vertical Deviation
Indicator (VDI)
APPENDICES
Required Vertical
Speed Indicator
(RVSI)
INDEX
Figure 5-144 VDI & RVSI Upon Reaching Top of Descent (TOD)
278
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
16) Upon reaching TOD, a descent vertical speed is established by placing the VSI pointer in line with the RVSI as
shown in Figure 5-145.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Keep Vertical Deviation
Indicator Centered
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Align Actual Vertical Speed
with
Required Vertical Speed
Figure 5-145 VDI & RVSI Showing Correctly Established Descent
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
17) When the aircraft is one minute from the bottom of descent (BOD) it is annunciated as shown in Figure 5-146.
Upon reaching the offset waypoint for OPSHN, the aircraft is at 10,000 feet.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-146 Approaching Bottom of Descent (BOD) at OPSHN Offset Waypoint
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
279
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
18) The aircraft is approaching OPSHN. The upcoming turn and next heading are annunciated at the top left of the
PFD as seen in Figure 5-147. Initiate the turn and maneuver the aircraft on a track through the turn radius to
intercept the magenta line for the OPSHN to FSHER leg and center the CDI.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-147 Turn to intercept OPSHN to FSHER Leg
280
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
19) After passing OPSHN, the next leg of the arrival turns magenta as shown in Figure 5-148. The magenta arrow
in the flight plan list now indicates the OPSHN to FSHER leg of the arrival procedure is now active.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-148 Tracking the OPSHN to FSHER Leg
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
20) The flight continues through the arrival procedure to PYNON (see Figure 5-149). At a point 31 nm from the
destination airport, the phase of flight scaling for the CDI changes to Terminal Mode and is annunciated by
displaying ‘TERM’ on the HSI.
A descent to HABUK is in the next leg. Note the TOD point on the map. Annunciations for the upcoming turn
and descent, as well as the VDI and RVSI, appear on the PFD as the flight progresses.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
281
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
INDEX
Figure 5-149 Approaching PYNON
282
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
21) Upon passing PYNON the approach procedure automatically becomes active. The approach may be activated
at any point to proceed directly to the IAF. In this example, the aircraft has progressed through the final
waypoint of the arrival and the flight plan has automatically sequenced to the IAF as the active leg, activating
the approach procedure (see Figure 5-150).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-150 Approach is Now Active
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Note: To manually activate the approach procedure, perform the following steps:
a) Press the PROC Key.
b) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘ACTIVATE APPROACH’ as shown in Figure 5-151.
AFCS
c) Press the ENT Key to activate the approach.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-151 Manually Activate Approach
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
283
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
22) The IAF is the next waypoint. At the TOD, establish a descent vertical speed as previously discussed in Step 16.
The aircraft altitude is 9,000 feet upon reaching HABUK.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-152 Descending Turn to the Initial Approach Fix (IAF)
284
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
23) After crossing FALUR the next waypoint is the FAF. The flight phase changes to LPV on the HSI indicating the
current phase of flight is in Approach Mode and the approach service level is LPV. CDI scaling changes accordingly
and is used much like a localizer when flying an ILS approach. The RVSI is no longer displayed and the VDI
changes to the Glidepath Indicator (as shown in Figure 5-153) when the final approach course becomes active.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-153 Descending to the FAF
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The descent continues through the FAF (CEGIX) using the Glidepath Indicator, as one would use a glideslope
indicator, to obtain an altitude “AT” 7,800 feet at the FAF. Note the altitude restriction lines over and under (At)
the altitude in the ‘ALT’ field in Figure 5-153.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
285
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
24) After crossing CEGIX, the aircraft continues following the glidepath to maintain the descent to “AT or ABOVE”
6,370 feet at the Missed Approach Point (MAP) (RW35R) as seen in Figure 5-154.
Figure 5-154 Descending to the Missed Approach Point
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
In this missed approach procedure, the altitude immediately following the MAP (in this case ‘6368ft’) is not
part of the published procedure. It is simply a Course to Altitude (CA) leg which guides the aircraft along
the runway centerline until the altitude required to safely make the first turn toward the MAHP is exceeded.
This altitude is provided by Jeppesen, and may be below, equal to, or above the published minimums for
this approach. In this case, if the aircraft altitude is below the specified altitude (6,368 feet) after crossing
the MAP, a direct-to is established to provide a course on runway heading until an altitude of 6,368 feet is
reached. After reaching 6,368 feet, a direct-to is established to the published MAHP (in this case MOGAL).
If the aircraft altitude is above the specified altitude after crossing the MAP, a direct-to is established to the
published fix (MOGAL) to begin the missed approach procedure.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
In some missed approach procedures this Course to Altitude leg may be part of the published procedure.
For example, a procedure may dictate a climb to 5,500 feet, then turn left and proceed to the Missed
Approach Hold Point (MAHP). In this case, the altitude would appear in the list of waypoints as ‘5500ft’.
Again, if the aircraft altitude is lower than the prescribed altitude, a direct-to is established on a Course to
Altitude leg when the missed approach procedure is activated.
286
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
25) Upon reaching the MAP, it is decided to execute a missed approach. Automatic waypoint sequencing is
suspended past the MAP. Press the Go Around Button, or press the SUSP Softkey on the PFD, to resume
automatic waypoint sequencing through the missed approach procedure.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A direct-to is initiated to MOGAL, which is the Missed Approach Hold Point (MAHP) as seen in Figure
5-155. The aircraft is climbing to 10,000 feet. The CDI flight phase now changes from LPV to MAPR as
seen on the HSI.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-155 Missed Approach Active
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
287
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
26) The aircraft continues climbing to “AT or ABOVE” 10,000 feet at MOGAL. A holding pattern is established at
the MAHP (MOGAL) as shown in Figure 5-156.
Figure 5-156 Establishing the Holding Pattern
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
27) The aircraft maintains 10,000 feet while following the magenta line through the hold as in Figure 5-157.
INDEX
Figure 5-157 Hold Established
288
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.12 ABNORMAL OPERATION
This section discusses the Dead Reckoning mode of operation and the subsequent indications.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Dead Reckoning Mode only functions in Enroute (ENR) or Oceanic (OCN) phase of flight. In all other
phases, an invalid GPS solution produces a “NO GPS POSITION” annunciation on the map and the G1000
stops using GPS.
EIS
While in Enroute or Oceanic phase of flight, if the G1000 detects an invalid GPS solution or is unable to
calculate a GPS position, the system automatically reverts to Dead Reckoning (DR) Mode. In DR Mode, the G1000
uses its last-known position combined with continuously updated airspeed and heading data (when available) to
calculate and display the aircraft’s current estimated position.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
It is important to note that estimated navigation data supplied by the G1000 in DR Mode may become increasingly
unreliable and must not be used as a sole means of navigation. If while in DR Mode airspeed and/or heading data
is also lost or not available, the DR function may not be capable of accurately tracking estimated position and,
consequently, the system may display a path that is different than the actual movement of the aircraft. Estimated
position information displayed by the G1000 through DR while there is no heading and/or airspeed data available
should not be used for navigation.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
DR Mode is inherently less accurate than the standard GPS/SBAS Mode due to the lack of satellite measurements
needed to determine a position. Changes in wind speed and/or wind direction compounds the relative inaccuracy
of DR Mode. Because of this degraded accuracy, other navigation equipment must be relied upon for position
awareness until GPS-derived position data is restored.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
DR Mode is indicated on the G1000 by the appearance of the letters ‘DR’ superimposed in amber over the ‘own
aircraft’ symbol as shown in Figure 5-158 In addition, ‘DR’ is prominently displayed in amber on the HSI slightly
above and to the right of the aircraft symbol on the CDI as shown in Figure 5-158. Also, the CDI deviation bar
is removed from the display. Lastly, but at the same time, a ‘GPS NAV LOST’ alert message appears on the PFD.
Normal navigation using GPS/SBAS source data resumes automatically once a valid GPS solution is restored.
AFCS
As a result of operating in DR Mode, all GPS-derived data is computed based upon an estimated position and
is displayed as amber text on the display to denote degraded navigation source information as shown in Figure
5-158.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Also, while the G1000 is in DR Mode, the autopilot does not couple to GPS, and both TAWS and Terrain
Proximity are disabled. Additionally, the accuracy of all nearest information (airports, airspaces, and waypoints)
is questionable. Finally, airspace alerts continue to function, but with degraded accuracy.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
289
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Distance &
Bearing
Current
Track
Indicator)
EIS
Dead Reckoning
Annunciation
Wind Data
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GPS Navigation
Lost Message
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Bearing
Pointer/
Distance
Wind Data
Nav Data Bar
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
All data except
Active Leg, TAS,
and DTK are in
amber
AFCS
Dead Reckoning
Annunciation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Subdued Aircraft
Symbol
APPENDICES
Figure 5-158 Dead Reckoning Mode - GPS Derived Data Shown in Amber
NOTE: The Inset Map is removed from the PFD any time aircraft pitch is greater than +30° or less than –20°,
INDEX
or when a 65° bank angle is reached.
290
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 6 HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Hazard avoidance features available for the G1000 are designed to aid situational awareness and provide advisory
information with regard to potential hazards to flight safety associated with weather, terrain, and air traffic.
Weather
• Garmin GDL 69/69A or 69/69A SXM SiriusXM Weather and Temporary Flight Restrictions (Optional)
• Garmin GSR 56 Garmin Connext Weather and Temporary Flight Restrictions (Optional)
• Garmin GDL 88 Flight Information Service-Broadcast (FIS-B) Weather (Optional)
EIS
• Garmin GWX 68/70 Airborne Color Weather Radar (Optional)
®
• L-3 Stormscope WX-500 Lightning Detection System (Optional)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Terrain Avoidance
• Terrain Proximity
• Terrain-SVS (Included with the SVT option)
Traffic
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Traffic Information Service (TIS)
®
• Avidyne TAS600 Series Traffic Advisory System (TAS) (Optional)
• Garmin GDL 88 Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Broadcast (ADS-B) Traffic (Optional)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
291
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.1 SIRIUSXM WEATHER
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
weather. Information contained within data link weather products may not accurately depict current
weather conditions.
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather
EIS
information shown by the data link weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data link weather product
may be significantly older than the indicated weather product age.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The optional GDL 69/69A or GDL69/69A SXM is a remote-mounted data link satellite receiver. Differences
in the receiver models, where applicable, are discussed throughout this section; refer to appropriate aircraft
documentation to determine the receiver model installed in this aircraft. Received graphical weather information
and associated text is displayed on the Multi Function Display (MFD) and the Primary Flight Display (PFD) Inset
Map. The GDL 69A and GDL 69A SXM can also receive SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment services. Both
weather data and audio entertainment programming operate in the S-band frequency range to provide continuous
reception capabilities at any altitude throughout North America.
Services from SiriusXM are subscription-based. For more information on specific service packages, visit www.
siriusxm.com.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ACTIVATING SERVICES
Before SiriusXM Weather and SiriusXM Satellite Radio can be used, the services must be activated. Services
are activated by providing coded IDs unique to the installed receiver. SiriusXM Satellite Radio (audio) and
SiriusXM Weather (data) services each have coded IDs. The Data and Audio Radio IDs must be provided to
activate the weather service and entertainment subscriptions, respectively. These IDs are located on:
AFCS
• The label on the back of the GDL 69/69A or GDL 69/69A SXM Data Link Receiver
• The XM Information Page on the MFD (Figure 6-1)
• The SiriusXM Satellite Radio Activation Instructions included with the unit
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Contact the installer if the Audio and Data Radio IDs cannot be located.
SiriusXM uses the coded IDs to send an activation signal that allows the system to receive weather data and/
or entertainment programming provided through the receiver.
APPENDICES
Establishing an account for SiriusXM services:
1) Select the XM Page in the AUX Page Group.
2) Select the INFO Softkey to display the AUX - XM Information Page.
3) Note the Data Radio ID (for SiriusXM Weather) and the Audio Radio ID (for SiriusXM Satellite Radio).
4) Contact SiriusXM Customer Service using the phone number listed on its website, www.siriusxm.com.
INDEX
5) Provide SiriusXM Customer Service the Audio and/or Data Radio IDs, payment information, and the desired
weather product subscription package.
292
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Activating the SiriusXM Weather service:
1) Once a SiriusXM Weather account has been established, select the XM Page in the Auxiliary Page Group.
2) Select the INFO Softkey to display the XM Information Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) View the list of supported Weather Products. A white empty box appears next to an unavailable weather
product; a green filled box appears next to an available weather product. During activation, it may take several
minutes for supported weather products in the selected subscription Service Class to become available.
4) When the available weather products displayed match the weather products offered in the selected SiriusXM
Weather product subscription Service Class, select the LOCK Softkey.
EIS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘YES’.
6) To complete activation, press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Audio Radio ID
(for Satellite
Radio)
Data Radio ID
(for SiriusXM
Weather)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-1 XM Information Page
AFCS
Select to Display XM
Information page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Weather
Products
(Available
Products for
Service Class
Indicated in
Green)
Select to Lock
Subscription
Information
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
USING SIRIUSXM WEATHER PRODUCTS
APPENDICES
The principal map for viewing SiriusXM Weather information is the Weather Data Link (XM) Page in the Map
Page Group. This is the only map display capable of showing information for all available SiriusXM Weather
products.
Viewing the Weather Data Link (XM) Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
INDEX
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Weather Data Link (XM or CNXT or FIS-B) Page. If ‘XM’ is not displayed
in the page title, proceed to the next step to change the data link weather source to SiriusXM.
3) Press the MENU Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Display XM Weather’ and press the ENT Key. SiriusXM is now the
selected data link weather source.
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
293
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The available softkeys and displayed data link weather information on the navigation maps correspond to the
selected data link weather source.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SiriusXM is the Active Data
Link Weather Source
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
NEXRAD Weather
Product Symbol
and Ages (U.S.
and Canada)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NEXRAD
Weather
Product
Selected for
Display
Figure 6-2 Weather Data Link (XM) Page
AFCS
For each enabled SiriusXM Weather product, the system displays a weather product icon and product age,
with the exception of TAFs and TFRs, discussed later. The product age is the elapsed time (in minutes) since
the weather data provider compiled the weather product. The product age display does not indicate the age
of the information contained within the weather product, which can be significantly older than the displayed
weather product age.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The SiriusXM Weather service broadcasts weather products at specific intervals (defined in the Broadcast
Rate column in Table 6-1). If for any reason, a product is not broadcast within the Expiration Time intervals
(see Table 6-1), the system removes the expired data from the display, and shows dashes instead of the product
age. This ensures the displayed information is consistent with what is currently being transmitted by the
SiriusXM Weather service. If more than half of the expiration time has elapsed, the color of the product age
changes to amber. If data for a weather product is not available or has not been received, the system displays
‘N/A’ next to the weather product symbol instead of the product age.
INDEX
Table 6-1 shows the weather product symbols, the expiration times and the broadcast rates. The broadcast
rate represents the interval at which the SiriusXM Weather service transmits new signals that may or may not
contain updated weather products. It does not represent the rate at which the weather information is updated
or when the Data Link Receiver receives new data. SiriusXM and its weather data suppliers define and control
the data update intervals, which are subject to change.
294
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Symbol
Echo Top
(ECHO TOP)
90
12
90
12
60
12
120
12
90
12
60
5
60
12
90
22
90
12
90
12
180
12
no product image
30
5
no product image
60
12
no product image
60
12
INDEX
12
APPENDICES
60
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
12
AFCS
30
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
30
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7.5
EIS
30
SiriusXM Lightning
(XM LTNG)
Cell Movement
(CELL MOV)
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
(SIG/AIR)
Meteorological Aerodrome Report
(METARs)
City Forecast
(CITY)
Surface Analysis
(SFC)
Freezing Levels
(FRZ LVL)
Winds Aloft
(WIND)
County Warnings
(COUNTY)
Cyclone Warnings
(CYCLONE)
Icing Potential (CIP and SLD)
(ICNG)
Pilot Weather Report
(PIREPs)
Air Report
(AIREPs)
Turbulence
(TURB)
No Radar Coverage
Temporary Flight Restrictions
(TFRs)
Terminal Aerodrome Reports
(TAFs)
Expiration Time Broadcast Rate
(Minutes)
(Minutes)
5 (U.S.)
30
10 (Canada)
15 (69/69A)
60
30 (69/69A SXM)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Next-generation Radar
(NEXRAD)
Cloud Top
(CLD TOP)
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SiriusXM Weather Product
Table 6-1 SiriusXM Weather Product Symbols and Data Timing
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
295
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Cloud Top (CLD TOP)
+
Echo Top (ECHO TOP)
+
Flight Plan Pages
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Cell Movement (CELL MOV)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
+
City Forecast (CITY)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
METARs
County Warnings (COUNTY)
+
Cyclone Warnings (CYCLONE)
+
Icing Potential (ICNG)
+
PIREPs
+
+
AIREPs
+
+
Turbulence (TURB)
+
+
Surface Analysis (SFC)
+
Freezing Levels (FRZ LVL)
+
Winds Aloft (WIND)
AFCS
+
SiriusXM Lightning (XM LTNG)
SIGMETs/AIRMETs (SIG/AIR)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Nearest Page Group
+
AUX - Video Page
+
AUX - Trip Planning
Page
+
Weather Information
Page
Weather Data Link
(XM) Page
EIS
NEXRAD
Navigation Map Page
SiriusXM Weather Product
PFD Inset Map
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Table 6-2 shows which SiriusXM products can be displayed (indicated with a ‘+’ symbol) on specific maps.
+*
+
No Radar Coverage
+
+
+
TFRs
+
+
+
TAFs
+
+
INDEX
APPENDICES
* Winds Aloft data is available inside Profile View when enabled on the Navigation Map Page.
Table 6-2 Sirius Weather Product Display Maps
296
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Softkeys control the display of weather information on most MFD pages and the PFD Inset Map. The following
figure shows the weather product softkeys for the Weather Data Link (XM) Page. When a weather product is
selected for display, the corresponding softkey label changes to gray to indicate the product is enabled.
CYCLONE SFC OFF
FRZ LVL
SIG/AIR
METAR
LEGEND MORE WX CHKLIST
WIND OFF ICNG OFF TURB OFF AIREPS
PIREPS
COUNTY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NEXRAD ECHO TOP CLD TOP XM LTNG CELL MOV
ENGINE
BACK
SFC Softkey label changes
to reflect current selection.
WIND/ICNG/TURB Softkey labels
change to reflect current selection.
CURRENT
12 HR
24 HR
36 HR
48 HR
LEGEND
BACK
EIS
OFF
Select the BACK Softkey
to move up one level.
3000
6000
9000
12000
15000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
18000
21000
24000
27000
30000
33000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
36000
39000
42000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
1000
3000
6000
9000
12000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
18000
21000
24000
27000
30000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
21000
24000
27000
30000
33000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
39000
42000
45000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
15000
36000
AFCS
SFC
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
OFF
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
PREV
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
PREV and NEXT Softkeys cycle through Winds Aloft,
Icing, and Turbulence altitude selection softkeys.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-3 Weather Data Link (XM) Page Softkeys
APPENDICES
The setup menus for the Navigation Map Page and the Weather Data Link (XM) Page control the map range
settings above which weather products data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the
weather product map range setting is selected, the weather product data is removed from the map. The menus
also provide a means in addition to the softkeys for enabling/disabling display of weather products.
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
297
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Setting up and customizing the Weather Data Link (XM) Page:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Weather Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-4).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘PRODUCT GROUP 1’ or ‘PRODUCT GROUP 2’, and press the ENT Key (Figure
6-5).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
EIS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link (XM) Page with the changed settings.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-4 Weather Data Link (XM) Page Menu
Figure 6-5 Weather Data Link (XM) Page Setup Menu
Restoring default Weather Data Link (XM) Page settings:
APPENDICES
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Weather Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Highlight the individual setting or product group name to restore to default values, then press the MENU Key.
INDEX
5) Highlight ‘Restore Selection Default’ or ‘Restore All Defaults’, as applicable, then press the ENT Key.
298
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Maps besides the Weather Data Link (XM) Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map
Page.
Setting up and customizing weather data for the Navigation Map Page:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-6).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-7).
EIS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-8).
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-6 Navigation Map Page Menu
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-7 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-8 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Weather Group
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
299
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
If multiple weather data link services are installed, customizing the display settings for the corresponding
weather products shown in Table 6-3 will result in identical settings for a comparable weather product from
another service provider.
Garmin Connext Weather
Product
Precipitation
NEXRAD and No Radar Coverage
(PRECIP) and No Radar Coverage
Cloud Top
Infrared Satellite
(CLD TOP)
(IR SAT)
Garmin Connext Data Link
SiriusXM Lightning
Lightning
(XM LTNG)
(DL LTNG)
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
(SIG/AIR)
(SIG/AIR)
Meteorological Aerodrome Report Meteorological Aerodrome Report
(METARs)
(METARs)
Winds Aloft
Winds Aloft
(WIND)
(WIND)
Pilot Weather Report
Pilot Weather Report
(PIREPs)
(PIREPs)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SiriusXM Weather Product
and Softkey
FIS-B Weather Product
NEXRAD and No Radar Coverage
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Meteorological Aerodrome Report
(METARs)
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Table 6-3 Weather Data Link Map Settings Shared for Multiple Weather Data Link Sources
Each active SiriusXM Weather product has an associated legend which can be displayed on the Weather Data
Link (XM) Page and Navigation Map Page.
Viewing legends for displayed weather products on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page:
AFCS
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page with the FMS Knob.
2) Select the LEGEND Softkey to display the legends for the displayed weather products.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘Weather Legend’ and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the legends if more are available than fit in the window.
APPENDICES
4) To remove the XM Weather Legends Window, select the LEGEND Softkey, the ENT or the CLR Key, or press the
FMS Knob.
Viewing legends for displayed weather products on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page with the FMS Knob.
INDEX
2) Press the MAP Softkey.
300
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3) Press the LEGEND Softkey to display the legends for the displayed weather products.
4) To remove the XM Weather Legends Window, press the LEGEND Softkey, the ENT or the CLR Key, or press the
FMS Knob.
• Echo Tops
• AIRMETs
• Cloud Tops
• METARs
• Cell Movement
• County Warnings
• SIGMETs
• TFRs
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Additional information about the following can be displayed by panning over the display on the map:
EIS
The map panning feature is enabled by pressing the Joystick. The map range is adjusted by turning the
Joystick. If the map range is adjusted while panning is enabled, the map is re-centered on the Map Pointer.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Additional
Information
about Item
Selected with
Map Pointer
Available
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TFR Selected
with Map
Pointer
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-9 Panning on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
301
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
NEXRAD
NOTE: NEXRAD cannot be displayed at the same time as echo tops, icing, turbulence, terrain data, or
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
airborne weather radar information is displayed.
The National Weather Service (NWS) operates the WSR-88D, or NEXRAD (NEXt-generation RADar)
system, an extensive network of 156 high-resolution Doppler radar systems. The NEXRAD network provides
centralized meteorological information for the continental United States and selected overseas locations. The
maximum range of a single NEXRAD site is 250 nm.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Individual NEXRAD sites supply the network with radar images, and the images from each radar site may
arrive at the network at different rates and times. Periodically, the weather data provider compiles the available
individual site images from the network to form a composite image, and assigns a single time to indicate when
it created the image. This image becomes the NEXRAD weather product. Individual images--gathered from
each NEXRAD site--differ in age, and are always older than the displayed NEXRAD weather product age. The
data provider then sends the NEXRAD data to the SiriusXM Weather service, whose satellites transmit this
information during the next designated broadcast time for the NEXRAD weather product.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Because of the time required to detect, assemble, and distribute the NEXRAD weather product, the displayed
weather information contained within the product may be significantly older than the current radar synopsis
and may not depict the current weather conditions. The NEXRAD weather product should never be used as a
basis for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous weather regardless of the information it contains.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
For radar sites in the United States, the NEXRAD weather product shows a composite reflectivity image.
This shows the highest radar energy received from multiple antenna tilt angles at various altitudes. For radar
sites based in Canada, the NEXRAD weather product shows radar returns from the lowest antenna tilt angle,
known as base reflectivity. The display of the information is color-coded to indicate the intensity of the echoes
and the type of precipitation, if known.
INDEX
APPENDICES
No Radar Coverage
Figure 6-10 NEXRAD Data on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
302
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying NEXRAD weather information:
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey). This step is not necessary on the
Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey.
All weather product legends can be viewed on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page. For the NEXRAD legend
(Figure 6-11), press the LEGEND Softkey when NEXRAD is selected for display.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
No Radar Coverage
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-11 NEXRAD Data with Legend
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The display of no radar coverage is always active when either NEXRAD or Echo Tops is selected. Areas
where NEXRAD radar coverage and Echo Tops information is not currently available or is not being collected
are indicated in gray shade of purple.
Reflectivity
Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. Colors on the NEXRAD
display are directly correlative to the level of detected reflectivity. Reflectivity as it relates to hazardous
weather can be very complex.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The role of radar is essentially to detect moisture in the atmosphere. Simply put, certain types of weather
reflect radar better than others. The intensity of a radar reflection is not necessarily an indication of the
weather hazard level. For instance, wet hail returns a strong radar reflection, while dry hail does not. Both
wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous.
The different NEXRAD echo intensities are measured in decibels (dB) relative to reflectivity (Z). NEXRAD
measures the radar reflectivity ratio, or the energy reflected back to the radar receiver (designated by the
letter Z). The value of Z increases as the returned signal strength increases.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
303
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
NEXRAD Limitations
NEXRAD radar images may have certain limitations:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• NEXRAD base reflectivity does not provide sufficient information to determine cloud layers or precipitation
characteristics (wet hail vs. rain). For example, it is not possible to distinguish between wet snow, wet
hail, and rain.
• NEXRAD base reflectivity is sampled at the minimum antenna elevation angle. An individual NEXRAD
site cannot depict high altitude storms at close ranges. It has no information about storms directly over
the site.
EIS
• When zoomed in to a range of 30 nm, each square block on the display represents an area of four square
kilometers. The intensity level reflected by each square represents the highest level of NEXRAD data
sampled within the area (Figure 6-12).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Any unknown precipitation below 52ºN is displayed as rain regardless of the actual precipitation type.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Block Area is 4 km2
Figure 6-12 NEXRAD Data - Zoomed
The following may cause abnormalities in displayed NEXRAD radar images:
APPENDICES
• Ground clutter
• Strobes and spurious radar data
• Sun strobes (when the radar antenna points directly at the sun)
• Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows
INDEX
• Metallic dust (chaff) from military aircraft, which can cause alterations in radar scans
304
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NEXRAD Limitations (Canada)
• Radar coverage extends to 55ºN.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Any precipitation displayed between 52ºN and 55ºN is displayed as mixed regardless of actual precipitation
type.
EIS
No Coverage
Above 55ºN
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Precipitation
Above 52ºN
Displays as Mixed
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-13 NEXRAD Data - Canada
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
305
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ECHO TOPS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Echo Tops data (Figure 6-14) shows the location and elevation of the highest radar echo. The highest radar
echo does not indicate the actual top of a storm or clouds; rather it indicates the highest altitude at which
precipitation is detected. Information is derived from NEXRAD data.
EIS
NOTE: Echo Tops cannot be displayed at the same time as Cloud Tops or NEXRAD.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
No Radar
Coverage
Figure 6-14 Echo Tops Weather Product
AFCS
Displaying Echo Tops information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the ECHO TOP Softkey.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To display the Echo Tops legend (Figure 6-15), press the LEGEND Softkey when Echo Tops is selected for
display. Since Echo Tops and Cloud Tops use the same color scaling to represent altitude, display of these
weather products is mutually exclusive. When Echo Tops is activated, NEXRAD and Cloud Tops data are
removed.
INDEX
No Radar Coverage
Figure 6-15 Echo Tops Legend
306
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The display of unavailable radar coverage is always active when either NEXRAD or Echo Tops is selected.
Areas where NEXRAD radar coverage and Echo Tops information is not currently available or is not being
collected are indicated in gray shade of purple.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
CLOUD TOPS
NOTE: Cloud Tops and Echo Tops cannot be displayed at the same time.
Cloud Tops data (Figure 6-16) depicts cloud top altitudes as determined from satellite imagery.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-16 Cloud Tops Weather Product
AFCS
Displaying Cloud Tops information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the CLD TOP Softkey.
To show the Cloud Tops legend (Figure 6-17), press the LEGEND Softkey when Cloud Tops is selected for
display. Since Cloud Tops and Echo Tops use the same color scaling to represent altitude, display of these
weather products is mutually exclusive. When Cloud Tops is activated, Echo Tops data is removed.
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 6-17 Cloud Tops Legend
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
307
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
NOTE: If a GDL 69A SXM receiver is installed, the broadcast rate for Cloud Tops is 30 minutes. As with all
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SiriusXM Weather products, the product age becomes amber when it reaches half of the expiration time,
which is 60 minutes for Cloud Tops. Therefore, this weather product age may be amber during routine
operation.
SIRIUSXM LIGHTNING
NOTE: SiriusXM Lightning cannot be displayed together on the same map as lightning data from an optional
EIS
on-board lightning detection system.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SiriusXM Lightning data (Figure 6-18) shows the approximate location of cloud-to-ground lightning strikes.
A strike icon represents a strike that has occurred within a two-kilometer region. The strike symbols on the
maps are only estimates and do not indicate exact position of strikes.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Lightning
Strikes
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-18 SiriusXM Lightning Data
Displaying SiriusXM Lightning information:
APPENDICES
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey). This step is not necessary on the
Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the XM LTNG Softkey..
INDEX
To display the SiriusXM Lightning legend on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page (Figure 6-19), press the
LEGEND Softkey when SiriusXM Lightning is selected for display.
Figure 6-19 SiriusXM Lightning Legend
308
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CELL MOVEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Cell Movement data (Figure 6-20) shows the location and movement of storm cells as identified by the
ground-based system. Cells are represented by yellow squares, with direction of movement indicated with
short, orange arrows.
NOTE: The Storm Cell base height is not available if a GDL 69A SXM data link receiver is installed. In this
case, the Storm Cell base height is displayed as 0 feet when the map pointer selects a storm cell.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Storm Cells
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-20 Cell Movement Data
AFCS
On most applicable maps, Cell Movement data is selected for display along with NEXRAD. On the Weather
Data Link (XM) Page, Cell Movement data can be selected independently.
Displaying Cell Movement information:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey). This step is not necessary on the XM
Weather Data Link Page.
APPENDICES
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey (CEL MOV Softkey on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page). For Cell Movement to
be displayed on maps other than the Weather Data Link (XM) Page, Cell Movement must be turned on in the
Navigation Map Setup Menu (see the procedure “Setting up and customizing weather data for the Navigation
Map Page”).
To display the Cell Movement legend on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page, (Figure 6-21), press the LEGEND
Softkey when Cell Movement is selected for display.
INDEX
Figure 6-21 Cell Movement Legend
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
309
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SIGMETS AND AIRMETS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SIGMETs (SIGnificant METeorological Information) and AIRMETs (AIRmen’s METeorological Information)
are issued for potentially hazardous weather. A Convective SIGMET is issued for hazardous convective
weather such as severe or widespread thunderstorms.
EIS
Airmet
Turbulence
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
AIRMET
IFR
Figure 6-22 SIGMET/AIRMET Data
Displaying SIGMETs and AIRMETs:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
AFCS
2) Press the SIG/AIR Softkey.
3) To view the text of the SIGMET or AIRMET, press the Joystick and move the Map Pointer over a SIGMET or
AIRMET boundary line until it is highlighted.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the ENT key. Figure 6-23 shows sample SIGMET text.
INDEX
APPENDICES
To display the SIGMET and AIRMET legend (Figure 6-24), press the LEGEND Softkey when SIGMETs and
AIRMETs are selected for display.
Figure 6-23 Sample SIGMET Text
310
Figure 6-24 SIGMET/AIRMET Legend
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NOTE: If a 69A SXM receiver installed, the SIGMET and AIRMET weather products are not available unless
at least one SIGMET or AIRMET has been received. The weather product age indicates ‘N/A’ when no
SIGMET or AIRMET is available.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
METARS AND TAFS
NOTE: Atmospheric pressure as reported for METARs is given in hectopascals (hPa), except for in the United
States, where it is reported in inches of mercury (in Hg). Temperatures are reported in Celsius.
EIS
NOTE: METAR information is only displayed within the installed navigation database service area.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
METARs (METeorological Aerodrome Reports) typically contain information about the temperature,
dewpoint, wind, precipitation, cloud cover, cloud heights, visibility, and barometric pressure at an airport or
observation station. They can also contain information on precipitation amounts, lightning, and other critical
data. METARs reflect hourly observations; non-routine updates include the code “SPECI” in the report.
METARs are shown as colored flags at airports that provide them.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Instructions for
Viewing METAR
and TAF Text
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected Airport
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-25 METAR Flags on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
TAFs (Terminal Aerodrome Forecasts) are weather predictions for specific airports within a 24- hour period,
and may span up to 36 hours. TAFs typically include forecast wind, visibility, weather phenomena, and sky
conditions using METAR codes.
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
INDEX
METAR and TAF text are displayed on the Weather Information Page. METAR data is displayed first in a
decoded fashion, followed by the original text. Note the original text may contain additional information not
found in the decoded text. TAF information is displayed only in its original form, when a TAF is available.
311
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Displaying METAR and TAF text:
1) On the Weather Data Link (XM) Page, press the METAR Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the Joystick and pan to the desired airport.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Weather Information Page is shown with METAR and TAF text.
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. METAR text must be completely
scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
5) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
EIS
Or:
1) Select the Weather Information Page.
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Waypoint Page Group.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
b) Press the WX Softkey to select the Weather Information Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to display the cursor.
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired airport and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. Note that the METAR text must
be completely scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
METAR data for the
Selected Airport
AFCS
METAR Symbol
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TAF Text for the
Selected Airport
Figure 6-26 METAR and TAF Text on the Weather Information Page
Original METAR text is also accessible while panning the map cursor over a METAR flag on any map page
on which a METAR is displayed. The METAR text is shown in a box near the METAR flag.
INDEX
In addition, METAR flags and their associated text are displayed on the Active Flight Plan Page on the MF.D.
A METAR flag is shown next to waypoint(s) in the flight plan with an available METAR.
312
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying original METAR text on the Active Flight Plan Page:
1) Select the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired waypoint. The METAR text will appear in the ‘SELECTED
WAYPOINT WEATHER’ window below.
4) When finished, press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor or press the FPL Key to exit the Active Flight Plan
Page.
EIS
To display the METAR legend on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page (Figure 6-27), press the LEGEND Softkey
when METARs are selected for display.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The METAR flag color is determined by the information in the METAR text. A gray METAR flag is displayed
when the METAR text does not contain adequate information to determine the METAR category (e.g., VFR,
IFR).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-27 METAR Legend
SURFACE ANALYSIS AND CITY FORECAST
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: Surface Analysis and City Forecast data are displayed only within the installed navigation database
service area.
Surface Analysis and City Forecast information (Figure 6-28) is available for current and forecast weather
conditions. Forecasts are available for intervals of 12, 24, 36, and 48 hours.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 6-28 Current Surface Analysis and City Forecast Weather Products
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
313
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Displaying Surface Analysis and City Forecast information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the SFC Softkey.
4) Select the desired forecast time: CURRENT, 12 HR, 24 HR, 36 HR, or 48 HR. The SFC Softkey label changes
to reflect the forecast time selected.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
To display the Surface Analysis and City Forecast legend (Figure 6-29), press the LEGEND Softkey when
Surface Analysis and City Forecast are selected to be displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-29 City Forecast and Surface Analysis Legend
FREEZING LEVELS
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Freezing Level weather product (Figure 6-30) shows the color-coded contour lines for the altitude and
location at which the first isotherm is found. When no data is displayed for a given altitude, the data for that
altitude has not been received, or is out of date and has been removed from the display.
Figure 6-30 Freezing Level Data
314
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying Freezing Level information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the FRZ LVL Softkey.
To display the Freezing Level legend on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page (Figure 6-31), press the LEGEND
Softkey when the Freezing Level weather product is enabled.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-31 Freezing Level Legend
WINDS ALOFT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Winds Aloft weather product (Figure 6-32) shows the predicted wind speed and direction at the
surface and at selected altitudes. Altitude can be displayed in 3,000-foot increments up to 42,000 feet MSL.
Displaying Winds Aloft data:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the WIND Softkey.
4) Select the desired altitude level: SFC (surface) up to 42,000 feet. Press the NEXT or PREV Softkey to cycle
through the altitude softkeys. The WIND Softkey label changes to reflect the altitude selected.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 6-32 Winds Aloft Weather Product at 9,000 Feet
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
315
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
To display the Winds Aloft legend (Figure 6-33), press the LEGEND Softkey when Winds Aloft is selected
for display.
Figure 6-33 Winds Aloft Data with Legend
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Headwind and tailwind components aloft are available inside the Profile View on the Navigation Map Page
(Figure 6-34). The displayed components are relative to current aircraft altitude and track, but not to aircraft
speed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Profile View
Path Enabled
Wind Component
Velocity and Direction
Arrows
AFCS
Altitude Scale
Figure 6-34 Winds Aloft Data Inside Profile View (Navigation Map Page)
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Arrows pointing to the left indicate headwind components; tailwind component arrows point to the right,
as shown in Table 6-4.
Headwind
Symbol
Tailwind
Symbol
Headwind/Tailwind Component
None
None
Less than 5 knots
5 knots
INDEX
10 knots
50 knots
Table 6-4 Profile View Headwind/Tailwind Component Symbols
316
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Showing/Hiding Profile View (containing winds aloft data)
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the PROFILE Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Show Profile View’ or ‘Hide Profile View’ (choice dependent on current
state) and press the ENT Key.
EIS
Winds Aloft information inside the Profile View window is enabled by default when the Profile View is
displayed on the Navigation Map Page. This behavior can be changed on the Navigation Map Page.
Enabling/disabling winds aloft data display in Profile View:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-35).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Profile Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-36).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob highlight the Profile Winds field (Figure 6-37).
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-35 Navigation Map Page Menu
APPENDICES
190-00962-04 Rev. A
INDEX
Figure 6-36 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-37 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Weather Group
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
317
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
COUNTY WARNINGS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The County Warnings weather product (Figure 6-38) provides specific public awareness and protection
weather warnings from the National Weather Service (NWS). This can include information on tornadoes,
severe thunderstorms, and flood conditions.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Additional
Information
on Flood
Warning
Selected
with Map
Pointer
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected
Flood
Warning
Figure 6-38 County Warning Weather Product
AFCS
Displaying County Warning information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the COUNTY Softkey.
INDEX
APPENDICES
To display the County Warnings legend (Figure 6-39), press the LEGEND Softkey when County Warnings
are displayed.
Figure 6-39 County Warnings Legend
318
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CYCLONE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Cyclone weather product (Figure 6-40) shows the current location of cyclones (hurricanes), tropical
storms, and their projected tracks. The system displays the projected track information in the form of DD/
HH:MM.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Cyclone
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-40 Cyclone Data with Projected Track
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Displaying cyclone (hurricane) track information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
AFCS
3) Press the CYCLONE Softkey.
To display the Cyclone legend (Figure 6-41), press the LEGEND Softkey when Cyclone data is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-41 Cyclone Legend
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
319
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ICING (CIP & SLD)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Current Icing Product (CIP) data shows a graphical view of the current icing environment (Figure 6-42).
Icing severity is displayed in four categories: light, moderate, severe, and extreme (not specific to aircraft
type). The CIP product is not a forecast, but a presentation of the conditions at the time of the analysis.
NOTE: Icing data cannot be displayed at the same time as NEXRAD data.
EIS
Supercooled Large Droplet (SLD) icing conditions are characterized by the presence of relatively large,
super cooled water droplets indicative of freezing drizzle and freezing rain aloft. SLD threat areas are depicted
as magenta dots, which may also be displayed over the CIP colors.
Displaying Icing data:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the ICNG Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Select the desired altitude level: 1,000 feet up to 30,000 feet. Press the NEXT or PREV Softkey to cycle through
the altitude softkeys. The ICNG Softkey label changes to reflect the altitude selected.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Icing
Potential
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
SLD Threat
Figure 6-42 Icing Data at 6,000 Feet
INDEX
APPENDICES
To display the Icing Potential legend (Figure 6-43), press the LEGEND Softkey when Icing data is displayed.
Figure 6-43 Icing Potential Legend
320
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TURBULENCE
NOTE: Turbulence data cannot be displayed at the same time as NEXRAD data.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Turbulence weather product (Figure 6-44) identifies the potential for erratic movement of high-altitude
air mass associated winds. Turbulence is classified as light, moderate, severe or extreme, at altitudes between
21,000 and 45,000 feet. Turbulence data is intended to supplement AIRMETs and SIGMETs.
Displaying Turbulence data:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
EIS
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the TURB Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Select the desired altitude level: 21,000 feet up to 45,000 feet. Press the NEXT or PREV Softkey to cycle
through the altitude softkeys. The TURB Softkey label changes to reflect the altitude selected.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Severe
Turbulence
Moderate
Turbulence
Light
Turbulence
AFCS
Figure 6-44 Turbulence Weather Product at 21,000 Feet
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To display the Turbulence legend (Figure 6-45), press the LEGEND Softkey when Turbulence is selected for
display.
APPENDICES
Figure 6-45 Turbulence Legend
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
321
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
PIREPS AND AIREPS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pilot Weather Reports (PIREPs) describe in-flight weather encountered by pilots. When significant weather
conditions are reported or forecast, Air Traffic Control (ATC) facilities are required to solicit PIREPs. A
PIREP may contain adverse weather conditions, such as low in-flight visibility, icing conditions, wind shear,
turbulence, and type of aircraft flown. PIREPs are issued as either Routine (UA) or Urgent (UUA).
Another type of PIREP is an Air Report (AIREP). Commercial airlines typically generate AIREPs.
EIS
Instructions for
Viewing PIREP
and AIREP Text
AIREP
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Routine
PIREP
Selected
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Urgent
PIREP
Figure 6-46 AIREPs and PIREPs on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
AFCS
Displaying PIREP and AIREP text:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the AIREPS or PIREPS Softkey.
4) Press the Joystick and pan to the desired weather report. A gray circle will appear around the weather report
when it is selected.
APPENDICES
5) Press the ENT Key. The Weather Information Page is shown with PIREP or AIREP text. The data is first displayed
in a decoded fashion, followed by the original text. Note the original text may contain addition information not
present in the decoded version.
6) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the PIREP or AIREP text.
INDEX
7) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
322
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Decoded PIREP Text
Selected PIREP
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Age of report in HH:MM
Original PIREP Text
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-47 PIREP Text on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
To display the PIREP or AIREP legend (Figure 6-48), press the LEGEND Softkey when PIREPs or AIREPs
are displayed.
The PIREP color is determined by the type (routine or urgent).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-48 AIREPs & PIREPs Legend
TFRS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) issues Temporary Flight Restrictions (TFRs) to designate areas
where flight is restricted. TFRs are issued to restrict flight for a variety of reasons including national security,
law enforcement, firefighting, natural disasters., airshows, and large sporting events. TFRs may be issued
at any time, and TFR data displayed on the G1000 is only intended to supplement official TFR information
obtained from official sources including Flight Service Stations (FSS), and air traffic control.
APPENDICES
The age of TFR data is not shown; however, if TFR data is not available or has expired, the system displays
‘TFR N/A’ in the upper-left corner of maps on which TFRs can be displayed.
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
323
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TFR Summary
Information
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
TFR Selected
with Map
Pointer
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-49 TFR Data on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
Displaying TFR Data:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page or Navigation Map Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the Joystick and pan the map pointer to highlight a TFR border. The system displays TFR summary
information for the selected TFR above the map.
3) Press the ENT Key. The system displays a pop-up menu.
4) If necessary, turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Review Airspaces’ and press the ENT Key. The system displays the
TFR Information window.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
5) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to remove the TFR Information window.
APPENDICES
Figure 6-50 Full Text for Selected TFR
The setup menus for the Navigation Map Page control the map range settings above which TFR data is
decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the TFR product map range setting is selected, the TFR
product data is removed from the map.
INDEX
Maps other than the Navigation Map Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
324
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Setting up and customizing TFR data for maps on which TFR data can be displayed:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) With Map Setup highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-51).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Aviation Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-52).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll to the TFR product maximum map range setting (Figure 6-53).
7) Press the ENT Key to select a range.
EIS
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-51 Navigation Map Page Menu
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-52 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-53 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Aviation Group
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
325
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.2 GARMIN CONNEXT WEATHER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous
weather. Information contained within data link weather products may not accurately depict current
weather conditions.
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: The availability of specific Garmin Connext weather products varies by region and is subject to change.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
EIS
information shown by the data link weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data link weather product
may be significantly older than the indicated weather product age.
The optional GSR 56 Iridium satellite transceiver provides Garmin Connext Weather reception capabilities to
the system. Graphical weather information and its associated text are displayed on the Multi Function Display
(MFD) and the Primary Flight Display (PFD) Inset Map.
For weather product coverage information, refer to sites.garmin.com/connext. This Pilot’s Guide shows
all Garmin Connext weather products, regardless of product availability in a specific area or subscription
package.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The system provides weather information after the pilot initiates either a manual or automatic Connext Data
Request on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page on the MFD.
Garmin Connext weather requires an active Iridium satellite network account and a subscription to the Garmin
Connext Weather service.
REGISTERING THE IRIDIUM SATELLITE SYSTEM
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
A subscriber account must be established for the Iridium transceiver prior to using the Iridium Satellite System
for telephone services. Before setting up an Iridium account, obtain the serial number of the Iridium Transceiver
(GSR1) and the System ID by selecting the AUX-System Status Page as shown in Figure 6-54. Contact Garmin at
1-866-739-5687 in the United States or 913-397-8200, ext. 1135.
326
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
System ID Number
EIS
Iridium Transceiver Serial
Number
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-54 Identification Needed for Iridium Registration
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
REGISTERING GARMIN CONNEXT WEATHER
When an account is established, Garmin provides an Access Code which must be entered on the system in
order to complete the registration process.
Registering the system to receive Garmin Connext Weather:
AFCS
1) With the aircraft outside and having a clear view of the sky, turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the
MAP page group.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (CNXT) Page. If another data link weather
source such as ‘XM’ or ‘FIS-B’ is displayed in the page title, it will be necessary to change the data link weather
source to CNXT before continuing. Refer to ‘Viewing the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page’ procedure to change
the data link source to prior to registration.
APPENDICES
3) If the system displays the ‘CONNEXT REGISTRATION’ window, proceed to step 6. Otherwise, press the MENU
Key. The page menu window is now displayed as seen in Figure 6-55.
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
327
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-55 Select Register With Connext
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘Register With Connext’ in the menu list.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Press the ENT Key. The Connext Registration Window appears as shown in Figure 6-56.
INDEX
Figure 6-56 Enter Access Code
6) Enter the access code provided by Garmin in the ‘ACCESS CODE’ field.
328
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
7) Press the ENT Key. ‘REGISTER’ is highlighted as in Figure 6-56.
8) Press the ENT Key. The system contacts Garmin through the Iridium network. System registration is complete
when ‘REGISTERED’ appears in the STATUS field.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ACCESSING GARMIN CONNEXT WEATHER PRODUCTS
EIS
The principal map for viewing Garmin Connext weather information is the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
in the Map Page Group (Figure 6-57). This is the only map display capable of showing information for all
available Garmin Connext weather products, with the exception of TAFs, discussed later in this section. This
page is also used to select a data link weather source, if more than one source (such as SiriusXM Weather) has
also been installed. The displayed weather products and softkeys correspond to the selected data link weather
source. No weather information is displayed until the first successful Connext Data Request has completed.
Viewing the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Weather Data Link (CNXT or XM or FIS-B) Page. If ‘CNXT’ is not
displayed in the page title, proceed to the next step to change the data link weather source to Connext.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the MENU Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Display Connext Weather’ and press the ENT Key. Connext is now the
selected data link weather source, and the page title displays ‘MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (CNXT)’.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The available softkeys and displayed data link weather information on the navigation maps correspond to
the selected data link weather source. Only one weather data link source may be selected for display at a time.
Weather
product age
information
AFCS
Precip Weather
Product Display
Enabled icon
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Figure 6-57 Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
(After Connext Data Request)
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
INDEX
Precip Weather
Product Selected
for Display
329
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
information shown by the data link weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data link weather product
may be significantly older than the indicated weather product age.
EIS
For each enabled Garmin Connext weather product, with the exception of TAFs and TFRs, discussed later,
the system displays a weather product icon and product age. The product age is the elapsed time (in minutes)
since the weather data provider compiled the weather product. The product age display does not indicate
the age of the information contained within the weather product, which can be significantly older than the
displayed weather product age.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The ground-based Connext weather service either updates weather products continuously or at specific
intervals (defined in the Refresh Rate column in Table 6-5). If for any reason, a product is not refreshed
within the Expiration Time intervals (see Table 6-5), the system removes the expired data from the display,
and shows dashes instead of the product age. If more than half of the expiration time has elapsed, the color
of the product age changes to amber. If data for a weather product is not available, the system displays ‘N/A’
next to the weather product symbol instead of the product age.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Table 6-5 shows the Garmin Connext weather product symbols, the expiration times, and the refresh rates.
The refresh rate represents the interval at which the Garmin Connext ground-based servers make available the
most current known weather data. It does not necessarily represent the rate at which new content is received
from various weather sources.
330
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Symbol
Continuous
60
Continuous
90
Continuous
90
Continuous
90
Continuous
no product image
60
Continuous
no product image
60
Continuous
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
30
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
30
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
60
EIS
Infrared Satellite
(IR SAT)
Data Link Lightning
(DL LTNG)
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
(SIG/AIR)
Meteorological Aerodrome
Report
(METARs)
Winds Aloft
(WIND)
Pilot Weather Report
(PIREPs)
Temporary Flight
Restrictions
(TFRs)
Terminal Aerodrome
Forecasts
(TAFs)
30
Refresh Rate
(Minutes)
U.S.: 3*
Canada: 3*†
Europe: 15
Australia: 15ˆ
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Radar Precipitation
(PRECIP)
Expiration Time
(Minutes)
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Garmin Connext
Weather Product
AFCS
* The composite precipitation image is updated every 3 minutes, but individual radar sites
may take between 3 and 10 minutes to provide new data.
†
Canadian radar precipitation data provided by Environment Canada.
ˆ Australian radar precipitation data provided by the Australian Bureau of Meteorology.
Table 6-5 Garmin Connext Weather Product Symbols and Data Timing
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
331
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Flight Plan Pages
EIS
Infrared Satellite (IR SAT)
Nearest Page
Group
+
System Page Group
+
AUX - Trip Planning
Page
Weather Data Link
(CNXT) Page
+
Precipitation (PRECIP)
Weather
Information Page
Navigation Map
Page
Garmin Connext Weather
Product
PFD Inset Map
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Table 6-6 shows which Garmin Connext Weather products can be displayed (indicated with a ‘+’ symbol) on
specific G1000 maps.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
+
SIGMETs/AIRMETs (SIG/AIR)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Datalink Lightning (LTNG)
+
No Radar Coverage
+
+
+
TFRs
+
+
+
+
+
+
METARs
+
Winds Aloft (WIND)
+
+
+*
+
PIREPs
+
TAFs
+
+
+
* Winds Aloft data on Navigation Map Page displayed inside Profile View when enabled.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Table 6-6 Garmin Connext Weather Product Display Maps
AFCS
Softkeys control the display of weather information on most MFD pages and the PFD Inset Map. The
following figure shows the weather product softkeys for the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page). When a
weather product is selected for display, the corresponding softkey label changes to gray to indicate the
product display is enabled.
PRECIP
IR SAT
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ENGINE
DL LTNG
SIG/AIR
WIND OFF
METAR
LEGEND MORE WX CHKLIST
PIREPS
BACK
WIND Softkey label changes
to reflect current selection.
Press the BACK Softkey
to move up one level.
INDEX
APPENDICES
PREV and NEXT Softkeys cycle through Winds Aloft
altitude selection softkeys.
PREV
OFF
SFC
3000
6000
9000
12000
15000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
18000
21000
24000
27000
30000
33000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
36000
39000
42000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
Figure 6-58 Weather Product Softkeys on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
332
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The setup menus for the Navigation Map Page and the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page control the map range
settings above which weather products data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the
weather product map range setting is selected, the weather product data is removed from the map. The menus
also provide a means in addition to the softkeys for enabling/disabling display of weather products.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Setting up and customizing the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Weather Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-59).
EIS
4) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through the Product Group 1 selections.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
7) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page with the changed settings.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-60 Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page Setup Menu
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-59 Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page Menu
Restoring default Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page settings:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
APPENDICES
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Weather Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Highlight the individual setting or product group name to restore to default values, then press the MENU Key.
5) Highlight ‘Restore Selection Default’ or ‘Restore All Defaults’, as applicable, then press the ENT Key.
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
INDEX
If multiple weather data link services are installed, customizing the display settings for the corresponding
weather products shown in Table 6-3 will result in identical settings for a comparable weather product from
another service provider.
333
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Garmin Connext Weather
Product
Precipitation
NEXRAD and No Radar Coverage
(PRECIP) and No Radar Coverage
Cloud Top
Infrared Satellite
(CLD TOP)
(IR SAT)
Garmin Connext Data Link
SiriusXM Lightning
Lightning
(XM LTNG)
(DL LTNG)
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
(SIG/AIR)
(SIG/AIR)
Meteorological Aerodrome Report Meteorological Aerodrome Report
(METARs)
(METARs)
Winds Aloft
Winds Aloft
(WIND)
(WIND)
Pilot Weather Report
Pilot Weather Report
(PIREPs)
(PIREPs)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SiriusXM Weather Product
and Softkey
FIS-B Weather Product
NEXRAD and No Radar Coverage
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Meteorological Aerodrome Report
(METARs)
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Table 6-7 Weather Data Link Map Settings Shared for Multiple Weather Data Link Sources
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Maps besides the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation
Map Page.
Setting up and customizing weather data for the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
AFCS
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-61).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-62).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-63).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
INDEX
APPENDICES
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
334
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Figure 6-61 Navigation Map Page Menu
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-62 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-63 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Weather Group
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Each active weather product has an associated legend which can be displayed on the Weather Data Link
(CNXT) Page. If no weather product softkeys are selected, the LEGEND Softkey will be unavailable.
Viewing legends for displayed weather products
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
2) Press the LEGEND Softkey to display the legends for the displayed weather products.
AFCS
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Weather Legend’ and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the legends if more are available than fit in the window.
4) To remove the Legend Window, select the LEGEND Softkey, the ENT or the CLR Key, or press the FMS Knob.
When a Garmin Connext weather product is enabled for display on the PFD Inset Map, the weather product
information box (with the product icon and age) can be displayed inside the PFD Inset Map.
APPENDICES
Viewing the weather product information box on the PFD Inset Map:
1) On the PFD, press the INSET Softkey.
2) Press the WX LGND Softkey.
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
INDEX
3) To remove the weather product information box, press the WX LGND Softkey again or deselect all active
Garmin Connext Weather products on the PFD Inset Map.
335
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Additional information about the following can be displayed by panning over the display on the map:
• Infrared Satellite (IR SAT)
• METARs
• SIGMETs
• TFRs
• AIRMETs
• PIREPs
The map panning feature is enabled by pressing the Joystick. The map range is adjusted by turning the
Joystick. If the map range is adjusted while panning is enabled, the map is re-centered on the Map Pointer.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Instructions
for Viewing
METAR and
TAF Text
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
METAR
Selected
with Map
Pointer
Figure 6-64 Map Panning on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
AFCS
CONNEXT DATA REQUESTS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Connext Data Request Menu provides the flight crew with the options to enable or disable the requested
weather coverage area(s), choose automatic weather update intervals (if desired), and the ability to send or
cancel weather data requests. The status of the Garmin Connext data request process is also displayed.
APPENDICES
Before a Garmin Connext data request can occur, a valid request coverage area must be defined from which
all currently available Garmin Connext weather products will be retrieved. At a minimum, either the aircraft’s
present position or a waypoint (as part of a flight plan or entered directly in the ‘WAYPOINT’ coverage field)
must be part of the request coverage area, otherwise the request status window indicates ‘Invalid Coverage Area’
and the system will not allow a request to occur.
It is not necessary for a destination (based on an active flight plan), a flight plan, or waypoint to be specified
prior to enabling these coverage areas; however no weather data will be retrieved for these option(s) until a
flight plan or waypoint is provided, respectively.
INDEX
Requesting Garmin Connext weather manually:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
336
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3) With ‘Connext Data Request’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-65).
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired coverage option(s) and press the ENT Key to check or uncheck
one of more of the following coverage selections (Figures 6-66, 6-67):
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• PRESENT POSITION – Requests data based on current location.
• DESTINATION – Requests data based on the active flight plan destination (Direct-To destinations excluded).
See the Flight Management section for more information about entering and activating flight plans.
EIS
• FPL – Requests data along an active flight plan, if one exists. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired
flight plan look-ahead distance option (or choose ‘REMAINING FPL’ to request the remainder of the flight
plan), then press the ENT Key.
• WAYPOINT – Requests data based on a waypoint (which may be off-route). Turn the large and small FMS
Knobs to enter a waypoint, then press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob highlight to the ‘DIAMETER / RTE WIDTH’ (diameter/route width) distance field and
turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired diameter and route width of the request, then press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) Turn the large FMS Knob until the ‘SEND REQ’ button is highlighted. Press the ENT Key to initiate the request
immediately or press the FMS Knob to return to the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page without requesting
weather data.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-65 Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page Menu
APPENDICES
Figure 6-66 Connext Data Request Window
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
337
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Destination Selected,
200 nm Diameter
Requested
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Present Position Selected,
200 nm Diameter
Requested
Off-Route Waypoint
Selected, 200 nm Diameter
Requested
AFCS
Next 80 nm of Flight Plan
Selected, 200 nm Route
Width Requested
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-67 Connext Weather Data Request Results with Precipitation and Infrared Satellite Displayed
APPENDICES
During a Connext Data Request, the Request Status box displays “Processing...” and the ‘CANCEL REQ’
button is highlighted. A countdown timer will display the estimated time remaining for the data request. If
desired, the Connext Data Request menu may be removed while the data request is processing by pressing the
FMS Knob; the data request will continue to process in the background. Connext Data Requests typically take
between 1 to 4 minutes to complete depending on the size of the selected weather coverage area, the amount
of precipitation present, and the Iridium signal connection quality.
INDEX
The system retrieves all available Garmin Connext Weather products within the selected coverage area during
an initial Connext Data Request, regardless of which products (if any) are currently enabled for display. On
subsequent requests, previously retrieved textual data (such as METARs and TAFS) is retained if it has not
expired, while new textual weather data matching the current coverage area and all graphical weather data is
downloaded during every data request.
338
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
At the completion of a successful weather data request, the Request Status Window (if still open) indicates
‘OK’. Refer to the Abnormal Operations discussion later in this section for more information on the messages
received if the request is unsuccessful.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Cancelling a Connext Weather Data Request in Progress:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Connext Data Request’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
EIS
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘CANCEL REQ’ and press the ENT Key. The request status box indicates
‘Request Cancelled’.
5) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The pilot can schedule Connext Data Requests to recur automatically. Auto requests remain enabled until
the pilot disables them, or the system power is cycled. The Request Status Window will indicate the number of
minutes or seconds until the next automatic data request occurs.
NOTE: If automatic Connext Data Requests were enabled prior to the system entering Reversionary Mode,
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
the automatic weather data requests will continue in Reversionary Mode, however the Connext Data
Request Window and its associated options will not be available.
Enabling/disabling automatic Connext Data Requests:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Connext Data Request’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Choose the desired weather coverage options.
AFCS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘UPDATE RATE’ setting. Then turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the
desired automatic update frequency (OFF, 5 Min, 10 Min, 15 Min, 20 Min, 30 Min, 45 Min, or 60 Min), then
press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) The ‘SEND REQ” button is highlighted and a timer is displayed in the ‘REQUEST STATUS’ based on the currently
selected update rate. Press the ENT Key to immediately send an immediate Connext Data Request.
Or:
Press the FMS Knob to return to the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
339
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
GARMIN CONNEXT WEATHER PRODUCTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
PRECIPITATION
NOTE: Precipitation data cannot be displayed simultaneously on the navigation map with terrain or the
airborne weather radar overlay.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The Precipitation weather product provides radar precipitation information in selected radar coverage areas.
This information comes from individual weather radar sites and weather data sources such as government
agencies. Each radar site or source may provide weather data at differing rates and times. Periodically,
the Garmin Connext service compiles the available information to form a composite image, and assigns a
single time to indicate when it created the image. This image becomes the Precipitation weather product.
Individual images--gathered from each radar site--differ in age, and are always older than the displayed
Precipitation weather product age.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Because of the time required to detect, assemble, and distribute the Precipitation weather product, the
displayed weather information contained within the product may be significantly older than the current
radar synopsis and may not depict the current weather conditions. The Precipitation weather product should
never be used as a basis for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous weather regardless of the
information it contains.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Boundary of
Precipitation Data
Request
APPENDICES
No Radar Coverage
Figure 6-68 Precipitation Data on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
Displaying Precipitation weather information:
INDEX
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, select the INSET Softkey). This step is not necessary on the
Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
340
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
2) Press the PRECIP Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Radar data shown represents the lowest level, base reflectivity, of radar returns. The display of the
information is color-coded to indicate the weather severity level. All weather product legends can be viewed
on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page. For the Precipitation legend (Figure 6-69), press the LEGEND Softkey
when Precipitation is selected for display.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
No Radar Coverage
Boundary of Connext
weather data request
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-69 Precipitation Data Legend
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The display of no radar coverage is enabled when Precipitation is selected for display. Areas where
precipitation radar coverage is not currently available or is not being collected are indicated in gray shade of
purple. A white tick-marked boundary line depicts the selected coverage area of the Connext Data Request.
This boundary encloses the precipitation data when this weather product is displayed.
Reflectivity
AFCS
Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. Colors on the Precipitation
display directly correlate to the level of detected reflectivity. Reflectivity as it relates to hazardous weather
can be very complex.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The role of radar is essentially to detect moisture in the atmosphere. Simply put, certain types of weather
reflect radar better than others. The intensity of a radar reflection is not necessarily an indication of the
weather hazard level. For instance, wet hail returns a strong radar reflection, while dry hail does not. Both
wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous.
The different radar echo intensities are measured in decibels (dB) relative to reflectivity (Z). Weather
radars measure the reflectivity ratio, or the energy reflected back to the radar receiver (designated by the
letter Z). The value of Z increases as the returned signal strength increases.
APPENDICES
Precipitation Limitations
Radar images may have certain limitations:
• Radar base reflectivity does not provide sufficient information to determine precipitation characteristics
(wet hail vs. rain). For example, it is not possible to distinguish between wet snow, wet hail, and rain.
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
341
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
• The radar beam may overshoot precipitation occurring below the beam, causing no precipitation to
be displayed. An individual radar site cannot depict high altitude storms at close ranges. It has no
information about storms directly over the radar site.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• When zoomed in to a range of 30 nm, each square block on the display represents an area of four square
kilometers.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Block Represents
4 km2
Figure 6-70 Precipitation Data - Zoomed
The following may cause abnormalities in displayed radar images:
• Ground clutter
AFCS
• Strobes and spurious radar data
• Sun strobes (when the radar antenna points directly at the sun)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows
INDEX
APPENDICES
• Metallic dust (chaff) from military aircraft, which can cause alterations in radar scans
342
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
INFRARED SATELLITE
Infrared Satellite (IR SAT) data (Figure 6-71) depicts cloud top temperatures from satellite imagery. Brighter
cloud top colors indicate cooler temperatures occurring at higher altitudes.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-71 Infrared Satellite Data on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Displaying Cloud Tops information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
2) Press the IR SAT Softkey.
AFCS
To display the Infrared Satellite legend (Figure 6-72), press the LEGEND Softkey when Infrared Satellite data
is selected for display.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-72 Infrared Satellite Legend
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
343
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
GARMIN CONNEXT DATA LINK LIGHTNING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Data Link Lightning (DL LTNG) (Figure 6-73) shows the approximate location of cloud-to-ground lightning
strikes. A strike icon represents a strike that has occurred within a two-kilometer region. Neither cloud-tocloud nor the exact location of the lightning strike is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
If the aircraft is also equipped with the L-3 WX-500 Stormscope®, only one lightning product may be
enabled for display at a time on a navigation map.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Lightning Strikes
Figure 6-73 Garmin Connext Data Link Lightning
AFCS
Displaying Garmin Connext Data Link Lightning information:
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey). This step is not necessary on the
Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the DL LTNG Softkey.
APPENDICES
To display the Connext Data Link Lightning legend on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page (Figure 6-74),
select the LEGEND Softkey when Connext Data Link Lightning is selected for display.
INDEX
Figure 6-74 Connext Data Link Lightning Legend
344
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SIGMETS AND AIRMETS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SIGMETs (SIGnificant METeorological Information) and AIRMETs (AIRmen’s METeorological Information)
are issued for potentially hazardous weather. A Convective SIGMET is issued for hazardous convective
weather such as severe or widespread thunderstorms. A localized SIGMET can be displayed when significant
weather conditions are not widespread.
The entire SIGMET or AIRMET is displayed as long as any portion of it is issued within the coverage area
of the Connext Data Request.
EIS
Instructions for Viewing
SIGMET/AIRMET Text
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SIGMET
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-75 SIGMET/AIRMET Data
AFCS
Displaying SIGMETs and AIRMETs:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
2) Press the SIG/AIR Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) To view the text of the SIGMET or AIRMET, press the Joystick and move the Map Pointer over the icon.
4) Press the ENT key. Figure 6-76 shows sample SIGMET text.
To display the SIGMET and AIRMET legend (Figure 6-77), press the LEGEND Softkey when SIGMETs and
AIRMETs are selected for display.
APPENDICES
190-00962-04 Rev. A
INDEX
Figure 6-76 Sample SIGMET Text
Figure 6-77 SIGMET/AIRMET Legend
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
345
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
METARS AND TAFS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: METAR information is only displayed within the installed navigation database service area.
EIS
METARs (METeorological Aerodrome Reports) typically contain information about the temperature,
dewpoint, wind, precipitation, cloud cover, cloud base heights, visibility, and barometric pressure at an
airport or observation station. They can also contain information on precipitation amounts, lightning, and
other critical data. METARs reflect hourly observations; non-routine updates include the code “SPECI” in the
report. METARs are shown as colored flags at airports that provide them.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Instructions
for Viewing
METAR and
TAF Text
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected
Airport
AFCS
Figure 6-78 METAR Flags on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TAFs (Terminal Aerodrome Forecasts) are weather predictions for specific airports within a 24- hour period,
and may span up to 36 hours. TAFs typically include forecast wind, visibility, weather phenomena, and sky
conditions using METAR codes.
METAR and TAF text are displayed on the Weather Information Page. METAR data is displayed first in a
decoded fashion, followed by the original text. Note the original text may contain additional information not
found in the decoded text. TAF information is displayed only in its original form, when a TAF is available.
APPENDICES
Displaying METAR and TAF text:
1) On the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page, press the METAR Softkey.
2) Press the Joystick and pan to the desired airport.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Weather Information Page is shown with METAR and TAF text.
INDEX
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. METAR text must be completely
scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
5) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
Or:
346
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1) Select the Weather Information Page.
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Waypoint Page Group.
b) Press the WX Softkey to select the Weather Information Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob to display the cursor.
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired airport and press the ENT Key.
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. Note that the METAR text must
be completely scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
METAR Text for the
Selected Airport
METAR Symbol
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TAF Text for the
Selected Airport
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-79 METAR and TAF Text on the Weather Information Page
AFCS
Original METAR text is also accessible while panning the map cursor over a METAR flag on any map page
on which a METAR is displayed. The METAR text is shown in a box near the METAR flag.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
In addition, METAR flags and their associated text are displayed on the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
METAR flags appears next to waypoints in the flight plan with an associated METAR.
Displaying original METAR text on the Active Flight Plan Page:
1) Select the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
APPENDICES
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight a waypoint with an associated METAR. The METAR text will appear in the
‘SELECTED WAYPOINT WEATHER’ window below.
4) When finished, press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor or press the FPL Key to exit the Active Flight Plan
Page.
INDEX
To display the METAR legend on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page, press the LEGEND Softkey when
METARs are selected for display.
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
347
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The METAR flag color is determined by the information in the METAR text. The METAR flag is gray when
the METAR text does not contain adequate information to determine the METAR category (e.g. VFR, IFR,
etc.).
EIS
Figure 6-80 METAR Legend
WINDS ALOFT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Winds Aloft data (Figure 6-81) shows the forecasted wind speed and direction at the surface and at selected
altitudes. Altitude can be displayed in 3,000-foot increments up to 42,000 feet MSL.
Displaying Winds Aloft data:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the WIND Softkey.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Select the desired altitude level: SFC (surface) up to 42,000 feet. Press the NEXT or PREV Softkey to cycle
through the altitude softkeys. The WIND Softkey label changes to reflect the altitude selected.
INDEX
Figure 6-81 Winds Aloft Data at 9,000 Feet
To display the Winds Aloft legend (Figure 6-82), press the LEGEND Softkey when Winds Aloft is selected
for display.
348
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Figure 6-82 Winds Aloft Data with Legend
EIS
Profile View
Path Enabled
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Wind Component
Velocity and Direction
Arrows
Altitude Scale
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-83 Winds Aloft Data Inside Profile View (Navigation Map Page)
Tailwind
Symbol
Headwind/Tailwind
Component
None
None
Less than 5 knots
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Headwind
Symbol
AFCS
Headwind and tailwind components aloft are available inside the Profile View on the Navigation Map Page
(Figure 6-83). The displayed components are relative to current aircraft altitude and track, but not to aircraft
speed.
5 knots
APPENDICES
10 knots
50 knots
Table 6-8 Profile View Headwind/Tailwind Component Symbols
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
349
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Enabling/disabling profile view (containing winds aloft data)
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the PROFILE Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Show Profile View’ or ‘Hide Profile View’ (choice dependent on current
state) and press the ENT Key.
EIS
Winds Aloft data inside the Profile View is enabled by default when the Profile View is displayed on the
Navigation Map Page. This behavior can be changed on the Navigation Map Page.
Enabling/disabling winds aloft data display in Profile View:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With Map Setup highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-84).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Profile Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-85).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘Profile Winds’ (Figure 6-86).
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
7) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 6-84 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-85 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
350
Figure 6-86 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Weather Group
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PIREPS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pilot Weather Reports (PIREPs) describe in-flight weather encountered by pilots. A PIREP may contain
adverse weather conditions, such as low in-flight visibility, icing conditions, wind shear, turbulence, and type
of aircraft flown. PIREPs are issued as either Routine (UA) or Urgent (UUA).
Instructions for
Viewing PIREP
Text
EIS
Urgent
PIREP
PIREP
Selected
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-87 PIREPs on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Displaying PIREP text:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the PIREPS Softkey.
AFCS
4) Press the Joystick and pan to the desired weather report. A gray circle will appear around the weather report
when it is selected.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Press the ENT Key. The PIREP tex is first displayed in a decoded fashion, followed by the original text. Note the
original text may contain additional information not present in the decoded version.
6) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the PIREP text.
7) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to close the PIREP text window and return to the Weather Data Link (CNXT)
Page.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
351
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
EIS
Decoded PIREP Text
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Original PIREP Text
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-88 PIREP Text on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
To display the PIREP legend (Figure 6-89), press the LEGEND Softkey when PIREPs are selected for
display. The PIREP color is determined by the type (routine or urgent).
Figure 6-89 AIREPs & PIREPs Legend
AFCS
TFRS
NOTE: Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) data from Garmin Connext is only available in the United States
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
(not including any U.S. territories.) Refer to sites.garmin.com/connext for Garmin Connext product coverage
information.
APPENDICES
In the United States, the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) issues Temporary Flight Restrictions (TFRs)
to designate areas where flight is restricted. TFRs are issued to restrict flight for a variety of reasons including
national security, law enforcement, firefighting, natural disasters., airshows, and large sporting events. TFRs
may be issued at any time, and TFR data displayed on the G1000 is only intended to supplement official TFR
information obtained from Flight Service Stations (FSS), and air traffic control.
INDEX
The age of TFR data is not shown; however, if TFR data is not available or has expired, the system displays
‘TFR N/A’ in the upper-left corner of maps on which TFRs can be displayed.
352
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TFR Summary
Information
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TFR Selected
with Map
Pointer
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-90 TFR Data on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Displaying TFR Data:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page or Navigation Map Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the Joystick and pan the map pointer over a TFR to highlight it. The system displays TFR summary
information above the map.
3) Press the ENT Key. The system displays a pop-up menu.
4) If necessary, turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Review Airspaces’ and press the ENT Key. The system displays the
TFR Information window (Figure 6-91).
AFCS
5) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to remove the TFR Information window.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-91 Full Text for Selected TFR
APPENDICES
The setup menus for the Navigation Map Page control the map range settings above which TFR data is
decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the TFR product map range setting is selected, the TFR
product data is removed from the map.
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
INDEX
Maps other than the Navigation Map Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
353
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Setting up and customizing TFR data for maps on which TFR data can be displayed:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With Map Setup highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-92).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Aviation Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-93).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll to the TFR product range setting (Figure 6-94).
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (Off, range settings).
EIS
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-92 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-94 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Weather Group
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-93 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
354
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ABNORMAL OPERATIONS
If the G1000 cannot complete a Connext Data Request, one or more messages will appear in the request status
window.
Auto requests inhibited
Send manual request to reset.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Weather Request Status
Message
Description
The system has disabled automatic weather data requests due to excessive errors.
Automatic weather data requests have stopped. Send a manual weather data request to
resume automatic updates.
EIS
Connext Server Temporarily
Inop
Connext Server Inop
Invalid Coverage Area
No Connext Subscription
Reduce Request Area
Transfer Preempted
APPENDICES
Request Cancelled
Request Failed - Try Again
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
INDEX
A ground-based server error has occurred or invalid data received.
There is a problem with the Garmin Connext registration. In the United States, contact
Garmin at 1-866-739-5687. Outside the United States, call 913-397-8200, wait for the
operator, and request extension 1135.
The Garmin Connext weather data server is temporarily out of service, but is expected to
return to service in less than 30 minutes.
The Garmin Connext weather data server will be out of service for at least 30 minutes.
The Connext Data Request does not sufficiently define a coverage area on which to
retrieve weather data. Verify the selections in the Connext Weather Coverage Window,
then issue another Connext Data Request.
The system is not currently subscribed to the Garmin Connext Weather service, or the
access code is incorrect. Verify the access code. In the United States, contact Garmin at
1-866-739-5687. Outside the United States, call 913-397-8200, wait for the operator,
and request extension 1135.
The weather data request area exceeds size limits. Reduce weather coverage area and
re-send data request.
The user has cancelled a weather data request.
The ground-based server halted the weather data request due to excessive delays. Re-send
data request.
The Iridium voice telephone has interrupted the weather data request. Retry request when
Iridium voice telephone is not in use.
AFCS
Connext Comm Error [8]
Connext Login Invalid
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The system halted the weather data request due to excessive delays while receiving
weather data. Verify Iridium signal strength and re-try data request.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Connext Comm Error [7]
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Auto update retry: ## Seconds The system will attempt another automatic weather data request after an error occurred
during the previous request. Displays estimated time until next automatic request occurs.
Connext Comm Error [2]
A communications error has occurred with the GIA or GDL 59.
Connext Comm Error [4]
This occurs if multiple weather data requests have recently failed, or the GIA or GDL 59 is
off-line. If this error persists, the system should be serviced.
Connext Comm Error [5]
The Iridium or Garmin Connext services are not accessible. Check Iridium signal strength.
If this error persists, the system should be serviced.
Connext Comm Error [6]
A communications error has occurred. If this error persists, the system should be serviced.
Table 6-9 Abnormal Weather Data Request Status Messages
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
355
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
GARMIN CONNEXT WEATHER IN REVERSIONARY MODE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the G1000 is operating in Reversionary Mode, only those weather products which can be displayed
on the PFD Inset map will be available for display (see Table 6-6 for a list of weather products and their
associated map availability).
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
If manual weather data requests were enabled prior to entering Reversionary Mode, no new Garmin
Connext weather data can be retrieved while operating in Reversionary Mode. If automatic weather data
requests were enabled prior to Reversionary Mode operation, the system will continue the automatic data
requests in Reversionary Mode (provided automatic requests have not been inhibited due to a system error).
356
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.3 FIS-B WEATHER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous
weather. Information contained within data link weather products may not accurately depict current
weather conditions.
EIS
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather
information shown by the data link weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data link weather product
may be significantly older than the indicated weather product age.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The optional Garmin GDL 88 is a Universal Access Transceiver (UAT). It receives Flight Information Services
- Broadcast (FIS-B) weather data from a network of UAT ground-based transceivers (GBTs). The system displays
FIS-B graphical weather information and associated text on the Multi Function Display (MFD) and the Primary
Flight Display (PFD) Inset Map.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
FIS-B weather data reception requires the aircraft be within range and line-of-sight of an operating GBT
broadcasting FIS-B weather data. Reception may be affected by factors including altitude and terrain.
Reception of FIS-B weather data occurs automatically without any pilot action. FIS-B broadcasts provide
weather data in a repeating cycle which may take approximately ten minutes to transmit all available weather
data. Therefore, not all available weather data may be available immediately upon initial FIS-B signal acquisition.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
USING FIS-B WEATHER PRODUCTS
The primary map for viewing FIS-B Weather data is the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page in the Map Page
Group.
Viewing the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page:
AFCS
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Weather Data Link (FIS-B, XM, or CNXT) Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) If the page title displays a weather data link weather source other than ‘FIS-B’, such as ‘XM’ or ‘CNXT’, proceed
to the following steps to change the data link weather source.
4) Press the MENU Key.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Display FIS-B Weather’ and press the ENT Key. The page title will display
‘MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (FIS-B)’ to indicate FIS-B is now the selected data link weather source.
APPENDICES
On the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) page, the pilot can enable/disable the reception of FIS-B weather data,
which includes all FIS-B weather products and related softkeys on various maps.
Enabling/disabling the FIS-B weather feature:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page.
INDEX
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘Enable FIS-B Weather’ or ‘Disable FIS-B Weather’, and press the ENT Key.
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
357
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Weather
Product Age
Display
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-95 Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When a FIS-B weather product is active on a map, the age of the data is displayed on the screen to the right
of the product symbol (Figure 6-95). The age of the product is based on the time difference between when
the data was assembled on the ground and the current GPS time. Weather products are transmitted at specific
intervals (defined in the Broadcast Rate column in Table 6-10).
AFCS
If for any reason, a weather product is not refreshed within the Expiration Time intervals (see Table 6-10),
the data is considered expired and is removed from the display. This ensures that the displayed data is consistent
with FIS-B broadcast data. If more than half of the expiration time has elapsed, the color of the product age
displayed changes to amber. The system displays dashes instead of a product age when a product has expired.
If a weather product is not available or has not been received, the system displays ‘N/A’ instead of a product age.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 6-10 shows the FIS-B weather product symbols, the expiration times, and broadcast rates. The broadcast
rate represents the interval at which FIS-B GBTs broadcast new signals that may or may not contain new weather
data. It does not represent the rate at which weather data is updated or new content is received by the UAT.
358
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Symbol
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FIS-B Weather Product
Expiration Time Broadcast Rate
(Minutes)
(Minutes)
30
15
NEXRAD Composite (Regional)
30
2.5
90
5
90
10
90
10
60
5
EIS
Meteorological Aerodrome Report
(METARs
Pilot Weather Report
(PIREPs)
Winds Aloft
(WIND)
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
(SIG/AIR)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NEXRAD Composite (US)
30
2.5
Terminal Aerodrome Forecast
no product image
60
10
Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR)
no product image
60
10
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
no product image
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
No Radar Coverage
Table 6-10 Weather Product Symbols and Data Timing
+
+
+
+
PIREPs
+
+
SIGMETs/AIRMETs (SIG/AIR)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+*
+
+
+
INDEX
Winds Aloft* (WIND)
+
+
TAFs
TFRs
+
APPENDICES
No Radar Coverage
Flight Plan Pages
+
Nearest Page Group
+
AUX - Video Page
Weather Data Link
(FIS-B) Page
METARs
AUX - Trip Planning
Page
Navigation Map Page
+
Weather Information
Page
PFD Inset Map
+
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
+
AFCS
NEXRAD
FIS-B Weather Product
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Table 6-11 shows which FIS-B weather products can be displayed (indicated with a ‘+’ symbol) on specific
maps.
* Winds Aloft information appears inside Profile View window on the Navigation Map Page.
Table 6-11 FIS-B Weather Product Display Maps
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
359
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Softkeys control the display of weather information on most MFD pages and the PFD Inset Map (Figure
6-96) shows the weather product softkeys for the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page). When a weather product
is enabled for display, the corresponding softkey label changes to gray.
SIG/AIR
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NEXRAD
METAR
LEGEND MORE WX CHKLIST
PIREPS
BACK
US
RGNL
EIS
WIND OFF
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
WIND Softkey label changes
to reflect current selection.
Press the BACK Softkey
to move up one level.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
PREV and NEXT Softkeys cycle through Winds Aloft
altitude selection softkeys.
PREV
OFF
1000
1500
2000
3000
6000
9000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
12000
15000
18000
24000
30000
34000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
39000
45000
53000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
Figure 6-96 Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Weather Product Softkeys
AFCS
Maps besides the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map
Page.
Setting up and customizing FIS-B weather data for the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-97).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-98).
APPENDICES
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-99).
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
INDEX
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
360
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Figure 6-97 Navigation Map Page Menu
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-98 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-99 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Weather Group
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The setup menus for the Navigation Map Page and the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page control the map range
settings above which weather products data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the
weather product map range setting is selected, the weather product data is removed from the map. The menus
also provide a means in addition to the softkeys for enabling/disabling display of weather products.
Setting up and customizing the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page:
AFCS
1) Select the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Weather Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-100).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘PRODUCT GROUP 1’, and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-101).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
APPENDICES
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page with the changed settings.
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
361
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-100 Weather Data
Link (FIS-B) Page Menu
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-101 Weather Data Link (FIS-B)
Page Setup Menu
Restoring default Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page settings:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
AFCS
3) With ‘Weather Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘PRODUCT GROUP 1’, and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-101).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) If restoring an individual weather product setting to its default value, turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the
desired field to restore.
6) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
7) Turn the large FMS Knob if needed to highlight ‘Restore Selection Default’ (to restore only the highlighted field)
or ‘Restore All Defaults’ (to restore all products within the selected product group to their default settings), and
press the ENT Key.
362
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
If multiple data link weather services are installed, customizing the display settings for the corresponding
weather products shown in Table 6-12 will result in identical settings for all services.
Garmin Connext Weather
Product
FIS-B Weather Product
Precipitation
(PRECIP) and No Radar Coverage
Next-generation Radar
(NEXRAD) and No Radar Coverage
Not Available
EIS
Not Available
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
(SIG/AIR)
Meteorological Aerodrome Report
(METARs)
Winds Aloft
(WIND)
Pilot Weather Report
(PIREPs)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Infrared Satellite
(IR SAT)
Garmin Connext Data Link
SiriusXM Lightning
Lightning
(XM LTNG)
(DL LTNG)
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
(SIG/AIR)
(SIG/AIR)
Meteorological Aerodrome Report Meteorological Aerodrome Report
(METARs)
(METARs)
Winds Aloft
Winds Aloft
(WIND)
(WIND)
Pilot Weather Report
Pilot Weather Report
(PIREPs)
(PIREPs)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SiriusXM Weather Product
and Softkey
Next-generation Radar
(NEXRAD) and No Radar
Coverage
Cloud Top
(CLD TOP)
Table 6-12 Weather Data Link Map Settings Shared for Multiple Weather Data Link Sources
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When a FIS-B weather product is enabled for display on the PFD Inset Map, the weather product information
box (with the product icon and age) can be displayed inside the PFD Inset Map.
Displaying/removing the weather product information box on the PFD Inset Map:
AFCS
1) On the PFD, press the INSET Softkey.
2) Press the WX LGND Softkey.
3) To remove the weather product information box, press the WX LGND Softkey again.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Each active weather product has an associated legend which can be displayed on the Weather Data Link
(FIS-B) Page. A weather product legend can also be displayed on the Navigation Map Page for active FIS-B
weather products displayed on that page.
Viewing legends for displayed weather products on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page:
APPENDICES
1) Select the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page.
2) Press the LEGEND Softkey to display the legends for the displayed weather products.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
b) Select ‘Weather Legend’ and press the ENT Key.
3) To remove the Legend Window, press the LEGEND Softkey, the ENT or the CLR Key, or press the FMS Knob.
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
363
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Viewing legends for displayed weather products (on the Navigation Map Page):
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MAP Softkey.
3) Press the LEGEND Softkey (available if one or more FIS-B weather products are enabled for display).
4) To remove the Legend Window, press the LEGEND Softkey, the ENT or the CLR Key, or press the FMS Knob.
Additional information about METARs, SIGMETs, AIRMETs, PIREPs, and TFRs can be selected by using the
Map Pointer to pan to the desired information on the map.
EIS
The map panning feature is enabled by pressing the Joystick. The map range is adjusted by turning the
Joystick. If the map range is adjusted while panning is enabled, the map is re-centered on the Map Pointer.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Instructions for
Viewing METAR
and TAF Text
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected Airport
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-102 METAR Flags on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page
NEXRAD
NOTE: The NEXRAD weather product cannot be displayed at the same time as terrain.
APPENDICES
The National Weather Service (NWS) operates the WSR-88D, or NEXRAD (NEXt-generation RADar)
system, an extensive network of 156 high-resolution Doppler radar systems. The NEXRAD network provides
centralized meteorological information for the continental United States and selected overseas locations. The
maximum range of a single NEXRAD site is 250 nm.
INDEX
Individual NEXRAD sites supply the network with radar images, and the images from each radar site may
arrive at the network at different rates and times. Periodically, the weather data provider to FIS-B compiles
the available individual site images from the network to form a composite image, and assigns a single time
to indicate when it created the image. This image becomes the NEXRAD weather product. Individual
364
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
images--gathered from each NEXRAD site--differ in age, and are always older than the displayed NEXRAD
weather product age. The data provider then sends the NEXRAD data to the FIS-B GBTs, which transmit this
information during the next designated broadcast time for the NEXRAD weather product.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Because of the time required to detect, assemble, and distribute the NEXRAD weather product, the displayed
weather information contained within the product may be significantly older than the current radar synopsis
and may not depict the current weather conditions. NEXRAD information should never be used as a basis for
maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous weather regardless of the information it contains.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-103 NEXRAD Weather Product on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page)
AFCS
The FIS-B NEXRAD weather product may be displayed for a region around the GBT (higher resolution,
updated more frequently) or for across the continental United States (lower resolution, updated less
frequently). The pilot can choose which type of NEXRAD weather product is displayed.
Displaying the NEXRAD weather product::
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey). This step is not necessary on the
Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page.
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey. This softkey becomes the US Softkey. A mosaic of NEXRAD data for the continental
United States (CONUS) is displayed.
APPENDICES
3) To display the regional version of the NEXRAD weather product, press the US Softkey. Softkey becomes the
RGNL Softkey.
4) To remove the NEXRAD weather product, press the RGNL Softkey. Softkey becomes the NEXRAD Softkey.
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
INDEX
The regional NEXRAD weather product coverage area varies, as it is determined by the data received from
ground-based sources. When the regional NEXRAD weather product is enabled, a white boundary encloses
this area to indicate the geographic limits of the regional NEXRAD coverage being displayed. The system
shows composite radar data from all available NEXRAD sites inside of this boundary area.
365
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If the continental United States version of the NEXRAD weather product is shown (US Softkey enabled),
the coverage boundary is not shown on the map.
No Radar
Coverage
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Boundary of
FIS-B Regional
NEXRAD
Product
Figure 6-104 Regional NEXRAD on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
This data is composed of the maximum reflectivity from the individual radar sweeps. The display of the
information is color-coded to indicate the weather severity level. All weather product legends can be viewed
on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page. For the NEXRAD legend (Figure 6-105), press the LEGEND Softkey
when the NEXRAD weather product is enabled.
No Radar Coverage
(Inside Coverage
Boundary)
APPENDICES
Boundary of Regional
Radar Coverage Area
Figure 6-105 NEXRAD Weather Product Legend
INDEX
The display of no radar coverage is enabled when NEXRAD is selected for display. Areas where radar data
is not currently available, has not yet been received, or is not being collected are indicated in gray shade of
purple.
366
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NOTE: If the system has not received all available NEXRAD weather data (such as during initial FIS-B signal
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
acquisition or in areas of marginal or poor signal reception), the system may display areas of no radar
coverage which are subsequently removed as radar data is received. It may take up to approximately ten
minutes to receive all FIS-B data, when adequate reception is available.
Reflectivity
EIS
Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. Colors on the NEXRAD
display are directly correlative to the level of detected reflectivity. Reflectivity as it relates to hazardous
weather can be very complex.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The role of radar is essentially to detect moisture in the atmosphere. Simply put, certain types of weather
reflect radar better than others. The intensity of a radar reflection is not necessarily an indication of the
weather hazard level. For instance, wet hail returns a strong radar reflection, while dry hail does not. Both
wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The different NEXRAD echo intensities are measured in decibels (dB) relative to reflectivity (Z). NEXRAD
measures the radar reflectivity ratio, or the energy reflected back to the radar receiver (designated by the
letter Z). The value of Z increases as the returned signal strength increases.
NEXRAD Limitations
NEXRAD radar images may have certain limitations:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• At a map range of 30 nm or less, individual blocks of NEXRAD weather data are viewable. For the
regional version of the NEXRAD weather product, each block is 1.5 nm wide by 1 nm tall. For the
continental United States version of the NEXRAD weather product, each block is 7.5 nm wide by 5 nm
wide.
• The continental US version of the NEXRAD weather product is not available above 60º of latitude.
• Precipitation occurring below the radar beam will not be detected.
AFCS
The following may cause abnormalities in displayed NEXRAD radar images:
• Ground clutter
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Strobes and spurious radar data
• Sun strobes (when the radar antenna points directly at the sun)
• Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows
• Metallic dust (chaff) from military aircraft, which can cause alterations in radar scans
APPENDICES
SIGMETS AND AIRMETS
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
INDEX
SIGMETs (SIGnificant METeorological Information) and AIRMETs (AIRmen’s METeorological Information)
are issued for potentially hazardous weather. A Convective SIGMET is issued for hazardous convective
weather such as severe or widespread thunderstorms. A localized SIGMET can be displayed when significant
weather conditions are not widespread.
367
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Instructions
for Viewing
SIGMET/
AIRMET
Text
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Selected
Convective
SIGMET
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-106 SIGMET/AIRMET Weather Product on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page
Displaying SIGMETs and AIRMETs:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the SIG/AIR Softkey.
3) To view the text of the SIGMET or AIRMET, press the Joystick and move the Map Pointer over the icon.
4) Press the ENT key. Figure 6-107 shows sample SIGMET text.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
To display the SIGMET and AIRMET legend (Figure 6-108), press the LEGEND Softkey when SIGMETs and
AIRMETs are selected for display.
INDEX
Figure 6-107 Convective SIGMET Text
368
Figure 6-108 SIGMET/AIRMET Legend
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
METARS AND TAFS
NOTE: Atmospheric pressure is reported in inches of mercury (in Hg). Temperatures are reported in Celsius.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The system will begin to display METAR flags as it receives reports; however it may take approximately
ten minutes for all available METAR and TAF data to be received over a FIS-B broadcast.
EIS
Aviation Routine Weather Reports or METARs typically contain current information about the temperature,
dewpoint, wind, precipitation, cloud cover, cloud heights, visibility, and barometric pressure at an airport or
observation station. They can also contain information on precipitation amounts, lightning, and other critical
data. METARs reflect routine hourly observations. An Aviation Selected Special Report or SPECI includes
the code “SPECI” in the report, and may be issued if critical information has changed after the issuance of a
METAR. The system displays colored flags at airports with report(s) available.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Instructions for
Viewing METAR
and TAF Text
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected Airport
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-109 METAR Flags on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page
APPENDICES
TAFs (Terminal Aerodrome Forecasts) are predications of expected weather conditions for an area within
five statute miles of the center of an airport’s runway complex. The National Weather Service issues scheduled
TAFs four times each day, and additional amended TAFs if conditions warrant. TAFs typically span a forecast
period of 24 hours, but may be scheduled for a longer period. TAFs may include forecast wind, visibility,
significant weather phenomena, and sky conditions using METAR codes.
METAR and TAF text are available on the Weather Information Page. METAR data is displayed first in a
decoded fashion, followed by the original text. Note the original text may contain additional information not
found in the decoded version. TAF information, when available, appears only in its original text.
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
369
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Displaying METAR and TAF text:
1) On the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page, press the METAR Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the Joystick and pan to the desired airport.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Weather Information Page is shown with METAR and TAF text.
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. METAR text must be completely
scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
5) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page.
EIS
Or:
1) Select the Weather Information Page.
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Waypoint Page Group.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
b) Press the WX Softkey to select the Weather Information Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to display the cursor.
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired airport and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. Note that the METAR text must
be completely scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
METAR Text for the
Selected Airport
AFCS
METAR Symbol
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TAF Text for the
Selected Airport
Figure 6-110 METAR and TAF Text on the Weather Information Page
Original METAR text is also accessible while panning the map cursor over a METAR flag on any map page
on which a METAR is displayed. The METAR text is shown in a box near the METAR flag.
INDEX
In addition, METAR flags and their associated text are displayed on the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
METAR flags appears next to waypoints in the flight plan with an associated METAR.
370
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying original METAR text on the Active Flight Plan Page:
1) Select the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired waypoint. The METAR text will appear in the ‘SELECTED
WAYPOINT WEATHER’ window below.
4) When finished, press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor or press the FPL Key to exit the Active Flight Plan
Page.
EIS
To display the METAR legend on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page (Figure 6-111), press the LEGEND
Softkey when METARs are selected for display.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The METAR flag color is determined by the information in the METAR text. The system displays a gray
METAR flag when the METAR text does not contain enough information to determine the METAR category
(e.g., VFR, IFR).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-111 METAR Legend
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
WINDS ALOFT
The Winds Aloft weather product (Figure 6-112) shows the predicted wind speed and direction at selected
altitudes. Winds aloft are available in various altitudes between 1,000 feet and 53,000 feet MSL. Temperatures
aloft, when available, appear next to the winds aloft arrows on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B). Temperatures
are in degrees Celsius.
AFCS
Displaying Winds Aloft information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the WIND OFF Softkey.
4) Press the softkey for the desired altitude. Press the NEXT or PREV Softkey to cycle through the altitude softkeys.
The WIND Softkey label changes to reflect the altitude selected.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
371
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-112 Winds Aloft Weather Product at 6,000 Feet
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
To display the Winds Aloft legend (Figure 6-113), select the LEGEND Softkey when Winds Aloft is
selected for display.
AFCS
Figure 6-113 Winds Aloft Data with Legend
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Headwind and tailwind components aloft are available inside the Profile View on the Navigation Map
Page (Figure 6-114). The displayed components are relative to current aircraft altitude and track, but not to
aircraft speed.
372
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Winds Aloft Data Age
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-114 Navigation Map Page with Winds Aloft Data on Profile View
Arrows pointing to the left indicate headwind components; tailwind component arrows point to the right, as
shown in Table 6-13.
Tailwind
Symbol
Headwind/Tailwind Component
None
None
Less than 5 knots
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Headwind
Symbol
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Wind Component
Velocity and Direction
Arrows
Altitude Scale
5 knots
AFCS
10 knots
50 knots
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 6-13 Profile View Headwind/Tailwind Component Symbols
Enabling/disabling profile view (containing winds aloft data)
APPENDICES
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the PROFILE Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
INDEX
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Show Profile View’ or ‘Hide Profile View’ (choice dependent on current
state) and press the ENT Key.
373
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Winds Aloft data inside the Profile View is enabled by default when the Profile View is displayed on the
Navigation Map Page. This behavior can be changed on the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Enabling/disabling winds aloft data display in Profile View:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With Map Setup highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-115).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Profile Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-116).
EIS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘Profile Winds’ (Figure 6-117).
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 6-115 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-117 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu,
Weather Group
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 6-116 Navigation Map Page
Setup Menu
374
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PIREPS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pilot Weather Reports (PIREPs) describe in-flight weather encountered by pilots. A PIREP may contain
adverse weather conditions, such as low in-flight visibility, icing conditions, wind shear, turbulence, and type
of aircraft flown. PIREPs are issued as either Routine (UA) or Urgent (UUA).
Instructions for
Viewing PIREP
Text
Urgent
PIREP
EIS
PIREP
Selected
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-118 PIREPs on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Displaying PIREP text:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the PIREPS Softkey.
AFCS
4) Press the Joystick and pan to the desired weather report. A gray circle will appear around the weather report
when it is selected.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Press the ENT Key. The PIREP text is first displayed in a decoded fashion, followed by the original text. Note
the original text may contain additional information not shown in the decoded version.
6) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the PIREP text.
7) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to close the PIREP text window and return to the Weather Data Link (FIS-B)
Page.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
375
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
EIS
Decoded PIREP Text
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Original PIREP
Text
Figure 6-119 PIREP Text on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
To display the PIREP legend (Figure 6-120), press the LEGEND Softkey when PIREPs are selected for
display. The PIREP color is determined by the report type (routine or urgent).
AFCS
Figure 6-120 AIREPs & PIREPs Legend
TFRS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: Do not rely solely upon data link services to provide Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) information.
Always confirm TFR information through official sources such as Flight Service Stations or Air Traffic Control.
APPENDICES
In the United States, the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) issues Temporary Flight Restrictions (TFRs)
to designate areas where flight is restricted. TFRs are issued to restrict flight for a variety of reasons including
national security, law enforcement, natural disasters, airshows, and large sporting events. TFRs may be issued
at any time, and TFR data displayed is only intended to supplement official TFR information obtained from
Flight Service Stations (FSS), and air traffic control.
INDEX
The age of TFR data is not shown; however, if TFR data is not available or has expired, the system displays
‘TFR N/A’ in the upper-left corner of maps on which TFRs can be displayed.
376
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TFR Summary
Information
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
TFR Selected
with Map
Pointer
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-121 TFR Data on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Displaying TFR Data:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page or Navigation Map Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the Joystick and pan the map pointer over a TFR to highlight it. The system displays TFR summary
information above the map.
3) Press the ENT Key. The system displays a pop-up menu.
4) If necessary, turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Review Airspaces’ and press the ENT Key. The system displays the
TFR Information window.
AFCS
5) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to remove the TFR Information window.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-122 Full Text for Selected TFR
The setup menus for the Navigation Map Page control the map range settings above which TFR data is
decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the TFR product map range setting is selected, the TFR
product data is removed from the map.
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
INDEX
Maps other than the Navigation Map Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
377
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Setting up and customizing TFR data for maps on which TFR data can be displayed:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With Map Setup highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-123).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Aviation Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-124).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll to the TFR product range setting (Figure 6-125).
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (Off, range settings).
EIS
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-123 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-125 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu,
Aviation Group
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-124 Navigation Map Page
Setup Menu
378
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FIS-B WEATHER STATUS
Additional information about the status of FIS-B weather products is available on the AUX - ADS-B Status
Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Viewing FIS-B status:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the AUX - ADS-B Status Page.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-126 Viewing FIS-B Weather Status on ADS-B Status Page
FIS-B Weather Status:
FIS-B Processing
DISABLED
---------------AVAILABLE
Description
The FIS-B weather feature is enabled to process and display FIS-B weather
products.
The FIS-B weather feature is disabled.
No data received from the GDL 88 UAT.
FIS-B weather data is available for display for the weather product.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOT AVAILABLE FIS-B weather data is not available for the weather product, and/or the system is
not receiving the FIS-B weather service.
APPENDICES
AWAITING DATA The system is receiving the FIS-B weather service, and is waiting to receive the
weather product from the FIS-B data broadcast.
INDEX
Weather Products:
AIRMET
CONUS NEXRAD
METAR
METAR GRAPHICAL
NOTAM/TFR
PIREP
REGIONAL NEXRAD
SIGMET
TAF
WINDS/TEMPS ALOFT
Status
Message
ENABLED
AFCS
ADS-B Status Page Item
Table 6-14 AUX-ADS-B Status Page Messages for FIS-B Weather
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
379
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.4 AIRBORNE COLOR WEATHER RADAR
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
EIS
The optional Garmin GWX 68 Airborne Color Weather Radar is a four-color digital pulsed radar with 6.5
kilowatts of output power. The Garmin GWX 70 Airborne Color Weather Radar is a solid-state pulsed radar
with forty watts of output power. The radar combines excellent range and adjustable scanning profiles with a
high-definition target display. The pulse width for the GWX 68 is four microseconds (µs) on all ranges except
the 2.5 nm range. The GWX 68 uses a one µs pulse width at this range to reduce the targets smearing together
on the display for better target definition at close range. The GWX 70 has an effective pulse length of 27.31
microseconds (µs), and the system optimizes the pulse length to maximize resolution at each range setting.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Diamond DA42NG uses a 10-inch phased array antenna that is fully stabilized to accommodate 30º of
pitch and roll.
To focus radar scanning on specific areas, Sector Scanning offers pilot-adjustable horizontal scan angles of
20º, 40º, 60º, or 90º. A vertical scanning function helps to analyze storm tops, gradients, and cell buildup
activity at various altitudes.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Radar features include:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Extended Sensitivity Time Constant (STC) logic that automatically correlates distance of the return echo with
intensity, so cells do not suddenly appear to get larger as they get closer.
• WATCH® (Weather ATtenuated Color Highlight) helps identify possible shadowing effects of short-range cell
activity, identifying areas where radar return signals are weakened or attenuated by intense precipitation (or
large areas of lesser precipitation) and may not fully reflect the weather behind a storm.
• Weather Alert that looks ahead for intense cell activity in the 80-320 nm range, even if these ranges are not
being monitored.
AFCS
• For the GWX 70 only, Altitude-Compensated Tilt (ACT) management, which automatically adjusts the
antenna tilt angle as the aircraft altitude changes.
PRINCIPLES OF PULSED AIRBORNE WEATHER RADAR
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The term RADAR is an acronym for RAdio Detecting And Ranging. Pulsed radar locates targets by transmitting
a microwave pulse beam that, upon encountering a target, is reflected back to the radar receiver as a return
echo. The microwave pulses are focused and radiated by the antenna, with the most intense energy in the
center of the beam and decreasing intensity near the edge. The same antenna is used for both transmitting and
receiving. The system processes the returned signal and displays it on the MFD.
APPENDICES
Radar detection is a two-way process that requires 12.36 µs for the transmitted microwave pulses to travel out
and back for each nautical mile of target range. It takes 123.6 µs for a transmitted pulse to make the round trip
if a target is ten nautical miles away.
INDEX
Airborne weather radar should be used to avoid severe weather, not for penetrating severe weather. The
decision to fly into an area of radar targets depends on target intensity, spacing between the targets, aircraft
capabilities, and pilot experience. Pulse type weather radar detects only precipitation, not clouds or turbulence.
The display may indicate clear areas between intense returns, but this does not necessarily mean it is safe to fly
between them. Only Doppler radar can detect turbulence.
380
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Airborne weather radar has other capabilities beyond weather detection. It also has the ability to detect and
provide distance to cities, mountains, coastlines, rivers, lakes, and oceans.
NEXRAD AND AIRBORNE WEATHER RADAR
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Both Airborne Weather Radar and NEXRAD measure weather reflectivity in decibels (dB). A decibel is a
logarithmic expression of the ratio of two quantities. Airborne Weather Radar measures the ratio of power
against the gain of the antenna, while NEXRAD measures the energy reflected back to the radar, or the radar
reflectivity ratio.
EIS
Both systems use colors to identify the different echo intensities, but the colors are not interchangeable.
Airborne color radar values used by Garmin Airborne Color Weather Radar should not be confused with
NEXRAD radar values.
ANTENNA BEAM ILLUMINATION
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Altitude (x1000 ft.)
80
Antenna at Zero Tilt
0
15
s
Beam Sidelobe
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
18,000 ft.
10°
0
Half Power at
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The radar beam is much like the beam of a spotlight. The further the beam travels, the wider it becomes.
The radar is only capable of seeing what is inside the boundaries of the beam. The following figure depicts
a radar beam’s characteristics. The figure illustrates vertical dimensions of the radar beam, although the
same holds true for the horizontal dimensions. In other words, the beam is as wide as it is tall. Note that
it is possible to miss areas of precipitation on the radar display because of the antenna tilt setting. With the
antenna tilt set to zero in this illustration, the beam overshoots the precipitation at less than 15 nautical miles.
Max Power at Beam Center
18,000 ft.
30
45
60
75
90
Range (nautical miles)
AFCS
Figure 6-127 Radar Beam from a 12 inch Antenna
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The curvature of the earth can also be a factor in missing areas of precipitation, especially at range settings
of 150 nautical miles or more. Here the beam overshoots the precipitation at less than 320 nautical miles.
APPENDICES
320 nm
INDEX
Figure 6-128 Radar Beam in Relation to the Curvature of the Earth
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
381
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
RADAR SIGNAL ATTENUATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The phenomenon of radar signal attenuation affects the operation of weather radar. When the radar signal
is transmitted, it is progressively absorbed and scattered, making the signal weaker. This weakening, or
attenuation, is caused by two primary sources, distance and precipitation.
EIS
Attenuation because of distance is due to the fact that the radar energy leaving the antenna is inversely
proportional to the square of the distance. The reflected radar energy from a target 40 miles away that fills
the radar beam is one fourth the energy reflected from an equivalent target 20 miles away. This would appear
to the operator that the storm is gaining intensity as the aircraft gets closer. Internal signal processing within
the system compensates for much of this distance attenuation.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Attenuation due to precipitation is not as predictable as distance attenuation. It is also more intense. As the
radar signal passes through moisture, a portion of the radar energy is reflected back to the antenna. However,
much of the energy is absorbed. If precipitation is very heavy, or covers a large area, the signal may not
reach completely through the area of precipitation. The weather radar system cannot distinguish between an
attenuated signal and an area of no precipitation. If the signal has been fully attenuated, the radar displays
a radar shadow. This appears as an end to the precipitation when, in fact, the heavy rain may extend much
further. A cell containing heavy precipitation may block another cell located behind the first, preventing
it from being displayed on the radar. Never fly into these shadowed areas and never assume that all of the
heavy precipitation is being displayed unless another cell or a ground target can be seen beyond the heavy
cell. The WATCH® feature of the weather radar system can help in identifying these shadowed areas. Areas
in question appear as shadowed or gray on the radar display. Proper use of the antenna tilt control can also
help detect radar shadows.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Attenuation can also be due to poor maintenance or degradation of the radome. Even the smallest amount
of wear and scratching, pitting, and pinholes on the radome surface can cause damage and system inefficiency.
RADAR SIGNAL REFLECTIVITY
AFCS
Precipitation
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Weather radar detects precipitation or objects more dense than water, such as the surface of the earth
or solid structures. The weather radar does not detect clouds, thunderstorms, or turbulence directly.
It detects precipitation associated with clouds, thunderstorms, and turbulence. The best radar signal
reflectors are raindrops, wet snow, or wet hail. The larger the raindrop, the better the reflectivity. The
size of the precipitation droplet is the most important factor in radar reflectivity. Because large drops in a
small concentrated area are characteristic of a severe thunderstorm, the radar displays the storm as a strong
return. Ice crystals, dry snow, and dry hail have low levels of reflectivity as shown in the illustration, and
are often not displayed by the radar. Additionally, a cloud that contains only small raindrops, such as fog
or drizzle, does not reflect enough radar energy to produce a measurable target return.
382
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-129 Precipitation Type and Reflectivity
Ground Returns
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The intensity of ground target returns depends upon the angle at which the radar beam strikes the
ground target (Angle of Incidence) and the reflective properties of that target. The gain can be adjusted so
shorelines, rivers, lakes, and cities are well-defined. Increasing the gain too much causes the display to fill
in between targets, thus obscuring some landmarks.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Cities normally provide a strong return signal. While large buildings and structures provide good returns,
small buildings can be shadowed from the radar beam by the taller buildings. As the aircraft approaches
and shorter ranges are selected, details become more noticeable as the highly reflective regular lines and
edges of the city become more defined.
AFCS
Bodies of water such as lakes, rivers, and oceans are not good reflectors and normally do not provide good
returns. The energy is reflected in a forward scatter angle with inadequate energy being returned. They
can appear as dark areas on the display. However, rough or choppy water is a better reflector and provides
stronger returns from the downwind sides of the waves.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Mountains also provide strong return signals to the antenna, but also block the areas behind. However,
over mountainous terrain, the radar beam can be reflected back and forth in the mountain passes or off
canyon walls, using up all or most of the radar energy. In this case, no return signal is received from this
area, causing the display to show a dark spot which could indicate a pass where no pass exists.
Angle of Incidence
APPENDICES
The angle at which the radar beam strikes the target is called the Angle of Incidence. The figure illustrates
the incident angle (‘A’). This directly affects the detectable range, the area of illumination, and the intensity
of the displayed target returns. A large incident angle gives the radar system a smaller detectable range and
lower display intensity due to minimized reflection of the radar energy.
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
383
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-130 Angle of Incidence
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
A smaller incident angle gives the radar a larger detectable range of operation and the target display shows
a higher intensity. Since more radar energy is reflected back to the antenna with a low incident angle, the
resulting detectable range is increased for mountainous terrain.
SAFE OPERATING DISTANCE
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The following information establishes a minimum safe distance from the antenna for personnel near
operating weather radar. The minimum safe distance is based on the FCC’s exposure limit at 9.3 to 9.5 GHz for
general population/uncontrolled environments, which is 1 mW/cm2. See Advisory Circular 20-68B for more
information on safe distance determination.
MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE EXPOSURE LEVEL (MPEL)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The zone in which the radiation level exceeds the US Government standard of 1 mW/cm2 is the semicircular
area of at least 9.16 feet from the 10-inch antenna. All personnel must remain outside of this zone. With a
scanning or rotating beam, the averaged power density at the MPEL boundary is significantly reduced.
APPENDICES
MPEL
Boundary
INDEX
9.16 ft. for 10”
antenna
Figure 6-131 MPEL Boundary
384
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
BASIC ANTENNA TILT SETUP
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following discussion is a simple method for setting up the weather radar antenna tilt for most situations.
It is not to be considered an all encompassing setup that works in all situations, but this method does provide
good overall parameters for the monitoring of threats. Ultimately, it is desired to have the antenna tilted so the
bottom of the radar beam is four degrees below parallel with the ground. The following example explains one
way of achieving this.
EIS
With the aircraft flying level, adjust the antenna tilt so ground returns are displayed at a distance that equals
the aircraft’s current altitude (AGL) divided by 1,000. For example, if the aircraft is at 14,000 feet, adjust the
tilt so the front edge of ground returns is displayed at 14 nautical miles. Note this antenna tilt angle setting.
Now, raise the antenna tilt 6 degrees above this setting. The bottom of the radar beam is now angled down 4º
from parallel with the ground.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
PRACTICAL APPLICATION USING THE BASIC TILT SETUP
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
With the antenna tilt set as previously described, any displayed target return should be scrutinized when
flying at altitudes between 2,000 and 30,000 feet AGL. If the displayed target advances on the screen to
within 5 nautical miles of the aircraft, avoid it. This may be either weather or ground returns that are 2,000
feet or less below the aircraft. Raising the antenna tilt 4 degrees can help separate ground returns from
weather returns in relatively flat terrain. This aligns the bottom of the radar beam parallel with the ground.
Return the antenna tilt to the previous setting after a few sweeps.
If the aircraft is above 29,000 feet, be cautious of any target return that gets to within 30 nautical miles.
This is likely a thunderstorm that has a top high enough that the aircraft cannot fly over it safely.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If the aircraft altitude is 15,000 feet or lower, setting the displayed range to 60 miles may be more helpful.
Closely monitor anything that enters the display.
Also, after setting up the antenna tilt angle as described previously, ground returns can be monitored for
possible threats. The relationship between antenna tilt angle, altitude, and distance is one degree of tilt equals
100 feet of altitude for every one nautical mile.
3000
2000
1000
0
1000
2000
3000
4000
APPENDICES
10 nm
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
+4°
+3°
+2°
+1°
0°
-1°
-2°
-3°
-4°
Vertical Change of Radar Beam (feet)
Change in Antenna Tilt
AFCS
4000
Figure 6-132 Vertical Change in Radar Beam per Nautical Mile
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
INDEX
Therefore, with the antenna tilt set so that the bottom of the beam is four degrees below parallel with
the ground, a target return at 10 nm is approximately 4,000 feet below the aircraft; at 20 nm, 8,000 feet;
385
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
at 50 nm, 20,000 feet. In other words, at this tilt setting, a ground return (such as a mountain peak) being
displayed at 10 nm would have a maximum distance below the aircraft of 4,000 feet. A ground target return
being displayed at five nm would have a maximum distance below the aircraft of 2,000 feet.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
This setup provides a good starting point for practical use of the airborne weather radar. There are many
other factors to consider in order to become proficient at using weather radar in all situations.
ALTITUDE COMPENSATED TILT (ACT) (GWX 70 ONLY)
EIS
The Altitude Compensated Tilt feature of the GWX 70 enables the system to automatically adjust the
antenna beam tilt angle setting based on aircraft altitude changes. For example, if the ACT feature is enabled
and the aircraft climbs, the system compensates by adjusting the tilt downward. As the aircraft descends
with ACT enabled, the system adjusts the antenna tilt upward. The system uses the ground as a reference for
adjusting the antenna tilt setting with ACT enabled.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
WEATHER MAPPING AND INTERPRETATION
WEATHER DISPLAY INTERPRETATION
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When evaluating various target returns on the weather radar display, the colors denote precipitation
intensity and rates shown in the following table.
Weather Mode Color
Intensity
Black
Green (GWX 68)
Green (GWX 70)
Yellow (GWX 68)
Yellow (GWX 70)
Red (GWX 68)
Red (GWX 70)
Magenta* (GWX 68 only)
< 23 dBZ
23 dBZ to < 32 dBZ
23 dBZ to < 33 dBZ
32 dBZ to < 41 dBZ
33 dBZ to < 41 dBZ
41 dBZ to < 50 dBZ
41 dBz and greater
50 dBZ and greater
Approximate
Precipitation Rate (in/hr.)
< .01.
.01 - 0.1.
.01 - 0.1.
0.1 - 0.5
0.1 - 0.5
0.5 - 2
0.5 and greater
>2
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
*Magenta color not applicable to GWX 70 installations
Table 6-15 Precipitation Intensity Levels
Thunderstorms
APPENDICES
Updrafts and downdrafts in thunderstorms carry water through the cloud. The more severe the drafts, the
greater the number and size of the precipitation droplets. With this in mind, the following interpretations
can be made from what is displayed on the weather radar. Avoid these areas by an extra wide margin.
• In areas where the displayed target intensity is red or magenta (indicating large amounts of precipitation),
the turbulence is considered severe. Magenta is only shown in GWX 68 installations.
INDEX
• Areas that show steep color gradients (intense color changes) over thin bands or short distances suggest
irregular rainfall rate and strong turbulence.
386
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• Areas that show red or magenta (magenta only shown in GWX 68 installations) are associated with hail
or turbulence, as well as heavy precipitation. Vertical scanning and antenna tilt management may be
necessary to identify areas of maximum intensity.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Along squall lines (multiple cells or clusters of cells in a line) individual cells may be in different stages
of development. Areas between closely spaced, intense targets may contain developing clouds not having
enough moisture to produce a return. However, these areas could have strong updrafts or downdrafts.
Targets showing wide areas of green are generally precipitation without severe turbulence.
EIS
Irregularities in the target return may also indicate turbulence, appearing as hooks, fingers, or scalloped
edges. These irregularities may be present in green areas with no yellow, red, or magenta areas and should
be treated as highly dangerous areas.
Squall Line
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Hook or Finger
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Steep Gradient
Scalloped Edge
Figure 6-133 Cell Irregularities
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Thunderstorm development is rapid. A course may become blocked within a short time. When displaying
shorter ranges, periodically select a longer range to see if problems are developing further out. That can
help prevent getting trapped in a blind alley or an area that is closed at one end by convective weather.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-134 The Blind Alley - Horizontal Scan
In areas of multiple heavy cells, use the Vertical Scan feature along with antenna tilt management to
examine the areas. Remember to avoid shadowed areas behind targets.
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
387
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The Blind Alley at Close Range
The Large Storm Behind
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-135 The Blind Alley
Tornadoes
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
There are no conclusive radar target return characteristics which identify a tornado. However, tornadoes
may be present if the following characteristics are observed:
• A narrow, finger-like portion extends and in a short time curls into a hook and closes on itself.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• A hook, which may be in the general shape of the numeral 6 (9 in the southern hemisphere), especially
if bright and projecting from the southwest quadrant (northeast quadrant in the southern hemisphere) of
a major thunderstorm.
• V-shaped notches.
• Doughnut shapes.
AFCS
These shapes do not always indicate tornadoes, and tornado returns are not limited to these characteristics.
Confirmed radar observations of tornadoes most often have not shown shapes different from those of a
normal thunderstorm display.
Hail
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Hail results from updrafts carrying water high enough to freeze. Therefore, the higher the top of a
thunderstorm, the greater the probability that it contains hail. Vertically scanning the target return can
give the radar top of a thunderstorm that contains hail. Radar top is the top of a storm cell as detected by
radar. It is not the actual top, or true top of the storm. The actual top of a storm cell is seen with the eyes
in clear air and may be much higher than the radar top. The actual top does not indicate the top of the
hazardous area.
INDEX
Hail can fall below the minimum reflectivity threshold for radar detection. It can have a film of water on
its surface, making its reflective characteristics similar to a very large water droplet. Because of this film of
water, and because hail stones usually are larger than water droplets, thunderstorms with large amounts
of wet hail return stronger signals than those with rain. Some hail shafts are extremely narrow (100 yards
or less) and make poor radar targets. In the upper regions of a cell where ice particles are dry (no liquid
coating), target returns are less intense.
388
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hail shafts are associated with the same radar target return characteristics as tornados. U-shaped cloud
edges three to seven miles across can also indicate hail. These target returns appear quite suddenly along
any edge of the cell outline. They also change in intensity and shape in a matter of seconds, making vigilant
monitoring essential.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
OPERATION IN WEATHER MODE
WARNING: Do not operate the weather radar in a transmitting mode when personnel or objects are within
the MPEL boundary.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
CAUTION: In Standby mode, the antenna is parked at the center line. It is always a good idea to put the
radar in Standby mode before taxiing the aircraft to prevent the antenna from bouncing on the bottom stop
and possibly causing damage to the radar assembly.
When the weather radar system is in the Weather or Ground Map mode, the system automatically switches
to Standby mode on landing.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
In Reversionary mode, the weather radar system automatically switches to Standby mode. The system
remains in Standby mode until both displays are restored. In Reversionary mode, the weather radar system
cannot be controlled.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Antenna
Stabilization
Status
Radar Mode
Scan Line
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-136 Horizontal Scan Display (GWX 68)
APPENDICES
Displaying weather on the Weather Radar Page:
1) Select the Weather Radar Page in the Map Page Group with the FMS Knob.
2) Press the MODE Softkey.
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
389
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
3) While on the ground, press the STANDBY Softkey. For the GWX 68 only, a one-minute warm-up period is
initiated (countdown is displayed on the screen). After the warm-up is complete, the radar enters the Standby
Mode. The warm-up period is not applicable to the GWX 70.
Press the WEATHER Softkey. A confirmation window is displayed.
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
a)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-137 Confirming Activating Radar
b)
Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight YES and press the ENT Key to continue radar activation.
Or:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If the aircraft is airborne, press the WEATHER Softkey. For the GWX 68 only, a one-minute warm-up period is
initiated (countdown is displayed on the screen). After the warm-up is complete, the radar begins transmitting.
The warm-up period is not applicable to the GWX 70.
4) Turn the Joystick to select the desired map range.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) The horizontal scan is initially displayed (Figure 6-138). If desired, press the VERTICAL Softkey to change to
vertical scanning.
Vertically scanning a storm cell:
NOTE: Vertical scanning of a storm cell should be done with the aircraft wings level to avoid constant
AFCS
adjustment of the Bearing Line.
1) While in the Horizontal Scan view, press the BRG Softkey. This places the cursor in the BEARING field and
displays the Bearing Line.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
If the Bearing Line is not displayed, press the MENU Key and turn the large FMS Knob to select Show Bearing
Line. Press the ENT Key.
2) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to place the Bearing Line on the desired storm cell or other area to be vertically
scanned.
390
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Bearing Line
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Scan Line
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-138 Bearing Line on Horizontal Scan (GWX 68)
4) Press the VERTICAL Softkey. A vertical scan of the selected area is displayed (Figure 6-139).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) The small FMS Knob may be used to move the scanned bearing line a few degrees right or left.
6) Turn the Joystick to adjust the range.
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) To select a new area to be vertically scanned, press the HORIZON Softkey to return to the Horizontal Scan view
and repeat the previous steps.
The Joystick can also be used to adjust bearing from left to right.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-139 Vertical Scan Display (GWX 68)
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
391
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Adjusting Antenna Tilt Angle
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In order to make an accurate interpretation of a storm cell, the radar beam should be pointed at the wet
part of the weather cell to record the proper rainfall intensity (color level). The ideal aiming point is just
below the freezing level of the storm. The best way to find this point is to use the Vertical Scan feature. The
antenna tilt angle can be centered on the strongest return area in the vertical scan to get a more accurate
view of the coverage and intensity of the target in the horizontal scan.
Adjusting antenna tilt on the Horizontal Scan display:
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor in the TILT field.
EIS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired antenna tilt angle.
3) Press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
The Joystick can also be used to adjust tilt up and down.
Altitude Compensated Tilt (ACT) Angle Adjustment
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Attitude Compensated Tilt feature of the GWX 70 enables automatic management of the antenna tilt
angle as the aircraft altitude changes. With ACT enabled, the antenna beam position remains centered at
the set position for the current map range. The system automatically decreases the tilt angle as the aircraft
climbs, and increases the tilt angle as the aircraft descends. The ACT feature is available in the Horizontal
Scan Mode when the system is operating in Weather Mode, and requires the system to be operating with
the GPS-derived altitude.
Enabling/Disabling Altitude Compensated Tilt (ACT) (GWX 70 only):
1) On the Weather Radar Page, press the MODE Softkey.
AFCS
2) Press the ACT ON Softkey. When ACT is enabled, ‘ACT ON’ is annunciated in upper right corner of the Weather
Radar Page. When ACT is disabled, ‘ACT OFF’ is annunciated.
Or:
1) On the Weather Radar Page, press the MENU Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Altitude Compensated Tilt On’ or ‘Altitude Compensated Tilt Off’, then press the
ENT Key.
Adjusting antenna tilt on the Vertical Scan display:
APPENDICES
1) Press the TILT Softkey to activate the cursor in the TILT field and display the Tilt Line.
If the Tilt Line is not displayed, press the MENU Key and turn the large FMS Knob to select Show Tilt Line. Press
the ENT Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to adjust the antenna tilt angle. The selected tilt angle is implemented when Horizontal
Scan is selected again.
INDEX
The Joystick can also be used to adjust tilt.
392
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Tilt Line
Scan Line
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-141 Adjusting Tilt on Vertical Scan Display (GWX 68)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Adjusting Gain
WARNING: Always position the weather radar gain setting to Calibrated for viewing the actual intensity of
precipitation. Changing the gain in weather mode causes precipitation intensity to be displayed as a color
not representative of the true intensity.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the GAIN Softkey to activate the cursor in the GAIN field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to adjust the gain for the desirable level. The gain setting is visible in the GAIN field
as a movable horizontal bar in a flashing box. The line pointer is a reference depicting the calibrated position.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
AFCS
4) Press the GAIN Softkey again to recalibrate the gain. CALIBRATED is displayed in the GAIN field.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Manual Gain Set Below Calibrated
Calibrated Gain
Figure 6-142 Gain Calibration
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
393
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Sector Scan
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) While in horizontal scan mode, press the BRG Softkey to display the Bearing Line and place the cursor in the
BEARING field. If the Bearing Line is not displayed, press the MENU Key and turn the large FMS Knob to select
Show Bearing Line.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
2) Press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-143 Selecting Sector Scan Position
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to place the Bearing Line in the desired position. The location of the Bearing Line
becomes the center point of the Sector Scan.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the SECTOR SCAN field.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select FULL, 60˚, 40˚, or 20˚ scan.
AFCS
6) If desired, readjust the Bearing Line as discussed previously to change the center of the Sector Scan.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
7) Press the BRG Softkey again to remove the Bearing Line and cursor. The bearing reference is reset to 0º.
Figure 6-144 40˚ Sector Scan
394
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Antenna Stabilization
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When radar stabilization is enabled, the radar tilt is corrected for pitch and roll, and therefore is kept
steady with respect to an earth-fixed reference. The commanded tilt angle is kept constant with respect to
the earth. When the stabilization is disabled, corrections are no longer made for pitch and roll, and the
radar tilt angle is kept constant with respect to the aircraft reference system.
Enabling/disabling antenna stabilization:
1) To enable or disable the antenna stabilization, press the MODE Softkey.
EIS
2) Press the STAB ON Softkey to activate antenna stabilization or press the STAB OFF Softkey to deactivate. The
current stabilization condition is shown in the upper right of the weather radar display.
WATCH® (Weather Attenuated Color Highlight)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Displayed intensity is questionable.
Potentially stronger than displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
WATCH® identifies deceptively strong or unknown intensity parts of a storm. While in horizontal scan
mode, this feature can be used as a tool to determine areas of possible inaccuracies in displayed intensity due
to weakening of the radar energy. This weakening is known as attenuation. The radar energy weakens as
it passes through areas of intense precipitation, large areas of lesser precipitation, and distance. Issues with
the radome attenuates the radar energy. All these factors have an effect on the return intensity. The more
energy that dissipates, the lesser the displayed intensity of the return. Accuracy of the displayed intensity
of returns located in the shaded areas are suspect. Make maneuvering decisions with this information in
mind. Proper antenna tilt management should still be employed to determine the extent of attenuation in
a shaded area.
To activate or deactivate the WATCH® feature, press the WATCH Softkey.
Areas of attenuated
signal are shaded
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Horizontal Scan Without WATCH®
Horizontal Scan With WATCH®
INDEX
Figure 6-145 Horizontal Scan Without and With WATCH®
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
395
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Weather Alert Bands and PFD Annunciation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Weather Alert feature indicates the presence of heavy precipitation between the ranges of 80 and 320
nm regardless of the currently displayed range. Weather Alert targets appear as red bands along the outer
range ring at the approximate azimuth of the detected returns.
If a Weather Alert is detected within ±10° of the aircraft heading, an alert is displayed on the PFD in the
Alerts Window when the WX ALRT Softkey is enabled on the Weather Radar Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Weather Alerts
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-146 Weather Alert Indications
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
If the antenna tilt is adjusted too low, a ground alerts may also cause a weather alert. To activate or
deactivate Weather Alerts, press the WX ALRT Softkey. Activating and deactivating enables or inhibits the
alert on the PFD, and does not affect the display of the red weather alert target bands on the Weather Radar
Page.
Figure 6-147 Weather Alert on PFD
APPENDICES
GROUND MAPPING AND INTERPRETATION
A secondary use of the weather radar system is for the presentation of terrain. This can be a useful tool for
verifying aircraft position. A picture of the ground is represented much like a topographical map that can be
used as a supplement to the navigation map on the MFD.
INDEX
Ground Map mode uses a different gain range than Weather mode. Different colors are also used to represent
the intensity levels. The displayed intensity of ground target returns are defined in the following table. Use
of the GAIN and TILT controls help improve contrast so that specific ground targets can be recognized more
easily. As previously discussed, the type and orientation of the target in relation to the aircraft affects the
intensity displayed.
396
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
When the weather radar system is in either the Weather or Ground Map mode, the system automatically
switches to Standby mode upon landing.
Black (GWX 68)
Black (GWX 70)
Cyan (GWX 68)
Cyan (GWX 70)
Yellow (GWX 70
Magenta (GWX 68)
Blue (GWX 68)
Blue (GWX 70)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Magenta (GWX 70)
0 dB
0 dB to 3 dB
> 0 dB to < 9 dB
>3 dB to < 13 dB
9 dB to < 18 dB
13 dB to < 21 dB
18 dB to < 27 dB
21 dB < 29 dB
27 dB and greater
29 gB and greater
EIS
Yellow (GWX 68)
Intensity
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Ground Map Mode
Color
Table 6-16 Ground Target Return Intensity Levels
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Operation in Ground Map Mode:
1) Press the MODE Softkey.
2) Press the GROUND Softkey to place the radar in Ground Map mode.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the BACK Softkey.
4) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the TILT field.
6) Adjust the antenna tilt angle by turning the small FMS Knob to display ground returns at the desired distance.
AFCS
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
WEATHER RADAR OVERLAY ON THE NAVIGATION MAP PAGE
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Map - Weather Radar Page is the principal map page for viewing airborne weather radar information.
Weather radar information may also be shown as an overlay on the Navigation Map Page on the MFD as an
additional reference.
APPENDICES
When the airborne weather radar overlay is enabled, a weather radar information box appears in the upperright corner of the Navigation Map Page. It indicates the selected weather mode, radar bearing, and antenna
tilt angle. The overlay is capable of showing radar information while the radar is in horizontal scan mode.
If the radar is operating in vertical scan mode while the overlay is enabled, the system indicates ‘N/A’ in the
information box to indicate the airborne weather radar overlay is not available until the horizontal scan mode
is selected on the Weather Radar Page.
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
397
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Radar Overlay Enabled Icon
Radar Mode
Selected
Radar Bearing
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Radar Range
Scan Line
Selected Antenna
Tilt Angle
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Boundary
of Selected
Radar Scan
Figure 6-148 Airborne Weather Radar Overlay on the Navigation Map Page
Enabling/Disabling Airborne Weather Radar Overlay on the Navigation Map Page:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MAP Softkey.
3) Press the WX RADAR Softkey.
Or:
AFCS
1) On the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key.
2) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ group, then press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the selections and highlight the WX RADAR selection (‘On’ or ‘Off’).
Turn the small FMS knob to highlight the desired selection.
5) To remove the menu, press the FMS Knob or CLR Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Weather radar controls on the Navigation Map Page are limited to adjustment of the radar range, bearing,
and antenna tilt angle. The airborne weather radar overlay is viewable at Navigation Map Ranges between five
and 800 nautical miles (ten to 1,500 kilometers). At map ranges beyond these limits, the system removes the
weather radar information from the map. Adjusting the range on the Navigation Map Page simultaneously
adjusts the range of the weather radar proportionally. This radar range is annunciated on the range arc that
appears when the overlay is enabled and a radar scan is active. When the radar range is adjusted on the
Navigation Map Page, system synchronizes the same range to the Weather Radar Page.
398
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The radar bearing is adjustable in one degree increments on the Navigation Map Page by pushing the Joystick
left or right when the overlay is enabled. A left or right arrow next to the bearing readout indicates the direction
of the selected bearing. The cyan radar bearing line is only viewable on the Weather Radar Page. While the
bearing line is not shown on the Navigation Map Page, adjusting the bearing on the Navigation Map Page while
Sector Scan is enabled centers the radar scan on the selected bearing, and the radar scan boundaries adjust
accordingly on the Navigation Map Page.
EIS
Radar antenna tilt angle is adjustable in 0.25 degree increments on the Navigation Map Page. Push the
Joystick up to adjust the antenna tilt angle downward. Push the Joystick down to adjust the antenna tilt angle
upward. An up or down arrow next to the antenna tilt angle setting indicates the direction of the antenna tilt
angle.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The weather radar overlay uses the same colors as those shown on the Weather Radar Page to indicate the
intensity of radar returns. However, the display of gray WATCH radar attenuation and red weather alert
target bands is exclusive to the Weather Radar Page. Because relative terrain information uses similar colors,
enabling the airborne weather radar overlay on the Navigation Map Page disables the display of relative terrain
information for this page.
SYSTEM STATUS
Standby
STANDBY
STANDBY
Standby (During Warm-Up),
applicable to GWX 68 only
STANDBY
WARM-UP
XX
(XX indicates number of seconds
remaining in warm-up)
Weather
WEATHER
None
Ground Mapping
Off
Radar Failed*
GROUND MAPPING
OFF
FAIL
None
OFF
RADAR FAIL
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Center Banner Annunciation
AFCS
Radar Mode Annunciation Box†
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Radar Mode
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The radar mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Weather Radar Page. Additional information
may be displayed in the center of the Weather Radar Page as a banner annunciation.
† Annunciations in this column appear in white text in the Weather Radar Mode box on the Navigation Map
Page.
* See Table 6-19 for additional failure annunciations
APPENDICES
Table 6-17 Radar Modes on the Weather Radar Page
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
399
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Radar Feature Status
ACT ON
ACT OFF
STAB ON
STAB OFF
EIS
The system displays the status of the radar antenna stabilization feature in the upper right corner of the
Weather Radar Page. For the GWX 70, the status of the Altitude Compensated Tilt feature also appears in the
upper right corner of the Weather Radar Page.
STAB INOP
Description
Altitude compensated tilt feature is enabled (GWX 70 only)
Altitude compensated tilt feature is disabled (GWX 70 only)
Antenna stabilization is selected on.
Antenna stabilization is selected off.
The radar is not receiving pitch and roll information. The
antenna stabilization feature is inoperative.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Table 6-18 Radar Feature Annunciations on the Weather Radar Page
If the unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown as a banner in the center of the Weather
Radar Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Weather Radar
Page Center Banner
Description
Annunciation
BAD CONFIG
The radar configuration is invalid. The radar should be serviced.
RDR FAULT
The radar unit is reporting a fault. The radar should be serviced.
The system is not receiving valid data from the radar unit. The system
RADAR FAIL
should be serviced.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Table 6-19 Abnormal Radar Status Annunciations on the Weather Radar Page
400
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.5 WX-500 STORMSCOPE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not rely on information from the lightning detection system display as the sole basis for
hazardous weather avoidance. Range limitations and interference may cause the system to display inaccurate
or incomplete information. Refer to documentation from the lightning detection system manufacturer for
detailed information about the system.
NOTE: Stormscope lightning cannot be displayed simultaneously on the same navigation map as lightning
EIS
information from data link weather lightning sources.
NOTE: When using Stormscope, there are several atmospheric phenomena in addition to nearby thunderstorms
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
that can cause isolated discharge points in the strike display mode. However, clusters of two or more
discharge points in the strike display mode do indicate thunderstorm activity if these points reappear after
the screen has been cleared.
• Stormscope Page
• Navigation Map
• AUX - Trip Planning Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The following pages can display Stormscope data:
• AUX - Video Page
• Nearest Pages
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Map - Stormscope Page is the principal page for viewing Stormscope data. Stormscope data can be displayed
on other map pages as an additional reference. To display Stormscope data on the Navigation Map, AUX - Trip
Planning Page, or any of the Nearest Pages, press the MAP Softkey, then press the STRMSCP Softkey. These pages
can also display cell or strike data using the yellow lightning strike symbology shown in Table 6-20.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 6-20 Lightning Age and Symbols
APPENDICES
SETTING UP STORMSCOPE ON THE NAVIGATION MAP
Setting up Stormscope options on the Navigation Map:
1) On the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key.
INDEX
2) With ‘Map Setup’ selected (Figure 6-149), press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the group selection window. Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Weather’,
and press the ENT Key.
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
401
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight and move between the product selections (Figure 6-150).
5) When an item is highlighted, turn the small FMS Knob to select the option.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
6) Press the ENT Key.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page (Figure 6-151).
The following options are available (Figure 6-150):
• STRMSCP LTNG – Turns the display of Stormscope data on or off.
EIS
• STRMSCP MODE – Selects the CELL or STRIKE mode of lightning activity. Cell mode identifies clusters
or cells of electrical activity. Strike mode indicates the approximate location of lightning strikes.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• STRMSCP SMBL – Selects the range at which Stormscope data displays. Stormscope data is removed
when a map range greater than the STRMSCP SMBL value is selected.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 6-149 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-150 Map Setup Menu
402
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CELL AND STRIKE MODE ON THE NAVIGATION MAP
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
On the Navigation Map, cell mode identifies cells of lightning activity (Figure 6-151). Stormscope identifies
clusters of electrical activity that indicate cells. Strike mode indicates the approximate location of lightning
strikes. Selecting the ‘cell’ or ‘strike’ mode on the Navigation Map:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) With ‘Map Setup’ selected, press the ENT Key.
3) Select the ‘Weather’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on ‘STRMSCP LTNG’.
EIS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘STRMSCP MODE’.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to change between ‘CELL’ and ‘STRIKE’ options. When an item is selected, press the
ENT Key.
7) Press the FMS knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-151 Navigation Map Page with Stormscope Lightning Data
APPENDICES
If heading input is lost, strikes and/or cells must be cleared manually after the execution of each turn. This
is to ensure that the strike and/or cell positions are depicted accurately in relation to the nose of the aircraft.
Manually clearing Stormscope data on the Navigation Map:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘Clear Stormscope® Lightning’ (Figure 6-152).
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
INDEX
3) Press the ENT Key.
403
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-152 Navigation Map Page Options Menu
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ZOOM RANGE ON THE NAVIGATION MAP
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Stormscope lightning data can be displayed up to 800 nm zoom range (in North up mode) on the Navigation
Map Page. However, in the track up mode at the 500 nm range, a portion of Stormscope lightning data
can be behind the aircraft and therefore not visible on the Navigation Map. Since the range for Stormscope
data is 400 nm diameter total (200 nm in front and 200 nm behind), the 500 nm range in North up mode
shows all the data.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
At a map range of less than 25 nm, Stormscope lightning data is not displayed, but can still be present. The
presence of Stormscope lightning data is indicated by the annunciation ‘LTNG < 25 nm’ in the upper right
corner (Figure 6-153).
Figure 6-153 Lightning Display Range Annunciation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selecting a Stormscope range on the Navigation Map:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘MAP SETUP’.
3) Select the ‘Weather’ group.
APPENDICES
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘STRMSCP SMBL’.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the maximum display range.
7) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
To change the display range on the Navigation Map Page, turn the Joystick clockwise to zoom out or
counter-clockwise to zoom in.
404
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SELECTING THE STORMSCOPE PAGE
Stormscope lightning data can be displayed at the ranges of 25 nm, 50 nm, 100 nm, and 200 nm.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Adjusting the Stormscope Map Range:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Stormscope Page (Figure 6-154).
3) To change the map range, turn the Joystick clockwise to zoom out or counter-clockwise to zoom in.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-154 Stormscope Page
AFCS
Changing between ‘cell’ and ‘strike’ mode on the Stormscope Page:
1) Select the Stormscope Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the MODE Softkey. The CELL and STRIKE softkeys are displayed.
3) Press the CELL Softkey to display ‘CELL’ data or press the STRIKE Softkey to display ‘STRIKE’ data. ‘CELL’ or
‘STRIKE’ is displayed in the mode box in the upper left corner of the Stormscope Page.
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the main Stormscope page.
APPENDICES
Changing the viewing mode between 360˚ and 120˚ on the Stormscope Page:
1) Select the Stormscope Page.
2) Press the VIEW Softkey. The 360 and ARC softkeys are displayed. Press the 360 Softkey to display a 360˚
viewing area or press the ARC Softkey to display a 120˚ viewing area.
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
INDEX
3) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the main Stormscope page.
405
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.6 TERRAIN PROXIMITY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not use Terrain Proximity information for primary terrain avoidance. Terrain Proximity is
intended only to enhance situational awareness.
NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed when the aircraft is outside of the installed terrain database coverage
area.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Terrain Proximity is a terrain awareness system that does not comply with TSO-C151b certification standards. It
increases situational awareness and aids in reducing controlled flight into terrain (CFIT). Do not confuse Terrain
Proximity with a Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS). TAWS is more sophisticated and robust, and
it is TSO-C151b certified. Terrain Proximity does not provide warning annunciations or voice alerts. It only
provides color indications on map displays when terrain and obstacles are within a certain altitude threshold from
the aircraft. Although the terrain and obstacle color map displays are the same, TAWS uses more sophisticated
algorithms to assess aircraft distance from terrain and obstacles.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Terrain Proximity requires the following components to operate properly:
• Valid 3-D GPS position
• Valid terrain/obstacle database
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Terrain Proximity displays altitudes of terrain and obstructions relative to the aircraft position and altitude with
reference to a database that may contain inaccuracies. Terrain and obstructions are shown only if they are in the
database. Terrain and obstacle information should be used as an aid to situational awareness. They should never
be used to navigate or maneuver around terrain.
Note that all obstructions may not be available in the terrain and obstacle database. No terrain and obstacle
information is shown without a valid 3-D GPS position.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The GPS receiver provides the horizontal position and altitude. GPS altitude is derived from satellite position.
GPS altitude is then converted to the height above geodetic sea level (GSL), which is the height above mean sea
level calculated geometrically. GSL altitude is used to determine terrain and obstacle proximity. GSL altitude
accuracy is affected by satellite geometry, but is not subject to variations in pressure and temperature that normally
affect pressure altitude sensors. GSL altitude does not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL altitude.
It is a widely-used MSL altitude source.
APPENDICES
Terrain and obstacle databases are referenced to MSL. Using the GPS position and altitude, the Terrain Proximity
feature portrays a 2-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the position and altitude of the
aircraft. GPS position and GSL altitude are used to calculate and predict the aircraft’s flight path in relation to
the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this way, the pilot can view predicted dangerous terrain and obstacle
conditions.
DISPLAYING TERRAIN PROXIMITY DATA
INDEX
The Map - Terrain Proximity Page is the principal page for viewing terrain and obstacle information. The
symbols and colors in the figure and table below are used to represent obstacles and aircraft altitude when the
Terrain Proximity Page is selected for display. Terrain Proximity uses black, yellow, and red to represent terrain
information relative to aircraft altitude. The color of each obstacle is associated with the altitude of the aircraft.
406
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Terrain Above Aircraft Altitude
Red terrain is above
or within 100 ft below
the aircraft altitude
Aircraft Altitude
100 ft Threshold
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1000 ft
Yellow terrain is between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
Black terrain is more than 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
EIS
On the Terrain Proxmity Page only, a gray shade of purple indicates no terrain data is
available.
Figure 6-155 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for Terrain Proximity
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL
Obstacle Location
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft
below the aircraft altitude
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and
1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Gray obstacle is more than 1000 ft
below aircraft altitude
* Gray obstacles only shown on navigation maps.
Table 6-21 Terrain Proximity Terrain/Obstacle Colors and Symbology
AFCS
Terrain and obstacle information can be displayed on the following pages:
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Flight Plan Page
• Terrain Proximity Page
• AUX - Video Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• PFD Inset Map
Displaying terrain and obstacle information (maps other than the Terrain Proximity Page):
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey).
APPENDICES
2) Press the TERRAIN Softkey to display terrain and obstacle data.
When Terrain Proximity is selected on maps other than the Terrain Proximity Page, an icon to indicate the
feature is enabled for display and a legend for Terrain Proximity colors are shown (Figure 6-159).
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
INDEX
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkey for enabling/disabling
display of terrain and obstacles. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which terrain and
obstacle data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the
data is removed from the map.
407
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Terrain data can be selected for display independently of obstacle data; however, obstacles recognized by
Terrain Proximity as yellow or red are shown when terrain is selected for display and the map range is within
the setting limit.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Maps besides the Terrain Proximity Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
The maximum display ranges for obstacles on each map are dependent on the range setting made for the
Navigation Map. If the maximum range for obstacle display on the Navigation Map is adjusted to below 20
nm, the highest obstacle display range settings on the other applicable maps are also adjusted proportionally.
Customizing terrain and obstacle display on the Navigation Map Page:
EIS
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-156).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-157).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-158).
• TERRAIN DATA – Turns the display of terrain data on or off and sets maximum range at which terrain is shown
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• OBSTACLE DATA – Turns the display of obstacle data on or off and sets maximum range at which obstacles are shown
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 6-156 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-157 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
408
Figure 6-158 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Map Group
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional information about obstacles can be displayed by panning over the display on the map. The map
panning feature is enabled by pressing the Joystick. The map range is adjusted by turning the Joystick. If the
map range is adjusted while panning is enabled, the map is re-centered on the Map Pointer.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Additional
Information on
Obstacle Selected
with Map Pointer
Red Terrain Area
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
EIS
Yellow Terrain Area
(Between 100’ and
1000’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Lighted Obstacle
Selected with Map
Pointer
Red Lighted
Obstacles
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Terrain Display
Enabled Icon
Terrain Legend
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-159 Terrain Information on the Navigation Map Page
TERRAIN PROXIMITY PAGE
AFCS
The Terrain Proximity Page is specialized to show terrain and obstacle data in relation to the aircraft’s current
altitude, without clutter from the basemap. Aviation data (airports, VORs, and other NAVAIDs) can be displayed
for reference.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Two views are available
relative to the position of the aircraft: the 360° default display and the radar-like ARC (120°) display. Map range
is adjustable with the Joystick from 1 to 200 nm, as indicated by the map range rings (or arcs).
Displaying the Terrain Proximity Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
APPENDICES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Terrain Proximity Page.
3) To change the view,
a) Press the VIEW Softkey.
b) Press the 360 or ARC Softkey to select the desired view.
INDEX
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘View Arc’ or ‘View 360º’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key to change the view.
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
409
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Showing/hiding aviation information on the Terrain Proximity Page:
1) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Select ‘Show Aviation Data’ or ‘Hide Aviation Data’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
Map Orientation
Current Aircraft
GPS-derived GSL
Altitude
Red Terrain
(Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
EIS
Map Range Rings
Black Terrain
(More than 1000’
Below the Aircraft
Altitude)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Red Lighted Obstacle
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
Yellow Terrain
(Between 100’
and 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Yellow Lighted
Obstacles (Between
100’ and 1000’ Below
Aircraft Altitude)
Terrain Legend
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-160 Terrain Proximity Page
Map Orientation
Current Aircraft
GPS-derived GSL
Altitude
AFCS
Red Terrain
(Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Map Range Arc
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Yellow Terrain
(Between 100’ and
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
APPENDICES
Black Terrain
(Terrain More
than 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)
Red Lighted Obstacle
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
Terrain Legend
INDEX
Figure 6-161 Terrain Proximity Page (ARC View)
410
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.7 PROFILE VIEW TERRAIN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not use Profile View Terrain data for primary terrain avoidance. Profile View Terrain is intended
only to enhance situational awareness.
NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed when the aircraft is outside of the installed terrain database coverage
area.
EIS
The G1000 offers a Profile View of terrain and obstacles relative to the aircraft’s current flight path and altitude
on the Navigation Map Page of the MFD. Profile View does not provide terrain or obstacle caution or warning
annunciations or voice alerts, nor does it display potential impact points inside the Profile View. The colors and
symbols in Figure 6-162 and Table 6-22 are used to represent terrain and obstacles.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Terrain Above Aircraft Altitude
Red terrain is above
or within 100 ft below
the aircraft altitude
Aircraft Altitude
100 ft Threshold
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1000 ft
Yellow terrain is between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Black terrain is more than 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
Figure 6-162 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for Profile View Terrain
Obstacle Location
AFCS
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft
below the aircraft altitude
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and
1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
APPENDICES
Gray obstacle is more than 1000 ft
below aircraft altitude
Table 6-22 Profile View Terrain/Obstacle Colors and Symbology
Accessing Profile View:
INDEX
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MAP Softkey.
3) Press the PROFILE Softkey to enable or disable Profile View.
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
411
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Select ‘Show Profile View’ or ‘Hide Profile View’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
Enabling/Disabling Profile View Terrain on the Navigation Map (when Profile View is enabled):
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MAP Softkey.
EIS
3) Press the TERRAIN Softkey.
PROFILE VIEW DISPLAY
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When the Profile View is enabled, it is displayed in a window below the Navigation Map. Altitude is shown
along a vertical scale, with an aircraft icon positioned at the current altitude. Distance is represented horizontally
along the bottom of the Profile View, and increases from left (present position) to right.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When the Navigation Map range is adjusted with the Joystick, the horizontal distance of the Profile View
is adjusted proportionately to be 1/2 of the Navigation Map range distance down to 1 nm, at which point
Profile View is no longer available (‘PROFILE NOT AVAILABLE’ is displayed). When Navigation Map range is
adjusted to remove altitude-correlated colored terrain data (as shown in the Terrain Legend) or obstacles from
the Navigation Map, these items are also removed from the Profile View; only an outline of the terrain will be
displayed in black in the Profile View window. Refer to the Terrain Proximity or Terrain-SVS discussions for
more information about displaying terrain or obstacles on the Navigation Map Page.
AFCS
Profile View
Path Enabled
Navigation Map Range
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Terrain Legend
APPENDICES
Altitude Scale
Profile View Length
is One Half of the
Navigation Map
Range
Distance Scale
INDEX
Figure 6-163 Profile View on Navigation Map with Terrain Display Enabled
Obstacles with heights greater than 200 feet AGL appear relative to aircraft altitude along the altitude scale.
The top of the obstacle symbol on the scale represents the obstacle’s height AGL. If the obstacle’s height AGL
412
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
is higher than can be represented by the obstacle symbol itself (e.g. for unusually tall obstacles), a vertical line
appears below the obstacle symbol in order to depict the top of the obstacle symbol at its height AGL, as shown
in Figure 6-164.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Figure 6-164 Profile View with Tall Obstacles
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Total Profile View Width
Approach
0.6 nm
Departure
0.6 nm
Terminal
2.0 nm
Enroute
4.0 nm
Oceanic
4.0 nm
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Flight Phase
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Profile View is based on the current aircraft track (or heading if track is unavailable) and shows the highest
known terrain or obstacles within a predetermined width from the present aircraft position to the end of the
profile range. The width of the Profile View (Table 6-23) is determined by the phase of flight, as annunciated
on the HSI. Refer to the Flight Instruments section for more information about flight phases.
AFCS
Table 6-23 Profile View Width Scale
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
PROFILE PATH
APPENDICES
The Profile Path displays the horizontal and lateral boundaries of the Profile View. The path is shown
as a white rectangle on the Navigation Map Page (Figure 6-163) and is only available when Profile View is
enabled. White range markers both edges of the Profile Path rectangle match the range markers along the
distance scale inside the Profile View display window whenever the profile range is at least 4 nm (or 7.5 km
if configured for metric units).
The Profile Path rectangle may be configured on or off, and the Navigation Map range at which the Profile
Path is removed from map display can be changed.
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
413
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Customizing the Profile Path display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-165).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Profile’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-166).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-167).
EIS
• PROFILE PATH – Turns the display of the Profile Path on or off and sets maximum map range at which the Profile
Path is shown
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (ON/OFF, range settings).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 6-165 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-167 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu,
Profile Group
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 6-166 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
414
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.8 TERRAIN-SVS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not use Terrain-SVS information for primary terrain avoidance. Terrain-SVS is intended only
to enhance situational awareness.
NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed when the aircraft is outside of the terrain database coverage area.
EIS
NOTE: Terrain-SVS is included with the SVS option. Terrain-SVS will take precedence over Terrain Proximity.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
G1000 Terrain-SVS is a terrain awareness system available with the Synthetic Vision Technology System (SVT).
Garmin SVT functionality is offered as an optional enhancement. Terrain-SVS is integrated within SVT to provide
visual and auditory alerts to indicate the presence of threatening terrain relevant to the projected flight path. For
detailed information regarding SVT, refer to the Additional Features section of the this pilot’s guide.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Terrain-SVS does not comply with TSO-C151b certification standards. It increases situational awareness and
aids in reducing controlled flight into terrain (CFIT). Do not confuse Terrain-SVS with a Terrain Awareness and
Warning System (TAWS). TAWS is more sophisticated and robust, and it is TSO-C151b certified. Although the
terrain and obstacle color map displays are the same, TAWS uses more sophisticated algorithms to assess aircraft
distance from terrain and obstacles.
Terrain-SVS does not provide the following:
• Premature Descent Alerting (PDA)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Excessive Descent Rate (EDR)
• Negative Climb Rate (NCR)
• Descent to 500 Feet Voice Callout (VCO)
Terrain-SVS requires the following components to operate properly:
AFCS
• Valid 3-D GPS position
• Valid terrain/obstacle database
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Terrain-SVS displays altitudes of terrain and obstructions relative to the aircraft position and altitude with
reference to a database that may contain inaccuracies. Terrain and obstructions are shown only if they are in the
database. Terrain and obstacle information should be used as an aid to situational awareness. They should never
be used to navigate or maneuver around terrain.
APPENDICES
Note that all obstructions may not be available in the terrain and obstacle database. No terrain and obstacle
information is shown without a valid 3-D GPS position.
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
INDEX
The G1000 GPS receiver provides the horizontal position and altitude. GPS altitude is derived from satellite
position. GPS altitude is then converted to the height above geodetic sea level (GSL), which is the height above
mean sea level calculated geometrically. GSL altitude is used to determine terrain and obstacle proximity. GSL
altitude accuracy is affected by satellite geometry, but is not subject to variations in pressure and temperature that
normally affect pressure altitude sensors. GSL altitude does not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL
altitude. It is a widely-used MSL altitude source.
415
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Terrain and obstacle databases are referenced to MSL. Using the GPS position and altitude, the Terrain-SVS
feature portrays a 3-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the position and altitude of the
aircraft. GPS position and GSL altitude are used to calculate and predict the aircraft’s flight path in relation to
the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this way, the pilot can view predicted dangerous terrain and obstacle
conditions.
DISPLAYING TERRAIN-SVS DATA
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Terrain-SVS uses yellow (caution) and red (warning) to depict terrain and obstacles (with heights greater than
200 feet above ground level, AGL) alerts relative to aircraft altitude. Colors are adjusted automatically as the
aircraft altitude changes. The colors and symbols in the figure and tables below are used to represent terrain,
obstacles, and potential impact points.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-168 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for Terrain-SVS
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL
Obstacle Location
AFCS
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft
below the aircraft altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and
1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
Gray obstacle is more than 1000 ft
below aircraft altitude
APPENDICES
* Gray obstacles only shown on navigation maps.
Table 6-24 Profile View Terrain/Obstacle Colors and Symbology
Potential Impact
Point Symbol
Alert Type
Example Annunciation
INDEX
Warning
Caution
Table 6-25 Terrain-SVS Potential Impact Point Symbols with Alert Types
416
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The Map - Terrain-SVS Page is the principal page for viewing terrain and obstacle information. Terrain-SVS
information can also be displayed on the following pages and maps as an additional reference:
• Flight Plan Pages
• Navigation Map Page
• AUX - Video Page
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• PFD Inset Map
• Trip Planning Page
Displaying terrain and obstacle information (maps other than the Terrain-SVS Page):
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, select the INSET Softkey).
EIS
2) Press the TERRAIN Softkey to display terrain and obstacle data.
When Terrain-SVS is selected on maps other than the Terrain-SVS Page, an icon to indicate the feature is
enabled for display and a legend for Terrain-SVS terrain colors are shown (Figure 6-169).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-169 Terrain-SVS Icon and Legend
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkey for enabling/disabling
display of terrain and obstacles. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which terrain and
obstacle data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the
data is removed from the map. For terrain data, the enable/disable function applies only to the MFD, while the
range setting also affects the PFD Inset Map.
AFCS
Terrain data can be selected for display independently of obstacle data; however, obstacles for which warnings
and cautions are issued are shown when terrain is selected for display and the map range is within the setting
limit.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Maps besides the Terrain-SVS Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page. The
maximum display ranges for obstacles on each map are dependent on the range setting made for the Navigation
Map. If the maximum range for obstacle display on the Navigation Map is adjusted to below 20 nm, the highest
obstacle display range settings on the other applicable maps are also adjusted proportionally.
Customizing terrain and obstacle display on the Navigation Map Page:
APPENDICES
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-170).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-171).
INDEX
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-172).
• TERRAIN DATA – Turns the display of terrain data on or off and sets maximum range at which terrain is shown
• OBSTACLE DATA – Turns the display of obstacle data on or off and sets maximum range at which obstacles are shown
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
417
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-170 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-171 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-172 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Map Group
AFCS
TERRAIN-SVS PAGE
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Terrain-SVS Page is specialized to show terrain, obstacle, and potential impact point data in relation to
the aircraft’s current altitude, without clutter from the basemap. It is the principal map page for viewing TerrainSVS data. Aviation data (airports, VORs, and other NAVAIDs) can be displayed for reference. If an obstacle and
the projected flight path of the aircraft intersect, the display automatically zooms in to the closest potential point
of impact on the Terrain-SVS Page.
APPENDICES
Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Two views are available
relative to the position of the aircraft: the 360° default display and the radar-like ARC (120°) display. Map range
is adjustable with the Joystick from 1 to 200 nm, as indicated by the map range rings (or arcs).
Displaying the Terrain-SVS Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Terrain-SVS Page.
INDEX
Changing the Terrain-SVS Page view:
1) Press the VIEW Softkey.
2) Press the 360 or ARC Softkey to select the desired view.
418
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘View Arc’ or ‘View 360º’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key to change the view
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Showing/hiding aviation information on the Terrain-SVS Page:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘Show Aviation Data’ or ‘Hide Aviation Data’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Red Terrain
(Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
EIS
Map Orientation
Current Aircraft
GPS-derived GSL
Altitude
Map Range Rings
Black Terrain
(More than 1000’
Below the Aircraft
Altitude)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Red Lighted Obstacle
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
Yellow Terrain
(Between 100’
and 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)
Yellow Lighted
Obstacles (Between
100’ and 1000’
Below Aircraft
Altitude)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Terrain Legend
Annunciation
Window
Figure 6-173 Terrain-SVS Page (360 View)
AFCS
Red Terrain
(Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Map Orientation
Current Aircraft
GPS-derived GSL
Altitude
Map Range Arc
APPENDICES
Yellow Terrain
(Between 100’ and
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Black Terrain
(Terrain More
than 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)
INDEX
Terrain Legend
Red Lighted Obstacle
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
Annunciation
Window
Figure 6-174 Terrain-SVS Page (ARC View)
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
419
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TERRAIN-SVS ALERTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Alerts are issued when flight conditions meet parameters that are set within Terrain-SVS software algorithms.
Terrain-SVS alerts typically employ a CAUTION or a WARNING alert severity level, or both. When an alert is
issued, visual annunciations are displayed with simultaneous voice alerts. Table 6-26 shows Terrain-SVS alert
types with corresponding annunciations and voice alerts.
When an alert is issued, annunciations appear on the PFD and MFD. The Terrain-SVS Alert Annunciation is
shown to the upper left of the Altimeter on the PFD and below the Terrain Legend on the MFD. If the TerrainSVS Page is not displayed at the time, a pop-up alert appears on the MFD. To acknowledge the pop-up alert:
EIS
• Press the CLR Key (to remove the pop-up alert), or
• Press the ENT Key (to display the Terrain-SVS Page)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
PFD Alert
Annunciation
MFD Pop-up Alert
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 6-175 Terrain-SVS Alert Annunciations
Terrain Display Enabled
Terrain Legend
INDEX
Alert Annunciation
Figure 6-176 Navigation Map Page
(After Terrain-SVS Pop-up Alert Acknowledgment)
420
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
MFD
Pop-Up Alert (except
Terrain-SVS Page)
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PFD/MFD*
Alert
Annunciation
Alert Type
Voice Alert
“Warning; Terrain, Terrain”
Imminent Terrain Impact Warning (ITI)
“Warning; Terrain, Terrain”
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Warning (ROC)
“Warning; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Imminent Obstacle Impact Warning (IOI)
“Warning; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Imminent Terrain Impact Caution (ITI)
“Caution; Terrain, Terrain”
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Caution (ROC)
“Caution; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Imminent Obstacle Impact Caution (IOI)
“Caution; Obstacle, Obstacle”
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
“Caution; Terrain, Terrain”
EIS
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Caution (RTC)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Warning (RTC)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
* Annunciation is displayed on the MFD when terrain display is enabled.
Table 6-26 Terrain-SVS Alerts Summary
FORWARD LOOKING TERRAIN AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA) feature of Terrain-SVS compares the projected flight path
as derived from GPS data with terrain features and obstacles from the terrain and obstacle databases. The
system issues visual and voice alerts when the projected flight path conflicts with terrain or obstacles.
AFCS
The projected flight path is a calculated area ahead of, to the sides, and below the aircraft. The size of
the projected flight path varies based on factors including ground speed (the path ahead is larger when the
ground speed is higher), whether the aircraft is level, turning, or descending, and the proximity to the nearest
runway along the current track. As the aircraft approaches the runway, the projected flight path becomes
narrower until the system automatically disables FLTA alerts or the pilot manually inhibits them.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
There are two types of FLTA alerts, Reduced Required Terrain/Obstacle Clearance (RTC or ROC respectively)
and Imminent Terrain/Obstacle Impact (ITI or IOI respectively).
APPENDICES
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance (RTC) and Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance (ROC)
alerts are issued when the aircraft flight path is above terrain, yet is projected to come within the minimum
clearance values in Figure 6-177. When an RTC alert is issued, a potential impact point is displayed on the
Terrain-SVS Page.
Imminent Terrain Impact (ITI) and Imminent Obstacle Impact (IOI) alerts are issued when the
aircraft is below the elevation of a terrain or obstacle in the aircraft’s projected path. ITI and IOI alerts are
accompanied by a potential impact point displayed on the Terrain-SVS Page. The alert is annunciated when
the projected vertical flight path is calculated to come within minimum clearance altitudes in Figure 6-177.
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
421
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Level (FT)
Descending (FT)
800
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Required
Clearance
(FT)
Required Terrain
Clearance (FT)
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
0
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
Distance From Runway (NM)
Figure 6-177 FLTA Alert Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Clearance Values
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
FLTA alerts are automatically inhibited when the aircraft is less than 200 feet above the destination runway
elevation while within 0.5 nm of the approach runway or the aircraft is between runway ends. When TerrainSVS alerts are inhibited, the annunciation ‘TER INH’ is shown on the PFD and in the MFD terrain annunciation
window.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLTA visual annunciations and voice alerts can also be manually inhibited. Discretion should be used when
inhibiting Terrain-SVS, and the system should be enabled when appropriate. When Terrain-SVS is inhibited,
the annunciation ‘TER INH’ is shown on the PFD and in the Terrain-SVS annunciation window on the MFD
(Figure 6-178).
AFCS
Figure 6-178 Terrain-SVS Alerting Disabled
(Terrain-SVS Inhibited) Annunciation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Inhibiting/enabling Terrain-SVS alerting:
1) Select the Terrain-SVS Page.
2) Press the INHIBIT Softkey to inhibit or enable Terrain-SVS (choice dependent on current state).
Or:
APPENDICES
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Inhibit Terrain-SVS’ or ‘Enable Terrain-SVS’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
If Terrain-SVS alerts are inhibited when the Final Approach Fix is the active waypoint on a GPS SBAS
approach, a ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation may appear on the PFD next to the Altimeter if the current aircraft
altitude is at least 164 feet below the prescribed altitude at the Final Approach Fix. See the Flight Instruments
Section for details.
422
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM STATUS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
During power-up, Terrain-SVS conducts a test of its alerting capabilities. A voice alert is issued at test
completion.
Terrain-SVS continually monitors several system-critical items such as database validity, hardware status,
and GPS status. If the terrain/obstacle database is not available, the voice alert, “Terrain System Failure” is
generated along with the ‘TER FAIL’ alert annunciation.
System Test in Progress
System Test Pass
None
No GPS position
None
“Terrain System Test OK”
None
None
NO GPS POSITION
“Terrain System Not Available”*
None
“Terrain System Not Available”*
TERRAIN FAIL
“Terrain System Failure”
TERRAIN DATABASE FAILURE
None
AFCS
None
None
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Excessively degraded GPS signal;
or Out of database coverage area
Terrain System Test Fail; Terrain
or Obstacle database unavailable
or invalid; Invalid software
configuration; or System audio
fault
MFD Terrain or Obstacle database
unavailable or invalid, and
Terrain-SVS operating with PFD
Terrain or Obstacle databases
Voice Alert
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Terrain Alerting Inhibited
Terrain-SVS Page Center
Banner Annunciation
TERRAIN TEST
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
PFD/MFD† Alert
Annunciation
Alert Type
EIS
Terrain-SVS requires a 3-D GPS navigation solution along with specific vertical accuracy minimums. Should
the navigation solution become degraded or if the aircraft is out of the database coverage area, the annunciation
‘TER N/A’ is generated in the annunciation window and on the Terrain-SVS Page. The voice alert, “Terrain
System Not Available” is generated. When sufficient GPS signal is returns and the aircraft is within the
database coverage area, the voice alert, “Terrain System Available” is generated.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
† Annunciation is shown on Terrain-SVS Page and the Navigation Map Page when Terrain is enabled.
* “Terrain System Available” will be heard when sufficient GPS signal is received, or Terrain database coverage area reentered.
Table 6-27 Terrain-SVS System Status Annunciations
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
423
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.9 TRAFFIC INFORMATION SERVICE (TIS)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all of the traffic
information within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate
information from other aircraft, traffic may be present but not represented on the displays.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance maneuvering.
EIS
The traffic display does not provide collision avoidance resolution advisories and does not under any
circumstances or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
site. Aircraft without an operating transponder are invisible to Traffic Advisory Systems (TAS), Traffic Alert
and Collision Avoidance Systems (TCAS), and to TIS. Aircraft without altitude reporting capability are shown
without altitude separation data or climb descent indication.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: TIS is available only when the aircraft is within the service volume of a TIS-capable terminal radar
NOTE: TIS is disabled if another traffic system is installed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic Information Service (TIS) is designed to help in detection and avoidance of other aircraft. TIS uses the
Mode S transponder for the traffic data link. TIS receives traffic information from ground stations, and is updated
every 5 seconds. The G1000 displays up to eight traffic targets within a 7.5-nm radius, from 3000 feet below to
3500 feet above the requesting aircraft. Traffic is displayed using the symbology shown in Table 6-28.
TIS Symbol
Description
Non-Threat Traffic
AFCS
Traffic Advisory (TA)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
Table 6-28 TIS Traffic Symbols
APPENDICES
A Traffic Advisory (TA) indicates that the current track of the intruder could result in a collision. When traffic
meets the advisory criteria for the TA, a solid amber circle symbol is generated. A TA which is detected, but is
outside the range of the map, is indicated with a message in the lower left corner of the map and a half TA symbol
at the relative bearing of the intruder.
INDEX
TIS also provides a vector line showing the direction in which the traffic is moving, to the nearest 45°. Traffic
information for which TIS is unable to determine the bearing (non-bearing traffic) is displayed in the center of the
Traffic Map Page (Figure 6-183) or in a banner at the lower left corner of maps other than the Traffic Map Page on
which traffic can be displayed (Figure 6-179).
424
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The altitude difference between the requesting aircraft and other intruder aircraft is displayed above/below the
traffic symbol in hundreds of feet. If the other aircraft is above the requesting aircraft, the altitude separation
appears above the traffic symbol; if below, the altitude separation appears below. Altitude trend is displayed as
an up/down arrow (for speeds greater than 500 fpm in either direction) to the right of the target symbol. Traffic
symbols for aircraft without altitude reporting capability appear without altitude separation or climb/descent
information.
DISPLAYING TRAFFIC DATA
• Nearest Pages
• Navigation Map Page
• Active Flight Plan Page
• Traffic Map Page
• AUX - Video Page
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• PFD Inset Map
EIS
The Map - Traffic Map Page is the principal page for viewing traffic information. Additional displays of traffic
information are available as map overlays while TIS is operating, and serve as additional reference to the Traffic
Map Page. Traffic information can be displayed on the following maps and pages:
• Trip Planning Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Displaying traffic information (maps other than the Traffic Map Page):
1) Press the MAP Softkey.
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When traffic is selected on maps other than the Traffic Map Page, an icon is shown to indicate the feature is
enabled for display.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Traffic Advisory
Non-Threat
Traffic
APPENDICES
Traffic Status
Banners
Traffic Display
Enabled
INDEX
Non-Bearing
Traffic
Advisory
Figure 6-179 TIS Traffic on the Navigation Map Page
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
425
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Displaying traffic information (PFD Inset Map):
1) Press the INSET Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey to display traffic data on the inset map (TRFC-1).
3) Press the softkey again to display the traffic-only inset (TRFC-2).
4) Press the softkey again to remove traffic data.
EIS
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkey for enabling/disabling
display of traffic. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which traffic data (symbols
and labels) are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the
data is removed from the map. Maps besides the Traffic Map Page use settings based on those selected for the
Navigation Map Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Customizing traffic display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-180).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Traffic’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-181).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-182).
• TRAFFIC – Turns the display of traffic data on or off
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• TRAFFIC MODE – Selects the traffic mode for display; select from:
- All Traffic - Displays all traffic
- TA/PA - Displays Traffic Alerts and Proximity Advisories
- TA ONLY - Displays Traffic Alerts only
AFCS
• TRAFFIC SMBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic symbols are shown
• TRAFFIC LBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic labels are shown (with the option to turn off)
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
INDEX
APPENDICES
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
426
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Figure 6-180 Navigation Map Page Menu
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-181 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-182 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Traffic Group
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE
The Traffic Map Page is specialized to show surrounding TIS traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current
position and altitude, without clutter from the basemap. It is the principal page for viewing TIS data. Aircraft
orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Map range is adjustable with the
Joystick from 2 to 12 nm, as indicated by the map range rings.
AFCS
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page. When the aircraft is on the
ground, TIS automatically enters Standby Mode. Once the aircraft is airborne, TIS switches from Standby to
Operating Mode and the system begins to display traffic information. Refer to the System Status discussion for
more information.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Displaying traffic on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Map Page.
APPENDICES
3) Confirm TIS is in Operating Mode:
Press the OPERATE Softkey to begin displaying traffic.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
INDEX
b) Select ‘Operate Mode’ (shown if TIS is in Standby Mode) and press the ENT Key.
427
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Traffic Mode Annunciation
Non-Threat
Traffic, 2500’
Above,
Descending
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
“TIS Not Available”
Voice Alert Status
Traffic Advisory, 500’
Below, Climbing
EIS
“Non-Bearing” Traffic
(System Unable to
Determine Bearing)
Distance is 4.0 nm,
500’ Above,
Descending
Range
Marking
Rings
Non-Threat
Traffic,
Altitude Not
Reported
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Off-Scale Traffic
Advisory
400’ Below, Level
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciations
Figure 6-183 Traffic Map Page
Select
to Mute
“TIS Not
Available”
Voice Alert
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TIS ALERTS
When the number of TAs on the Traffic Map Page increases from one scan to the next, the following occur:
• A single “Traffic” voice alert is generated.
• A ‘TRAFFIC’ Annunciation appears to the top left of the Attitude Indicator on the PFD, flashing for 5 seconds
and remaining displayed until no TAs are detected in the area.
AFCS
• The PFD Inset Map is automatically displayed with traffic.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To reduce the number of nuisance alerts due to proximate aircraft, the “Traffic” voice alert is generated only
when the number of TAs increases. For example, when the first TA is displayed, a voice and visual annunciation
are generated. As long as a single TA remains on the display, no additional voice alerts are generated. If a second
TA appears on the display or if the number of TAs initially decreases and then subsequently increases, another
voice alert is generated.
428
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Inset Map
Displays When
TA is Detected
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-184 Traffic Annunciation (PFD)
A “TIS Not Available” (TNA) voice alert is generated when the TIS service becomes unavailable or is out of
range. TIS may be unavailable in the radar coverage area due to the following:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Radar site TIS Mode S sensor is not operational or is out of service
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is beyond the maximum range of the TIS-capable Mode S radar site.
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is above the radar site in the cone of silence and out of range of an adjacent site.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is below radar coverage. In flat terrain, the coverage extends from about 3000
feet upward at 55 miles. Terrain and obstacles around the radar site can further decrease radar coverage in all
directions.
• Traffic does not have an operating transponder.
AFCS
The “TIS Not Available” (TNA) voice alert can be manually muted to reduce nuisance alerting. TNA muting
status is shown in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
Muting the “TIS Not Available” voice alert:
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the TNA MUTE Softkey. The status is displayed in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
APPENDICES
b) Select ‘‘’Not Available” Mute On’ (shown if TNA muting is currently off) and press the ENT Key.
SYSTEM STATUS
The G1000 performs an automatic test of TIS during power-up. If TIS passes the test, TIS enters Standby
Mode (on the ground) or Operating Mode (in the air). If TIS fails the power up test, an annunciation is shown
in the center of the Traffic Map Page.
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
429
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Traffic Map Page
Annunciation
NO DATA
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
DATA FAILED
FAILED
Description
Data is not being received from the transponder*
Data is being received from the transponder, but
a failure is detected in the data stream*
The transponder has failed*
UNAVAILABLE
TIS is unavailable or out of range
EIS
* Contact a service center or Garmin dealer for corrective action
Table 6-29 TIS Failure Annunciations
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
System Test
has Failed
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Data Not
Received from
Transponder
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-185 TIS Power-up Test Failure
INDEX
APPENDICES
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page. When the aircraft is on the
ground, TIS automatically enters Standby Mode. If traffic is selected for display on another map while Standby
Mode is selected, the traffic display enabled icon is crossed out (also the case whenever TIS has failed). Once
the aircraft is airborne, TIS switches to Operating Mode and traffic information is displayed. The mode can be
changed manually using softkeys or the page menu.
430
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)
TIS Operating
OPERATING
STANDBY
(also shown in white in center of page)
TIS Failed*
FAIL
Traffic Display Enabled Icon
(Other Maps)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TIS Standby
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Mode
* See Table 6-31 for additional failure annunciations
EIS
Table 6-30 TIS Modes
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Switching between TIS modes:
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
2) Press the STANDBY or OPERATE Softkey to switch between modes. The mode is displayed in the upper left
corner of the Traffic Map Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
TA OFF SCALE
TRFC COAST
TRFC FAIL
NO TRFC DATA
TRFC UNAVAIL
Traffic is removed because it is too old for coasting (12 to 60 seconds since last message)
Traffic may exist within the selected display range, but it is not displayed
APPENDICES
TRFC RMVD
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the selected display range
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation in hundreds of feet, and
altitude trend arrow (climbing/descending)
Appears if traffic data is not refreshed within 6 seconds
If after another 6 seconds data is not received, traffic is removed from the display
The quality of displayed traffic information is reduced as the age increases
The displayed data is not current (6 to 12 seconds since last message)
The quality of displayed traffic information is reduced when this message is displayed
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AGE MM:SS
Description
AFCS
TA X.X ± XX ↕
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
b) Select ‘Operate Mode’ or ‘Standby Mode’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key. The
annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner
of maps on which traffic can be displayed (Table 6-31).
Traffic data has failed
Traffic data has not been detected
The traffic service is unavailable or out of range
INDEX
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
Table 6-31 TIS Traffic Status Banner Annunciations
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
431
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.10 AVIDYNE TAS600 TRAFFIC
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all of the traffic
within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate information
from aircraft or ground stations, traffic may be present that is not represented on the display.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance maneuvering.
EIS
The traffic display does not provide collision avoidance resolution advisories and does not under any
circumstances or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft.
NOTE: Pilots should be aware of TAS system limitations. TAS systems require transponders of other aircraft
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
to respond to system interrogations. If the transponders do not respond to interrogations due phenomena
such as antenna shading or marginal transponder performance, traffic may be displayed intermittently, or
not at all. Aircraft without altitude reporting capability are shown without altitude separation data or climb
descent indication. Pilots should remain vigilant for traffic at all times.
NOTE: Refer to the Avidyne TAS600 Series Pilot’s Guide for a detailed discussion of the Avidyne TAS600
system.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: TIS is disabled if a traffic advisory system (TAS) is installed.
TAS SYMBOLOGY
AFCS
The optional Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is designed to help in detection and avoidance of other aircraft. TAS
uses an on-board interrogator-processor and the Mode S transponder for the air-to-air traffic data link. Traffic is
displayed using the symbols shown in Table 6-32.
TAS Symbol
Description
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Non-Threat Traffic
Proximity Advisory (PA)
APPENDICES
Traffic Advisory (TA)
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
INDEX
Table 6-32 TAS Symbol Description
432
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
A Non-threat Advisory, shown as an open white diamond, indicates that an intruding aircraft is at greater than
±1200 feet relative altitude or the distance is beyond 5 nm.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Proximity Advisory indicates that the intruding aircraft is within ±1200 feet and is within 5 nm range, but
is still not considered a threat.
A Traffic Advisory (TA) alerts the crew to a potentially hazardous intruding aircraft. Closing rate, distance,
and vertical separation meet TA criteria. A Traffic Advisory that is beyond the selected display range is indicated
by a half TA symbol at the edge of the screen at the relative bearing of the intruder.
DISPLAYING TRAFFIC DATA
• Nearest Pages
• Navigation Map Page
• Active Flight Plan Page
• Trip Planning Page
• AUX - Video Page
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• PFD Inset Map
EIS
The Map - Traffic Map Page is the principal page for viewing traffic information. Traffic information can
displayed on the following maps as an additional reference:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Displaying traffic on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Map Page.
3) Turn the Joystick clockwise to display a larger area or counter-clockwise to display a smaller area.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Operating
Mode
Non-Threat Traffic, 2500’
Above, Descending
Altitude
Mode
AFCS
Traffic Display
Range Rings
Traffic Advisory, 500’
Below, Climbing
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
“No Bearing”
Traffic (Bearing
Undetermined),
Distance 4.0
nm, 500’ Above,
Descending
Proximity Traffic,
900’ Above,
Level
APPENDICES
Traffic
Advisory OffScale, 400’
Below, Level
Non-Threat
Traffic,
Altitude Not
Reported
INDEX
Figure 6-186 Traffic Map Page
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
433
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The Traffic Map Page shows surrounding TAS traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current position and
altitude, without basemap clutter. Aircraft orientation is always heading up unless there is no valid heading.
Map range is adjustable with the Joystick from 2 to 24 nm, as indicated by the map range rings.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The traffic mode and altitude display mode are annunciated in the upper left corner.
Displaying traffic information (maps other than the Traffic Map Page):
1) Select the MAP Softkey.
2) Select the TRAFFIC Softkey to display traffic data.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
When traffic is selected on maps other than the Traffic Map Page, a traffic icon is shown to indicate TAS is
enabled for display.
Non-Threat
Traffic
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Traffic
Advisory
Proximity
Traffic
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TA Off Scale Banner
Annunciation
Traffic Status
Icon
“No Bearing”
Traffic Advisory
Banner Annunciation
AFCS
Figure 6-187 TAS Traffic on Navigation Map Page
Displaying traffic information (PFD Inset Map):
1) Select the INSET Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Select the TRAFFIC Softkey to display traffic data on the inset map (TRFC-1).
3) Select the softkey again to display the traffic-only inset (TRFC-2).
INDEX
APPENDICES
4) Select the softkey again to remove traffic data.
434
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ALTITUDE DISPLAY
The Pilot can select the volume of airspace in which traffic is displayed. Traffic Advisories (TAs) outside of
these limits will still be shown. Refer to the TAS600 Series Pilot’s Guide for specific display thresholds.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Changing the altitude display mode:
1) On the Traffic Page, select the ALT MODE Softkey.
2) Select one of the following Softkeys:
BELOW
•
NORMAL
•
ABOVE
•
UNREST (unrestricted)
EIS
•
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) To return to the Traffic Page, select the BACK Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
BELOW
•
NORMAL
•
ABOVE
•
UNREST (unrestricted)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
•
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select one of the following:
3) Select the ENT Softkey.
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE DISPLAY RANGE
AFCS
The display range on the Traffic Map Page can be changed at any time. Map range is adjustable with the
Joystick from 2 to 24 nm, as indicated by the map range rings.
Changing the display range on the Traffic Page:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Turn the Joystick.
2) The following range options are available:
2 nm
•
2 and 6 nm
•
6 and 12 nm
•
12 and 24 nm
APPENDICES
•
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
INDEX
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu also controls the display of traffic. The setup menu controls the map
range settings. Traffic data symbols and labels can be decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than
the map range setting is selected, the data is removed from the map. Maps besides the Traffic Map Page use
settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
435
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Customizing the traffic display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With Map Setup highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-188).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-189).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through the selections (Figure 6-190).
• TRAFFIC – Turns the display of traffic data on or off
EIS
• TRAFFIC MODE – Selects the traffic mode for display; select from:
- All Traffic - Displays all traffic
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- TA/PA - Displays Traffic Alerts and Proximity Advisories
- TA ONLY - Displays Traffic Alerts only
• TRAFFIC SMBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic symbols are shown
• TRAFFIC LBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic labels are shown with the option to turn off
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-188 Navigation Map Page Menu
INDEX
Figure 6-189 Navigation Map Page
Setup Menu
436
Figure 6-190 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu,
Traffic Group
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TAS ALERTS
NOTE: Refer to the TAS600 documentation for information on alerts generated by the TAS equipment.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the number of TAs on the Traffic Map Page increases from one scan to the next, the following occur:
• A “Traffic” voice alert is generated followed by the clock position, relative altitude and range of the TA.
• A TRAFFIC Annunciation appears at the top right of the airspeed on the PFD, flashing for 5 seconds and
remaining displayed until no TAs are detected in the area.
EIS
• The PFD Inset Map is automatically displayed with TA traffic.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Inset Map
Displays When
TA is Detected
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-191 Traffic Annunciation (PFD)
TAS VOICE ALERTS
AFCS
To listen to an update of Traffic Advisories select the MUTE Softkey twice.
Muting the TAS voice alert in progress:
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Select the MUTE Softkey while the voice alert is playing. Subsequent voice alerts will be heard.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
437
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM STATUS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the TAS600 documentation for information on the operating mode.
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)
Mode
Traffic Display Enabled Icon
(Other Maps)
OPERATING
EIS
TAS Operating
FAIL
TAS Failed*
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
* See Table 6-34 for additional failure annunciations
Table 6-33 TAS Modes
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If the unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown in the center of the Traffic Map Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic Map Page Annunciation
Description
NO DATA
Data is not being received from the TAS unit
Data is being received from the TAS unit, but the
DATA FAILED
unit is self-reporting a failure
FAILED
Incorrect data format received from the TAS unit
Table 6-34 TAS Failure Annunciations
AFCS
The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of
maps on which traffic can be displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
APPENDICES
TA OFF SCALE
TA X.X ± XX ↕
INDEX
TRFC FAIL
NO TRFC DATA
Description
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display
range*
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within
the selected display range
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic
Advisory**
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude
separation in hundreds of feet, and altitude trend
arrow (climbing/descending)
TAS unit has failed (unit is self-reporting a failure or
sending incorrectly formatted data)
Data is not being received from the TAS unit
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
Table 6-35 TAS Traffic Status Annunciations
438
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.11 GARMIN GDL 88 ADS-B TRAFFIC
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance maneuvering.
The traffic display does not provide collision avoidance resolution advisories and does not under any
circumstances or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all of the traffic
EIS
information within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate
information from other aircraft, traffic may be present but not represented on the display.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The optional Garmin GDL 88 is a dual-link Universal Access Transceiver (UAT). It sends and receives
Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Broadcast (ADS-B) traffic information on the 978 MHz UAT frequency. It
also receives data link weather information on the UAT frequency. As a dual-link transceiver, the GDL 88 also
receives ADS-B traffic information with its 1090 MHz Extended Squitter (1090 ES) receiver. The system provides
visual annunciations and voice traffic alerts to help the pilot visually acquire potentially conflicting traffic. This
discussion covers the traffic features of the GDL 88; refer to the Flight Information Service-Broadcast (FIS-B)
Weather discussion for more information about the UAT data link weather features of the GDL 88.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ADS-B SYSTEM OVERVIEW
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ADS-B is a core technology in the FAA NextGen air traffic control system. It includes air-to-air, air-to-ground,
and ground-to-air transmission of aircraft position and velocity data to provide pilots and controllers with a
more comprehensive view air traffic to improve flight safety and efficiency.
ADS-B relies on the automatic broadcast of position reports by aircraft, surface vehicles, and transmitters on
fixed objects. These broadcasts contain information such as GPS position, identity (Flight ID, Call Sign, Tail
Number, ICAO registration number, etc), ground track, ground speed, pressure altitude, and emergency status.
AFCS
1090 ES
UAT
RADAR
Composite
GPS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1090 ES
18,000 FT
Mode A/C
RADAR
ATC
UAT
UAT
APPENDICES
10,000 FT
UAT
1090 ES
ADS-B
Ground
Station
INDEX
Figure 6-192 ADS-B System
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
439
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
For the purpose of distinguishing between levels of ADS-B service, there are three classifications of aircraft or
system capability: ADS-B In, ADS-B Out, and ADS-B participating. ADS-B In refers to the capability to receive
ADS-B information. ADS-B Out refers to the capability to transmit ADS-B information. ADS-B participating
refers to the capability to both send and receive ADS-B information. Aircraft lacking either ADS-In, ADS-B Out,
or both ADS-B capabilities may also be referred to as ADS-B nonparticipating aircraft.
AUTOMATIC DEPENDENT SURVEILLANCE-REBROADCAST (ADS-R)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Because it is not required that ADS-B In capable aircraft be able to receive ADS-B data on both the 1090
MHz and 978 MHz data links, a method exists to get data from one data link to the other. ADS-R is the
rebroadcast of ADS-B data by FAA ground stations, which provide this service by taking data from one link
and rebroadcasting it on the other link. For example, two aircraft are in the service volume for a ground
station, and one is transmitting on 1090 MHz and the other on 978 MHz, the ground station retransmits the
data from each aircraft on the other link to ensure the two aircraft can “see” each other.
The GDL 88 is capable of receiving ADS-B traffic reports directly on the 1090 MHz ES data link in addition
to the 978 MHz UAT data link. This allows the GDL 88 to receive ADS-B position reports on both frequencies
from aircraft in the vicinity, without relying on ADS-R ground station coverage.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TRAFFIC INFORMATION SERVICE-BROADCAST (TIS-B)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TIS-B provides the bridge between the radar-based ATC system and the ADS-B-based system. When an
ADS-B In or Out capable aircraft is within the service volume of an FAA ADS-B ground station, the ground
station broadcasts a portion of the ATC radar data to the aircraft. This aircraft is then included in the list of
aircraft being provided TIS-B service and is then considered a “TIS-B participant.”
TIS-B coverage is available when the aircraft is within ground station coverage, in Secondary Surveillance
Radar coverage, and the other aircraft is also in Secondary Surveillance Radar coverage, and is transmitting
its altitude.
AFCS
The ground station provides ATC radar information for other aircraft within ±3,500 feet and 15 NM of the
participant, to include altitude, position, ground speed, and ground track. TIS-B broadcasts occur once every
three to thirteen seconds, depending on the characteristics of the ground station providing the TIS-B service.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The following table describes the aircraft that are observed by a GDL 88-equipped aircraft according to the
level of equipment installed in the other aircraft.
APPENDICES
Other Aircraft Equipment
Viewable by GDL 88 UAT Equipped Aircraft
1090ES Out Equipped
Yes
UAT Receive Only Capable
No
UAT Transmit Equipped
Yes
No Transponder, No ADS-B
No
Non ADS-B Equipped, but with Mode C or S Transponder
Yes*
* Only when in ADS-B ground station coverage and when the other aircraft is in ATC radar coverage.
INDEX
Table 6-36 Aircraft Available for Viewing by an ADS-B Equipped Own Aircraft
440
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADS-B WITH TAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When an optional Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is also installed and operating with the UAT, the UAT
receives traffic from the active traffic system and attempts to match (or “correlate”) this traffic with ADS-B
traffic the UAT is tracking. When a correlation is made, only the traffic with the most accurate information
is displayed to the flight crew. Any traffic that is not correlated (i.e., only detected by one system but not the
other) is also displayed for the flight crew. This correlation of traffic by the UAT improves the accuracy of the
traffic displayed, while reducing the occurrence of the same aircraft being displayed twice.
NOTE: When operating on the edges of ATC radar coverage or when using an optional active traffic system
EIS
providing intromittent traffic data, a single aircraft may be briefly or periodically depicted as two aircraft on
the display.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Either the TAS or the UAT unit can issue a traffic alert. If both systems determine an alert is necessary, and
the traffic is correlated, only the TAS-generated alert is issued. If traffic is not correlated, and both systems
determine an alert is necessary, the TAS-generated alert occurs first, followed by the UAT-generated alert.
CONFLICT SITUATIONAL AWARENESS & ALERTING
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Conflict Situational Awareness (CSA) is an alerting algorithm which provides ADS-B traffic alerting similar to
the TAS systems discussed previously.
The UAT issues a voice alert when a Traffic Advisory (TA) is displayed, for example “Traffic! Two O’clock,
Low, Two Miles.”
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The own aircraft altitude above terrain determines the sensitivity of the CSA algorithm to minimize nuisance
alerts. Radar Altitude (if available), Height Above Terrain, and Geodetic Sea Level (GSL) altitude are used to
adjust the sensitivity of the CSA algorithm in accordance with the following table:
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
441
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
4
Up to 1000 (RA
or HAT)
Any
Any
Any
Lookahead
time
(sec)
20
4
4
Unavailable
Unavailable
Any
Unavailable
Any
Approach
Any
Any
20
20
850
850
0.20
0.20
5
>1000
<=2350
Unavailable
Any
Any
Any
25
850
0.20
Any
Any
25
850
0.20
Terminal
Not approach
and not
Terminal
(including
unavailable)
Not approach
and not
Terminal
(including
unavailable)
Any
<=5000
25
30
850
850
0.20
0.35
>5000
<=10,000
40
850
0.55
>10,000
<=20,000
45
850
0.80
>20,000
<=42,000
48
850
1.10
> 42,000
48
1200
1.10
GPS Phase
of Flight
Own Altitude
(Feet)
Unavailable
Unavailable or
>2350
7
Unavailable or
>2350
Unavailable or
>2350
8
Unavailable or
>2350
Unavailable or
>2350
9
Unavailable or
>2350
Unavailable or
>2350
10
Unavailable or
>2350
Unavailable or
>2350
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5
6
>1000
<=2350
Unavailable
Unavailable or
>2350
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5
Height Above
Terrain (HAT)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Sensitivity Radar Altitude
Level
(Feet)
Not approach
and not
Terminal
(including
unavailable)
Not approach
and not
Terminal
(including
unavailable)
Not approach
and not
Terminal
(including
unavailable)
Vertical
Threshold
for Alert
(feet)
850
Protected
Volume
(NM)
0.20
INDEX
Table 6-37 CSA Alerting Thresholds for ADS-B Traffic
442
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
When the system detects a new Traffic Advisory (TA), the following occur:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• The system issues a single “Traffic!” voice alert, followed by additional voice information about the bearing,
relative altitude, and approximate distance from the intruder that triggered the TA (Table 6-38). For example,
the announcement “Traffic! 12 o’clock, high, four miles,” would indicate the traffic is in front of own
aircraft, above own altitude, and approximately four nautical miles away.
• A ‘TRAFFIC’ annunciation appears at the top right of the airspeed on the PFD, flashes for five seconds, and
remains displayed until no TAs are detected in the area (Figure 6-193).
• The PFD Inset Map is automatically displayed with TA traffic.
EIS
If the bearing of TA traffic cannot be determined, an amber text banner will be displayed in the center of the
Traffic Map Page and in the lower-left of the PFD inset map instead of a TA symbol. The text will indicate ‘TA’
followed by the distance, relative altitude, and vertical trend arrow for the TA traffic, if known.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
A TA will be displayed for at least eight seconds, even if the condition(s) that initially triggered the TA are no
longer a factor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Inset Map
Displays When
TA is Detected
AFCS
Figure 6-193 Traffic Annunciation (PFD)
Relative Altitude
Approximate Distance (nm)
“One o’clock” through
“Twelve o’clock”
or “No Bearing”
“High”, “Low”, “Same Altitude” (if
within 200 feet of own altitude), or
“Altitude not available”
“Zero miles”, “Less than one mile”,
“One Mile” through “Ten Miles”, or
“More than ten miles”
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Bearing
APPENDICES
Table 6-38 TA Descriptive Voice Announcements
NOTE: ADS-B traffic voice alerts are suppressed when below 500 feet.
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
443
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AIRBORNE AND SURFACE APPLICATIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The UAT can help the pilot visually acquire traffic both in the air and on-the-ground. There are two ADS-B
applications or modes: Airborne Situational Awareness (AIRB) and Surface Situational Awareness (SURF). The
system automatically selects the appropriate application based on conditions.
The AIRB application is on when the aircraft is more than five NM and 1,500 feed above the nearest airport.
When the AIRB application is active, the system only displays traffic which is airborne.
EIS
The SURF application is on when the aircraft is within five NM and less than 1,500 feet above field elevation.
When the SURF applications is on, the system displays airborne and on the ground traffic. At a Traffic Map
Page range of two nm or less, the airport environment (including taxiways and runways) appears in addition to
traffic. The airport displays are derived from the SafeTaxi database. Refer to the Additional Features section for
more information about SafeTaxi displays.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: Do not rely on the solely on the traffic display to determine the runway alignment of traffic, especially
when runways are in close proximity to each other.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Due to the varying precision of the data received via ADS-B, ADS-R, and TIS-B, all traffic targets may not be
depicted on the traffic display. Because higher data precision is required for display in the SURF environment,
some traffic eligible for AIRB will not be displayed while SURF is on. Individual eligibility for AIRB and SURF
is depicted on the AUX-ADS-B Status Page, discussed later in this section.
Aircraft traffic is on
the ground
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SURF Application
On
APPENDICES
Ground Vehicles
INDEX
Figure 6-194 Traffic Map Page with SURF Mode On
444
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TRAFFIC DESCRIPTION
Symbol
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The symbols used to display ADS-B traffic are shown in Table 6-39. Above or below the traffic symbol is the
traffic identifier, and altitude. A small up or down arrow next to the traffic symbol indicates that the traffic is
climbing or descending at a rate of at least 500 feet per minute.
Description
Traffic Advisory with directional information. Points in the direction of the intruder aircraft track.
Traffic Advisory without directional information.
EIS
Traffic Advisory out of the selected display range. Displayed at outer range ring at proper bearing.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Proximity Advisory with directional information. Points in the direction of the aircraft track.
Proximity Advisory without directional information.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Non-threat traffic with directional information. Points in the direction of the intruder aircraft track.
Non-threat traffic without directional information.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic located on the ground with directional information. Points in the direction of the aircraft track. Ground traffic is only
displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or own aircraft is on the ground.
Ground traffic without directional information. Ground traffic is only displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or own
aircraft is on the ground.
Non-aircraft ground traffic. Ground traffic is only displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or own aircraft is on the
ground.
AFCS
Table 6-39 ADS-B Traffic Symbology
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
OPERATION
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE
APPENDICES
The Traffic Map Page shows surrounding traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current position and altitude,
without basemap clutter. Aircraft orientation is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Map
range is adjustable with the Joystick, as indicated by the map range rings.
The traffic mode and altitude display mode are annunciated in the upper left corner of the page.
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
445
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Airborne
Application On
Altitude
Mode
Traffic Display
Range
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Traffic Advisory
with Directional
Information
200’ Above,
Descending
Non-Threat
Traffic with
Directional
Information
10000’ Below,
Climbing
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
“No Bearing”
Traffic (Bearing
Undetermined),
Distance 4.0
nm, 500’ Below,
Climbing
Non-Threat
Traffic,
Altitude Not
Reported
Proximity
Advisory with
Directional
Information,
500’ Above,
Level
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Off-Scale Traffic
Advisory
Figure 6-195 Traffic Map Page
Enabling/disabling the display of ADS-B traffic.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
2) Press the ADS-B Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key and turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘ADS-B On’ or ‘ADS-B Off’.
AFCS
b) Press the ENT Key.
Testing the display of ADS-B traffic:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
2) If necessary, turn the Joystick to select a map range of 2 and 6 nm to ensure full test pattern display.
2) Ensure the ADS-B Softkey is disabled.
3) If an optional TAS is installed, ensure the TAS STBY Softkey is enabled.
APPENDICES
4) Press the Test Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘Test Mode’.
INDEX
c) Press the ENT Key.
446
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
A test pattern of traffic symbols appears during the test, and a ‘TRAFFIC’ annunciation appears on the PFDs.
At the conclusion of the test, the system issues the voice alert “Traffic System Test”. If the test pattern is
displayed and the voice alert is heard, the system has passed the test.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-196 Traffic Map Page with Test Mode Enabled
The pilot can select the volume of airspace in which non-threat and proximity traffic is displayed. TAs
occurring outside of these limits will always be shown.
AFCS
Changing the altitude range:
1) On the Traffic Map Page, select the ALT MODE Softkey.
2) Press one of the following Softkeys:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• ABOVE: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 9000 feet above the aircraft to 2700 feet below the
aircraft. Typically used during climb phase of flight.
• NORMAL: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to 2700 feet below
the aircraft. Typically used during enroute phase of flight.
•
APPENDICES
• BELOW: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to 9000 feet below the
aircraft. Typically used during descent phase of flight.
UNREST (unrestricted): All traffic is displayed from 9900 feet above and 9900 feet below the aircraft.
3) To return to the Traffic Map Page, press the BACK Softkey.
INDEX
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
447
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select one of the following (see softkey description in step 2 above):
•
ABOVE
•
NORMAL
•
BELOW
•
UNRESTRICTED
3) Press the ENT Key.
DISPLAYING MOTION VECTORS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
When Absolute Motion Vectors are selected, the vectors extending from the traffic symbols depict the
traffic’s reported track and speed over the ground. When Relative Motion Vectors are selected, the vectors
extending from the traffic symbols display how the traffic is moving relative to own aircraft. These vectors
are calculated using the traffic’s track and ground speed and own aircraft’s track and ground speed. These two
values are combined to depict where the traffic is moving purely with respect to own aircraft, and provide a
forecast of where the traffic will be, relative to own aircraft, in the near future.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Absolute Motion
Vectors
APPENDICES
Figure 6-197 Traffic Map Page with Absolute Motion Vectors Enabled
Enabling/disabling the Motion Vector display:
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
INDEX
2) Select the MOTION Softkey.
3) Select one of the following softkeys:
448
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
ABS:
Displays the motion vector pointing in the absolute direction.
•
REL:
Displays the motion vector relative to own aircraft
•
OFF:
Disables the display of the motion vector.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
•
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Or:
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘Relative Motion’, ‘Absolute Motion’ or ‘Motion Vector Off’.
EIS
4) Press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Relative Motion
Vectors
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-198 Traffic Map Page with Relative Motion Vectors Enabled
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Adjusting the duration for the Motion Vector projected time:
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
2) Select the MOTION Softkey.
APPENDICES
3) Select the DURATION Softkey.
4) Press a softkey for the desired duration (30 SEC, 1 MIN, 2 MIN, 5 MIN).
5) When finished, press the BACK Softkey to return to the Traffic Map Page.
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
449
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Flight ID Display
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Flight IDs of other aircraft (when available) can be enabled for display on the Traffic Map Page
(Figure 6-199). When a flight ID is received, it will appear above or below the corresponding traffic symbol
on the Traffic Map Page when this option is enabled.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Flight ID
Figure 6-199 Traffic Map Page with Flight IDs Enabled
Enabling/Disabling Flight ID Display:
AFCS
On the Traffic Map Page, press the FLT ID Softkey.
Displaying Additional Traffic Information
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Traffic Map Page can display additional information for a selected aircraft symbol. This may include
the aircraft tail number/Flight ID, type of aircraft (e.g., glider, small/medium/large aircraft, service vehicle,
unmanned airborne vehicle (UAV)), course, track, groundspeed), and other information.
450
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Showing additional traffic information:
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob. A cyan bracket highlights the first selected traffic symbol. Additional information appears
in a window in the upper-right corner of the Traffic Map Page.
3) To select a different aircraft symbol, turn the FMS Knob to move the cyan bracket until the selected aircraft
traffic symbol is highlighted.
4) When finished, press the FMS Knob again to remove the cyan selection bracket.
EIS
Traffic Map Page Display Range
The display range on the Traffic Map Page can be changed at any time. Map range is adjustable with the
Joystick, as indicated by the map range rings.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Changing the display range on the Traffic Map Page:
Turn the Joystick clockwise to increase the range of the traffic map, or counter-clockwise to decrease the range.
ADDITIONAL TRAFFIC DISPLAYS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Map - Traffic Map Page is the principal map page for viewing traffic information. Traffic information
can also be displayed on the following other maps for additional reference on the MFD when the traffic unit
is operating:
• PFD Inset Map
• Nearest Pages
• Active Flight Plan Page
• Trip Planning Page
• AUX - Video Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Navigation Map Page
Traffic information can also be displayed on the PFD when the Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) option
is installed and enabled. See the Additional Features Section for details.
AFCS
Displaying traffic information (MFD maps other than the Traffic Map Page):
1) Press the MAP Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey. Traffic is now displayed on the map.
When traffic is selected on maps other than the Traffic Map Page, a traffic icon is shown to indicate traffic
is enabled for display (Figure 6-200).
Displaying traffic on the Navigation Map
APPENDICES
1) Ensure the traffic system is operating. With the Navigation Map displayed, press the MAP Softkey.
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey. Traffic is now displayed on the map as shown in Figure 6-200.
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
451
Proximity Advisory
without Directional
Information
Traffic Advisory
with Directional
Information
Non-Threat Traffic
with Directional
Information
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Proximity Advisory
with Directional
Information
TA Off Scale
Banner
Traffic Overlay
Enabled Icon
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Non-Bearing
Traffic
Advisory
Figure 6-200 ADS-B Traffic on the Navigation Map Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Customizing the traffic display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With Map Setup highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-201).
AFCS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-202).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through the selections (Figure 6-203).
• TRAFFIC – Turns the display of traffic data on or off
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• TRAFFIC MODE – Selects the traffic mode for display; select from:
- All Traffic - Displays all traffic
- TA/PA - Displays Traffic Advisories and Proximity Advisories
APPENDICES
- TA ONLY - Displays Traffic Advisories only
• TRAFFIC SMBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic symbols are shown
• TRAFFIC LBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic labels are shown with the option to turn off
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).
INDEX
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page.
452
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Figure 6-201 Navigation Map
Page Menu
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-202 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-203 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Traffic Group
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu also controls the display of traffic. The setup menu controls the map
range settings. Traffic data symbols and labels can be decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than
the map range setting is selected, the data is removed from the map. Maps besides the Traffic Map Page use
settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
AFCS
Traffic information can also be displayed on the PFD Inset Map by pressing the INSET Softkey. A traffic map
will appear in heading up orientation. Traffic information can also be overlaid with navigation, topographic
and optional data link weather information.
Displaying traffic information (PFD Inset Map):
1) Press the INSET Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey to display traffic data on the inset map (TRFC-1).
3) Select the softkey again to display the traffic-only inset (TRFC-2).
4) Select the softkey again to remove traffic data.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
453
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM STATUS
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)
Traffic Map Page Center
Banner Annunciation
ADS-B System Test
Initiated
ADS-B: TEST
TEST MODE
ADS-B Operating in
Airborne Mode
ADS-B: AIRB
ADS-B: AIRB
ADS-B Operating in
Surface Mode
ADS-B: SURF
ADS-B: SURF
ABD-B Traffic Off
ADS-B: OFF
ADS-B TRFC OFF
ADS-B Traffic Not
Available
ADS-B: N/A
ADS-B TRFC N/A
ADS-B Failed*
ADS-B: FAIL
ADS-B TRFC FAIL
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Mode
Traffic Display Status Icon
(Other Maps)
* See Table 6-41 for additional failure annunciations
Table 6-40 Traffic Modes
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If the traffic unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown in the center of the Traffic Map
Page. During a failure condition, the Operating Mode cannot be selected.
AFCS
Traffic Map Page Center
Description
Annunciation
NO DATA
Data is not being received from the traffic unit
Data is being received from the traffic unit, but the
DATA FAILED
unit is self-reporting a failure
ADS-B TRFC FAIL
Incorrect data format received from the traffic unit
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 6-41 Traffic Failure Annunciations
INDEX
APPENDICES
The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of
maps on which traffic can be displayed.
454
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TA X.X ± XX ↕
NO TRFC DATA
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*.
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the
selected display range.
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**.
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation
in hundreds of feet, and altitude trend arrow (climbing/
descending).
Traffic unit has failed (unit is self-reporting a failure or
sending incorrectly formatted data)
Data is not being received from the traffic unit
EIS
TRFC FAIL
Description
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TA OFF SCALE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
Table 6-42 Traffic Status Annunciations
Additional information about the status of ADS-B traffic products is available on the AUX - ADS-B Status Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Viewing ADS-B Traffic Status:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the AUX - ADS-B Status Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-204 ADS-B Traffic Status on ADS-B Status Page
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
455
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ADS-B Status Page
Item
Traffic Application
Status: AIRBORNE
(AIRB), SURFACE
(SURF), AIRBORNE
ALERTS (CSA)
Status Message
Description
ON
Traffic application is currently on. Required input data is available, and it meets
performance requirements.
Traffic application is not currently active, but application is ready to run when
condition(s) determine the application should be active. Required input data is
available, and it meets performance requirements.
Traffic application is not available. Required input data is available, but it does
not meet performance requirements.
Traffic application is not available. Required input data is not available or the
application has failed.
Traffic application is not available, because it has not been configured. If this
annunciation persists, the system should be serviced.
Traffic application status is invalid or unknown.
The system is receiving the ADS-R coverage from an FAA ground station.
The system is not receiving the ADS-R coverage from an FAA ground station.
ADS-R coverage is invalid or unknown.
The GDL 88 is using the #1 GPS receiver for the GPS position source.
The GDL 88 is using the #2 GPS receiver for the GPS position source.
The GPS source is invalid or unknown.
Displays the number of minutes since the last uplink from a ground station
occurred. If no uplink has been received, or the status is invalid, dashes appear
instead of a number of minutes.
AVAILABLE TO RUN
NOT AVAILABLE
EIS
FAULT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOT CONFIGURED
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TIS-B/ADS-R Coverage
GPS Status: GPS
Source
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Ground Uplink Status:
Last uplink
---------------AVAILABLE
NOT AVAILABLE
--------------External #1
External #2
--------Number of minutes, or
‘------’
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Table 6-43 AUX-ADS-B Status Page Messages for ADS-B Traffic
456
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00-00962-04 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 7 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The approved Aircraft Flight Manual Supplement (AFMS) always supersedes the information in this
Pilot’s Guide.
NOTE: A failure of the primary (#1) Integrated Avionics Unit (IAU) results in loss of the flight director. Any
IAU failure results in loss of the autopilot and manual electric trim.
• GSA 80 AFCS Yaw Damper Servo (1)
• GDU 1045 Multi-Function Display (MFD)
• GSA 81 AFCS Servo (3)
• GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Units (2)
• GSM 85 or GSM 86 Servo Mounts (4)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• GDU 1040 Primary Flight Display (PFD)
EIS
The Garmin AFCS is a digital Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS), fully integrated within the G1000
System avionics architecture. The System Overview section provides a block diagram (Figure 1-1) to support
this system description. Garmin AFCS functionality in Diamond DA42NG aircraft is distributed across the
following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Garmin AFCS can be divided into these main operating functions:
• Flight Director (FD) — Flight director operation takes place within the primary (#1) IAU. Flight director
commands are displayed on the PFD. The flight director provides:
– Command Bars showing pitch/roll guidance
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
– Pitch/roll mode selection and processing
– Autopilot communication
AFCS
• Autopilot (AP) — Autopilot operation occurs within the pitch, roll, and pitch trim servo and provides servo
monitoring and automatic flight control in response to flight director steering commands, AHRS attitude and
rate information, and airspeed.
• Yaw Damper (YD) — The yaw servo is self-monitoring and provides Dutch roll damping and turn
coordination in response to yaw rate, roll angle, vertical acceleration, and airspeed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Manual Electric Trim (MET) — The pitch trim servo provides manual electric trim capability when the
autopilot is not engaged.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
457
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.1 AFCS CONTROLS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following dedicated AFCS keys are located on the bezel of the MFD:
AP Key
FD Key
Engages/disengages the autopilot
2
Activates/deactivates the flight director only
Pressing once turns on the flight director in the default pitch and roll modes. Pressing
again deactivates the flight director and removes the Command Bars. If the autopilot
is engaged, the key is disabled.
3 NAV Key
Selects/deselects Navigation Mode
4 ALT Key
Selects/deselects Altitude Hold Mode
5 VS Key
Selects/deselects Vertical Speed Mode
6 FLC Key
Selects/deselects Flight Level Change Mode
7 YD Key
Engages/disengages the yaw damper
8 HDG Key
Selects/deselects Heading Select Mode
9 APR Key
Selects/deselects Approach Mode
10 VNV Key
Selects/deselects Vertical Path Tracking Mode for Vertical Navigation flight control
11 NOSE UP/NOSE Control the mode reference in Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level Change
modes
DN Keys
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
1
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1045
1
7
2
8
3
9
4
10
5
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
11
6
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 7-1 Dedicated MFD AFCS Controls
458
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The following AFCS controls are located in the cockpit separately from the MFD:
AP DISC Switch
(Autopilot Disconnect)
Disengages the autopilot and interrupts pitch trim operation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
This switch may be used to mute the aural autopilot disconnect alert.
The AP DISC Switch is located on each control stick.
While pressed, allows manual control of the aircraft while the autopilot is
CWS Button
(Control Wheel Steering) engaged and synchronizes the flight director’s Command Bars with the current
aircraft pitch (if not in Glideslope Mode) and roll (if in Roll Hold Mode)
EIS
Upon release of the CWS Button, the flight director may establish new
reference points, depending on the current pitch and roll modes. CWS
operation details are discussed in the flight director modes section.
GA Button (Go Around)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The CWS Button is located on the top of the left control stick.
Selects flight director Go Around Mode
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If an approach procedure is loaded this switch also activates the missed
approach when the selected navigation source is GPS or when the navigation
source is VOR/LOC and a valid frequency has been tuned.
The GA Button is located on the left throttle handle.
AP TRIM Switch
(Autopilot Trim)
Used to command manual electric trim (MET)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
This composite switch is split into left and right sides. The left switch is
the ARM contact and the right switch controls the DN (forward) and UP
(rearward) contacts. The AP TRIM ARM switch can be used to disengage
the autopilot and to acknowledge an autopilot disconnect alert and mute the
associated aural tone.
AFCS
Manual trim commands are generated only when both sides of the switch
are operated simultaneously. If either side of the switch is active separately for
more than three seconds, MET function is disabled and ‘PTRM’ is displayed
as the AFCS Status Annunciation on the PFD. The function remains disabled
until both sides of the switch are inactivated.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The AP TRIM Switch is located on the left control stick.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
459
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.2 FLIGHT DIRECTOR OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The flight director function provides pitch and roll commands to the AFCS and displays them on the PFD.
With the flight director activated, the aircraft can be hand-flown to follow the path shown by the Command Bars.
Maximum commanded pitch (-15°/+20°) and roll (22°) angles, vertical acceleration, and roll rate are limited to
values established during AFCS certification. The flight director also provides commands to the autopilot.
ACTIVATING THE FLIGHT DIRECTOR
EIS
An initial press of a key listed in Table 7-1 (when the flight director is not active) activates the flight director
in the listed modes. The flight director may be turned off and the Command Bars removed from the display by
pressing the FD Key again. The FD Key is disabled when the autopilot is engaged.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Control Pressed
ALT Key
VS Key
VNV Key
Lateral
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
Takeoff (on ground)
Go Around (in air)
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
NAV Key
Navigation**
APR Key
Approach**
HDG Key
Heading Select
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
FD Key
AP Key
CWS Button
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GA Button
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Modes Selected
ROL
ROL
ROL
TO
GA
ROL
ROL
ROL
GPS
VOR
LOC
BC
GPS
VOR
LOC
HDG
Vertical
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Takeoff (on ground)
TO
Go Around (in air)
GA
Altitude Hold
ALT
Vertical Speed
VS
Vertical Path Tracking* VPTH
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
*Valid VNV flight plan must be entered before VNV Key press activates flight director.
**The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active GPS
course before NAV or APR Key press activates flight director.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Table 7-1 Flight Director Activation
460
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AFCS STATUS BOX
Lateral Modes
Active
Vertical Modes
Active
Mode
Reference
EIS
Armed
Yaw
Autopilot Damper
Status
Status
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight director mode annunciations are displayed on the PFD when the flight director is active. Autopilot
status is displayed in the center of the AFCS Status Box. Lateral flight director modes are displayed on the left
and vertical on the right. Armed modes are annunciated in white and active in green.
Armed
AFCS Status Box
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selected
Altitude
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Command
Bars
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GPS is
Selected
Navigation
Source
AFCS
Figure 7-2 PFD AFCS Display
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
461
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
COMMAND BARS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Upon activation of the flight director, Command Bars are displayed on the PFD as a single magenta cue. The
Command Bars move together vertically to indicate pitch commands and bank left or right to indicate roll
commands. The Command Bars do not override the aircraft symbol.
If the attitude information sent to the flight director becomes invalid or unavailable, the Command Bars are
removed from the display. The flight director Command Bars also disappear if either pitch exceeds +30˚/-20˚
or bank exceeds 65˚.
EIS
Command Bars
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Aircraft Symbol
Figure 7-3 Command Bars
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT DIRECTOR MODES
Flight director modes are normally selected independently for the pitch and roll axes. Unless otherwise
specified, all mode keys are alternate action (i.e., press on, press off). In the absence of specific mode selection,
the flight director reverts to the default pitch and/or roll mode(s).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Armed modes are annunciated in white and active in green in the AFCS Status Box. Under normal operation,
when the control for the active flight director mode is pressed, the flight director reverts to the default mode(s)
for the axis(es). Automatic transition from armed to active mode is indicated by the white armed mode
annunciation moving to the green active mode field and flashing for 10 seconds.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
If the information required to compute a flight director mode becomes invalid or unavailable, the flight
director automatically reverts to the default mode for that axis. A flashing yellow mode annunciation and
annunciator light indicate loss of sensor (ADC) or navigation data (VOR, LOC, GPS, VNV, SBAS) required to
compute commands. When such a loss occurs, the system automatically begins to roll the wings level (enters
Roll Hold Mode) or maintain the pitch angle (enters Pitch Hold Mode), depending on the affected axis. The
flashing annunciation stops when the affected mode key is pressed or another mode for the axis is selected. If
after 10 seconds no action is taken, the flashing annunciation stops.
APPENDICES
Figure 7-4 Loss of VOR Signal
INDEX
The flight director is automatically disabled if the attitude information required to compute the default flight
director modes becomes invalid or unavailable.
462
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
7.3 VERTICAL MODES
Pitch Hold
Flight Level Change
VNV Target Altitude Capture
Glidepath***
100 fpm
1 kt
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Go Around
0.5°
AFCS
Glideslope
Holds aircraft pitch attitude; may
be used to climb/descend to the (default)
PIT
-15° to +20°
Selected Altitude
Captures the Selected Altitude
*
ALTS
Holds current Altitude Reference ALT Key ALT nnnnn ft
Holds aircraft vertical speed; may
-3000 to
be used to climb/descend to the
VS Key VS nnnn fpm
+1500 fpm
Selected Altitude
Holds aircraft airspeed while
aircraft is climbing/descending to FLC Key FLC nnn kt 90 to 180 kt
the Selected Altitude
Captures and tracks descent legs
VNV
VPTH
of an active vertical profile
Key
Captures the Vertical Navigation
**
ALTV
(VNV) Target Altitude
Captures and tracks the SBAS
GP
glidepath on approach
APR
Key
Captures and tracks the ILS
GS
glideslope on approach
Commands a constant pitch
GA
GA
6°
angle and wings level
Button
Reference
Change
Increment
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Vertical Path Tracking
Reference
Range
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Vertical Speed
Control Annunciation
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selected Altitude Capture
Altitude Hold
Description
EIS
Vertical Mode
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Table 7-2 lists the vertical modes with their corresponding controls and annunciations. The mode reference is
displayed next to the active mode annunciation for Altitude Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level Change modes.
The NOSE UP/NOSE DN Keys can be used to change the vertical mode reference while operating under Pitch
Hold, Vertical Speed, or Flight Level Change Mode. Increments of change and acceptable ranges of values for
each of these references using the NOSE UP/NOSE DN Keys are also listed in the table.
* ALTS is armed automatically when PIT, VS, FLC, or GA is active, and under VPTH when the Selected Altitude is to be captured
instead of the VNV Target Altitude.
** ALTV is armed automatically under VPTH when the VNV Target Altitude is to be captured instead of the Selected Altitude.
APPENDICES
***GP is available in installations with GIA 63W IAUs when SBAS is available.
Table 7-2 Flight Director Vertical Modes
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
463
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
PITCH HOLD MODE (PIT)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the flight director is activated (the FD Key is pressed), Pitch Hold Mode is selected by default. Pitch
Hold Mode is indicated as the active pitch mode by the green annunciation ‘PIT’. This mode may be used for
climb or descent to the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter), since Selected Altitude Capture Mode is
automatically armed when Pitch Hold Mode is activated.
EIS
In Pitch Hold Mode, the flight director maintains a constant pitch attitude, the pitch reference. The pitch
reference is set to the aircraft pitch attitude at the moment of mode selection. If the aircraft pitch attitude
exceeds the flight director pitch command limitations, the flight director commands a pitch angle equal to the
nose-up/down limit.
CHANGING THE PITCH REFERENCE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When operating in Pitch Hold Mode, the pitch reference can be adjusted by:
• Using the NOSE UP/NOSE DN Keys
• Pressing the CWS Button, hand-flying the aircraft to establish a new pitch reference, then releasing the
CWS Button
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pitch Hold
Mode Active
Selected Altitude
Capture Mode Armed
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected
Altitude
Command Bars Maintain
Desired Pitch Reference
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 7-5 Pitch Hold Mode
464
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SELECTED ALTITUDE CAPTURE MODE (ALTS)
Selected Altitude Capture Mode is automatically armed with activation of the following modes:
• Go Around
• Vertical Speed
• Vertical Path Tracking (if the Selected Altitude is to
be captured instead of the VNV Target Altitude)
• Flight Level Change
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Pitch Hold
The white ‘ALTS’ annunciation indicates Selected Altitude Capture Mode is armed (see Figure 7-5 for example).
The ALT Knob is used to set the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter) until Selected Altitude Capture
Mode becomes active.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions to Selected Altitude
Capture Mode with Altitude Hold Mode armed (Figure 7-6). This automatic transition is indicated by the green
‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds and the appearance of the white ‘ALT” annunciation. The
Selected Altitude is shown as the Altitude Reference beside the ‘ALTS’ annunciation.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
At 50 feet from the Selected Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions from Selected Altitude
Capture to Altitude Hold Mode and holds the Selected Altitude (shown as the Altitude Reference). As Altitude
Hold Mode becomes active, the white ‘ALT’ annunciation moves to the active pitch mode field and flashes green
for 10 seconds to indicate the automatic transition.
Altitude Reference
(in this case, equal to
Selected Altitude)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Flash up to 10 sec, Indicating Automatic Transition
Figure 7-6 Automatic Mode Transitions During Altitude Capture
AFCS
CHANGING THE SELECTED ALTITUDE
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while in Selected Altitude Capture Mode does not cancel the mode.
Use of the ALT Knob to change the Selected Altitude while Selected Altitude Capture Mode is active causes
the flight director to revert to Pitch Hold Mode with Selected Altitude Capture Mode armed for the new
Selected Altitude.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
465
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
ALTITUDE HOLD MODE (ALT)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Altitude Hold Mode can be activated by pressing the ALT Key; the flight director maintains the current aircraft
altitude (to the nearest 10 feet) as the Altitude Reference. The flight director’s Altitude Reference, shown in the
AFCS Status Box, is independent of the Selected Altitude, displayed above the Altimeter. Altitude Hold Mode
active is indicated by a green ‘ALT’ annunciation in the AFCS Status Box.
Altitude Hold Mode is automatically armed when the flight director is in Selected Altitude Capture Mode (see
Figure 7-6). Selected Altitude Capture Mode automatically transitions to Altitude Hold Mode when the altitude
error is less than 50 feet. In this case, the Selected Altitude becomes the flight director’s Altitude Reference.
EIS
CHANGING THE ALTITUDE REFERENCE
NOTE: Turning the ALT Knob while in Altitude Hold Mode changes the Selected Altitude, but not the flight
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
director’s Altitude Reference, and does not cancel the mode.
With the CWS Button depressed, the aircraft can be hand-flown to a new Altitude Reference. When the
CWS Button is released at the desired altitude, the new altitude is established as the Altitude Reference.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Altitude Hold
Mode Active
Altitude
Reference
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected
Altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Selected
Altitude
Bug
Command Bars Hold Pitch Attitude
to Maintain Altitude Reference
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 7-7 Altitude Hold Mode
466
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VERTICAL SPEED MODE (VS)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In Vertical Speed Mode, the flight director acquires and maintains a Vertical Speed Reference. Current aircraft
vertical speed (to the nearest 100 fpm) becomes the Vertical Speed Reference at the moment of Vertical Speed
Mode activation. This mode may be used for climb or descent to the Selected Altitude (shown above the
Altimeter) since Selected Altitude Capture Mode is automatically armed when Vertical Speed Mode is selected.
When Vertical Speed Mode is activated by pressing the VS Key, ‘VS’ is annunciated in green in the AFCS Status
Box along with the Vertical Speed Reference. The Vertical Speed Reference is also displayed above the Vertical
Speed Indicator. A Vertical Speed Reference Bug corresponding to the Vertical Speed Reference is shown on
the indicator.
EIS
CHANGING THE VERTICAL SPEED REFERENCE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Vertical Speed Reference (shown both in the AFCS Status Box and above the Vertical Speed Indicator)
may be changed by:
• Using the NOSE UP/NOSE DN Keys
• Pressing the CWS Button, hand-flying the aircraft to attain a new Vertical Speed Reference, then releasing
the CWS Button
Vertical
Speed
Reference
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Vertical Speed
Mode Active
Selected
Altitude Capture
Mode Armed
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected
Altitude
Vertical
Speed
Reference
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Vertical
Speed
Reference
Bug
Command Bars Indicate Climb to
Attain Vertical Speed Reference
APPENDICES
Figure 7-8 Vertical Speed Hold Mode
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
467
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT LEVEL CHANGE MODE (FLC)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Level Change Mode is selected by pressing the FLC Key. This mode acquires and maintains the
Airspeed Reference while climbing or descending to the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter). When
Flight Level Change Mode is active, the flight director continuously monitors Selected Altitude, airspeed, and
altitude.
EIS
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
The Airspeed Reference is set to the current airspeed upon mode activation. Flight Level Change Mode is
indicated by a green ‘FLC’ annunciation beside the Airspeed Reference in the AFCS Status Box. The Airspeed
Reference is also displayed directly above the Airspeed Indicator, along with a bug corresponding to the Airspeed
Reference along the tape.
NOTE: The Selected Altitude should be set before selecting Flight Level Change Mode.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Engine power must be adjusted to allow the autopilot to fly the aircraft at a pitch attitude corresponding
to the desired flight profile (climb or descent) while maintaining the Airspeed Reference. The flight director
maintains the current altitude until either engine power or the Airspeed Reference are adjusted and does not
allow the aircraft to climb or descend away from the Selected Altitude.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
CHANGING THE AIRSPEED REFERENCE
The Airspeed Reference (shown in both the AFCS Status Box and above the Airspeed Indicator) may be
adjusted by:
• Using the NOSE UP/NOSE DN Keys
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Pressing the CWS Button, hand-flying the aircraft to a new airspeed, then releasing the CWS Button to
establish the new Airspeed Reference
Selected
Airspeed Altitude Capture
Reference Mode Armed
AFCS
Flight Level
Change Mode
Active
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Airspeed
Reference
APPENDICES
Airspeed
Reference
Bug
INDEX
Command Bars Indicate Climb
to Attain Selected Altitude
Figure 7-9 Flight Level Change Mode (IAS)
468
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VERTICAL NAVIGATION MODES (VPTH, ALTV)
NOTE: VNV is disabled when parallel track or dead reckoning mode is active.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The Selected Altitude takes precedence over any other vertical constraints.
Vertical Navigation (VNV) flight control is available for enroute/terminal cruise and descent operations any
time that VNV flight planning is available. Refer to the Flight Management Section for more information on
VNV flight plans. Conditions for availability include, but are not limited to:
EIS
• The selected navigation source is GPS.
• A VNV flight plan (with at least one altitude-constrained waypoint) or vertical direct-to is active.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• VNV is enabled (VNV ENBL Softkey pressed on the MFD).
• Crosstrack error is valid and within certain limits.
• Desired/actual track are valid or track angle error is within certain limits.
• The VNV Target Altitude of the active waypoint is no more than 250 ft above the current aircraft altitude.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The flight director may be armed for VNV at any time, but no target altitudes are captured during a climb.
The Command Bars provide vertical profile guidance based on specified altitudes (entered manually or loaded
from the database) at waypoints in the active flight plan or vertical direct-to. The appropriate VNV flight control
modes are sequenced by the flight director to follow the path defined by the vertical profile. Upon reaching
the last waypoint in the VNV flight plan, the flight director transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and cancels any
armed VNV modes.
VERTICAL PATH TRACKING MODE (VPTH)
NOTE: If another pitch mode key is pressed while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is selected, Vertical Path
AFCS
Tracking Mode reverts to armed.
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is active does not cancel the mode. The
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
autopilot guides the aircraft back to the descent path upon release of the CWS Button.
APPENDICES
When a vertical profile (VNV flight plan) is active and the VNV Key is pressed, Vertical Path Tracking
Mode is armed in preparation for descent path capture. ‘VPTH’ (or ‘/V’ when Glidepath or Glideslope Mode
is concurrently armed) is annunciated in white in addition to previously armed modes. If applicable, the
appropriate altitude capture mode is armed for capture of the next VNV Target Altitude (ALTV) or the Selected
Altitude (ALTS), whichever is greater.
INDEX
Figure 7-10 Vertical Path Tracking Armed Annunciations
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
469
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Prior to descent path interception, the Selected Altitude must be set below the current aircraft altitude
by at least 75 feet. For the flight director to transition from Altitude Hold to Vertical Path Tracking Mode,
acknowledgment is required within 5 minutes of descent path interception by:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Pressing the VNV Key
• Adjusting the Selected Altitude
EIS
If acknowledgment is not received within 1 minute of descent path interception, the white ‘VPTH’
annunciation starts to flash. Flashing continues until acknowledged or the descent path is intercepted. If
the descent is not confirmed by the time of interception, Vertical Path Tracking Mode remains armed and the
descent is not captured.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
In conjunction with the “TOD [top of descent] within 1 minute” annunciation in the Navigation Status Box
and the “Vertical track” voice message, VNV indications (VNV Target Altitude, vertical deviation, and vertical
speed required) appear on the PFD in magenta (Figure 7-11).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Altitude Hold
Mode Active
Vertical Path Tracking
Armed, (Flashing Indicates
Acknowledgment Required)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected
Altitude Below
VNV Target
VNV Target
Altitude
AFCS
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
Required
Vertical
Speed Bug
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
GPS is
Selected
Navigation
Source
Terminal
Phase of
Flight
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 7-11 Vertical Path Capture
470
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
When a descent leg is captured (i.e., vertical deviation becomes valid), Vertical Path Tracking becomes
active and tracks the descent profile. An altitude capture mode (‘ALTS’ or ‘ALTV’) is armed as appropriate.
VNV Target Altitude
Capture Armed
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Vertical Path
Tracking Active
VNV Target
Altitude
EIS
Terminal
Phase of
Flight
Command Bars Indicate Descent to
Maintain Required Vertical Speed
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GPS is
Selected
Navigation
Source
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Required
Vertical
Speed
Indication
(RVSI)
Vertical Deviation
Indicator (VDI)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 7-12 Vertical Path Tracking Mode
AFCS
If the Altimeter’s barometric setting is adjusted while Vertical Path Tracking is active, the flight director
increases/decreases the descent rate by up to 500 fpm to re-establish the aircraft on the descent path (without
commanding a climb). Adjusting the altimeter barometric setting creates discontinuities in VNV vertical
deviation, moving the descent path. For large adjustments, it may take several minutes for the aircraft to reestablish on the descent path. If the change is made while nearing a waypoint with a VNV Target Altitude,
the aircraft may not re-establish on the descent path in time to meet the vertical constraint.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
471
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Reversion to Pitch Hold Mode
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
• Vertical deviation exceeds 200 feet during an overspeed condition.
Several situations can occur while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is active which cause the flight director to
revert to Pitch Hold Mode:
• Vertical deviation experiences a discontinuity that both exceeds 200 feet in magnitude and results in the
vertical deviation exceeding 200 feet in magnitude. Such discontinuities are usually caused by flight plan
changes that affect the vertical profile.
• Vertical deviation becomes invalid (the Vertical Deviation Indicator is removed from the PFD).
EIS
• A display enters Reversionary Mode (this does not apply to an active vertical direct-to).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Unless VNV is disabled, Vertical Path Tracking Mode and the appropriate altitude capture mode become
armed following the reversion to Pitch Hold Mode to allow for possible profile recapture.
Non-Path Descents
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level Change modes can also be used to fly non-path descents
while VNV flight control is selected. If the VS or FLC Key is pressed while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is
selected, Vertical Path Tracking Mode reverts to armed along with the appropriate altitude capture mode to
allow profile re-capture.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 7-13 Flight Level Change VNV Non-Path Descent
To prevent immediate profile re-capture, the following must be satisfied:
• At least 10 seconds have passed since the non-path transition was initiated
• Vertical deviation from the profile has exceeded 250 feet, but is now less than 200 feet
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Pressing the VNV Key twice re-arms Vertical Path Tracking for immediate profile re-capture.
472
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VNV TARGET ALTITUDE CAPTURE MODE (ALTV)
NOTE: Armed VNV Target Altitude and Selected Altitude capture modes are mutually exclusive. However,
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected Altitude Capture Mode is armed implicitly (not annunciated) whenever VNV Target Altitude Capture
Mode is armed.
EIS
VNV Target Altitude Capture is analogous to Selected Altitude Capture Mode and is armed automatically
after the VNV Key is pressed and the next VNV Target Altitude is to be intercepted before the Selected
Altitude. The annunciation ‘ALTV’ indicates that the VNV Target Altitude is to be captured. VNV Target
Altitudes are shown in the active flight plan or vertical direct-to, and can be entered manually or loaded
from a database (see the Flight Management Section for details). At the same time as “TOD within 1 minute”
is annunciated in the Navigation Status Box, the active VNV Target Altitude is displayed above the Vertical
Speed Indicator (see Figure 7-11).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
As the aircraft nears the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions to VNV Target
Altitude Capture Mode with Altitude Hold Mode armed. This automatic transition is indicated by the green
‘ALTV’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds and the appearance of the white ‘ALT’ annunciation. The
VNV Target Altitude is shown as the Altitude Reference beside the ‘ALTV’ annunciation and remains displayed
above the Vertical Speed Indicator. The Required Vertical Speed Indication (RVSI) is removed once VNV
Target Altitude Capture Mode becomes active.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
At 50 feet from the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions from VNV Target
Altitude Capture to Altitude Hold Mode and tracks the level leg. As Altitude Hold Mode becomes active, the
white ‘ALT’ annunciation moves to the active vertical mode field and flashes green for 10 seconds to indicate
the automatic transition. The flight director automatically arms Vertical Path Tracking, allowing upcoming
descent legs to be captured and subsequently tracked.
Altitude Reference (In
This Case, Equal To
VNV Altitude Target)
AFCS
Flash up to 10 sec, Indicating Automatic Transition
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 7-14 Automatic Mode Transitions During Altitude Capture
Changing the VNV Target Altitude
APPENDICES
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while in VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode does not cancel the mode.
INDEX
Changing the current VNV Target Altitude while VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode is active causes the
flight director to revert to Pitch Hold Mode. Vertical Path Tracking and the appropriate altitude capture
mode are armed in preparation to capture the new VNV Target Altitude or the Selected Altitude, depending
on which altitude is to be intercepted first.
VNV target altitudes can be changed while editing the active flight plan (see the Flight Management
Section for details).
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
473
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
GLIDEPATH MODE (GP) (SBAS ONLY)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM) to determine whether SBAS functionality is approved.
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while Glidepath Mode is active does not cancel the mode. The autopilot
guides the aircraft back to the glidepath upon release of the CWS Button.
EIS
Glidepath Mode is available only in installations with GIA 63W IAUs when SBAS is available. Glidepath
Mode is used to track the SBAS-based glidepath. When Glidepath Mode is armed, ‘GP’ is annunciated in white
in the AFCS Status Box.
Selecting Glidepath Mode:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Ensure a GPS approach with vertical guidance (LPV, LNAV/VNAV, LNAV+V) is loaded into the active flight plan.
The active waypoint must be part of the flight plan (cannot be a direct-to a waypoint not in the flight plan).
2) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: Some RNAV (GPS) approaches provide a vertical descent angle as an aid in flying a stabilized
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the APR Key.
WARNING: When flying an LNAV approach (with vertical descent angle) with the autopilot coupled, the
approach. These approaches are NOT considered Approaches with Vertical Guidance (APV). Approaches
that are annunciated on the HSI as LNAV or LNAV+V should be flown to an MDA, until visual with the
landing surface, even though vertical glidepath (GP) information may be provided..
aircraft will not level off at the MDA even if the MDA is set in the altitude preselect.
AFCS
Upon reaching the glidepath, the flight director transitions to Glidepath Mode and begins to capture and
track the glidepath.
Figure 7-15 Glidepath Mode Armed
Once the following conditions have been met, the glidepath can be captured:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• The active waypoint is at or after the final approach fix (FAF)
• Vertical deviation is valid
• The CDI is at less than full scale deviation
INDEX
APPENDICES
• Automatic sequencing of waypoints has not been suspended (no ‘SUSP’ annunciation on the HSI)
474
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GPS Approach
Mode Active
Glidepath
Mode Active
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Command Bars Indicate
Descent on Glidepath
Figure 7-16 Glidepath Mode
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
LNAV/VNAV
Approach
Active
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GPS is
Selected
Navigation
Source
Glidepath
Indicator
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
475
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
GLIDESLOPE MODE (GS)
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while Glideslope Mode is active does not cancel the mode. The autopilot
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
guides the aircraft back to the glideslope upon release of the CWS Button.
Glideslope Mode is available for LOC/ILS approaches to capture and track the glideslope. When Glideslope
Mode is armed (annunciated as ‘GS’ in white), LOC Approach Mode is armed as the lateral flight director
mode.
Selecting Glideslope Mode:
EIS
1) Ensure a valid localizer frequency is tuned.
2) Ensure that LOC is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources).
3) Press the APR Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Or:
1) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources).
2) Ensure a LOC/ILS approach is loaded into the active flight plan.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Ensure the corresponding LOC frequency is tuned.
4) Press the APR Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 7-17 Glideslope Mode Armed
Once LOC is the navigation source, the localizer and glideslope can be captured. Upon reaching the glideslope,
the flight director transitions to Glideslope Mode and begins to capture and track the glideslope.
Approach
Mode Active
Glideslope
Mode Active
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Active ILS
Frequency
Tuned
INDEX
NAV2 (localizer) is Selected
Navigation Source
Command Bars Indicate Descent
on Localizer/Glideslope Path
Figure 7-18 Glideslope Mode
476
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
Glideslope
Indicator
190-00962-04 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GO AROUND MODE (GA)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pushing the GA Switch engages the flight director in a wings-level, pitch-up attitude, allowing the execution
of a missed approach or a go around. This mode is a coupled pitch and roll mode and is annunciated as ‘GA’
in both the active pitch and roll mode fields. Go Around Mode disengages the autopilot and arms Selected
Altitude Capture Mode automatically. Subsequent autopilot engagement is allowed. Attempts to modify the
aircraft attitude (i.e., with the CWS Button or NOSE UP/NOSE DN Keys) result in reversion to Pitch and Roll
Hold modes.
Go Around Mode Active
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Autopilot Disconnect Annunciation
Flashes Yellow for 5 sec
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Command Bars Indicate Climb
Figure 7-19 Go Around Mode
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
477
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.4 LATERAL MODES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Garmin AFCS offers the lateral modes listed in Table 7-3. Refer to the vertical modes section for information
regarding Go Around Mode.
Lateral Mode
Description
Holds the current aircraft roll
attitude or rolls the wings level,
(default)
depending on the commanded
bank angle
Captures and tracks the
HDG
Selected Heading
Key
EIS
Roll Hold
Heading Select
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Control Annunciation
Navigation, GPS
Navigation, VOR Enroute Capture/Track
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Navigation, LOC Capture/Track
(No Glideslope)
Navigation Backcourse Capture/Track
Captures and tracks the
selected navigation source (GPS,
VOR, LOC)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
HDG
25º
GPS
25º
25º Capture
10º Track
25º Capture
10º Track
Captures and tracks a
localizer signal for backcourse
approaches
BC
GPS
Approach, VOR Capture/Track
Approach, LOC Capture/Track
(Glideslope Mode automatically armed)
AFCS
25º
LOC
Approach, GPS
Go Around
ROL
VOR
NAV
Key
Captures and tracks the
selected navigation source (GPS,
VOR, LOC)
Commands a constant pitch
angle and wings level
APR
Key
VAPP
LOC
GA
Button
Maximum Roll
Command Limit
GA
25º Capture
10º Track
25º
25º Capture
10º Track
25º Capture
10º Track
Wings Level
The Garmin AFCS limits turn rate to 3 degrees per second (standard rate turn).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 7-3 Flight Director Lateral Modes
INDEX
APPENDICES
The CWS Button does not change lateral references for Heading Select, Navigation, Backcourse, or Approach
modes. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Heading/Course upon release of the CWS
Button.
478
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ROLL HOLD MODE (ROL)
NOTE: If Roll Hold Mode is activated as a result of a mode reversion, the flight director rolls the wings
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
level.
When the flight director is activated, Roll Hold Mode is selected by default. This mode is annunciated as
‘ROL’ in the AFCS Status Box. The current aircraft bank angle is held, subject to the bank angle conditions listed
in Table 7-4.
EIS
Figure 7-20 Roll Hold Mode Annunciation
Flight Director Response
Rolls wings level
Maintains current aircraft roll attitude
Limits bank to 25°
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Bank Angle
< 6°
6 to 25°
> 25°
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Table 7-4 Roll Hold Mode Responses
CHANGING THE ROLL REFERENCE
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The roll reference can be changed by pressing the CWS Button, establishing the desired bank angle, then
releasing the CWS Button.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
479
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
HEADING SELECT MODE (HDG)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Heading Select Mode is activated by pressing the HDG Key. Heading Select Mode acquires and maintains the
Selected Heading. The Selected Heading is shown by a light blue bug on the HSI and in the box to the upper
left of the HSI.
CHANGING THE SELECTED HEADING
NOTE: Pressing the HDG Knob synchronizes the Selected Heading to the current heading.
EIS
The Selected Heading is adjusted using the HDG Knob. Pressing the CWS Button and hand-flying the
aircraft does not change the Selected Heading. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Heading
upon release of the CWS Button.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Turns are commanded in the same direction as Selected Heading Bug movement, even if the bug is turned
more than 180° from the present heading (e.g., a 270° turn to the right). However, Selected Heading changes
of more than 340° at a time result in turn reversals.
Altitude Hold
Mode Active
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Heading Select
Mode Active
Selected
Heading
Bug
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected
Heading
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Command Bars Track Selected Heading
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 7-21 Heading Select Mode
480
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NAVIGATION MODES (GPS, VOR, LOC, BC)
NOTE: The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active GPS course for the
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
flight director to enter Navigation Mode.
NOTE: When intercepting a flight plan leg, the flight director gives commands to capture the active leg at
approximately a 45° angle to the track between the waypoints defining the active leg. The flight director
does not give commands fly to the starting waypoint of the active leg.
EIS
NOTE: When making a backcourse approach, set the Selected Course to the localizer front course.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Pressing the NAV Key selects Navigation Mode. Navigation Mode acquires and tracks the selected navigation
source (GPS, VOR, LOC). The flight director follows GPS roll steering commands when GPS is the selected
navigation source. When the navigation source is VOR or LOC, the flight director creates roll steering commands
from the Selected Course and deviation. Navigation Mode can also be used to fly non-precision GPS and LOC
approaches where glideslope capture is not required.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Backcourse Navigation Mode is selected when the localizer front course is greater than 105° from the aircraft
heading. Backcourse Navigation Mode captures and tracks a localizer signal in the backcourse direction. The
annunciation ‘BC’ in the AFCS Status Box indicates Backcourse Navigation Mode.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If the Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) shows greater than one dot when the NAV Key is pressed, the selected
mode is armed. If the CDI is less than one dot, Navigation Mode is automatically captured when the NAV Key
is pressed. The armed annunciation appears in white to the left of the active roll mode.
Figure 7-22 GPS Navigation Mode Armed
AFCS
When the CDI has automatically switched from GPS to LOC during a LOC/ILS approach, GPS Navigation
Mode remains active, providing GPS steering guidance until the localizer signal is captured. LOC Navigation
Mode is armed when the automatic navigation source switch takes place. If the APR Key is pressed prior to the
automatic navigation source switch, LOC Navigation Mode is armed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
If Navigation Mode is active and either of the following occur, the flight director reverts to Roll Hold Mode
(wings rolled level):
• Different VOR tuned while in VOR Navigation Mode (VOR Navigation Mode reverts to armed)
APPENDICES
• Navigation source manually switched (with the CDI Softkey)
• During a LOC/ILS approach the FAF is crossed while in GPS Navigation Mode after the automatic navigation
source switch from GPS to LOC
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
481
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
CHANGING THE SELECTED COURSE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Selected Course is controlled using the CRS Knob (while in VOR, LOC, or OBS Mode). Pressing the
CWS Button and hand-flying the aircraft does not change the Selected Course while in Navigation Mode.
The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Course (or GPS flight plan) when the CWS Button is
released.
Pitch Hold
Mode Active
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
GPS Navigation
Mode Active
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GPS is Selected
Navigation
Source
Command Bars Indicate Left Turn
to Track GPS Course and Climb
to Intercept Selected Altitude
Selected
Course
Figure 7-23 Navigation Mode
Pitch Hold
Mode Active
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Backcourse
Mode Active
LOC2 is Selected
Navigation Source
Command Bars Hold Pitch Attitude
Figure 7-24 Backcourse Mode
482
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPROACH MODES (GPS, VAPP, LOC)
NOTE: The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active GPS course for the
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
flight director to enter Approach Mode.
Approach Mode is activated when the APR Key is pressed. Approach Mode acquires and tracks the selected
navigation source (GPS, VOR, or LOC), depending on loaded approach. This mode uses the selected navigation
receiver deviation and desired course inputs to fly the approach. Pressing the APR Key when the CDI is greater
than one dot arms the selected approach mode (annunciated in white to the left of the active lateral mode). If
the CDI is less than one dot, the LOC is automatically captured when the APR Key is pressed.
EIS
VOR Approach Mode (VAPP) provides greater sensitivity for signal tracking than VOR Navigation Mode.
Selecting VOR Approach Mode:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Ensure a valid VOR frequency is tuned
2) Ensure that VOR is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
3) Press the APR Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When GPS Approach Mode is armed, Glidepath Mode is also armed.
Selecting GPS Approach Mode:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Ensure a GPS approach is loaded into the active flight plan. The active waypoint must be part of the flight plan
(cannot be a direct-to a waypoint not in the flight plan).
2) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
3) Press the APR Key.
AFCS
Figure 7-25 GPS Approach Mode Armed
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
483
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
LOC Approach Mode allows the autopilot to fly a LOC/ILS approach with a glideslope. When LOC Approach
Mode is armed, Glideslope Mode is also armed automatically. LOC captures are inhibited if the difference
between aircraft heading and localizer course exceeds 105°.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting LOC Approach Mode:
1) Ensure a valid localizer frequency is tuned.
2) Ensure that LOC is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
3) Press the APR Key.
EIS
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
2) Ensure a LOC/ILS approach is loaded into the active flight plan.
3) Ensure the corresponding LOC frequency is tuned.
4) Press the APR Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If the following occurs, the flight director reverts to Roll Hold Mode (wings rolled level):
• Approach Mode is active and a Vectors-To-Final is activated
• Approach Mode is active and Navigation source is manually switched
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• During a LOC/ILS approach, GPS Navigation Mode is active and the FAF is crossed after the automatic
navigation source switch from GPS to LOC
CHANGING THE SELECTED COURSE
AFCS
The Selected Course is controlled using the CRS Knob (while in VOR, LOC, or OBS Mode). Pressing the
CWS Button and hand-flying the aircraft does not change the Selected Course while in Approach Mode.
The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Course (or GPS flight plan) when the CWS Button is
released.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
INTERCEPTING AND FLYING A DME ARC
APPENDICES
The AFCS will intercept and track a DME arc that is part of the active flight plan provided that GPS
Navigation Mode is engaged, GPS is the active navigation source on the CDI, and the DME arc segment is
the active flight plan leg. It is important to note that automatic navigation of DME arcs is based on GPS.
Thus, even if the APR key is pressed and LOC or VOR Approach Mode is armed prior to reaching the Initial
Approach Fix (IAF), Approach Mode will not activate until the arc segment is completed.
INDEX
If the pilot decides to intercept the arc at a location other than the published IAF (i.e. ATC provides vectors
to intercept the arc) and subsequently selects Heading Mode or Roll Mode, the AFCS will not automatically
intercept or track the arc unless the pilot activates the arc leg of the flight plan and arms GPS Navigation
Mode. The AFCS will not intercept and fly a DME arc before reaching an IAF that defines the beginning of the
arc segment. Likewise, if at any point while established on the DME arc the pilot deselects GPS Navigation
Mode, the AFCS will no longer track the arc.
484
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
7.5 AUTOPILOT AND YAW DAMPER OPERATION
NOTE: Refer to the AFM for specific instructions regarding emergency procedures.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The autopilot and yaw damper operate flight control surface servos to provide automatic flight control. The
autopilot controls the aircraft pitch and roll attitudes following commands received from the flight director. Pitch
autotrim provides trim commands to the pitch trim servo to relieve any sustained effort required by the pitch
servo. The yaw damper reduces Dutch roll tendencies and coordinates turns.
EIS
FLIGHT CONTROL
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Pitch and roll commands are provided to the servos, based on the active flight director modes. Servo motor
control limits the maximum servo speed and torque. The servo mounts are equipped with slip-clutches set to
certain values. This allows the servos to be overridden in case of an emergency.
PITCH AXIS AND PITCH TRIM
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The autopilot pitch axis uses pitch rate to stabilize the aircraft pitch attitude during upsets and flight
director maneuvers. Flight director pitch commands are rate- and attitude-limited, combined with pitch
damper control, and sent to the pitch servo motor. The pitch servo measures the output effort (torque) and
provides this signal to the pitch trim servo. The pitch trim servo commands the motor to reduce the average
pitch servo effort.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When the autopilot is not engaged, the pitch trim servo may be used to provide manual electric trim.
This allows the aircraft to be trimmed using a control stick switch rather than the trim wheel. Manual trim
commands are generated only when both halves of the MEPT Switch are operated simultaneously. Trim
speeds are scheduled with airspeed to provide more consistent response.
ROLL AXIS
AFCS
The autopilot roll axis uses roll rate to stabilize aircraft roll attitude during upsets and flight director
maneuvers. The flight director roll commands are rate- and attitude-limited, combined with roll damper
control, and sent to the roll servo motor.
YAW AXIS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The yaw damper uses yaw rate and roll attitude to dampen the aircraft’s natural Dutch roll response.
It also uses lateral acceleration to coordinate turns. Yaw damper operation is independent of autopilot
engagement.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
485
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
ENGAGING THE AUTOPILOT AND YAW DAMPER
NOTE: Autopilot engagement/disengagement is not equivalent to servo engagement/disengagement. Use
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
the CWS Button to disengage the pitch and roll servos while the autopilot remains active.
EIS
When the AP Key is pressed, the autopilot, yaw damper, and flight director are activated (if not already
engaged). The flight director engages in Pitch and Roll Hold modes when initially activated. When the YD
Key is pressed, the system engages the yaw damper independently of the autopilot (if not already engaged).
Autopilot and yaw damper status are displayed in the center of the AFCS Status Box. Engagement is indicated
by green ‘AP’ and ‘YD’ annunciations, respectively.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Autopilot
Engaged
Figure 7-26 Autopilot and Yaw Damper Engaged
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
CONTROL WHEEL STEERING
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
During autopilot operation, the aircraft may be hand-flown without disengaging the autopilot. Pressing and
holding the CWS Button disengages the pitch and roll servos from the flight control surfaces and allows the
aircraft to be hand-flown. At the same time, the flight director is synchronized to the aircraft attitude during
the maneuver. CWS activity has no effect on yaw damper engagement. The ‘AP’ annunciation is temporarily
replaced by ‘CWS’ in white for the duration of CWS maneuvers.
In most scenarios, releasing the CWS Button reengages the autopilot with a new reference. Refer to the flight
director modes section for CWS behavior in each mode.
AFCS
Control Wheel Steering
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 7-27 CWS Annunciation
486
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DISENGAGING THE AUTOPILOT AND YAW DAMPER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The autopilot is manually disengaged by pushing the AP DISC Switch, AP TRIM ARM Switch, or the AP Key
on the MFD. Manual disengagement is indicated by a five-second flashing yellow ‘AP’ annunciation and a twosecond autopilot disconnect aural alert. After manual disengagement, the autopilot disconnect aural alert may
be cancelled by pushing the AP TRIM ARM or AP DISC Switch (AP DISC Switch also cancels the flashing ‘AP’
annunciation).
The YD Key or AP DISC Switch can be used to disengage the yaw damper. The ‘YD’ annunciation turns
yellow and flashes for five seconds upon disengagement.
EIS
Figure 7-28 Manual Autopilot Disengagement
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Automatic autopilot disengagement is indicated by a flashing red ‘AP’ annunciation and by the autopilot
disconnect aural alert, which continue until acknowledged by pushing the AP DISC or AP TRIM ARM
Switch.
Automatic disengagement occurs due to:
• Invalid sensor data
• Inability to compute default flight director modes
(FD also disengages automatically)
• Stall Warning
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• System failure
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 7-29 Automatic Autopilot Disengagement
AFCS
Automatic yaw damper disengagement occurs when autopilot disengagement is caused by a failure in a
parameter also affecting the yaw damper. This means that the yaw damper can remain operational in some
cases where the autopilot automatically disengages. The yaw damper also disengages upon a localized failure
in the yaw damper system.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 7-29 Automatic Autopilot Disengagement
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
487
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.6 EXAMPLE FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The following example flight plan and diagrams (not to be used for navigation) in this section are
for instructional purposes only and should be considered not current. Numbered portions of accompanying
diagrams correspond to numbered procedure steps.
EIS
This scenario-based set of procedures (based on the example flight plan found in the Flight Management
Section) shows various Garmin AFCS modes used during a flight. In this scenario, the aircraft departs Charles B.
Wheeler Downtown Airport (KMKC), enroute to Colorado Springs Airport (KCOS). After departure, the aircraft
climbs to 12,000 ft and airway V4 is intercepted, following ATC vectors.
0
24
27
24
27
24
30
21
18
15
18
9
24
21
12
15
27
12
6
Lamar
VOR
(LAA)
Topeka
VOR
(TOP)
21
Hays
VOR
(HYS)
9
V 244
Salina
VOR
(SLN)
12
3
V4
18
V 244
9
6
0
33
KMKC
27
30
6
KCOS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3
30
3
6
0
33
3
30
33
9
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
33
0
15
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Airway V4 is flown to Salina VOR (SLN) using VOR navigation, then airway V244 is flown using GPS navigation.
The ILS approach for runway 35L and LPV (WAAS) approach for runway 35R are shown and a missed approach
is executed.
12
21
15
18
AFCS
Figure 7-30 Flight Plan Overview
DEPARTURE
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Climbing to the Selected Altitude and flying an assigned heading:
1) Before takeoff, set the Selected Altitude to 12,000 feet using the ALT Knob.
2) In this example, Vertical Speed Mode is used to capture the Selected Altitude (Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, or
Flight Level Change Mode may be used).
APPENDICES
a) Press the VS Key to activate Vertical Speed Mode.
INDEX
The Vertical Speed Reference may be adjusted after Vertical Speed Mode is selected using the NOSE UP/
NOSE DN Keys or pushing the CWS Button while hand-flying the aircraft to establish a new Vertical Speed
Reference.
488
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
b) Press the AP Key to engage the autopilot in a climb using Vertical Speed Mode.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Use the HDG Knob to set the Selected Heading, complying with ATC vectors to intercept Airway V4.
Press the HDG Key to activate Heading Select Mode while the autopilot is engaged in the climb. The autopilot
follows the Selected Heading Bug on the HSI and turns the aircraft to the desired heading.
EIS
4) As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
At 50 feet from the Selected Altitude, the green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds; the autopilot
transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HD
GM
od
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
e
3
AFCS
Selected Altitude of 12,000 MSL
ALT Mode
4
1
2
VS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
KMKC
e
Mod
APPENDICES
Figure 7-31 Departure
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
489
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
INTERCEPTING A VOR RADIAL
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
During climb-out, the autopilot continues to fly the aircraft in Heading Select Mode. Airway V4 to Salina
VOR (SLN) should now be intercepted. Since the enroute flight plan waypoints correspond to VORs, flight
director Navigation Mode using either VOR or GPS as the navigation source may be used. In this scenario, VOR
Navigation Mode is used for navigation to the first VOR waypoint in the flight plan.
Intercepting a VOR radial:
1) Arm VOR Navigation Mode:
EIS
a) Tune the VOR frequency.
b) Press the CDI Softkey to set the navigation source to VOR.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
c) Use the CRS Knob to set the Selected Course to 255°. Note that at this point, the flight director is still in
Heading Select Mode and the autopilot continues to fly 290°.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
d) Press the NAV Key. This arms VOR Navigation Mode and the white ‘VOR’ annunciation appears to the left of
the active lateral mode.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) As the aircraft nears the Selected Course, the flight director transitions from Heading Select to VOR Navigation
Mode and the ‘VOR’ annunciation flashes green. The autopilot begins turning to intercept the Selected
Course.
3) The autopilot continues the turn until the aircraft is established on the Selected Course.
0
3
Hd
29 g
0o
30
AFCS
33
V4
6
o
255
Salina
VOR
(SLN)
24
VO
R
9
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
27
3
NA
V
Mo
de
2
HD
G
12
M
od
e,
VO
R
Ar
m
ed
15
21
18
APPENDICES
1
INDEX
Figure 7-32 Intercepting a VOR Radial
490
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLYING A FLIGHT PLAN/GPS COURSE
NOTE: Changing the navigation source cancels Navigation Mode and causes the flight director to revert
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
back to Roll Hold Mode (wings rolled level).
As the aircraft closes on Salina VOR, GPS is used to navigate the next leg, airway V244. The aircraft is
currently tracking inbound on Airway V4.
Flying a GPS flight plan:
EIS
1) Transition from VOR to GPS Navigation Mode:
a) Press the CDI Softkey until GPS is the selected navigation source.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
b) Press the NAV Key to activate GPS Navigation Mode. The autopilot guides the aircraft along the active flight
plan leg.
0
33
30
3
V4
6
3
o
075
30
e
V Mod
PS NA
6
27
G
o
AFCS
12
21
18
12
15
24
9
Hays
VOR
(HYS)
Salina
VOR
(SLN)
V 244
2
24
27
076
1
d
AV Mo
VOR N
9
o
260
e
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
0
33
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Following the flight plan, the autopilot continues to steer the aircraft under GPS guidance. Note that in GPS
Navigation Mode, course changes defined by the flight plan are automatically made without pilot action
required.
15
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
21
18
Figure 7-33 Transition to GPS Flight Plan
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
491
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DESCENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
• Flight Level Change descent – Flight Level Change Mode can be used to descend to the Selected Altitude at a
constant airspeed. This descent method does not account for flight plan waypoint altitude constraints.
While flying the arrival procedure, the aircraft is cleared for descent in preparation for the approach to KCOS.
Three methods are presented for the descent:
• Vertical Path Tracking descent – Vertical Path Tracking Mode is used to follow the vertical descent path
defined in the GPS flight plan. Altitude constraints correspond to waypoints in the flight plan. Before VNV
flight control can provide vertical profile guidance, a VNV flight plan must be entered and enabled.
EIS
• Non-path descent in a VNV scenario – A VNV flight plan is entered and enabled, however Pitch Hold, Vertical
Speed, or Flight Level Change Mode can be used to descend to the VNV Target Altitude prior to reaching the
planned TOD. Flight Level Change Mode is used in the example.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Flight Level Change descent:
1) Select Flight Level Change Mode:
a) Using the ALT Knob, set the Selected Altitude to 10,000 feet.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
b) Press the FLC Key to activate Flight Level Change Mode. The annunciation ‘FLC’ appears next to the
Airspeed Reference, which defaults to the current aircraft airspeed. Selected Altitude Capture Mode is armed
automatically.
2) Use the NOSE UP/NOSE DN Keys or push the CWS Button while hand-flying the aircraft to adjust the
commanded airspeed while maintaining the same power, or reduce power to allow descent in Flight Level
Change Mode while the autopilot maintains the current airspeed.
AFCS
3) As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the Selected Altitude; the
autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft.
1
Cruise Altitude of 12,000 MSL
ALT Mode
2
FLC
Mod
e
3
INDEX
Selected Altitude of 10,000 MSL
ALT Mode
Figure 7-34 FLC Descent
492
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Vertical Path Tracking descent to VNV Target Altitude:
1) Select VNV flight control:
a) Press the VNV Key to arm Vertical Path Tracking Mode. The white annunciation ‘VPTH’ appears.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
b) Using the ALT Knob, set the Selected Altitude below the flight plan’s VNV Target Altitude of 10,000 feet.
EIS
If the Selected Altitude is not at least 75 ft below the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director captures the
Selected Altitude rather than the VNV Target Altitude once Vertical Path Tracking Mode becomes active (ALTS is
armed rather than ALTV).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
c) If Vertical Path Tracking Mode is armed more than 5 minutes prior to descent path capture, acknowledgment is
required for the flight director to transition from Altitude Hold to Vertical Path Tracking Mode. To proceed with
descent path capture if the white ‘VPTH’ annunciation begins flashing, do one of the following
• Press the VNV Key
• Turn the ALT Knob to adjust the Selected Altitude
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If the descent is not confirmed by the time of interception, Vertical Path Tracking Mode remains armed and the
descent is not captured.
2) When the top of descent (TOD) is reached, the flight director transitions to Vertical Path Tracking Mode and
begins the descent to the VNV Target Altitude. Intention to capture the VNV Target Altitude is indicated by the
white ‘ALTV’ annunciation.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) As the aircraft nears the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director transitions to VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTV’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
AFCS
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the VNV Target Altitude;
the autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft at the vertical waypoint.
ALT Mode
TOD
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1
Cruise Altitude of 12,000 MSL
2
APPENDICES
VPT
HM
ode
3
BOD
VNAV Target Altitude of 10,000 MSL
ALT Mode
Selected Altitude (set below VNAV Target Altitude)
INDEX
3 nm
OPSHN
Figure 7-35 VPTH Descent
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
493
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Non-path descent using Flight Level Change Mode:
1) Using Flight Level Change Mode, command a non-path descent to an intermediate altitude above the next VNV
flight plan altitude:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
a) Using the ALT Knob, set the Selected Altitude below the current aircraft altitude to an altitude (in this case
9,400 feet) at which to level off between VNV flight plan altitudes.
EIS
b) Press the FLC Key before the planned TOD during an altitude hold while VPTH is armed. The Airspeed Reference
defaults to the current aircraft airspeed. Vertical Path Tracking and Selected Altitude Capture Mode are armed
automatically.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Reduce power to allow descent in Flight Level Change Mode. The autopilot maintains the Airspeed Reference.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the Selected Altitude; the
autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft. After leveling off, reset Selected Altitude at
or below 9,000 ft.
AFCS
4) When the next TOD is reached, Vertical Path Tracking becomes active (may require acknowledgment to allow
descent path capture).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) As the aircraft nears the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director transitions to VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTV’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
INDEX
APPENDICES
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the VNV Target Altitude;
the autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft at the vertical waypoint.
494
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VP
TH
M
od
e
ALT Mode
1
FL
C
VNAV Target Altitude of 10,000 MSL
Pla
nn
M
od
e
Selected Altitude of 9,400 MSL
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Planned
TOD
2
BOD
3
ed
De
sce
nt
Pa
th
ALT Mode
TOD
4
VP
TH
Mo
5
BOD
ALT Mode
EIS
VNAV Target Altitude of 9,000 MSL
de
Selected Altitude
OPSHN
HABUK
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3 nm
Figure 7-36 Non-path Descent
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
APPROACH
Flying an ILS approach:
1) Transition from GPS Navigation Mode to Heading Select Mode.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
a) Select the Runway 35L ILS approach for KCOS and select ‘VECTORS’ for the transition. Load and activate the
approach into the flight plan.
b) Use the HDG Knob to set the Selected Heading after getting vectors from ATC.
c) Press the HDG Key. The autopilot turns the aircraft to the desired heading.
d) Use Heading Select Mode to comply with ATC vectors as requested.
AFCS
2) Arm LOC Approach and Glideslope modes.
a) Ensure the appropriate localizer frequency is tuned.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
b) Press the APR Key when cleared for approach to arm Approach and Glideslope modes. ‘LOC’ and ‘GS’ appear
in white as armed mode annunciations.
APPENDICES
c) The navigation source automatically switches to LOC. After this switch occurs, the localizer signal can be captured
and the flight director determines when to begin the turn to intercept the final approach course. The flight
director now provides guidance to the missed approach point.
3) There are two options available at this point, as the autopilot flies the ILS approach:
• Push the AP DISC Switch at the decision height and land the aircraft.
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
INDEX
• Use the GA Button to execute a missed approach.
495
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
KCOS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
LOC APR/
GS Mode
3
PETEY
2
HD
G
od
M
e
1
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GPS NAV Mode
EIS
PYNON
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 7-37 ILS Approach to KCOS
NOTE: Refer to the AFM to determine whether SBAS functionality is approved. Support for SBAS precision
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
approaches is available only in installations with GIA 63Ws when SBAS is available.
Flying a RNAV GPS approach with vertical guidance:
1) Arm flight director modes for a RNAV GPS approach with vertical guidance:
a) Make sure the navigation source is set to GPS (use CDI Softkey to change navigation source).
AFCS
b) Select the Runway 35R LPV approach for KCOS. Load and activate the approach into the flight plan.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the APR Key once clearance for approach has been received. GPS Approach Mode is activated and
Glidepath Mode is armed.
APPENDICES
3) Once the glidepath is captured, Glidepath Mode becomes active. The flight director now provides guidance to
the missed approach point.
4) There are two options available at this point, as the autopilot flies the approach:
• Push the AP DISC Switch at the Decision height and land the aircraft.
INDEX
• Use the GA Button to execute a missed approach.
496
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
KCOS
4
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3
GPS APR/
GP Mode
CEGIX
EIS
2
FALUR
HABUK
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
PYNON
1
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GPS NAV Mode
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 7-38 LPV Approach to KCOS
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
497
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
GO AROUND/MISSED APPROACH
NOTE: As a result of calculations performed by the system while flying the holding pattern, the display may
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
re-size automatically and the aircraft may not precisely track the holding pattern as depicted on the PFD and
MFD.
Flying a missed approach:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
1) Push the GA Button at the Decision Height and apply go around power to execute a missed approach. The
flight director Command Bars establish a nose-up climb to follow. If flying an ILS or LOC approach the CDI also
switches to GPS as the navigation source.
2) Start the climb to the prescribed altitude in the published Missed Approach Procedure (in this case, 10,000 ft).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Press the NAV Key to have the autopilot fly to the hold.
3) Use the ALT Knob to set a Selected Altitude to hold.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
To hold the current airspeed during the climb, press the FLC Key.
AFCS
As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the Selected Altitude; the
autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft.
INDEX
APPENDICES
4) The autopilot flies the holding pattern after the missed approach is activated. Annunciations are displayed in
the Navigation Status Box, above the AFCS Status Box.
498
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
4
MOGAL
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GPS NAV Mode
3
2
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GA Mode
KCOS
1
AFCS
Figure 7-39 Go Around/Missed Approach
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
499
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.7 AFCS ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTS
AFCS STATUS ALERTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The annunciations in Table 7-5 (listed in order of increasing priority) can appear on the PFD above the
Airspeed and Attitude indicators. Only one annunciation may occur at a time, and messages are prioritized by
criticality.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
AFCS Status Annunciation
Figure 7-40 AFCS Status Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Alert Condition
Rudder Mistrim Right
Rudder Mistrim Left
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Aileron Mistrim Right
Aileron Mistrim Left
Elevator Mistrim Down
AFCS
Elevator Mistrim Up
Pitch Trim Failure
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
(or Stuck AP TRIM
Switch)
APPENDICES
Yaw Damper Failure
Description
Yaw servo providing sustained force in the indicated direction
Roll servo providing sustained force in indicated direction
Pitch servo providing sustained force in the indicated direction
If AP engaged, take control of the aircraft and disengage AP
If AP disengaged, move AP TRIM switches separately to unstick
YD control failure
Roll Failure
Roll axis control failure; AP inoperative
Pitch Failure
Pitch axis control failure; AP inoperative
System Failure
Preflight Test
INDEX
Annunciation
AP and MET are unavailable; FD may still be available
Performing preflight system test; aural alert sounds at completion
Do not press the AP DISC Switch during servo power-up and preflight
system tests. Doing so may cause the preflight system test to fail or never
to start. Cycle power to the servos if this occurs.
Preflight system test failed; aural alert sounds at failure
Table 7-5 AFCS Status Alerts
500
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
OVERSPEED PROTECTION
NOTE: Overspeed protection is not active in Altitude Hold, Glideslope or Glidepath Modes.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
While Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, Flight Level Change, Vertical Path Tracking, or an altitude capture mode is
active, airspeed is monitored by the flight director and pitch commands are limited for overspeed protection.
Overspeed protection is provided in situations where the flight director cannot acquire and maintain the mode
reference for the selected vertical mode without exceeding the certified maximum autopilot airspeed.
EIS
When an autopilot overspeed condition occurs, the Airspeed Reference appears in a box above the Airspeed
Indicator, flashing a yellow ‘MAXSPD’ annunciation. Engine power should be reduced and/or the pitch reference
adjusted to slow the aircraft. The annunciation disappears when the overspeed condition is resolved.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airspeed
Indicator
Figure 7-41 Overspeed Annunciation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
UNDERSPEED PROTECTION
NOTE: While underspeed protection is active, the aircraft may deviate from the selected reference.
AFCS
NOTE: When underspeed protection is active while in FLC Mode the AFCS will revert to PIT Mode.
Underspeed Protection is available when the autopilot is on. It is designed to discourage aircraft operation
below minimum established airspeeds.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
When the aircraft airspeed reaches 90 kts and 95 kts, a flashing yellow ‘MINSPD’ annunciation (Figure
7-42) will appear above the airspeed indicator. When the airspeed trend vector reaches a predetermined
airspeed (specific to each flap setting), a single aural “AIRSPEED” will sound, alerting the pilot to the impending
underspeed condition.
Flaps
Airspeed Alert
0%
82 kts
APP
80 kts
LDG
75 kts
INDEX
Table 7-6 AFCS Status Alerts
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
501
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Figure 7-42 Underspeed Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If the aircraft continues to decelerate, Underspeed Protection functionality depends on which vertical flight
director mode is selected. For the purpose of this discussion, the vertical flight director modes can be divided
into two categories: Those in which it is important to maintain altitude for as long as possible (altitude-critical
modes), and those in which maintaining altitude is less crucial (non-altitude critical modes).
ALTITUDE-CRITICAL MODES (ALT, GS, GP, TO, GA)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If the aircraft decelerates to stall warning for at least one second, the lateral and vertical flight director
modes will change from active to armed. The autopilot will provide input causing the aircraft to pitch down
to maintain an airspeed no less than stall warning activation speed plus two knots, and the wings to level.
AFCS
Lateral and
Vertical FD
Modes Armed
Figure 7-43 Lateral and Vertical Flight Director Modes Armed
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
An aural “AIRSPEED” alert will sound every five seconds and a red “UNDERSPEED PROTECT ACTIVE”
annunciation will appear in the CAS window on the MFD.
APPENDICES
When airspeed increases (as a result of adding power/thrust) to above the IAS at which stall warning turns
off, plus two knots, the autopilot will cause the aircraft to pitch up until recapturing the vertical reference.
The vertical and lateral flight director modes will change from armed to active.
NON-ALTITUDE CRITICAL MODES (VS, VNAV, LVL, PIT, IAS)
INDEX
If the aircraft decelerates to an IAS below the minimum commandable autopilot airspeed, a red
“UNDERSPEED PROTECT ACTIVE” annunciation will appear in the CAS window. The vertical flight director
mode will change from active to armed, and the autopilot will cause the aircraft to pitch down until reaching
a pitch attitude at which IAS equals the minimum commandable autopilot airspeed.
502
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Vertical FD
Mode Armed
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Figure 7-44 Vertical Flight Director Mode Armed
When sufficient power/thrust is available, the autopilot will recapture the previously selected vertical
reference and the flight director mode will change from armed to active.
EIS
NOTE: When the autopilot is outside normal operating limits, it uses more aggressive commands to return
to normal limits.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ANNUNCIATIONS FOR KAP 140 AUTOPILOT SYSTEM
NOTE: Refer to the autopilot manufacturer’s Pilot’s Guide for more information.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When GPS approach mode becomes active and the necessary approach criteria are met, a message appears
in the AFCS Status Box alerting the pilot to a change in autopilot NAV source (“NAV Source Changed – Select
Desired Autopilot Mode”). The annunciation shall blink for five seconds and remain in the AFCS Status Box
for 30 seconds.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 7-45 KAP 140 Annunciation (Informative)
NOTE: KAP 140 equipped aircraft only: Each time the CDI Softkey is pressed or the navigation source
AFCS
is changed (i.e. missed approach), the following message appears in the message window, “NAV Source
Changed – Select Desired Autopilot Mode.”
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
503
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Blank Page
504
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
NOTE: Regardless of the availability of SafeTaxi®, ChartView, or FliteCharts®, it may be necessary to carry
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
another source of charts on-board the aircraft.
Additional features of the G1000 include the following:
• Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) (Optional)
• SafeTaxi® diagrams
• Electronic Stability and Protection (ESP™) System
(Optional)
• Scheduler
• Airport Directory
• Flight Data Logging
• SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment (Optional)
• Auxiliary Video (Optional)
EIS
• ChartView (optional) and FliteCharts® electronic
charts
• Electronic Checklists (Optional)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Iridium Satellite Telephone and SMS text messaging
(Optional)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The optional Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) provides a three-dimensional forward view of terrain features
on the PFD. SVT imagery shows the pilot’s view of relevant features in relation to the aircraft attitude, as well as
the flight path pertaining to the active flight plan.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SafeTaxi diagrams provide detailed taxiway, runway, and ramp information at more than 700 airports in the
United States. By decreasing range on an airport that has a SafeTaxi diagram available, a close up view of the
airport layout can be seen.
The FliteCharts and optional ChartView provide on-board electronic terminal procedures charts. Electronic
charts offer the convenience of rapid access to essential information. Either ChartView or FliteCharts may be
configured in the system, but not both.
AFCS
The AOPA and optional AC-U-KWIK Airport Directories offer detailed information for a selected airport, such
as available services, hours of operation, and lodging options. Either the AOPA or AC-U-KWIK database may be
installed, but not both simultaneously.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The optional SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment audio feature of the GDL 69A Data Link Receiver handles
more than 170 channels of music, news, and sports. SiriusXM Satellite Radio offers more entertainment choices
and longer range coverage than commercial broadcast stations.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
505
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Satellite telephone is an optional subscription service offered through Garmin Flight Data Services and Iridium
Satellite LLC. Voice and SMS messaging communications are through the Iridium Satellite Network.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
The Scheduler feature can be used to enter and display short term or long term reminder messages such as
Switch fuel tanks, Change oil, or Altimeter-Transponder Check in the Alerts Window on the PFD.
The optional Garmin Electronic Stability and Protection (ESP™) system discourages aircraft operation outside
the normal flight envelope.
Optional checklists help to quickly find the proper procedure on the ground or during flight.
EIS
The Flight Data Logging feature automatically stores critical flight and engine data on an SD data card.
Approximately 1,000 flight hours can be recorded for each 1GB of available space on the card.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The G1000 system provides a control and display interface to an optional auxiliary video system.
506
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.1 SYNTHETIC VISION TECHNOLOGY (SVT)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Use appropriate primary systems for navigation, and for terrain, obstacle, and traffic avoidance.
SVT is intended as an aid to situational awareness only and may not provide either the accuracy or reliability
upon which to solely base decisions and/or plan maneuvers to avoid terrain, obstacles, or traffic.
EIS
The optional Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) is a visual enhancement to the G1000 Integrated Flight Deck.
SVT depicts a forward-looking attitude display of the topography immediately in front of the aircraft. The field of
view is 30 degrees to the left and 35 degrees to the right. SVT information is shown on the Primary Flight Display
(PFD), or on the Multifunction Display (MFD) in Reversionary Mode (Figure 8‑114). The depicted imagery is
derived from the aircraft attitude, heading, GPS three-dimensional position, and a nine arc-second database of
terrain, obstacles, and other relevant features. The terrain data resolution of nine arc-seconds, meaning that
the terrain elevation contours are stored in squares measuring nine arc-seconds on each side, is required for the
operation of SVT. Loss of any of the required data, including temporary loss of the GPS signal, will cause SVT to
be disabled until the required data is restored.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The SVT terrain display shows land contours (colors are consistent with those of the topographical map display),
large water features, towers, and other obstacles over 200’ AGL that are included in the obstacle database. Cultural
features on the ground such as roads, highways, railroad tracks, cities, and state boundaries are not displayed even
if those features are found on the MFD map. The terrain display also includes a north–south east–west grid with
lines oriented with true north and spaced at one arc-minute intervals to assist in orientation relative to the terrain.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Terrain-SVS is integrated within SVT to provide visual and auditory alerts to indicate the presence of terrain
and obstacle threats relevant to the projected flight path. Terrain alerts are displayed in red and yellow shading
on the PFD.
The terrain display is intended for situational awareness only. It may not provide the accuracy or fidelity on
which to base decisions and plan maneuvers to avoid terrain or obstacles. Navigation must not be predicated
solely upon the use of the Terrain–SVT terrain or obstacle data displayed by the SVT.
AFCS
The following SVT enhancements appear on the PFD:
• Airport Signs
• Flight Path Marker
• Runway Display
• Horizon Heading Marks
• Terrain Alerting
• Traffic Display
• Obstacle Alerting
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Pathways
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
507
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Figure 8-1 Synthetic Vision Imagery
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SVT OPERATION
SVT is activated from the PFD using the softkeys located along the bottom edge of the display. Pressing the
softkeys turns the related function on or off. When SVT is enabled, the pitch scale increments are reduced to
10 degrees up and 7.5 degrees down. The major pitch scale marks and numeric labels are shown at five degree
increments.
AFCS
SVT functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. The PFD Softkey leads into the PFD function
Softkeys, including synthetic vision. Pressing the SYN VIS Softkey displays the SVT feature softkeys. The
softkeys are labeled PATHWAY, SYN TERR, HRZN HDG, and APTSIGNS. The BACK Softkey returns to
the previous level of softkeys. Synthetic Terrain must be active before any other SVT feature may be activated.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
HRZN HDG, APTSIGNS, and PATHWAY Softkeys are only available when the SYN TERR Softkey is
activated (gray with black characters). After activating the SYN TERR Softkey, the HRZN HDG, APTSIGNS,
and PATHWAY softkeys may be activated in any combination to display desired features. When system power
is cycled, the last selected state (on or off) of the SYN TERR, HRZN HDG, APTSIGNS, and PATHWAY
softkeys is remembered by the system.
• PATHWAY Softkey enables display of rectangular boxes that represent course guidance.
• SYN TERR Softkey enables synthetic terrain depiction.
• HRZN HDG Softkey enables horizon heading marks and digits.
INDEX
• APTSIGNS Softkey enables airport signposts.
508
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PFD
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYN VIS
BACK
Pressing the BACK Softkey
returns to the top-level softkeys.
BACK
PATHWAY SYN TERR HRZN HDG APTSIGNS
EIS
Pressing the BACK Softkey returns to the previous level of softkeys.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 8-2 SVT Softkeys
Activating and deactivating SVT:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.
3) Press the SYN TERR Softkey. The SVT display will cycle on or off with the SYN TERR Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Activating and deactivating Pathways:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.
3) Press the PATHWAY Softkey. The Pathway feature will cycle on or off with the PATHWAY Softkey.
AFCS
Activating and deactivating Horizon Headings:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the HRZN HDG Softkey. The horizon heading display will cycle on or off with the HRZN HDG Softkey.
Activating and deactivating Airport Signs:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
APPENDICES
2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.
3) Press the APTSIGNS Softkey. Display of airport signs will cycle on or off with the APTSIGNS Softkey.
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
509
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Airport
Runway
EIS
SVT FEATURES
Airplane
Symbol
Selected
Altitude
Pathways
Color
Matches CDI
Indicating
NAV Source
Flight
Path
Marker
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Zero
Pitch Line
(ZPL) with
Compass
Heading
Marks
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Synthetic
Terrain
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SVT
Softkeys
Figure 8-3 SVT on the Primary Flight Display
NOTE: Pathways and terrain features are not a substitute for standard course and altitude deviation
AFCS
information provided by the altimeter, CDI, and VDI.
PATHWAYS
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pathways provide a three-dimensional perspective view of the selected route of flight shown as colored
rectangular boxes representing the horizontal and vertical flight path of the active flight plan. The box
size represents 700 feet wide by 200 feet tall during enroute, oceanic, and terminal flight phases. During
an approach, the box width is 700 feet or one half full scale deviation on the HSI, whichever is less. The
height is 200 feet or one half full scale deviation on the VDI, whichever is less. The altitude at which the
pathway boxes are displayed is determined by the higher of either the selected altitude or the VNAV altitude
programmed for the active leg in the flight plan (Figure 8-4).
INDEX
The color of the rectangular boxes may be magenta, green, or white depending on the route of flight and
navigation source selected. The active GPS or GPS overlay flight plan leg is represented by magenta boxes
that correspond to the Magenta CDI. A localizer course is represented by green boxes that correspond to a
green CDI. An inactive leg of an active flight plan is represented by white boxes corresponding to a white line
drawn on the Inset map or MFD map indicating an inactive leg.
510
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selected
Altitude
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Programmed
Altitudes
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-4 Programmed and Selected Altitude
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Pathways provide supplemental glidepath information on an active ILS, LPV, LNAV/VNAV, and some LNAV
approaches. Pathways are intended as an aid to situational awareness and should not be used independent
of the CDI, VDI, glide path indicator, and glide slope indicator. They are removed from the display when
the selected navigation information is not available. Pathways are not displayed beyond the active leg when
leg sequencing is suspended and are not displayed on any portion of the flight plan leg that would lead to
intercepting a leg in the wrong direction.
Departure and Enroute
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Prior to intercepting an active flight plan leg, pathways are displayed as a series of boxes with pointers at
each corner that point in the direction of the active waypoint. Pathways are not displayed for the first leg
of the flight plan if that segment is a Heading-to-Altitude leg. The first segment displaying pathways is the
first active GPS leg or active leg with a GPS overlay. If this leg of the flight plan route is outside the SVT
field of view, pathways will not be visible until the aircraft has turned toward this leg. While approaching
the center of the active leg and prescribed altitude, the number of pathway boxes decreases to a minimum
of four.
APPENDICES
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
INDEX
Pathways are displayed along the flight plan route at the highest of either the selected altitude or the
programmed altitude for the leg. Climb profiles cannot be displayed due to the variables associated with
aircraft performance. Flight plan legs requiring a climb are indicated by pathways displayed at a level above
the aircraft at the altitude selected or programmed.
511
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Descent and Approach
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pathways are shown descending only for a programmed descent (Figures 8-5, 8-6). When the flight plan
includes programmed descent segments, pathways are displayed along the descent path provided that the
selected altitude is lower than the programmed altitude.
EIS
When an approach providing vertical guidance is activated, Pathways are shown level at the selected
altitude or at the next programmed crossing altitude, Pathways are shown level at the selected altitude or
at the next programmed crossing altitude, whichever is higher, up to the point along the final approach
course where the altitude intercepts the extended vertical descent path, glidepath, or glideslope. From
the vertical path descent, glidepath, or glideslope intercept point, the pathways are shown inbound to the
Missed Approach Point (MAP) along the published lateral and vertical descent path.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
During an ILS approach, the initial approach segment is displayed in magenta at the segment altitudes
if GPS is selected as the navigation source on the CDI. When switching to localizer inbound with LOC
selected as the navigation source on the CDI, pathways are displayed in green along the localizer and glide
slope.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
VOR, LOC BC, and ADF approach segments that are approved to be flown using GPS are displayed in
magenta boxes. Segments that are flown using other than GPS or ILS, such as heading legs or VOR final
approach courses are not displayed.
Selected Altitude
set for Enroute
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected Altitude
set for Departure
Climbs NOT
displayed
by pathway
Non-programmed descents NOT displayed by pathway
TOD
AFCS
Selected Altitude
for Step Down
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Programmed descent
displayed by pathway
APPENDICES
Selected Altitude or Programmed Altitude
(whichever is higher)
INDEX
Figure 8-5 SVT Pathways, Enroute and Descent
512
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Missed Approach
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Upon activating the missed approach, pathways lead to the Missed Approach Holding Point (MAHP) and
are displayed as a level path at the published altitude for the MAHP, or the selected altitude, whichever is
the highest. If the initial missed approach leg is a Course-to-Altitude (CA) leg, the pathways boxes will
be displayed level at the altitude published for the MAHP. If the initial missed approach leg is defined by
a course using other than GPS, pathways are not displayed for that segment. In this case, the pathways
displayed for the next leg may be outside the field of view and will be visible when the aircraft has turned
in the direction of that leg.
EIS
Pathways are displayed along each segment including the path required to track course reversals that are
part of a procedure, such as holding patterns. Pathways boxes will not indicate a turn to a MAHP unless a
defined geographical waypoint exists between the MAP and MAHP.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FAF
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Descent displayed
by pathway
Selected Altitude
or Programmed Altitude
(whichever is higher)
by pathway
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
MAP Climbs NOT displayed
Turn Segment
NOT displayed
by pathway
MAHP
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-6 SVT Pathways, Approach, Missed Approach, and Holding
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
513
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT PATH MARKER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Flight Path Marker (FPM), also known as a Velocity Vector, is displayed on the PFD at groundspeeds
above 30 knots. The FPM depicts the approximate projected path of the aircraft accounting for wind speed
and direction relative to the three-dimensional terrain display.
The FPM is always available when the Synthetic Terrain feature is in operation. The FPM represents the
direction of the flight path as it relates to the terrain and obstacles on the display, while the airplane symbol
represents the aircraft heading.
EIS
The FPM works in conjunction with the Pathways feature to assist the pilot in maintaining desired altitudes
and direction when navigating a flight plan. When on course and altitude the FPM is aligned inside the
pathway boxes as shown (Figure 8-7).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The FPM may also be used to identify a possible conflict with the aircraft flight path and distant terrain or
obstacles. Displayed terrain or obstacles in the aircraft’s flight path extending above the FPM could indicate
a potential conflict, even before an alert is issued by the Terrain-SVS system. However, decisions regarding
terrain and/or obstacle avoidance should not be made using only the FPM.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Flight Path
Marker
(FPM)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Wind
Vector
APPENDICES
Figure 8-7 Flight Path Marker and Pathways
ZERO PITCH LINE
INDEX
The Zero Pitch Line is drawn completely across the display and represents the horizon when the terrain
horizon is difficult to distinguish from other terrain being displayed. It may not align with the terrain
horizon, particularly when the terrain is mountainous or when the aircraft is flown at high altitudes.
514
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HORIZON HEADING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Horizon Heading is synchronized with the HSI and shows approximately 60 degrees of compass
heading in 30‑degree increments on the Zero Pitch Line. Horizon Heading tick marks and digits appearing
on the zero pitch line are not visible behind either the airspeed or altitude display. Horizon Heading is used
for general heading awareness, and is activated and deactivated by pressing the HRZN HDG Softkey.
TRAFFIC
WARNING: Intruder aircraft at or below 500 ft. AGL may not appear on the SVT display or may appear as a
EIS
partial symbol.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic symbols are displayed in their approximate locations as determined by the related traffic systems.
Traffic symbols are displayed in three dimensions, appearing larger as they are getting closer, and smaller
when they are further away. Traffic within 250 feet laterally of the aircraft will not be displayed on the SVT
display. Traffic symbols and coloring are consistent with that used for traffic displayed in the Inset map or
MFD traffic page. If the traffic altitude is unknown, the traffic will not be displayed on the SVT display. For
more details refer to the traffic system discussion in the Hazard Avoidance section.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
515
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
AIRPORT SIGNS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Airport Signs provide a visual representation of airport location and identification on the synthetic terrain
display. When activated, the signs appear on the display when the aircraft is approximately 15 nm from
an airport and disappear at approximately 4.5 nm. Airport signs are shown without the identifier until
the aircraft is approximately eight nautical miles from the airport. Airport signs are not shown behind the
airspeed or altitude display. Airport signs are activated and deactivated by pressing the APTSIGNS Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Traffic
Airport
Sign
without
Identifier
(Between
8 nm and
15 nm)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airport
Sign with
Identifier
(Between
4.5 nm and
8 nm)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 8-8 Airport Signs
516
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
RUNWAYS
WARNING: Do not use SVT runway depiction as the sole means for determining the proximity of the aircraft
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
to the runway or for maintaining the proper approach path angle during landing.
NOTE: Not all airports have runways with endpoint data in the database, therefore, these runways are not
displayed.
EIS
Runway data provides improved awareness of runway location with respect to the surrounding terrain. All
runway thresholds are depicted at their respective elevations as defined in the database. In some situations,
where threshold elevations differ significantly, crossing runways may appear to be layered. As runways are
displayed, those within 45 degrees of the aircraft heading are displayed in white. Other runways will be gray
in color. When an approach for a specific runway is active, that runway will appear brighter and be outlined
with a white box, regardless of the runway orientation as related to aircraft heading. As the aircraft gets closer
to the runway, more detail such as runway numbers and centerlines will be displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Other
Runway
on Airport
Runway
Selected for
Approach
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-9 Airport Runways
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
517
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
TERRAIN-SVS ALERTING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Terrain alerting on the synthetic terrain display is triggered by Forward-looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA)
alerts, and corresponds to the red and yellow X symbols on the Inset Map and MFD map displays. For more
detailed information regarding Terrain-SVS, refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section.
In some instances, a terrain or obstacle alert may be issued with no conflict shading displayed on the
synthetic terrain. In these cases, the conflict is outside the SVT field of view to the left or right of the aircraft.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
TERRAIN
Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Terrain
Caution
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Potential
Impact
Point
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 8-10 Terrain Alert
518
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Obstacles are represented on the synthetic terrain display by standard two-dimensional tower symbols found
on the Inset map and MFD maps and charts. Obstacle symbols appear in the perspective view with relative
height above terrain and distance from the aircraft. Unlike the Inset map and MFD moving map display,
obstacles on the synthetic terrain display do not change colors to warn of potential conflict with the aircraft’s
flight path until the obstacle is associated with an actual FLTA alert. Obstacles greater than 1000 feet below the
aircraft altitude are not shown. Obstacles are shown behind the airspeed and altitude displays.
EIS
TERRAIN
Annunciation
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Obstacle
Warning
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Potential
Impact
Point
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-11 Obstacle
AFCS
FIELD OF VIEW
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The PFD field of view can be represented on the MFD Navigation Map Page. Two dashed lines forming a
V‑shape in front of the aircraft symbol on the map, represent the forward viewing area shown on the PFD.
Configuring field of view:
APPENDICES
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight Map Setup and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
519
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Field of
View
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Navigation Map Page OPTIONS Menu
Map Setup Menu, Map Group, Field of View Option
Figure 8-12 Option Menus
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the Map Group and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the Map Group options to FIELD OF VIEW.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select On or Off.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The following figure compares the PFD forward looking depiction with the MFD plan view and FIELD OF
VIEW turned on.
APPENDICES
Lines
Depict
PFD Field
of View
INDEX
SVT View on the PFD
Field of View on the MFD
Figure 8-13 PFD and MFD Field of View Comparison
520
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.2 SAFETAXI
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SafeTaxi is an enhanced feature that gives greater map detail when viewing airports at close range. The
maximum map ranges for enhanced detail are pilot configurable. When viewing at ranges close enough to
show the airport detail, the map reveals taxiways with identifying letters/numbers, airport Hot Spots, and airport
landmarks including ramps, buildings, control towers, and other prominent features. Resolution is greater at
lower map ranges. When the MFD display is within the SafeTaxi ranges, the airplane symbol on the airport
provides enhanced position awareness.
EIS
Designated Hot Spots are recognized at airports with many intersecting taxiways and runways, and/or complex
ramp areas. Airport Hot Spots are outlined to caution pilots of areas on an airport surface where positional
awareness confusion or runway incursions happen most often. Hot Spots are defined with a magenta circle or
outline around the region of possible confusion.
• User Waypoint Information Page
• Weather Datalink Page
• Trip Planning Page
• Airport Information Page
• Nearest Pages
• Intersection Information Page
• Active and Stored Flight Plan Pages
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Inset Map (PFD)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Any map page that displays the navigation view can also show the SafeTaxi airport layout within the maximum
configured range. The following is a list of pages where the SafeTaxi feature can be seen:
• Navigation Map Page
• VOR Information Page
• NDB Information Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
During ground operations the aircraft’s position is displayed in reference to taxiways, runways, and airport
features. In the example shown, the aircraft is on taxiway Bravo inside the High Alert Intersection boundary
on KSFO airport. Airport Hot Spots are outlined in magenta. When panning over the airport, features such as
runway holding lines and taxiways are shown at the cursor.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
521
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Taxiway
Identification
EIS
Aircraft
Position
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Airport
Features
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airport Hot
Spot Outline
DCLTR Softkey
Removes
Taxiway
Markings
Figure 8-14 SafeTaxi Depiction on the Navigation Map Page
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The DCLTR Softkey (declutter) label advances to DCLTR-1, DCLTR -2, and DCLTR-3 each time the softkey is
pressed for easy recognition of decluttering level. Pressing the DCLTR Softkey removes the taxiway markings and
airport feature labels. Pressing the DCLTR-1 Softkey removes VOR station ID, the VOR symbol, and intersection
names if within the airport plan view. Pressing the DCLTR-2 Softkey removes the airport runway layout, unless
the airport in view is part of an active route structure. Pressing the DCLTR-3 Softkey cycles back to the original
map detail. Refer to Map Declutter Levels in the Flight Management Section.
Configuring SafeTaxi range:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Map Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
Figure 8-15 Navigation Map PAGE MENU, Map Setup Option
522
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the Aviation Group and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the Aviation Group options to SAFETAXI.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the range of distances.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
6) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired distance for maximum SafeTaxi display range.
7) Press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SAFETAXI
Option
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SafeTaxi
Range
Options
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 8-16 MAP SETUP Menu, Aviation Group, SAFETAXI Range Options
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
SafeTaxi database is revised every 56 days. SafeTaxi is always available for use after the expiration date.
When turning on the system, the Power-up Page indicates whether the databases are current, out of date, or
not available.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
523
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SafeTaxi Database
Figure 8-17 Power-up Page, SafeTaxi Database
Definition
Normal operation. SafeTaxi database is valid and within current cycle.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Power-up Page Display
SafeTaxi database has expired.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Database card contains no SafeTaxi data.
Table 8-1 SafeTaxi Annunciation Definitions
AFCS
The SafeTaxi Region, Version, Cycle, Effective date and Expires date of the database cycle can also be found
on the AUX - System Status page, as seen in Figure 8-18.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Select the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the DATABASE window. Scroll through the listed
information by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the SafeTaxi database information is
shown.
The SafeTaxi database cycle number shown in the figure, 14S1, is deciphered as follows:
14 – Indicates the year 2014
S – Indicates the data is for SafeTaxi
APPENDICES
1 – Indicates the first issue of the SafeTaxi database for the year
INDEX
The SafeTaxi EFFECTIVE date 13–JAN–14 is the beginning date for the current database cycle. SafeTaxi
EXPIRES date 10–MAR–14 is the revision date for the next database cycle.
524
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
SafeTaxi Data
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-18 AUX – System Status Page, SafeTaxi Current Information
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SafeTaxi information appears in blue and yellow text. The EFFECTIVE date appears in blue when data is
current and in yellow when the current date is before the effective date. The EXPIRES date appears in blue
when data is current and in yellow when expired (Figures 8‑18 and 8-19). NOT AVAILABLE appears in blue
in the REGION field if SafeTaxi data is not available on the database card (Figure 8‑19). An expired SafeTaxi
database is not disabled and will continue to function indefinitely.
AFCS
Press the MFD1 DB Softkey a second time. The softkey label will change to PFD1 DB. The DATABASE
window will now be displaying database information for PFD1. As before, scroll through the listed information
by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the SafeTaxi database information is shown.
Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix B for instructions on revising the SafeTaxi database.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
525
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Current Date is before Effective Date
SafeTaxi Database has Expired
SafeTaxi Database Not Installed
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-19 AUX – System Status Page, SafeTaxi Database Status
526
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.3 CHARTVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ChartView resembles the paper version of Jeppesen terminal procedures charts. The charts are displayed in full
color with high-resolution. The MFD depiction shows the aircraft position on the moving map in the planview
of approach charts and on airport diagrams. Airport Hot Spots are outlined in magenta.
The geo-referenced aircraft position is indicated by an aircraft symbol displayed on the chart when the current
position is within the boundaries of the chart. Inset boxes (Figure 8-20) are not considered within the chart
boundaries. Therefore, when the aircraft symbol reaches a chart boundary line, or inset box, the aircraft symbol
is removed from the display.
EIS
Figure 8-20 shows examples of off-scale areas, indicated by the grey shading. Note, the grey shading is for
illustrative purposes only and will not appear on the published chart or MFD display. These off-scale areas
appear on the chart to convey supplemental information. However, the depicted geographical position of this
information, as it relates to the chart planview, is not the actual geographic position. Therefore, when the aircraft
symbol appears within one of these areas, the aircraft position indicated is relative to the chart planview, not to
the off-scale area.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Inset Box
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Off-Scale
Area
Off-Scale
Areas
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-20 Sample Chart Indicating Off-Scale Areas
APPENDICES
NOTE: Do not maneuver the aircraft based solely upon the geo-referenced aircraft symbol.
The ChartView database subscription is available from Jeppesen, Inc. Available data includes:
• Arrivals (STAR)
• Airport Diagrams
• Departure Procedures (DP)
• NOTAMs
INDEX
• Approaches
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
527
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
CHARTVIEW SOFTKEYS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ChartView functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. While on the Navigation Map Page, Nearest
Airports Page, or Flight Plan Page, pressing the SHW CHRT Softkey displays the available terminal chart and
advances to the chart selection level of softkeys: CHRT OPT, CHRT, INFO-1/INFO-2, DP, STAR, APR, WX,
NOTAM, and GO BACK. The chart selection softkeys shown below appear on the Airport Information Page.
Pressing the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the top level softkeys and previous page.
Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey advances to the next level of softkeys: ALL, HEADER, PLAN, PROFILE,
MINIMUMS, FIT WDTH, FULL SCN, and BACK.
EIS
While viewing the CHRT OPT Softkeys, after 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, the system reverts to the chart
selection softkeys.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SHW CHRT
CHRT
INFO-1
DP
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
CHRT OPT
STAR
APR
WX
NOTAM
GO BACK
Pressing the GO BACK Softkey returns
to the top-level softkeys and previous page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ALL
HEADER
PLAN
PROFILE
MINIMUMS FIT WDTH FULL SCN
BACK
Pressing the BACK Softkey returns
to the Chart Selection Softkeys.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 8-21 ChartView SHW CHRT, Chart Selection, and Chart Option Softkeys
528
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TERMINAL PROCEDURES CHARTS
Selecting Terminal Procedures Charts:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Nearest Airport Page, or Flight Plan Page, press the SHW CHRT
Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the OPTIONS Menu to Show Chart.
EIS
3) Press the ENT Key to display the chart.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Navigation Map Page OPTIONS Menu
Waypoint Airport Information Page OPTIONS Menu
Figure 8-22 Option Menus
AFCS
When no terminal procedure chart is available for the nearest airport or the selected airport, the banner
CHART NOT AVAILABLE appears on the screen. The CHART NOT AVAILABLE banner does not refer to
the Jeppesen subscription, but rather the availability of a particular airport chart selection or procedure for a
selected airport.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-23 Chart Not Available Banner
APPENDICES
If there is a problem in rendering the data (such as a data error or a failure of an individual chart), the banner
UNABLE TO DISPLAY CHART is then displayed.
INDEX
Figure 8-24 Unable To Display Chart Banner
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
529
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
When a chart is not available by pressing the SHW CHRT Softkey or selecting a Page Menu Option, charts
may be obtained for other airports from the WPT Pages or Flight Plan Pages.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If a chart is available for the destination airport, or the airport selected in the active flight plan, the chart
appears on the screen. When no flight plan is active, or when not flying to a direct-to destination, pressing the
SHW CHRT Softkey displays the chart for the nearest airport, if available.
The chart shown is one associated with the WPT – Airport Information page. Usually this is the airport runway
diagram. Where no runway diagram exists, but Take Off Minimums or Alternate Minimums are available, that
page appears. If Airport Information pages are unavailable, the Approach Chart for the airport is shown.
EIS
Selecting a chart:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Flight Plan Page, or Nearest Airports Page, press the SHW CHRT
Softkey. The airport diagram or approach chart is displayed on the Airport Information Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select either the Airport Identifier Box or the Approach Box. (Press the APR Softkey
if the Approach Box is not currently shown).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the small and large FMS Knob to enter the desired airport identifier.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the airport selection.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Approach Box.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to show the approach chart selection choices.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) Turn either FMS Knob to scroll through the available charts.
9) Press the ENT Key to complete the chart selection.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Chart Scale
Select Desired
Approach Chart
From Menu
INDEX
APPENDICES
Scroll Through
Chart With
the Joystick
Figure 8-25 Approach Information Page, Chart Selection
530
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
While the APPROACH Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the G1000 softkeys are blank. Once the desired
chart is selected, the chart scale can be changed and the chart page can be scrolled using the Joystick. Pressing
the Joystick centers the chart on the screen.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The aircraft symbol is shown on the chart only if the chart is to scale and the aircraft position is within
the boundaries of the chart. The aircraft symbol is not displayed when the Aircraft Not Shown Icon appears
(Figure 8‑29). If the Chart Scale Box displays a banner NOT TO SCALE, the aircraft symbol is not shown. The
Aircraft Not Shown Icon may appear at certain times, even if the chart is displayed to scale.
EIS
Pressing the CHRT Softkey switches between the ChartView diagram and the associated map in the WPT
page group. In the example shown, the CHRT Softkey switches between the Colorado Springs, CO (KCOS)
Airport Diagram and the navigation map on the WPT – Airport Information page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press CHRT Softkey
to Switch Between
ChartView and WPT Airport Information Page
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 8-26 CHRT Softkey, Airport Information Page
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
531
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Pressing the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey returns to the airport diagram when the view is on a different chart.
If the displayed chart is the airport diagram, the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey has no effect.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The aircraft position is shown in magenta on the ChartView diagrams when the location of the aircraft is within
the chart boundaries. In the example shown, the aircraft is turning onto Taxiway Romeo on the Charlotte, NC
(KCLT) airport.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Another source for additional airport information is from the INFO Box above the chart for certain airports.
This information source is not related to the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey. When the INFO Box is selected using
the FMS Knob, the G1000 softkeys are blank. The Charlotte, NC airport has five additional charts offering
information; the Airport Diagram, Take-off Minimums, Class B Airspace, Airline Parking Gate Coordinates, and
Airline Parking Gate Location. (The numbers in parentheses after the chart name are Jeppesen designators.)
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Aircraft
Current
Position
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-27 Airport Information Page, INFO View, Full Screen Width
532
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
In the example shown in Figure 8-27, the Class B Chart is selected. Pressing the ENT Key displays the
Charlotte Class B Airspace Chart (Figure 8-28).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-28 Airport Information Page, Class B Chart Selected from INFO View
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the DP Softkey displays the Departure Procedure Chart if available.
Chart Not
To Scale
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Aircraft Not
Shown Icon
INDEX
Figure 8-29 Departure Information Page
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
533
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Pressing the STAR Softkey displays the Standard Terminal Arrival Chart if available.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Chart Not
To Scale
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Change Range
and Scroll
Through the
Chart With the
Joystick
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Aircraft Not
Shown Icon
Figure 8-30 Arrival Information Page
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the APR Softkey displays the approach chart for the airport if available.
INDEX
Figure 8-31 Approach Information Page
534
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the WX Softkey shows the airport weather frequency information, and includes weather data such as
METAR and TAF from the XM Data Link Receiver, when available. Weather information is available only when
an XM Data Link Receiver is installed and the SiriusXM Satellite Weather subscription is current.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
WX Info
When
Available
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
WX Softkey
Selected
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-32 Weather Information Page
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.
AFCS
Recent NOTAMS applicable to the current ChartView cycle are included in the ChartView database. Pressing
the NOTAM Softkey shows the local NOTAM information for selected airports, when available. When NOTAMS
are not available, the NOTAM Softkey label appears subdued and is disabled as shown in Figure 8-32. The
NOTAM Softkey may appear on the Airport Information Page and all of the chart page selections.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
535
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTAM
Softkey
Appears for
Selected
Airports
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-33 NOTAM Softkey Highlighted
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Local
NOTAM on
This Airport
NOTAM
Softkey
Selected
Figure 8-34 Airport Information Page, Local NOTAMs
INDEX
Pressing the NOTAM Softkey again removes the NOTAMS information.
536
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the previous page (Navigation Map Page, Nearest Pages, or Flight
Plan Page).
CHART OPTIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey displays the next level of softkeys, the chart options level (Figure 8-21).
Pressing the ALL Softkey shows the complete approach chart on the screen.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Complete
Chart
Shown
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-35 Approach Information Page, ALL View
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
537
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pressing the HEADER Softkey shows the header view (approach chart briefing strip) on the screen.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Approach
Chart
Briefing Strip
Figure 8-36 Approach Information Page, Header View
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the PLAN Softkey shows the approach chart two dimensional plan view.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Approach
Chart Plan
View
Figure 8-37 Approach Information Page, Plan View
538
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the PROFILE Softkey displays the approach chart descent profile strip.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Approach
Chart Descent
Profile Strip
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-38 Approach Information Page, Profile View, Full Screen Width
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the MINIMUMS Softkey displays the minimum descent altitude/visibility strip at the bottom of the
approach chart.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Minimum
Descent
Altitude/
Visibility Strip
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 8-39 Approach Information Page, Minimums View, Full Screen Width
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
539
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If the chart scale has been adjusted to view a small area of the chart, pressing the FIT WIDTH Softkey
changes the chart size to fit the available screen width.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Press FIT WDTH
Softkey to Show
Full Chart Width
Figure 8-40 Airport Information Page, FIT WDTH Softkey Pressed
540
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the FULL SCN Softkey alternates between removing and replacing the data window to the right.
Selecting Additional Information:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) While viewing the Airport Taxi Diagram, press the FULL SCN Softkey to display the information windows
(AIRPORT, INFO).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the AIRPORT, INFO, RUNWAYS, or FREQUENCIES Box (INFO Box shown).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the INFO Box choices. If multiple choices are available, scroll to the desired
choice with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
EIS
5) Press the FMS Knob again to deactivate the cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Available
Information
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press FULL SCN
Softkey to Switch
Between Full
Screen and Chart
with Info Window
APPENDICES
Figure 8-41 Airport Information Page, Full Screen and Info Window
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
INDEX
Pressing the BACK Softkey, or waiting for 45 seconds reverts to the chart selection softkeys.
541
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
The full screen view can also be selected by using the page menu option.
Selecting full screen On or Off:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move between the FULL SCREEN and COLOR SCHEME Options.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between the On and Off Full Screen Options.
Chart Setup Option
Full Screen On/Off Selection
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-42 Page Menus
542
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DAY/NIGHT VIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ChartView can be displayed on a white or black background for day or night viewing. The Day View offers
a better presentation in a bright environment. The Night View gives a better presentation for viewing in a dark
environment. When the CHART SETUP Box is selected the G1000 softkeys are blank.
Selecting Day, Night, or Automatic View:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-43 Waypoint Information Page, OPTIONS Menu
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move to the COLOR SCHEME Option (Figure 8‑44).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between Day, Auto, and Night Options.
AFCS
5) If Auto Mode is selected, turn the large FMS Knob to select the percentage field. Use the small FMS Knob to
change the percentage value. The percentage value is the day/night crossover point based on the percentage of
backlighting intensity. For example, if the value is set to 15%, the day/night display changes when the display
backlight reaches 15% of full brightness.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The display must be changed in order for the new setting to become active. This may be accomplished by
selecting another page or changing the display range.
6) Press the FMS Knob when finished to remove the Chart Setup Menu.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
543
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-44 Arrival Information Page, Day View
544
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-45 Arrival Information Page, Night View
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
545
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
CHARTVIEW CYCLE NUMBER AND EXPIRATION DATE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ChartView database is revised every 14 days and offered on a subscription basis. Charts are still viewable
during a period that extends from the cycle expiration date to the disables date. ChartView is disabled 70 days
after the expiration date and is no longer available for viewing. When turning on the system, the Power-up Page
displays the current status of the ChartView database. See the table below for the various ChartView Power-up
Page displays and the definition of each.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ChartView Database
Figure 8-46 Power-up Page, ChartView Database
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Power-up Page Display
Definition
Blank Line. system is not configured for ChartView. Contact a Garminauthorized service center for configuration.
System is configured for ChartView but no chart database is installed.
Contact Jeppesen for a ChartView database.
Normal operation. ChartView database is valid and within current
cycle.
ChartView database is within 1 week after expiration date. A new cycle
is available for update.
ChartView database is beyond 1 week after expiration date, but still
within the 70 day viewing period.
ChartView database has timed out. Database is beyond 70 days after
expiration date. ChartView database is no longer available for viewing.
System time is not available. GPS satellite data is unknown or the
system has not yet locked onto satellites. Check database cycle number
for effectivity.
System is verifying chart database when new cycle is installed for the
first time.
After verifying, chart database is found to be corrupt. ChartView is not
available.
Table 8-2 ChartView Power-up Page Annunciations and Definitions
546
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The ChartView time critical information can also be found on the AUX - System Status page. The database
CYCLE number, EXPIRES, and DISABLES dates of the ChartView subscription appear in either blue or yellow
text. When the ChartView EXPIRES date is reached, ChartView becomes inoperative 70 days later. This is
shown as the DISABLES date. When the DISABLES date is reached, charts are no longer available for viewing.
The SHW CHRT Softkey label then appears subdued and is disabled until a revised issue of ChartView is
installed.
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.
EIS
Select the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the DATABASE window. Scroll through the listed
information by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the ChartView database information is
shown.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The ChartView database cycle number shown in the figure, 1403, is deciphered as follows:
14 – Indicates the year 2014
03 – Indicates the third issue of the ChartView database for the year
The EXPIRES date 17–FEB–14 is the date that this database should be replaced with the next issue.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The DISABLES date 28–APR–14 is the date that this database becomes inoperative.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ChartView
Data
APPENDICES
Figure 8-47 AUX – System Status Page, ChartView Current and Available
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
INDEX
The ChartView database is provided directly from Jeppesen. Refer to Updating Jeppesen Databases in
Appendix B for instructions on revising the ChartView database.
547
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Other possible AUX - System Status page conditions are shown in Figure 8-48. The EXPIRES date, in yellow,
is the revision date for the next database cycle. The DISABLES date, in yellow, is the date that this database
cycle is no longer viewable. NOT AVAILABLE in blue, indicates no ChartView data is available on the database
card or no database card is inserted.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ChartView has Expired, but is not Disabled
ChartView Database is Disabled
ChartView Database is Not Available
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-48 AUX – System Status Page, ChartView Database Status
548
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.4 FLITECHARTS
FliteCharts resemble the paper version of AeroNav Services terminal procedures charts. The charts are displayed
with high-resolution and in color for applicable charts.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The geo-referenced aircraft position is indicated by an aircraft symbol displayed on the chart when the current
position is within the boundaries of the chart. An aircraft symbol may be displayed within an off-scale area
depicted on some charts.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Departure Procedures (DP)
EIS
Figure 8-49 shows examples of off-scale areas, indicated by the grey shading. Note, these areas are not shaded on
the published chart. These off-scale areas appear on the chart to convey supplemental information. However, the
depicted geographical position of this information, as it relates to the chart planview, is not the actual geographic
position. Therefore, when the aircraft symbol appears within one of these areas, the aircraft position indicated is
relative to the chart planview, not to the off-scale area.
The FliteCharts database subscription is available from Garmin. Available data includes:
• Arrivals (STAR)
• Approaches
• Airport Diagrams
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Off-Scale
Areas
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Off-Scale
Area
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Off-Scale
Areas
Off-Scale
Area
INDEX
Figure 8-49 Sample Chart Indicating Off-Scale Areas
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
549
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
NOTE: Do not maneuver the aircraft based solely upon the geo-referenced aircraft symbol.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLITECHARTS SOFTKEYS
FliteCharts functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. While on the Navigation Map Page, Nearest
Airports Page, or Flight Plan Page, pressing the SHW CHRT Softkey displays the available terminal chart and
advances to the chart selection level of softkeys: CHRT OPT, CHRT, INFO-1/INFO-2, DP, STAR, APR, WX,
and GO BACK. The chart selection softkeys appear on the Airport Information Page.
EIS
Pressing the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the top level softkeys and previous page.
Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey displays the available terminal chart and advances to the next level of
softkeys: ALL, FIT WDTH, FULL SCN, and BACK.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
While viewing the CHRT OPT Softkeys, after 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, the system reverts to the chart
selection softkeys.
NOTAMs are not available with FliteCharts. The NOTAM Softkey label appears subdued and is disabled.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SHW CHRT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
CHRT OPT
CHRT
INFO-1
DP
STAR
APR
WX
GO BACK
Presssing the GO BACK Softkey returns
to the top-level softkeys and previous page.
AFCS
ALL
FIT WDTH
FULL SCN
BACK
Pressing the BACK Softkey returns
to the Chart Selection Softkeys.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-50 FliteCharts SHW CHRT, Chart Selection, and Chart Option Softkeys
550
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TERMINAL PROCEDURES CHARTS
Selecting Terminal Procedures Charts:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Nearest Airport Page, or Flight Plan Page, press the SHW CHRT
Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the OPTIONS Menu to Show Chart.
EIS
3) Press the ENT Key to display the chart.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Navigation Map Page OPTIONS Menu
Waypoint Airport Information Page OPTIONS Menu
Figure 8-51 Option Menus
AFCS
When no terminal procedure chart is available, the banner CHART NOT AVAILABLE appears on the screen.
The CHART NOT AVAILABLE banner does not refer to the FliteCharts subscription, but rather the availability
of a particular airport chart selection or procedure for a selected airport.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-52 Chart Not Available Banner
APPENDICES
If there is a problem in rendering the data (such as a data error or a failure of an individual chart), the banner
UNABLE TO DISPLAY CHART is then displayed.
INDEX
Figure 8-53 Unable To Display Chart Banner
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
551
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
When a chart is not available by pressing the SHW CHRT Softkey or selecting a Page Menu Option, charts
may be obtained for other airports from the WPT Pages or Flight Plan Pages.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If a chart is available for the destination airport, or the airport selected in the active flight plan, the chart
appears on the screen. When no flight plan is active, or when not flying to a direct-to destination, pressing the
SHW CHRT Softkey displays the chart for the nearest airport, if available.
The chart shown is one associated with the WPT – Airport Information page. Usually this is the airport runway
diagram. Where no runway diagram exists, but Take Off Minimums or Alternate Minimums are available, that
page appears. If Airport Information pages are unavailable, the Approach Chart for the airport is shown.
EIS
Selecting a chart:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Flight Plan Page, or Nearest Airports Page, press the SHW CHRT
Softkey. The airport diagram or approach chart is displayed on the Airport Information Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select either the Airport Identifier Box or the Approach Box. (Press the APR Softkey
if the Approach Box is not currently shown).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the small and large FMS Knob to enter the desired airport identifier.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the airport selection.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Approach Box.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to show the approach chart selection choices.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) Turn either FMS Knob to scroll through the available charts.
9) Press the ENT Key to complete the chart selection.
AFCS
Chart Not
To Scale
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Select Desired
Approach Chart
from Menu
APPENDICES
Scroll Through
Chart With
the Joystick
INDEX
Aircraft Not
Shown Icon
Figure 8-54 Approach Information Page, Chart Selection
552
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
While the APPROACH Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the G1000 softkeys are blank. Once the desired
chart is selected, the chart scale can be changed and the chart can be panned using the Joystick. Pressing the
Joystick centers the chart on the screen.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The aircraft symbol is not shown on FliteCharts. The Chart Scale Box displays a banner NOT TO SCALE, and
the Aircraft Not Shown Icon is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen.
Pressing the CHRT Softkey alternates between the FliteCharts diagram and the associated map in the WPT
page group. In the example shown, the CHRT Softkey switches between the Charlotte, NC (KCLT) Airport
Diagram and the navigation map on the WPT – Airport Information page.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Press CHRT Softkey
to Switch Between
FliteCharts and
Navigation Map Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-55 CHRT Softkey, Airport Information Page
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
553
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Pressing the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey returns to the airport diagram when the view is on a different chart.
If the displayed chart is the airport diagram, the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey has no effect.
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Another source for additional airport information is from the INFO Box above the chart (Figure 8-55) or to
the right of the chart (Figure 8-56) for certain airports. This information source is not related to the INFO1 or INFO-2 Softkey. When the INFO Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the G1000 softkeys are blank.
The Charlotte, NC airport has three additional charts offering information; the Airport Diagram, Alternate
Minimums, and Take-off Minimums.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Info Box
Selected
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 8-56 Airport Information Page, INFO View with Airport Information
554
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
In the example shown in Figure 8-56, TAKE OFF MINIMUMS is selected. Pressing the ENT Key displays the
Take-off Minimums and Departure Procedures Chart (Figure 8-57).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-57 Airport Information Page, TAKE OFF MINIMUMS Selected from INFO View
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the DP Softkey displays the Departure Procedure Chart if available.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 8-58 Departure Information Page
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
555
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pressing the STAR Softkey displays the Standard Terminal Arrival Chart if available.
Figure 8-59 Arrival Information Page
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the APR Softkey displays the approach chart for the airport if available.
INDEX
Figure 8-60 Approach Information Page
556
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the WX Softkey shows the airport weather frequency information, when available, and includes
weather data such as METAR and TAF from the XM Data Link Receiver. Weather information is available only
when an XM Data Link Receiver is installed and the SiriusXM Satellite Weather subscription is current.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting Additional Information:
1) While viewing the Airport Taxi Diagram, press the WX Softkey to display the information windows (AIRPORT,
INFO).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the INFO Box.
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the INFO Box choices. When the INFO Box is selected the G1000 softkeys
are blank. If multiple choices are available, scroll to the desired choice with the large FMS Knob and press the
ENT Key to complete the selection.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Press the FMS Knob again to deactivate the cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Info Available
on This Airport
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
WX Info
When
Available
AFCS
Chart Not
To Scale
Figure 8-61 Weather Information Page, WX Softkey Selected
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Softkeys are
Blank during
Info Box
Selection
WX Softkey
Selected
APPENDICES
Pressing the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the previous page (Navigation Map Page or Flight Plan Page).
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
557
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
CHART OPTIONS
Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey displays the next level of softkeys, the chart options level (Figure 8-50).
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pressing the ALL Softkey shows the complete chart on the screen.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Complete
Chart
Shown
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 8-62 Airport Information Page, ALL View Selected
558
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the FIT WIDTH Softkey fits the width of the chart in the display viewing area. In the example
shown, the chart at close range is replaced with the full width chart.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press FIT WDTH
Softkey to Show
Full Chart Width
Figure 8-63 Approach Information Page, FIT WDTH Softkey Selected
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
559
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pressing the FULL SCN Softkey alternates between removing and replacing the data window to the right.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Press FULL SCN
Softkey to Switch
Between Chart on
Full Screen and Chart
with Info Window
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-64 Airport Information Page, Full Screen and Info Window
INDEX
APPENDICES
Pressing the BACK Softkey, or waiting for 45 seconds reverts to the chart selection softkeys.
560
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The full screen view can also be selected by using the page menu option.
Selecting full screen On or Off:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move between the FULL SCREEN and COLOR SCHEME Options.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between the On and Off Full Screen Options.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Chart Setup Option
Full Screen On/Off Selection
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-65 Page Menus
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
561
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
DAY/NIGHT VIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FliteCharts can be displayed on a white or black background for day or night viewing. The Day View offers
a better presentation in a bright environment. The Night View gives a better presentation for viewing in a dark
environment. When the CHART SETUP Box is selected the G1000 softkeys are blank.
Selecting Day, Night, or Automatic View:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-66 Waypoint Information Page, OPTIONS Menu
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move to the COLOR SCHEME Option (Figure 8‑67).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between Day, Auto, and Night Options.
AFCS
5) If Auto Mode is selected, turn the large FMS Knob to select the percentage field. Use the small FMS Knob to
change the percentage value. The percentage value is the day/night crossover point based on the percentage of
backlighting intensity. For example, if the value is set to 15%, the day/night display changes when the display
backlight reaches 15% of full brightness.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The display must be changed in order for the new setting to become active. This may be accomplished by
selecting another page or changing the display range.
INDEX
APPENDICES
6) Press the FMS Knob when finished to remove the Chart Setup Menu.
562
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-67 Approach Information Page, Day View
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
563
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Figure 8-68 Approach Information Page, Night View
FLITECHARTS CYCLE NUMBER AND EXPIRATION DATE
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FliteCharts data is revised every 28 days and offered on a subscription basis. Charts are still viewable during
a period that extends from the cycle expiration date to the disables date. FliteCharts is disabled 180 days after
the expiration date and are no longer available for viewing upon reaching the disables date. When turning on
the system, the Power-up Page displays the current status of the FliteCharts database. See the table below for
the various FliteCharts Power-up Page displays and the definition of each.
564
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
FliteCharts Database
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 8-69 Power-up Page, FliteCharts Database
Power-up Page Display
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Definition
Blank Line. system is not configured for FliteCharts. Contact a Garminauthorized service center for configuration.
System is configured for FliteCharts but no chart database is installed.
Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix B for the FliteCharts
database
Normal operation. FliteCharts database is valid and within current
cycle.
FliteCharts database is beyond the expiration date, but still within the
180 day viewing period.
FliteCharts database has timed out. Database is beyond 180 days
after expiration date. FliteCharts database is no longer available for
viewing.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Table 8-3 FliteCharts Power-up Page Annunciations and Definitions
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Other possible AUX - System Status page conditions are shown in Figure 8-70. ‘FliteCharts Expires’ plus a
date in white, indicates the chart database is current. ‘Chart data is out of date!’ in yellow, indicates charts are
still viewable, but approaching the disable date.
APPENDICES
When the 180 day grace period has expired, ‘Chart data is disabled.’ in yellow indicates that the FliteCharts
database has expired and is no longer viewable. ‘Chart Data: N/A’ appears in white if no FliteCharts data is
available on the database card or no database card is inserted.
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
INDEX
FliteCharts time critical information can also be found on the AUX - System Status page. The FliteCharts
database REGION, CYCLE number, EFFECTIVE, EXPIRES, and DISABLES dates of the subscription appear in
either blue or yellow text. Dates shown in blue are current data. Dates shown in yellow indicate the data is not
within the current subscription period.
565
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FliteCharts becomes inoperative 180 days after the FliteCharts EXPIRES date is reached, and is no longer
available for viewing. This date is shown as the DISABLES date. After the disable date the SHW CHRT Softkey
label appears subdued and is unavailable until a revised issue of FliteCharts is installed.
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.
Select the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the DATABASE window. Scroll through the listed
information by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the FliteCharts database information is
shown.
EIS
The FliteCharts database cycle number shown in the figure, 1402, is deciphered as follows:
14 – Indicates the year 2014
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
02 – Indicates the second issue of the FliteCharts database for the year
The FliteCharts EFFECTIVE date 10–FEB–14 is the first date that this database is current.
The FliteCharts EXPIRES date 10–MAR–14 is the last date that this database is current.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The DISABLES date 06–SEP–14 is the date that this database becomes inoperative.
566
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FliteCharts
Data
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-70 AUX – System Status Page, FliteCharts Current and Available
The FliteCharts database is provided from Garmin. Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix B for
instructions on revising the FliteCharts database.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The other four possible AUX - System Status page conditions are shown here. The EFFECTIVE date, in
yellow, indicates the current date preceeds the date the FliteCharts database becomes effective. The EXPIRES
date, in yellow, is the revision date for the next database cycle. The DISABLES date, in yellow, is the date that
this database cycle is no longer viewable. NOT AVAILABLE in blue, indicate the FliteCharts database is not
available on the database card or no database card is inserted.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
567
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FliteCharts Expired, but is not Disabled
FliteCharts Database is Disabled
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Current Date is Before Effective Date
FliteCharts Database is Not Available
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 8-71 AUX – System Status Page, FliteCharts Datbase Status
568
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.5 AIRPORT DIRECTORY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Aircraft Owners and Pilots Association (AOPA) and optional AC-U-KWIK Airport Directory databases
offer detailed information regarding services, hours of operation, lodging options, and more. This information
is viewed on the Airport Information Page by selecting the INFO Softkey until INFO-2 is displayed as shown in
Figure 8-72.
Both Airport Directories are available for downloading at flygarmin.com. However, copy only one of the
databases to the Supplemental Data Card. The system cannot recognize both databases simultaneously.
EIS
Selecting the Airport Directory Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘WPT’ page group.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the AIRPORT INFORMATION Page. Initially, information for the airport closest
to the aircraft’s present position is displayed.
3) If necessary, select the INFO softkey until INFO-2 is displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-72 Airport Directory Information on the Airport Information Page
APPENDICES
AIRPORT DIRECTORY DATABASE CYCLE NUMBER AND REVISION
The Airport Directory databases are revised every 56 days and offered on a subscription basis. Check fly.
garmin.com for the current database. The Airport Directory is always available for use after the expiration date.
When turning on the system, the Power-up Page indicates whether the databases are current, out of date, or
not available.
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
569
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Airport Directory Database
Figure 8-73 Power-up Page, Airport Directory Database
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Power-up Page Display
Definition
Normal operation. Airport Directory database is valid and within
current cycle.
Airport Directory database has expired.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Database card contains no Airport Directory data.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Table 8-4 Airport Directory Annunciation Definitions
570
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The Airport Directory Region, Version, Cycle, Effective date and Expires date of the database cycle can also be
found on the AUX - System Status page, as seen in Figure 8-74.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Select the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the DATABASE window. Scroll through the listed
information by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the Airport Directory database information
is shown.
The Airport Directory database cycle number shown in the figure, 14D1, is deciphered as follows:
14 – Indicates the year 2014
D – Indicates the data is for Airport Directory
EIS
1 – Indicates the first issue of the Airport Directory database for the year
The Airport Directory EFFECTIVE date 13–JAN–14 is the beginning date for the current database cycle. The
Airport Directory EXPIRES date 10–MAR–14 is the revision date for the next database cycle.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
571
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Airport
Directory
Data
Figure 8-74 AUX – System Status Page, AOPA Airport Directory Database Status
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Airport Directory information appears in blue and yellow text. The EFFECTIVE date appears in blue when
data is current and in yellow when the current date is before the effective date. The EXPIRES date appears in
blue when data is current and in yellow when expired (Table 8-4). NOT AVAILABLE appears in blue in the
REGION field if Airport Directory data is not available on the database card. An expired Airport Directory
database is not disabled and will continue to function indefinitely.
572
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.6 SIRIUSXM SATELLITE RADIO ENTERTAINMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section for information about SiriusXM Satellite Weather products.
The optional SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment feature of the GDL 69A Data Link Receiver is available for
the pilot’s and passengers’ enjoyment. The GDL 69A can receive SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment services
at any altitude throughout the Continental U.S. Entertainment audio is available only on the GDL 69A Data Link
Receiver, not the GDL 69.
EIS
SiriusXM Satellite Radio offers a variety of radio programming over long distances without having to constantly
search for new stations. Based on signals from satellites, coverage far exceeds land-based transmissions.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio services are subscription-based. For more information on specific service packages, visit
www.siriusxm.com.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ACTIVATING SIRIUSXM SATELLITE RADIO SERVICES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The service is activated by providing SiriusXM Satellite Radio with either one or two coded IDs, depending on
the equipment. Either the Audio Radio ID or the Data Radio ID, or both, must be provided to SiriusXM Satellite
Radio to activate the entertainment subscription.
It is not required to activate both the entertainment and weather service subscriptions with the GDL 69A.
Either or both services can be activated. SiriusXM Satellite Radio uses one or both of the coded IDs to send an
activation signal that, when received by the GDL 69A, allows it to play entertainment programming.
These IDs are located:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• On the label on the back of the Data Link Receiver
• On the XM Information Page on the MFD (Figure 8-75)
• On the XM Satellite Radio Activation Instructions included with the unit (available at www.garmin.com, P/N
190-00355-04)
AFCS
Contact the installer if the Data Radio ID and the Audio Radio ID cannot be located.
NOTE: The LOCK Softkey on the XM Information Page (Auxiliary Page Group) is used to save GDL 69A
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
activation data when the SiriusXM services are initially set up. It is not used during normal SiriusXM
Radio operation, but there should be no adverse effects if inadvertently pressed during flight. Refer to the
GDL 69/69A XM Satellite Radio Activation Instructions (190-00355-04, Rev K or later) for further information.
Activating the SiriusXM Satellite Radio services:
APPENDICES
1) Contact SiriusXM Satellite Radio. Follow the instructions provided by SiriusXM Satellite Radio services.
2) Select the Auxiliary Page Group.
3) Select the AUX - XM RADIO page.
4) Press the INFO Softkey to display the XM Information Page.
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
INDEX
5) Verify that the desired services are activated.
573
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
6) Press the LOCK Softkey.
7) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight YES.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
8) To complete activation, press the ENT Key.
Data
Radio ID
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Audio
Radio ID
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Weather
Products
Window
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
RADIO
and INFO
Softkeys
Figure 8-75 XM Information Page
LOCK Softkey
is Used to Save
Activation Data
During Initial
Setup
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
If SiriusXM Satellite Weather services have not been activated, all the weather product boxes are blank on
the XM Information Page and a yellow Activation Required message is displayed in the center of the Weather
Data Link Page (Map Page Group). The Service Class refers to the groupings of weather products available for
subscription.
574
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
USING SIRIUSXM RADIO
The XM Radio Page provides information and control of the audio entertainment features of the SiriusXM
Satellite Radio.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting the XM Radio Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Auxiliary Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the displayed AUX - XM Information Page.
3) Press the RADIO Softkey to show the XM Radio Page where audio entertainment is controlled.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Active
Channel
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Channel
List
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Volume
Field
Categories
Field
AFCS
Figure 8-76 XM Radio Page
ACTIVE CHANNEL AND CHANNEL LIST
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Active Channel Box on the XM Radio Page displays the currently selected channel that the SiriusXM
Radio is using.
The Channels List Box of the XM Radio Page shows a list of the available channels for the selected category.
Channels can be stepped through one at a time or may be selected directly by channel number.
APPENDICES
Selecting a channel from the channel list:
1) While on the XM Radio Page, press the CHNL Softkey.
2) Press the CH + Softkey to go up through the list in the Channel Box, or move down the list with the
CH – Softkey.
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
575
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Or:
1) Press the FMS Knob to highlight the channel list and turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the channels.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the ENT Key to activate the selected channel.
Selecting a channel directly:
1) While on the XM Radio Page, press the CHNL Softkey.
2) Press the DIR CH Softkey. The channel number in the Active Channel Box is highlighted.
EIS
3) Press the numbered softkeys located on the bottom of the display to directly select the desired channel
number.
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the selected channel.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
CATEGORY
The Category Box of the XM Radio Page displays the currently selected category of audio. Categories of
channels such as jazz, rock, or news can be selected to list the available channels for a type of music or other
contents. One of the optional categories is PRESETS to view channels that have been programmed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selecting a category:
1) Press the CATGRY Softkey on the XM Radio Page.
2) Press the CAT + and CAT - Softkeys to cycle through the categories.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Or:
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Categories list. Highlight the desired category with the small FMS Knob
and press the ENT Key. Selecting All Categories places all channels in the list.
576
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 8-77 Categories List
PRESETS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Up to 15 channels from any category can be assigned a preset number. The preset channels are selected by
pressing the PRESETS and MORE Softkeys. Then the preset channel can be selected directly and added to
the channel list for the Presets category.
Setting a preset channel number:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) On the XM Radio Page, while listening to an Active Channel that is wanted for a preset, press the PRESETS
Softkey to access the first five preset channels (PS1 - PS5).
2) Press the MORE Softkey to access the next five channels (PS6 – PS10), and again to access the last five
channels (PS11 – PS15). Pressing the MORE Softkey repeatedly cycles through the preset channels.
AFCS
3) Press any one of the (PS1 - PS15) softkeys to assign a number to the active channel.
4) Press the SET Softkey on the desired channel number to save the channel as a preset.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press PRESETS to
Access the Preset
Channels Softkeys
APPENDICES
Press MORE to Cycle
Through the Preset
Channels
Press SET to
Save Each
Preset Channel
Figure 8-78 Accessing and Selecting Preset SiriusXM Channels
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
INDEX
Pressing the BACK Softkey, or waiting during 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, returns the system to the top
level softkeys.
577
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
VOLUME
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Radio volume is shown as a percentage. Volume level is controlled by pressing the VOL Softkey, which
brings up the MUTE Softkey and the volume increase and decrease softkeys.
Adjusting the volume:
1) With the XM Radio Page displayed, press the VOL Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
2) Press the VOL – Softkey to reduce volume or press the VOL + Softkey to increase volume. (Once the VOL
Softkey is pressed, the volume can also be adjusted using the small FMS Knob.)
Figure 8-79 Volume Control
Radio volume may also be adjusted at each passenger station.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Mute SiriusXM audio:
1) Select the XM Radio Page or XM Information Page.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the MUTE Softkey to mute the audio. Press the MUTE Softkey again to unmute the audio.
578
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.7 SATELLITE TELEPHONE SERVICES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The optional GSR 56 Iridium Transceiver provides airborne Iridium Satellite Telephone and SMS Messaging service.
Iridium telephone and text meassaging are available to the flight crew through the MFD, audio panel, and headset.
Operation of these features in the cockpit is accomplished through the AUX-TELEPHONE and AUX-TEXT
MESSAGING Pages.
NOTE: Aural and pop-up visual annunciations for incoming calls and received text messages are inhibited
EIS
during taxiing, takeoff and landing roll, low altitude operations, low airspeed operations, and excessive
pitch and roll attitudes.
REGISTERING THE IRIDIUM SATELLITE SYSTEM
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
A subscriber account must be established for each Iridium transceiver prior to using the Iridium Satellite System
for telephone services. Before setting up an Iridium account, obtain the serial number of the Iridium Transceiver
(GSR1) and the System ID by selecting the AUX- SYSTEM STATUS Page as shown in Figure 8-80. Contact Garmin
Flight Data Services at 1-866-739-5687 in the United States or 913-397-8200, ext. 1135.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Iridium Transceiver Serial Number
System ID Number
APPENDICES
Figure 8-80 Identification Needed for Iridium Registration
TELEPHONE COMMUNICATION
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
INDEX
The pilot or copilot can place and answer calls on the Iridium satellite network as well as to or from the telephone
handset in the cabin, when installed. Calls can also be answered or made from the cabin phone, however, only
actions initiated from the cockpit phone will be discussed here. See the cabin handset user guide for more
information. Control and monitoring of telephone functions are accomplished through the AUX-TELEPHONE
Page.
579
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Viewing the Telephone Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the AUX page group.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select AUX - TELEPHONE
EIS
The PHONE STATUS display, as shown in Figure 8-81, gives a graphical representation of the current disposition
of voice and/or data transmissions. Table 8-5 describes symbology used on PHONE STATUS display.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Satellite
Signal
Strength
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
External
Phone
Figure 8-81 Phone Status Display
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ENABLE/DISABLE THE IRIDIUM TELEPHONE SYSTEM
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The Iridium Satellite Telephone System may be turned on or off by using the page menu.
APPENDICES
Figure 8-82 Enable Iridium Telephone System
To enable the Iridium telephone system:
1) With the AUX-TELEPHONE Page displayed, select the MENU Key on the MFD to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Enable Iridium Transmission’.
INDEX
3) Press the ENT Key.
580
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
To disable the Iridium telephone system:
1) With the AUX-TELEPHONE Page displayed, select the MENU Key on the MFD to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Disable Iridium Transmission’.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key.
Internal
Phone
External
Phone
Description
EIS
Phone is Idle
Phone is ringing
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Phone has a dial tone (off hook) or connected to another phone
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Phone dialed is busy
Phone is dialing another phone
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Phone has failed
Phone status not known
AFCS
Phone is disabled
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Phone is reserved for data transmission
Calling other phone or incoming call from other phone
APPENDICES
Other phone is on hold
Phones are connected
INDEX
Table 8-5 Telephone Symbols
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
581
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
INCOMING CALLS
NOTE: Outside callers should dial 00 + 8816 or 8817 + aircraft phone number when calling the aircraft
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Iridium Telephone System.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
When a phone call is received while viewing MFD pages other than the AUX-TELEPHONE Page, a popup alert similar to Figure 8-83 is displayed, accompanied by a ringtone heard on the selected cockpit audio.
The pop-up alert may be inhibited at times, such as during takeoff. In addition to the pop-up alert, a ringing
phone symbol is displayed to the right of the MFD page title as shown in Figure 8-83.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Incoming Call Pop-up
Incoming Call Symbol on MFD Page
Figure 8-83 Incoming Call
To answer an incoming call in the cockpit:
1) Press the TEL Key on the appropriate audio panel.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the ANSWER Softkey on the MFD.
Or:
While viewing the AUX-TELEPHONE Page
1) Press the TEL Key on the appropriate audio panel.
AFCS
2) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
3) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Answer Incoming Call’.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the ENT Key.
Selecting the IGNORE Softkey will extinguish the pop-up window and leave the current call unanswered.
Selecting the IGNRE ALL Softkey will extinguish the pop-up window for the current and all future incoming
calls and leave the current call unanswered. Selecting the TEL Softkey will display the AUX-TELEPHONE
Page allowing additional call information to be viewed before answering.
APPENDICES
Disabling incoming call alerts:
1) With the AUX-TELEPHONE Page displayed, press the MENU Key on the MFD to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Disable Incoming Call Alerts’.
INDEX
3) Press the ENT Key. The voice and pop-up alert will not be displayed now when an incoming call is received.
582
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
OUTGOING CALLS
Voice calls can be made from the cockpit to an external phone through the Iridium Satellite Network.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The Push-to-Talk switch is not utilized for telephone communication. The microphone is active after
selecting the ANSWER Softkey, and stays active until the call is terminated.
To make a call:
1) Press the TEL Key on the audio panel.
EIS
2) Press the DIAL Softkey on the MFD. A display similar to Figure 8-84 will be shown.
Or:
While viewing the AUX-TELEPHONE Page:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
a) Press the TEL Key on the audio panel.
b) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
c) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Dial a Phone Call’.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
d) Press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-84 Initiating a Call
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
583
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
3) Enter the desired telephone number by selecting the number softkeys on the MFD or by pressing the numeric
keys on the MFD Control Unit. The International dialing sequence is necessary to place a call from the cockpit
to an external phone: Country Code + City/Area Code (if any) + Telephone Number.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following country codes may be used when calling other satellite telephone systems.
EIS
Satellite System
Inmarsat
ICO
Ellipso
Iridium
Globalstar
Country Code
870
8810 or 8811
8812 or 8813
8816 or 8817
8818 or 8819
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the ENT Key. ‘OK’ is highlighted as in Figure 8-85.
Figure 8-85 Make the Call
INDEX
APPENDICES
5) Press the ENT Key. The system will begin calling the number, as in Figure 8-86.
584
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-86 System is Making the Connection
When the phone is answered, the connection is established as shown in Figure 8-87. To exit the call, press
the HANGUP Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-87 Phone is Answered, Connection Complete
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
585
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
TEXT MESSAGING (SMS)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The pilot or copilot can send and receive text messages on the Iridium satellite network. Messages may be
sent to an email address or text message capable cellular telephone. Message length is limited to 160 characters,
including the email address.
The text messaging user interface is mainly through the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page.
Viewing the Text Messaging Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the AUX page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the AUX - TELEPHONE.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
3) If necessary, press the SMS Softkey to display the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page as shown in Figure 8-88.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-88 Text Messaging Page
Message Symbol
Description
APPENDICES
Received text message that has not been opened
Received text message that has been opened
INDEX
Saved text message, draft not sent
586
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Message Symbol
Description
System is sending text message
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Text message has been sent
System failed to send text message
EIS
Predefined text message
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Table 8-6 Text Message Symbols
VIEWING A TEXT MESSAGE WHEN RECEIVED
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When viewing MFD pages other than the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page, a pop-up alert similar to Figure
8-89 will be displayed when a new text message is received.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
New Text Message Symbol on MFD Page
AFCS
New Text Message Pop-up
Figure 8-89 New Text Message Received
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press the VIEW Softkey to view the message (Figure 8-90). Selecting the IGNORE Softkey will extinguish
the pop-up window and leave the text message unopened. Selecting the IGNR ALL Softkey will extinguish
the pop-window and ignore all future incoming text messages. Selecting the SMS Softkey will display the
AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
587
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Figure 8-90 Text Message Displayed from Pop-Up Alert
The pop-up alerts may be enabled or disabled through the Page Menu.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Enabling/disabling incoming text message pop-up alerts:
1) With the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page displayed, press the MENU Key on the MFD to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Disable New Message Popups’ or ‘Enable New Message Popups’.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
3) Press the ENT Key. The pop-up alert will not be displayed when an incoming text message is received.
588
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 8-91 Disabling New Text Message Pop-Ups
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
REPLY TO A TEXT MESSAGE
After reading a text message, a reply may be sent.
Replying to a text message:
While viewing the text message, press the REPLY Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Reply To Message’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
AFCS
SENDING A TEXT MESSAGE
Text messages may be sent from the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Sending a new text message:
1) While viewing the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page, press the NEW Softkey.
Or:
APPENDICES
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Draft New Message’.
c) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
589
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Figure 8-92 Composing a New Text Message
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) The TEXT MESSAGE DRAFT Window is now displayed with the cursor in the ‘TO’ field. Enter the desired
telephone number or email address. Entry can be accomplished through the alphanumeric keys on the MFD
Controller, or combination of the FMS Knob on the controller and softkeys on the MFD. The FMS Knob is used
to enter letters and numbers, or numbers can be entered from the MFD by selecting the NUMBERS Softkey.
Press the CAP LOCK Softkey to create upper and lower case alpha characters. Special characters can be
accessed by selecting the SYMBOLS Softkey. See Figure 8-92.
3) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed in the ‘MESSAGE’ field.
AFCS
4) Enter the desired message using any combination of entry methods as described in step 2.
5) Press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Press the SEND Softkey to send the message immediately, or press the SAVE Softkey to save the message in
Outbox for sending at a later time. Press the CANCEL Softkey to delete the message.
PREDEFINED TEXT MESSAGES
APPENDICES
Time and effort can be saved in typing text messages that are used repeatedly by saving these messages as
a predefined message.
Creating a predefined text message:
INDEX
1) While viewing the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page, press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
590
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 8-93 Creating/Editing Predefined Messages
2) Turn either FMS Knob to select ‘Edit Predefined Messages’ as shown in Figure 8-93.
3) Press the ENT Key. The PREDEFINED MESSAGES view is now displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Press the NEW Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Draft New Predefined Message’.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
c) Press the ENT Key. The PREDEFINED SMS TEXT MESSAGE Window is now displayed as shown in Figure 8-94.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 8-94 Composing a Predefined Message
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
591
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5) The cursor is displayed in the ‘TITLE’ field. Enter the desired message title. Entry can be accomplished through
the alphanumeric keys on the MFD Controller, or combination of the FMS Knob on the controller and softkeys
on the MFD. The FMS Knob is used to enter letters and numbers, or numbers can be entered from the MFD
by selecting the NUMBERS Softkey. Press the CAP LOCK Softkey to create upper and lower case alpha
characters. Special characters can be accessed by selecting the SYMBOLS Softkey.
6) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed in the ‘MESSAGE’ field.
7) Enter the desired message using any combination of entry methods as described in step 5.
8) Press the ENT Key.
EIS
9) Press the SAVE Softkey. The new predefined message is now shown in the displayed list. Selecting the
CANCEL Softkey will delete the message without saving.
10) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
11) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Stop Editing Predefined Message’.
12) Press the ENT Key.
Sending a predefined text message:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) While viewing the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page, select the NEW Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) The TEXT MESSAGE DRAFT Window is now displayed with the cursor in the ‘TO’ field. Enter the desired
telephone number or email address. Entry can be accomplished through a combination of the FMS Knob on
the controller and softkeys on the MFD. The FMS Knob is used to enter letters and numbers, or numbers can be
entered from the MFD by selecting the NUMBERS Softkey. Select the CAP LOCK Softkey to create upper and
lower case alpha characters. Special characters can be accessed by selecting the SYMBOLS Softkey.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
3) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed in the ‘MESSAGE’ field (Figure 8-95).
Figure 8-95 Composing a New Text Message
592
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) Press the PREDEFD Softkey. The PREDEFINED MESSAGE MENU Window is displayed as seen in Figure 8-96.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 8-96 Predefined Message List
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired predefined message.
6) Press the ENT Key. The predefined message text is inserted into the message field. If desired, the message can
be edited by using the FMS Knobs.
7) Press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) Press the SEND Softkey to transmit the message.
TEXT MESSAGE BOXES
AFCS
Received text messages reside in the Inbox as ‘Read’ or ‘Unread’ messages. The Outbox contains ‘Sent” and
‘Unsent’ text messages. Saved messages that are meant to be sent later are stored as Drafts. Each text message
box may be viewed separately, or together in any combination.
Show Inbox messages:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
While viewing the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page, press the ARRANGE Softkey, then press the INBOX Softkey
(Figure 8-97).
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
APPENDICES
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Show Inbox Messages’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The message box selected for viewing is indicated at the bottom left of the list window.
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
593
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Figure 8-97 Text Message Inbox
Show Outbox messages:
While viewing the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page, press the ARRANGE Softkey, then press the OUTBOX Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Show Outbox Messages’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The message box selected for viewing is indicated at the bottom left of the list window.
AFCS
Show Draft messages:
While viewing the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page, press the ARRANGE Softkey, then press the DRAFTS Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Show Draft Messages’.
INDEX
APPENDICES
3) Press the ENT Key. The message box selected for viewing is indicated at the bottom left of the list window.
594
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MANAGING TEXT MESSAGES
The viewed messages may be listed according to the date/time the message was sent or received, the type of
message (read, unread, sent, unsent, etc.), or by message address.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Viewing messages sorted by message date/time:
While viewing the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page, press the ARRANGE Softkey, then press the TIME Softkey
(Figure 8-97).
Or:
EIS
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Sort By Date/Time’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The sorting selection is indicated at the bottom center of the list window (Figure 8-97).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Viewing messages sorted by message type:
While viewing the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page, press the ARRANGE Softkey, then press the TYPE Softkey.
Or:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Sort By Type’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The sorting selection is indicated at the bottom center of the list window.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Viewing messages sorted by address:
While viewing the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page, press the ARRANGE Softkey, then press the ADDRESS
Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
AFCS
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Sort By Address’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The sorting selection is indicated at the bottom center of the list window.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
595
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Viewing the content of a text message:
1) While viewing the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page, select the desired message box.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired message.
4) Press the VIEW Softkey.
Or:
Press the ENT Key.
EIS
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘View Selected Message’.
c) Press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Message content is displayed as shown in Figure 8-98.
APPENDICES
Figure 8-98 Viewing Message Content
5) To close the text message, press the CLOSE Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
INDEX
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Close Message’.
c) Press the ENT Key.
596
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Marking selected message as read:
1) While viewing the Inbox on the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired message.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the MRK READ Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Mark Selected Message As Read’.
EIS
c) Press the ENT Key.
The message symbol now indicates the message has been opened.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
597
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Marking all messages as read:
1) While viewing the Inbox on the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page, press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Mark All New Messages As Read’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed.
4) With cursor highlighting ‘YES’, press the ENT Key. The message symbols now indicate all the message have
been opened.
Delete a message:
EIS
1) While viewing the Inbox on the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired message.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the DELETE Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Delete Selected Message’.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
c) Press the ENT Key.
598
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.8 ELECTRONIC STABILITY AND PROTECTION (ESP™)
NOTE: Refer to the Airplane Flight Manual to determine approval of ESP functionality.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
The optional Garmin Electronic Stability and Protection (ESP™) system is available only when the Garmin AFCS
is installed. This system is designed to provide automatic control inputs to discourage aircraft operation outside
the normal flight envelope. Garmin ESP™ works to maintain the desired pitch, roll, and airspeed operating
envelope by automatically engaging one or more servos when the aircraft is near a defined pitch, roll, and/or
airspeed operating limit. While ESP™ utilizes the same sensors, processors, and actuators as the Garmin AFCS
autopilot, it is a separate function. The ESP™ system only operates when the Garmin AFCS autopilot is not
engaged and the aircraft is above 200 feet AGL.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ESP™ engages when the aircraft exceeds one or more conditions (pitch, roll, and airspeed) beyond the normal
flight parameters. Enhanced stability for each condition is provided by applying a force to the appropriate control
surface to return the aircraft to the normal flight envelope. This is perceived by the pilot as resistance to control
movement in the undesired direction when the aircraft approaches a steep attitude or high airspeed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
As the aircraft deviates further from the normal attitude and/or airspeed range, the force increases (up to an
established maximum) to encourage control movement in the direction necessary to return to the normal attitude
and/or airspeed range. Except in the case of high airspeed, when maximum force is reached, force remains constant
up to the maximum engagement limit. Above the maximum engagement limit, forces are no longer applied. There
is no maximum engagement related to a high airspeed condition.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The pilot can interrupt ESP™ by pressing and holding the Autopilot Disconnect (AP DISC) switch. Upon releasing
the or AP DISC switch, ESP™ force will again be applied, provided aircraft roll attitude is within engagement limits.
ESP™ can also be overridden by overpowering the servo’s mechanical torque limit.
ESP™ can be enabled or disabled on the AUX-SYSTEM SETUP 2 Page on the MFD.
To enable or disable ESP™:
AFCS
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the AUX - SYSTEM SETUP 1 page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) If necessary, press the SETUP 2 Softkey to display the AUX-SYSTEM SETUP 2 Page. If the AUX-SYSTEM SETUP 2
is already displayed, proceed to step 4.
4) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the STABILITY & PROTECTION field.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘ENABLE’ or ‘DISABLE’.
APPENDICES
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
ESP™ is automatically enabled on system power up.
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
599
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
ROLL ENGAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Roll Limit Indicators are displayed on the roll scale at 45° right and left, indicating where ESP™ will engage
(see Figure 8-99). As roll attitude exceeds 45°, ESP™ will engage and the on-side Roll Limit Indicator will move
to 30°, as shown in Figure 8-100. The Roll Limit Indicator is now showing where ESP™ will disengage as roll
attitude decreases.
Roll Limit Indicator
ESP Engage (45°)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Roll Limit Indicator
ESP Engage (45°)
Figure 8-99 ESP Roll Engagement Indication (ESP NOT Engaged)
ESP Disengage (30°)
Aircraft Roll Attitude = 46°
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ESP Engage (45°)
Aircraft Roll Attitude = 44°
APPENDICES
Before ESP Engage
After ESP Engage
Figure 8-100 Roll Increasing to ESP Engagement
INDEX
Once engaged, ESP™ force will be applied between 30° and 75°, as illustrated in Figure 8-101. The force
increases as roll attitude increases and decreases as roll attitude decreases. The applied force is intended to
encourage pilot input that returns the airplane to a more normal roll attitude. As roll attitude decreases, ESP™
will disengage at 30°.
600
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
10º
0º
10º
20º
5º
30
º
EIS
60
º
90º
90º
75º
75º
º
60
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
º
45
4
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
º
30
20º
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 8-101 ESP Roll Operating Range When Engaged
(Force Increases as Roll Increases & Decreases as Roll Decreases)
ESP™ is automatically disengaged if the aircraft reaches the autopilot roll engagement attitude limit of 75°
(Figure 8-102).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ESP Upper Disengage Limit (75°)
Aircraft Roll Attitude = 74°
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-102 Roll Attitude Autopilot Engagement Limit (ESP Engaged)
PITCH ENGAGEMENT
APPENDICES
ESP™ engages at 16° nose-up and 22° nose-down. Once ESP™ is engaged, it will apply increasing opposing
force between 16° and 20° nose-up and between 22° and 25° nose-down, as indicated in Figure 8-103.
Maximum opposing force is applied between 20° and 50° nose-up and between 25° and 50° nose-down. ESP™
disengages when 50° is exceeded in a nose-up or nose-down attitude.
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
601
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
With ESP™ engaged, and the aircraft in a nose-up condition, opposing force steadily decreases from 20° noseup to 12° nose-up as aircraft pitch moves toward zero degrees. ESP™ disengages at 12° nose-up. With ESP™
engaged, and the aircraft in a nose-down condition, opposing force steadily decreases from 25° nose-down to
17° nose-down as aircraft pitch moves toward zero degrees. ESP™ disengages at 17° nose-down.
The opposing force increases or decreases depending on the pitch angle and the direction of pitch travel. This
force is intended to encourage movement in the pitch axis in the direction of the normal pitch attitude range
for the aircraft.
APPENDICES
50˚
45˚
45˚
40˚
40˚
35˚
30˚
35˚
30˚
ESP
50˚
25˚
25˚
20˚
20˚
15˚
15˚
10˚
10˚
5˚
5˚
0˚
0˚
5˚
5˚
10˚
10˚
15˚
15˚
20˚
20˚
25˚
25˚
30˚
35˚
30˚
ESP
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
There are no indications marking the pitch ESP™ engage and disengage limits in these nose-up/nose-down
conditions.
35˚
40˚
40˚
45˚
45˚
50˚
50˚
Figure 8-103 ESP Pitch Operating Range When Engaged
(Force Increases as Pitch Increases & Decreases as Pitch Decreases)
INDEX
HIGH AIRSPEED PROTECTION
Exceeding Vne will result in ESP™ applying force to raise the nose of the aircraft. When the high airspeed
condition is remedied, ESP™ force is no longer applied.
602
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.9 SCHEDULER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Scheduler feature can be used to enter and display reminder messages (e.g., Change oil, Switch fuel tanks,
or Altimeter-Transponder Check) in the Alerts Window on the PFD. Messages can be set to display based on
a specific date and time (event), once the message timer reaches zero (one-time; default setting), or recurrently
whenever the message timer reaches zero (periodic). Message timers set to periodic alerting automatically reset
to the original timer value once the message is displayed. When power is cycled, all messages are retained until
deleted, and message timer countdown is resumed.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-104 Scheduler (Utility Page)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Entering a scheduler message:
1) Select the AUX - UTILITY Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the first empty scheduler message naming field.
AFCS
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter the message text to be displayed in the Alerts Window and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the field next to Type.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the message type:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Event—Message issued at the specified date/time
• One-time—Message issued when the message timer reaches zero (default setting)
• Periodic—Message issued each time the message timer reaches zero
7) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
APPENDICES
8) For periodic and one-time message, use the FMS Knob to enter the timer value (HH:MM:SS) from which to
countdown and press the ENT Key.
9) For event-based messages:
a) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired date (DD-MM-YY) and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
b) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
c) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time (HH:MM) and press the ENT Key.
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
603
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
10) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to enter the next message.
Deleting a scheduler message:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Select the AUX - UTILITY Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the name field of the scheduler message to be deleted.
4) Press the CLR Key to clear the message text. If the CLR Key is pressed again, the message is restored.
5) Press the ENT Key while the message line is cleared to clear the message text.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Scheduler messages appear in the Messages Window on the PFD. When a scheduler message is waiting, the
ALERTS Softkey label changes to ADVISORY. Pressing the ADVISORY Softkey opens the Messages Window
and acknowledges the scheduler message. The softkey label reverts to ALERTS when pressed. Pressing the
ALERTS Softkey again removes the Messages Window from the display, and the scheduler message is deleted
from the message queue.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 8-105 PFD Messages Window
604
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.10 ELECTRONIC CHECKLISTS
NOTE: The optional checklists presented here are for example only and may differ from checklists available
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
for the DA42NG. The information described in this section is not intended to replace the checklist information
described in the POH.
NOTE: Garmin is not responsible for the content of checklists. Checklists are created by the aircraft
manufacturer. Modifications or updates to the checklists are coordinated through the aircraft manufacturer.
The user cannot edit these checklists.
EIS
The optional checklist functions are displayed on two levels of softkeys that are available on any MFD page.
(Optional)
ENGINE
MAP
DCLTR
CHECK
EXIT
RETURN
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ENGINE
SHW CHRT CHKLIST
EMERGCY
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The CHECK Softkey label changes to UNCHECK
when the checklist item is already checked.
Figure 8-106 Checklist Softkeys
• Gray - General notes
• Yellow - Caution notes
• Red - Warning notes
AFCS
The following colors are used for checklist items:
• Light Blue - Items not selected or checked
• White - Item is selected
• Green - Item has been checked
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The MFD is able to display optional electronic checklists which allow the pilot to quickly find the proper
procedure on the ground and during each phase of flight. The system accesses the checklists from an SD card
inserted into the top card slot of the MFD. If the SD card contains an invalid checklist file or no checklist,
the Power-up Page messages display ‘Checklist File: Invalid’ or ‘Checklist File: N/A’ (not available) and the
CHKLIST Softkey is not available.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Accessing and navigating checklists:
1) From any page on the MFD, select the CHKLIST Softkey or turn the large FMS Knob to select the Checklist Page.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘GROUP’ field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired procedure and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘CHECKLIST’ field.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired checklist and press the ENT Key. The selected checklist item is
indicated with white text surrounded by a white box.
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
605
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
6) Press the ENT Key or select the CHECK Softkey to check the selected checklist item. The line item turns green
and a checkmark is placed in the associated box. The next line item is automatically selected for checking.
Either FMS Knob can be used to scroll through the checklist and select the desired checklist item.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Press the CLR Key or select the UNCHECK Softkey to remove a check mark from an item.
7) When all checklist items have been checked, ‘*Checklist Finished*’ is displayed in green text at the bottom left
of the checklist window and ‘GO TO NEXT CHECKLIST?’ is highlighted. If ‘GO TO NEXT CHECKLIST?’ is selected
prior to checking all the checklist items, ‘*CHECKLIST NOT FINISHED*’ will be displayed in yellow text.
EIS
8) Press the ENT Key. If ‘GO TO NEXT CHECKLIST?’ is displayed when pressing the ENT Key, the next checklist in
the group will be displayed. If ‘EXIT CHECKLISTS?’ is displayed when pressing the ENT Key, the system will exit
the Checklist Page.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
9) Select the EXIT Softkey to exit the Checklist Page and return to the page last viewed. When returning to the
Checklist Page after pressing the EXIT Softkey, the system will return to the last selected checklist item.
INDEX
Figure 8-107 Sample Checklist
606
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Accessing emergency procedures:
1) From any page on the MFD, select the CHKLIST Softkey or turn the large FMS Knob to select the Checklist Page.
2) Select the EMERGCY Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired emergency checklist and press the ENT Key.
4) Press the ENT Key or select the CHECK Softkey to check the selected emergency checklist item. The line item
turns green and a checkmark is placed in the box next to it. The next line item is automatically highlighted for
checking.
Either FMS Knob can be used to scroll through the checklist and select the desired checklist item.
EIS
Press the CLR Key or select the UNCHECK Softkey to remove a check mark from an item.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) When all checklist items have been checked, ‘*Checklist Finished*’ is displayed in green text at the bottom left
of the checklist window and ‘GO TO NEXT CHECKLIST?’ is highlighted. If ‘GO TO NEXT CHECKLIST?’ is selected
prior to checking all the checklist items, ‘*CHECKLIST NOT FINISHED*’ will be displayed in yellow text.
6) Press the ENT Key to advance to the next checklist.
7) Select the RETURN Softkey to return to the previous checklist.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8) Select the EXIT Softkey to exit the Checklist Page and return to the page last viewed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
607
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 8-108 Emergency Checklist Page Example
608
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.11 FLIGHT DATA LOGGING
NOTE: Some aircraft installations may not provide all aircraft/engine data capable of being logged by the
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
system.
The Flight Data Logging feature will automatically store critical flight and engine data on an SD data card (up
to 16GB) inserted into the top card slot of the MFD. Approximately 1,000 flight hours can be recorded for each
1GB of available space on the card.
EIS
Data is written to the SD card once each second while the MFD is powered on. All flight data logged on a
specific date is stored in a file named in a format which includes the date, time, and nearest airport identifier. The
file is created automatically each time the G1000 system is powered on, provided an SD card has been inserted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The status of the Flight Data Logging feature can be viewed on the AUX-UTILITY Page. If no SD card has been
inserted, “NO CARD” is displayed. When data is being written to the SD card, “LOGGING DATA” is displayed.
The .csv file may be viewed with Microsoft Excel® or other spreadsheet applications.
The following is a list of data parameters the G1000 system is capable of logging for the DA42NG aircraft.
• GPS altitude (MSL)
• Magnetic Heading (degrees)
• GPS vertical alert limit
• GPS altitude (WGS84 datum)
• HSI source
• Baro-Corrected altitude (feet)
• Selected course
• SBAS GPS horizontal protection
level
• Baro Correction (in/Hg)
• Com1/Com2 frequency
• Indicated airspeed (kts)
• Nav1/Nav2 frequency
• SBAS GPS vertical protection
level
• Vertical speed (fpm)
• CDI deflection
• Fuel Qty (right & left)(gals)
• GPS vertical speed (fpm)
• VDI/GP/GS deflection
• Fuel Flow (gph)
• OAT (degrees C)
• Wind Direction (degrees)
• Fuel Pressure (psi)
• True airspeed (knots)
• Wind Speed (knots)
• Voltage 1 and/or 2
• Pitch Attitude Angle (degrees)
• Active Waypoint Identifier
• Amps 1 and/or 2
• Roll Attitude Angle (degrees)
• Distance to next waypoint (nm)
• Engine RPM
• Lateral and Vertical G Force (g)
• Bearing to next waypoint
(degrees)
• Oil Pressure (psi)
• Magnetic variation (degrees)
• Manifold Pressure (in. Hg)
• Autopilot On/Off
• CHT
• AFCS roll/pitch modes
• EGT
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Oil Temperature (deg. F)
APPENDICES
• Latitude (degrees; geodetic;
+North)
AFCS
• Ground Track (degrees
magnetic)
• GPS horizontal alert limit
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Ground Speed (kts)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• GPS fix
• Time
• Longitude (degrees; geodetic;
+East)
• Date
• AFCS roll/pitch commands
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
609
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The file containing the recorded data will appear in the format shown in Figure 8-109. This file can be imported
into most computer spreadsheet applications.
Local Date
YYMMDD
Local 24hr Time
HHMMSS
Nearest Airport
(A blank will be
inserted if no
airport is found)
EIS
log_140210_104506_KIXD.csv
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 8-109 Log File Format
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Data logging status can be monitored on the AUX - UTILITY Page.
610
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.12 AUXILIARY VIDEO
The G1000 system provides a control and display interface to an optional auxiliary video system.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Images provided on the Aux-Video page are for supplemental use only.
There are four modes of operation of the auxiliary video display: Full-Screen, Full-Screen with Digital Zoom,
Split-Screen with Map, and Split-Screen with Map and Digital Zoom.
Displaying auxiliary video:
EIS
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the AUX-VIDEO Page.
The video display softkeys shown below appear on the AUX - VIDEO Page.
MAP
SETUP
VID ZM+
VID ZM-
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ENGINE
MAP ACTV HIDE MAP
VID ACTV
CNTRST +
BRIGHT -
BRIGHT +
SAT -
SAT +
BACK
Pressing the BACK Softkey returns
to the Previous Level Softkeys.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-110 Video Display Softkeys
RESET
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
CNTRST -
Control of the AUX - VIDEO Page can also be accessed through the Page Menu.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-111 AUX - VIDEO Page Menu
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
611
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Selecting video menu options:
1) While viewing the AUX - VIDEO Page press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired video adjustment option and press the ENT Key.
Once the ENT key is pressed on any option, the page menu closes and returns to the AUX - VIDEO Page.
VIDEO SETUP
EIS
Video brightness, contrast, and saturation may be adjusted be selecting the setup function. While viewing
the setup function softkeys, after 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, the system reverts to the AUX - VIDEO Page
softkeys.
Adjusting the video settings:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) With the AUX - VIDEO Page displayed, press the SETUP Softkey.
2) Press the BRIGHT - or BRIGHT +, to adjust display brightness in five percent increments from 0 to 100%.
3) Press the CNTRST - or CNTRST +, to adjust display contrast in five percent increments from 0 to 100%.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Press the SAT - or SAT +, to adjust display saturationin five percent increments from 0 to 100%.
5) If desired, return the display to the default settings by pressing the RESET Softkey.
6) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the previous softkey level.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
DISPLAY SELECTION
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Pressing the HIDE MAP Softkey removes the map and displays video on the full screen. The softkey label
changes to grey with black characters. Pressing the HIDE MAP Softkey again restores the map view and the
small video image. The softkey label returns to white characters on a black background.
612
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Video
Display
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Map
View
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-112 AUX - Video Split-Screen
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-113 Full Screen Video Display
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
613
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ZOOM/RANGE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
The RANGE Knob can be used to increase or decrease the range setting on the map display or zoom in and
out on the video display. While in the Split-Screen mode, pressing the MAP ACTV or VID ACTV Softkey
determines which display the RANGE Knob adjusts. Pressing the softkey to display MAP ACTV allows the
RANGE Knob to control the range setting of the map display. Pressing the softkey to display VID ACTV allows
the RANGE Knob to control the zoom setting of the video display.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Pressing the VID ZM + or VID ZM - Softkeys increases or decreases video display magnification between 1x
and 10x.
614
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.13 WI-FI CONNECTIONS
The optional GDL 59 Data Link provides a high speed IEEE 802.11g Wi-Fi data link between the aircraft and a
ground computer network while the aircraft is on the ground and located within range of the network.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system is capable of WEP64, WEP128,WPA-PSK, and WPA2-PSK encryption formats. WPA-Enterprise
and WPA2-Enterprise are not supported. Connections that require web proxies, captive portals, or other elements
that require user credentials, including a username and password or a redemption or access code; or require
action such as accepting a user agreement, are not supported.
Control and monitoring of Wi-Fi functions are accomplished through the AUX-WI-FI SETUP Page.
EIS
Viewing the Wi-Fi Setup Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the AUX page group.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the AUX - WI-FI SETUP Page.
Setting up a new Wi-Fi connection:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Select the AVAIL Softkey on the MFD. A list of available networks will be displayed in the AVAILABLE NETWORKS
window as shown in Figure 8-114. Signal strength is shown for each network, as well as security requirements
and whether the network has been saved in the system’s memory.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-114 Available Wi-Fi Networks
2) If necessary, select the RESCAN Softkey to have the system scan again for available networks.
Or:
INDEX
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Rescan Available Networks’.
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
615
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
c) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to place the cursor in the list of networks.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired network. See Figure 8-115.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-115 Desired Network Selected
5) Select the CONNECT Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
AFCS
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Connect to Selected Network’.
c) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) If the network is secured, a window similar to Figure 8-116 will be displayed in order to enter the necessary
passcode. Use the FMS Knobs to enter the desired alpha numeric characters. Select the CAP LOCK Softkey to
enter upper case letters. If there is no security associated with the network, proceed to step 9.
616
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Figure 8-116 Enter Security Code
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7) Press the ENT Key. ‘OK’ will be highlighted.
8) Press the ENT Key again.
9) The SAVE SETTINGS window is now displayed with the cursor highlighting ‘SAVE CONNECTION’.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 8-117 Save Option
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
617
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
10) The selected network can be saved to system memory to make reconnection easier at a later time.
Connecting the selected network without saving:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to highlight ‘CONNECT’.
b) Press the ENT Key.
Saving and connect the selected network:
a) Press the ENT Key. A checkmark is placed in the checkbox and the cursor moves to the airport field as shown
in Figure 8-118.
EIS
b) Using the FMS Knobs, enter an airport identifier to be associated with the saved network. This aids in identifying
the network later in the event of duplicate network names.
c) Press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to ‘CONNECT’.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
d) Press the ENT Key again to connect to the selected network.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 8-118 Save Connection
618
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Editing a saved network:
1) While viewing list of saved networks, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor as seen in Figure 8-119.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight the network to be edited.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Pressing the ENT Key at this point will check or uncheck the AUTO CONNECT checkbox. When a checkmark is
present, the system will automatically connect to the network when within range.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-119 Select Network to be Edited
4) Select the EDIT Softkey. The cursor now appears in the CONNECTION SETTINGS window as shown in Figure 8-120.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
619
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Figure 8-120 Select Attributes to Edit
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the network attribute to be edited.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to begin editing the field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
7) When the entry is complete, press the ENT Key.
8) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key until ‘SAVE’ is highlighted.
9) Press the ENT Key.
Disconnecting a Wi-Fi network:
AFCS
Select the DISCNCT Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Disconnect From Network’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
Deleting a saved Wi-Fi network:
APPENDICES
1) While viewing the list of saved networks, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight the network to be deleted.
INDEX
3) Select the DELETE Softkey. The selected network is removed from the list.
620
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.14 ABNORMAL OPERATION
SVT TROUBLESHOOTING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SVT is intended to be used with traditional attitude, heading, obstacle, terrain, and traffic inputs. SVT is
disabled when valid attitude or heading data is not available for the display. In case of invalid SVT data, the
PFD display reverts to the standard blue-over-brown attitude display.
SVT becomes disabled without the following data resources:
• Attitude data
EIS
• Heading data
• GPS position data
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• 9 Arc-second Terrain data
• Obstacle data
• Terrain function is not available, in test mode, or failed
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• The position of the aircraft exceeds the range of the terrain database.
REVERSIONARY MODE
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SVT can be displayed on the Multifunction Display (MFD) in Reversionary Mode. If it is enabled when switching
to Reversionary Mode, SVT will take up to 30 seconds to be displayed. The standard, non-SVT PFD display will
be shown in the interim.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 8-121 SVT Reversionary Mode
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
621
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
UNUSUAL ATTITUDES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Unusual attitudes are displayed with red chevrons overlaid on the display indicating the direction to fly to
correct the unusual attitude condition. The display shows either a brown or blue colored bar at the top or
bottom of the screen to represent earth or sky. This is intended to prevent losing sight of the horizon during
extreme pitch attitudes.
Figure 8-122 Unusual Attitude Display
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The blue colored bar is also displayed when terrain gradient is great enough to completely fill the display.
AFCS
Blue Band
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Terrain
Completely
Fills Display
APPENDICES
Figure 8-123 Blue Sky Bar with Full Display Terrain
GDL 69/69A DATA LINK RECEIVER TROUBLESHOOTING
Some quick troubleshooting steps listed below can be performed to find the possible cause of a failure.
INDEX
• Ensure the owner/operator of the aircraft in which the Data Link Receiver is installed has subscribed to
SiriusXM
• Ensure the SiriusXM subscription has been activated
• Perform a quick check of the circuit breakers to ensure that power is applied to the Data Link Receiver
622
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
For troubleshooting purposes, check the LRU Information Box on the AUX - System Status Page for Data Link
Receiver (GDL 69/69A) status, serial number, and software version number. If a failure has been detected in the
GDL 69/69A the status is marked with a red X.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting the System Status Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the AUX - SYSTEM STATUS page.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 8-124 LRU Information Window on System Status Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
If a failure still exists, the following messages may provide insight as to the possible problem:
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00962-04 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
623
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
CHECK ANTENNA
UPDATING
NO SIGNAL
LOADING
OFF AIR
---
Message Location
XM Radio Page - active channel field
XM Radio Page - active channel field
XM Radio Page - active channel field
Weather Datalink Page - center of page
XM Radio Page - active channel field
XM Radio Page - active channel field
XM Radio Page - active channel field
Description
Data Link Receiver antenna error; service required
Data Link Receiver updating encryption code
Loss of signal; signal strength too low for receiver
EIS
Acquiring channel audio or information
Channel not in service
Missing channel informattion
No communication from Data Link Receiver
WEATHER DATA LINK FAILURE Weather Datalink Page - center of page
within last 5 minutes
DETECTING ACTIVATION
Weather Datalink Page - center of page SiriusXM subscription is not activated
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Table 8-7 GDL 69/69A Data Link Receiver Error Messages
624
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA42NG
190-00962-04 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTS
NOTE: The Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) supersedes information found in this document.
FLIGHT
I